LNA06075ENG

FACTORY AUTOMATION
INVERTER
FR-A800
Unparalleled Performance. Uncompromising Quality.
[Parallel operation function compatible model added to the line-up]
• Approach to the leading

drive performance
• Security & safety
• Easy setup
& easy to use
• Eco-friendly factories
• System support
Global Player
GLOBAL IMPACT OF
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Through Mitsubishi Electric’s vision, “Changes for the Better“ are possible for a brighter future.
Mitsubishi Electric is involved in many areas including the following
We bring together the best minds to Energy and Electric Systems

create the best technologies. At A wide range of power and electrical products from generators to large-scale displays.
Mitsubishi Electric, we understand
that technology is the driving force of Electronic Devices
change in our lives. By bringing A wide portfolio of cutting-edge semiconductor devices for systems and products.
greater comfort to daily life, maximiz-
ing the efficiency of businesses and Home Appliance
keeping things running across Dependable consumer products like air conditioners and home entertain-
society, we integrate technology and ment systems.
innovation to bring changes for the
better. Information and Communication Systems
Commercial and consumer-centric equipment, products and systems.
Industrial Automation Systems

Maximizing productivity and efficiency with cutting-edge automation technology.
2
Contents
Features 4 1
Application Example, PLC Function, FR Configurator2 18 2
Connection Example 26 3
Standard Specifications 27 4
Outline Dimension Drawings 34 5
Terminal Connection Diagram, Terminal Specification Explanation 46 6
Operation Panel (FR-DU08(-01)), LCD Operation Panel (FR-LU08(-01)) 61 7
Parameter List 66 8
Explanations of Parameters 108 9
Protective Functions 166 10
Option and Peripheral Devices 170 11
Low-Voltage Switchgear/Cables 192 12
Precaution on Selection and Operation 198 13
Compatible Motors 204 14
Compatibility 226 15
Warranty, Inquiry 230 16
3
Unparalleled Performance. Uncom
What is required of inverters in this constantly changing world?
At Mitsubishi Electric, we have pursued the answer to this question through constant innovation and evolution.
Introducing our extensive range of high-value,
next-generation inverters delivering outstanding drive performance in any environment,
and a wealth of functionality covering startup to maintenance.
We utilized the traditional Mitsubishi Electric philosophy to further perfect our inverters.
01 02 03
APPROACH TO THE LEADING DRIVE PERFORMANCE SECURITY & SAFETY EASY SETUP & EASY TO USE
The enhanced Real sensorless vector control and Rapid response is obtained Fully equipped with a variety of simple functions and
vector control serve the needs of all machinery types. when an unexpected trouble occurs. equipment to improve work efficiency.
04 05
ECO-FRIENDLY FACTORIES SYSTEM SUPPORT
Save energy while increasing factory production. Numerous functions and the extensive lineup of
models are ready to support various systems.
promising Quality.
01
APPROACH TO THE LEADING
Excellent Drive
DRIVE PERFORMANCE
The new series is equipped with the new state-of-the-art high-speed
Performance processor developed by Mitsubishi Electric. With better control
performance and response level, safe and accurate operation is assured
in a diverse range of applications.
1 Swift, Smooth, yet Robust

The enhanced Real sensorless vector control and vector control serve the needs of all machinery types.
Features
The vector control is available when a vector control compatible option is installed.
(1) For high-quality products

High response
Response speed Real sensorless vector control 50 Hz*1 A700: 20 Hz Fast response terminal •Terminal response
Vector control 130 Hz*2 A700: 50 Hz The response delay time is reduced. A700: 5 to 20 ms A800: 2 to 3 ms
FR-A800
170 ms
Improved speed response ensures minimal FR-A700
Line control
speed fluctuation due to load changes. 80 ms
80 ms Line control is necessary for the
170 ms
machining of elongated products
FR-A800 such as paper, thread, wires, all
900
FR-A700 kinds of sheet, and tape. This will
Speed
respond rapidly to changes in line
Speed (r/min)
Torque (%)
speed and suppress the

occurrences of winding unevenness.
100 This contributes to a steady supply
0 0 of high-quality products.
Load torque
Time (s) 100 ms/div *1 : At 3.7 kW with no load. Differs depending on the load conditions and motor capacity.
*2 : The option (FR-A8AP, FR-A8AL, or FR-A8TP) is required.
[Example of changes in actual rotation speed with impact load] Speed response: The speed response indicates how fast the inverter follows the change in the
(With Real sensorless vector control, SF-PR 4P motor (3.7 kW))
speed command. (The larger value indicates the better speed trackability.)
(2) Perform ultra-fine processing

High-speed rotation
Operating frequency Real sensorless vector control and vector control 400 Hz A700: 120 Hz
V/F control 590 Hz*3 A700: 400 Hz

Machine tool
FR-A700 Cutting-edge machine tools are
FR-A800 harder and thinner than ever before
Real sensorless vector control, 120 Hz
approx. 3.3 times to be applicable to diverse new
vector control materials.
400 Hz
High-speed rotation is required
more than ever before in order to
400 Hz be applicable for fine and precise
V/F control approx. 1.5 times
cutting on hard and
590 Hz
difficult-to-grind materials.
Running frequency *3 : According to the review result of the export control order about frequency changers, the upper
limit of output frequency was determined to be 590 Hz for standard models.
(3) Swiftly move heavy weights

High torque at low speed
Starting torque (When at 0.3 Hz) Zero-speed torque Speed control range
Real sensorless vector control 200% (ND rating)*4, Vector control 200%. (Select HD rating.)*4 V/F control 1:10 (6 to 60 Hz: Driving)
Vector control 200% (ND rating)*4 Advanced magnetic flux vector control 1:120 (0.5 to 60 Hz: Driving)
(150% of initial setting for 5.5K and higher) Real sensorless vector control 1:200 (0.3 to 60 Hz: Driving)
Vector control 1:1500 (1 to 1500 r/min: Both driving/regeneration)
Low speed area enlarged
200
200
150
Cranes
150 80
Torque (%)
80 0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000
Cranes are in operation daily at ports
-80 carrying fully-laden containers in
Torque (%)
0
-150
response to strong demand from all
50 150 -200
over the world. Our new inverter
realizes smooth cargo handling work
-80 Speed (r/min) at low speed and high torque for the
-150 [Example of speed-torque characteristics with Real sensorless vector control] slow and stable movements required
When offline auto tuning is performed for the SF-PR 4P motor (15 kW). In the for heavy objects.
-200
low-speed range, the torque increases by the increased magnetic excitation.
Torque characteristics in the low-speed range can be set in the parameters.
*4 : Refer to page 13 for the multiple rating setting.
6
1
Features
(4) For accurate and stable transport between machines
PM sensorless vector control
• What is a permanent magnet (PM) motor? • Easy maintenance for sensor (encoder)-less motor
A PM motor is a synchronous motor with strong permanent magnets •No additional cables means less
embedded in its rotor. The two major PM motor types are: the wiring space required.
interior permanent magnet (IPM) motor with its magnets embedded •Improved reliability is obtained in
inside the rotor, and the surface permanent magnet (SPM) motor unfavorable operating
with its permanent magnets attached on the rotor surface. environments. (e.g. high vibration) Comparison of
•PM motors are usually smaller and SF-PRF 1.5 kW 4P and MM-CF152
• What is PM sensorless vector control?
lighter than induction motors.
The speed and magnetic pole positions, the two essential bits of
information to control a PM motor, are detected without a sensor
(encoder). The speed detection internally-performed in an inverter Transfer of
enables highly accurate control of a PM motor, almost as circuit boards
accurate as an AC servo The Simple positioning control
Inverter
Power supply
system, without the need of delivers a precision workpiece,

Sensorless
Main circuit area Current
PM
such as a printed substrate, to a
a sensor (encoder)*5. detection
motor precise position.
Combining with Mitsubishi Electric Transfer of fragile glass substrates
Control area Encoder can be performed with a highly
MM-CF series IPM motors Model adaptive
speed control accurate driving system.
facilitates aspects of high-level Speed detection
*5: Speed fluctuation ratio: ±0.05% (digital input)
control with no encoder such as Encoder Speed under no load − Speed under rated load
“simple positioning”*6 and not required Speed fluctuation ratio = ×100(%)
Rated speed
“zero speed torque”. *6: Positional accuracy (with no load) of 1.5K and lower: ±1.8°, 2K and higher: ±3.6°
(5) Taking motor performance to the max

Induction motors and magnet motors can be combined freely
• The cutting-edge auto tuning function • Low speed, high torque realized with SF-PR motor
The PM motor auto tuning function, which has been newly By combining with Mitsubishi Electric's high-performance,
developed, enables sensorless operation of other manufacturers' energy-saving motor SF-PR, 100% continuous operation is
permanent magnet (PM) motors. possible from a low speed of 0.3 Hz for inverters of any capacity.
Operation with all Mitsubishi Electric induction motors and PM (when using Real sensorless vector control)
motors, in addtion to induction motors and PM motors from other 0.4K to 3.7K 5.5K 7.5K to 30K
All capacities (0.75K to 55K)
100 100
manufacturers*7, is possible. That means you need less motors for 95
90
85
80
Output torque (%)
Output torque (%)
spare and stocks. 70

65
37K to 55K
(With IPM motors other than MM-CF and PM motors manufactured by other 45 45
companies, starting torque is limited to 50%, and simple positioning control and
zero speed torque cannot be used even if tuned.)
0 0
*7: Tuning may not be available depending on its motor characteristics. 3 6 20 30 40 60 120 0.3 60 120
Output frequency (Hz) Output frequency (Hz)
PM motor by SF-JR continuous operation torque characteristics SF-PR continuous operation torque characteristics
Mitsubishi Electric other manufacturers (Motor input voltage: 200 V) (Motor input voltage: 200 V)
general-purpose (induction)
motor SF-PR
• Sharing the spare inverter
One spare inverter is enough for the two types of motors (IM and PM).
Before Now…
Inverter Drive unit Inverter
Induction motor
by other
manufacturers One spare inverter for
Spare inverters for each different motors
Mitsubishi Electric Inverter Drive unit

IPM motor Induction
Mitsubishi Electric motor
vector control dedicated motor Mitsubishi Electric MM-EFS
SF-V5RU IPM motor PM motor
MM-CF
7
02
SECURITY & SAFETY
Swift recovery ensured by preventing trouble beforehand.
The FR-A800 has been developed with reliability and safety
Security & Safety foremost in mind.
1 For Improved Equipment Reliability

Rapid response is obtained when an unexpected trouble occurs.
Features
(1) Improved system safety

Safety standards compliance NEW
Controls with safety functions can be easily performed. •PLd and SIL2 are supported as standard.
The Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function is supported by the •EN ISO 13849-1 PLd / Cat.3
inverter. The inverter with the safety function can comply with •EN 61508, EN 61800-5-2 SIL2
the safety standards without incurring much expenses.
MELSEC iQ-R series

safety programmable
controller
Up to 120 units can be connected to the remote station.
*1
Safety shutdown
CC-Link IE Field Magnetic
signal of the contactor Safety stop function (STO)
Network safety
remote I/O module inverters is (MC) cuts down the number of
hard-wired. MCs to one!*2
•Low cost
Alarm/failure •Low maintenance (maintenance for one)
•Small installation space
Inverter output shutoff
Emergency stop
*1: Safety communication is available between a safety programmable controller and a remote I/O module.
*2: One MC is required to shut off the power at an activation of the protective function.
(2) Reliable and secure maintenance (3) Long life components and life check function
Standard 24 VDC power supply for the control circuit NEW Long life components
In addition to the existing power supply input terminals (R1 and •The service life of the cooling fans is now 10 years*3.
S1) of the control circuit, 24 VDC input is equipped as standard. The service life can be further extended by ON/OFF control of
The 24 VDC power supplied from outside can be fed to the the cooling fan.
control circuit locally, enabling the parameter settings, •Capacitors with a design life of 10 years*3*4 are adapted.
communication operation and safety maintenance without With these capacitors, the service of the inverter is further
turning ON the main power. extended.
•Estimated service lifespan of the long-life parts
Components Estimated lifespan of the FR-A800 *3 Guideline of JEMA*5
OFF Cooling fan 10 years 2 to 3 years
24 VDC
Main circuit smoothing capacitor 10 years*4 5 years
Printed board smoothing capacitor 10 years*4 5 years
*3: Surrounding air temperature: Annual average of 40˚C (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas,
oil mist, dust and dirt).
The design life is a calculated value from the LD rating and is not a guaranteed product life.
*4: Output current: 80% of the inverter LD rating
24 V external power supply
*5: Excerpts from “Periodic check of the transistorized inverter” of JEMA (Japan Electrical
input indication Manufacturer’s Association).
Prevention of trouble with temperature monitoring NEW Enhanced life diagnosis function
•An internal thermal sensor is equipped to
The inverter is equipped with an internal temperature sensor, which
all inverters as standard, which enables
outputs a signal when the ambient temperature is high.
monitoring of the installation environment.
This facilitates the detection of rises in temperature inside the
Use this function as a guide for the life
inverter following cooling fan malfunction, or rises in ambient
diagnosis. NEW
temperature due to inverter operating conditions.
•Maintenance timers are available for up
to three peripheral devices, such as "Maintenance 1 output"
warning
motor and bearing.
8
1
Features
(4) Quick reaction to troubles (5) Renewal assurance
Easy fault diagnosis NEW Intercompatibility with existing models
•The operating status (output frequency, etc.) immediately before •The inverter installation method is the
the protection function activates can be stored in the inverter same as that for the FR-A700 series,
built-in RAM with the trace function. The stored data (trace eliminating any concerns over replacement.
data) can be copied to a USB memory device or directly Furthermore, FR-A700 series control
imported to a computer, facilitating trouble analysis using the circuit terminal blocks can be installed
inverter setup software (FR Configurator2). with the use of an option (FR-A8TAT).
Trace data stored in the built-in RAM is deleted when the power is turned OFF or the
inverter is reset.
•The terminal response adjustment function allows a user to adjust
the response speed in accordance with the existing facility. NEW
•The conversion function of Inverter Setup Software (FR
Configurator2) enables parameter copy from an FR-A700 and
even from an FR-A500 (to be supported soon).
For the compatibilities and differences with the FR-A700 series,
refer to page 226.
•Clock setting is now available in addition to the
already-available cumulative energization time. The time and
date at a protective function activation are easily identified. (6) Reasons for high quality
(The clock is reset at power-OFF.) The date and time are also
Design considering the hazardous environment
saved with the trace data, making the fault analysis easier.
By using the real-time clock function with the optional liquid 3D-vibration analysis is performed to confirm the vibration
crystal display (LCD) operation panel (FR-LU08) (when using resistance. The analysis is also useful to find the best layout
battery), the time is not reset even when the power supply is position and to further improve the product's rigidity.
turned OFF. Assuming a hazardous
service condition, the
product reliability is
Backup/restore NEW
thoroughly assessed in the
•The GOT can be used for backing up inverter's parameter design stage. Every effort
settings and the data used in the PLC function of inverter, and is made to ensure the best
the backup stored in the GOT can be used to restore the data quality of the Mitsubishi
in the inverter. Electric inverter.*6
Ethernet CC-Link IE Field Network
3D-vibration analysis
Backup
Heat control for high quality
Restore Resistance against heat is what makes an inverter reliable.
Programmable controller
A well-designed heat-resistant power module is essential in a
GOT reliable inverter. From the power module's design stage, its heat
FR-A800-GF or resistance is carefully considered.*6
FR-A800 with FR-A8NCE
Hydraulic analysis and heat simulation
*6: The usage beyond the product's specified service condition is not guaranteed.
9
03
EASY SETUP & EASY TO USE
A range of equipment and functions are prepared allowing
Easy Setup work to be performed anywhere to suit product life cycles.
&
Easy to use
1 From Startup to Maintenance

Fully equipped with a variety of simple functions and equipment to improve work efficiency.
Features
(1) Streamlining the startup process (2) Easy-to-follow display improves the operability
Parameter copying with USB memory NEW Easy operation with GOT NEW
•A USB host connecter (A type), which allows external device •Automatic communication is possible without
connections, has been added. specifying any parameter settings simply by
Parameters can be copied to commercial USB memory devices. connecting to the GOT2000 series.
(Refer to page 63) •The PLC function device monitor can be
displayed at the GOT2000 series.
Batch control of multiple inverter device
monitors is possible with a single GOT unit.
•The sample screen data for the A800 can be found in the screen
design software of the GOT2000 series. The newest version of the
screen design software can be downloaded from the Mitsubishi
Electric FA Global Website.
USB 2.0 (full speed) supported
Easy-to-follow parameter configuration NEW
Easy setup with the Inverter Setup Software (FR Configurator2) One of the selectable mode by the operation panel is the Group
parameter mode, which provides intuitive and simple parameter settings.
•It is a software which is easy to use and has unity as Mitsubishi Electric
(The conventional parameter setting mode is selected by default.)
FA products with MELSOFT common design and good operability. Major
division Name
•Easy plug-and-play connection to USB terminal equipped as Conventional
8 1 8
E Environment
Pr.
parameter (A700) F Acceleration/deceleration
standard D Start and frequency commands
Mini-B H Protective function
connector M Monitor
New parameter T Multi function I/O terminal
FR Configurator2
(A800)
Pr. C + 1 + 1 2 C Motor constant
A Applications
Major Minor
division division B Applications (position control)
N Communication
Group number Parameter number G Control
Easy-to-read operation panel NEW

Inverter
USB cable A 5-digit, 12-seg display has been adopted for the operation panel
•Free trial version, which contains start-up functions, is available. It (FR-DU08) for a more natural character display. Furthermore, an
can be downloaded at Mitsubishi Electric FA Global Website. optional LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) adopting an LCD panel
capable of displaying text and menus is also available.
For FR Configurator2, please refer to page 24.
FR-DU08 (12-segment type) FR-LU08 (LCD type) (option)
Easy wiring to the control circuit NEW

PU MON IM
Spring clamp terminals have been adopted for control circuit terminals.
EXT PRM PM
NET P.RUN
FWD
Wires can be protected against loosening under vibrations during RE V
transportation of the inverter. Ten additional terminals are used as STOP

RESET
compared to the FR-A700 series. Round crimping terminals can

also be used by employing a control terminal option (FR-A8TR).
Assures the
(3) To aid with maintenance PU
Easy wiring.
EXT MON
PRM IM
NET PM
P.RUN
tensile strength
Reduced wiring check time
FWD
Just insert.
REV
STOP
of the DIN
RESET
standards.
Split-type covers are adapted for all
capacity models.
Maintenance is now easy because all an
operator has to do is to remove the
cover for the target wiring area.
Maintenance and control of multiple inverters (Option) NEW

Serial number reading is possible using the optional LCD operation
panel (FR-LU08) or the Inverter Setup Software (FR Configurator2).
Administration of different inverters has become much more simple.
10
04
ECO-FRIENDLY
FACTORIES
Eco Factory The power consumption by motors is said to amount about the half of
all power consumption made by the Japanese manufacturing industry.
Factories can save more energy without dropping their production.
Less energy and more production—the FR-A800 series will help you to
get the both.
The Next Step Go Green 1

Save energy while increasing factory production.
Features
(1) Energy-saving function tailored to system, application
Variety of functions
• Check the energy saving effect at a glance • Save energy with Optimum excitation control NEW
•You can check the energy saving effect on the energy saving The excitation current is constantly adjusted to drive the motor in
monitor. the most efficient method which leads to energy saving.
•The measured output power amount can be output in pulses. For example, with optimum excitation control with motor load
torque of 10% when using the SF-JR, motor efficiency has
• Reduce power consumption during standby increased by approximately 15% over the previous V/F control
•Control circuits other than those for power-related parts can be
method.
operated with 24 VDC power supplied from an external power
source. NEW • Effective use of regenerative energy (option)
Since the control circuit can use the external 24 VDC, other Multiple inverters can be
power control circuits can stay OFF while no driving is required, connected to the power ACL
and that saves the standby energy. regeneration common

converter (FR-CV)/high
•By turning the cooling fan ON/OFF based on the inverter status, FR-CV
power factor converter
wasteful power consumption during stoppages can be reduced.
(FR-HC2) via a common
FR-A800 FR-A800 FR-A800
PN bus.
Regenerative power is used at other inverters, and surplus
energy is returned to the power supply, resulting in energy saving.
The 315K or higher models are inverter-converter separated
types, which are suitable for power regeneration. NEW
(2) PM motor contributes to the energy saving in factories

PM motor
If the inverter is being used for an application requiring constant-torque, such as a conveyor, factory energy savings can be achieved by
replacing your current induction motors with permanent magnet motors (PM motors).
(Tuning is required for an IPM motor other than MM-CF, and for the PM motors of other manufacturers.)
• Why is a PM motor so efficient?

•The current does not flow to the rotor (secondary side), so there Conveyor
is no secondary copper loss. A conveyor transports different
goods and products according to
•Magnetic flux is generated by permanent magnets, so less its application. A PM motor can
current is required to drive a motor. keep the carrying speed constant
while saving energy.
Induction motor
Iron loss
100% Primary IPM motor

copper loss
(stator side)
Iron loss
46%
Secondary
copper loss Primary
(rotor side) copper loss
Other Other
SF-JR MM-CF
[ Comparison of motor losses ]
(Example of 1.5 kW motors)
11
05
SYSTEM SUPPORT
System Support
(FUNCTION)
1 High Equipment Functionality

Numerous functions and the extensive lineup of models are ready to support various systems.
Features
(1) Various network compatibility brings all the control in your hand
Compatibility to various open networks
Using a controller, the inverter can be controlled and monitored via various types of network.
• Ethernet communication NEW
FR-A800-E
•The CC-Link IE Field Network Basic is supported, so the network can be created easily. The inverter's status can be monitored and the
parameters can be set via Internet. (MODBUS/TCP is also supported.)
Factory Router Office outside of the factory

Firewall
Office Equipment Hub
Internet
Programmable GOT
controller Inverter Inverter
Inverter FR Configurator2
FR Configurator2
FR-A800-GF • Other network communication

•CC-Link, SSCNETIII (/H), DeviceNet™,
•The inverter has the CC-Link IE Field Network communication function, which
PROFIBUS-DPV0 are supported using a compatible
enables immediate operation via the CC-Link IE Field Network.
communication option. Other Ethernet-based
communication such as the CC-Link IE Field Network
Inverter Inverter
communication and the FL remote communication can
Up to 120 units
be also supported.
Programmable can be connected •A function block (FB) programming for CC-Link
GOT controller communication is available for the MELSEC-Q/L series to
( When
are connected )
only inverters create the inverter control sequence programs easily. (The
FB library (collection of FB elements) can be downloaded
FR-A800-GF FR-A800-GF from the Mitsubishi Electric FA Global Website.)
or FR-A800 & or FR-A800 &
FR-A8NCE FR-A8NCE •The standard model with an RS-485 interface
(Mitsubishi inverter protocol, MODBUS® RTU protocol)
Ethernet cable
CC-Link IE Network enables communication with other devices without
using a communication option.
For details of the CC-Link family compatible with the FR-A800 series inverters, refer to page 228.
(2) Reduced tact time with functionality suited to the application

Anti-sway control NEW
When an object is moved by a crane, swinging at the time of stopping is suppressed on the
crane's transverse axis or traveling axis. This control cuts down the tact time and facilitates
efficient operation.
Increased magnetic excitation deceleration NEW

Deceleration time can be reduced without a brake resistor.
Tact time can be eliminated at conveyor lines, etc.
12
1
Features
(3) Selection of optimum capacity to suit the application
Multiple rating NEW
Rated current and four different overload capacity ratings (SLD rating (super light duty), LD rating (light duty), ND rating (normal duty), HD
rating (heavy duty)) can be selected with parameters. The optimum inverter can be selected to suit the application, and by selecting an
inverter with SLD or LD rating, equipment size can be reduced when compared with the FR-A700 series. The HD rating is best suited for
applications requiring low speed and high torque.
If using an inverter with capacity of 75K or higher, or motor with capacity of 75 kW or higher, always select and install the inverter based on
the capacity of the motor with DC reactor.
With FR-A700 With FR-A800 SLD LD ND HD

Rating
Super light duty Light duty Normal duty Heavy duty
Space
saving Fan and Pump
PU MON IM
EXT PRM PM
NET P.RUN
FWD
Shield Machines, Winding and Unwinding,

RE V
STOP
RESET
Printing Machines
Application
Cranes, Press
Inverter Inverter
Conveyor
15K 11K
(LD rating example) Pr.570 (E301) setting 0 1 2 (Initial value) 3
Overload current rating 110% 60 s, 120% 60 s, 150% 60 s, 200% 60 s,
(inverse-time characteristics) 120% 3 s 150% 3 s 200% 3 s 250% 3 s
Surrounding air temperature 40°C 50°C 50°C 50°C
Refer to page 16 for the inverter rating selection.
Motor 15 kW Motor 15 kW
(4) PLC control with an inverter

Built-in PLC function in an inverter NEW
•Parameters and setting frequency can be changed at the program.
•Inverter control such as inverter operations triggered by input
signals, signal output based on inverter operation status, and
monitor output can be freely customized based on the machine
specifications.
•All machines can be controlled by the inverter alone, and control Crane
can also be dispersed. Conveyor
•Time-based operation is possible by using in combination with the FR Configurator2
real-time clock function (optional LCD operation panel (FR-LU08)).

Fan
•The FR-A800-E enables communication between multiple
inverters using the I/O devices and special registers of the PLC
function, which can create a small-scale system by Ethernet using
the inverter-to-inverter link function.
Refer to page 22 for the details.
13
05
SYSTEM SUPPORT
System Support
(ENVIRONMENT
ADAPTABILITY)
1 Installation Anywhere
Compliant with a variety of standards, our extensive range of the FR-A800 series inverter covers various applications.
Features
(1) Comprehensive noise countermeasures

Compliance with EU EMC Directive with inverter alone
Troublesome acquisition of standards is unnecessary.
[dBμV/m]
•The FR-A800 series is equipped with an EMC filter as standard for 90
compliance with EMC Directive with the inverter alone. 80
(EN 61800-3 2nd Environment Category C3) 70 EN 61800-3
60 Category C3 QP level
•The newly developed drive technology and the power supply
50
technology minimize the EMI emitted from inverters. FR-A700 QP value
40
Capacitive filter Input-side 30
common mode choke DC reactor
(radio noise filter) (line noise filter) 20
FR-A800 QP value
55K or lower Standard (built-in) Standard (built-in) Option (sold separately) 10
75K or higher Standard (built-in) Option (sold separately) Option (sold separately) 0
30 50 70 100 200 300
Frequency [MHz]
(2) Global compatibility

Compliance with a variety of standards
•Complies with UL, cUL, and EC Directives (CE marking), and the
Radio Waves Act (South Korea) (KC marking). It is also certified as
compliant with the Eurasian Conformity (EAC).
•The inverters are compliant with the EU RoHS Directive (Restriction
of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and
Electronic Equipment), friendly to people and to the environment.
•For the 400 V class*1, compliance with various countries ship
classifications allows use on ship equipment. (A noise filter is
required for the FR-A840 inverter and the FR-CC2 converter unit,
and a ferrite core is required for the FR-A846 inverter. (Refer to
page 191).)
Certification body
NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)
ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
BV (Bureau Veritas)
LR (Lloyd's Register of Shipping)
DNV GL (DNV GL AS)
CCS (China Classification Society)
KR (Korean Register of Shipping)
*1: The IP55 compatible model with a built-in C3 filter is not compliant with the ship
classification standards.
For details of the models compliant with global standards, contact your local sales office.
(3) Protected in hazardous environment (4) Wire saving, space saving

Circuit board coating Built-in brake transistor NEW
The inverters with PCB coating (IEC60721-3-3 3C2/3S2) and conductive In addition to the 22K and lower, 400 V class 30 to 55K models
plating are available for improved environmental resistance. ("-60" or "-06" have also been equipped with a built-in brake transistor. In an
is affixed to the end of the inverter model name.) application where the motor is hardly decelerated, connecting a
brake resistor can shorten the deceleration time; no brake unit or
power regeneration converter is required. Wiring, space, and
ultimately the cost will be all saved.
14
1
Features
(5) Direct installation by the machine
IP55 compatible NEW
•Inverters can be installed nearby the machine, minimizing cable

length between the inverter and motor.
•Support is available for use even in high-humidity or dusty
environments, facilitating a more flexible choice of installation
locations.
•By enclosing a DC reactor, it requires less wiring and less space.
•Compatible with cable glands to meet the IP55 specification at the
wiring section.
IP 5 5
•First digit (protection rating against solid objects) •Second digit (protection rating against water)
IP rating Description IP rating Description
Protection against dust. No ingress of Protection against water jets
Class 5 Class 5
dust that may inhibit normal operation. from all directions.
(6) Flexible configuration to meet the needs

Separate inverter and converter modules NEW
The inverter module and the converter module are physically separated for the 315K or
higher capacity models. Converter module Separate Inverter module
Inverter module : FR-A842
Converter module : FR-CC2
This facilitates flexible support for a variety of systems such as common bus line (to be M
supported soon) and parallel operation, allowing the installation space to be minimized
and costs to be reduced. The converter unit can be run with 12-phase rectifier power
supply. Motors up to 1350 kW (LD rating) can be driven by the inverters with parallel
operation function (FR-A842-P) and the converter units (FR-CC2-P).
FR-CC2 FR-A842 FR-CC2-P FR-A842-P

FR-POL*2
M
Motor
a
Converter Inverter Converter Inverter
module module module module
M
FR-A842 FR-CC2-P FR-A842-P a' Motor
FR-POL*2
M
Motor
Inverter module Converter module Inverter module

*2: When the cable length from
Common bus Parallel operation an inverter to the node point
(a/a') is less than 10 m,
Some functions from the standard inverter are limited install the FR-POL. (Refer to
or not available. (Refer to page 229.) page 178.)
15
Inverter by rating
•200 V class
SLD (Super light duty) LD (Light duty) ND (Normal duty initial value) HD (Heavy duty)
Inverter model
FR-A820- Motor capacity Rated current Motor capacity Rated current Motor capacity Rated current Motor capacity Rated current
1 0.4K 00046
(kW)*1
0.75
(A)
4.6
(kW)*1
0.75
(A) (kW)*1
4.2
(A)
0.4
(kW)*1
3
(A)
0.2 1.5
0.75K 00077 1.5 7.7 1.5 7 0.75 5 0.4 3
Features
1.5K 00105 2.2 10.5 2.2 9.6 1.5 8 0.75 5

2.2K 00167 3.7 16.7 3.7 15.2 2.2 11 1.5 8
3.7K 00250 5.5 25 5.5 23 3.7 17.5 2.2 11
5.5K 00340 7.5 34 7.5 31 5.5 24 3.7 17.5
7.5K 00490 11 49 11 45 7.5 33 5.5 24
11K 00630 15 63 15 58 11 46 7.5 33
15K 00770 18.5 77 18.5 70.5 15 61 11 46
18.5K 00930 22 93 22 85 18.5 76 15 61
22K 01250 30 125 30 114 22 90 18.5 76
30K 01540 37 154 37 140 30 115 22 90
37K 01870 45 187 45 170 37 145 30 115
45K 02330 55 233 55 212 45 175 37 145
55K 03160 75 316 75 288 55 215 45 175
75K 03800 90/110 380 90 346 75 288 55 215
90K 04750 132 475 110 432 90 346 75 288
•400 V class
SLD (Super light duty) LD (Light duty) ND (Normal duty initial value) HD (Heavy duty)
Inverter model
FR-A84- Motor capacity Rated current Motor capacity Rated current Motor capacity Rated current Motor capacity Rated current
(kW)*1 (A) (kW)*1 (A) (kW)*1 (A) (kW)*1 (A)
0.4K 00023 0.75 2.3 0.75 2.1 0.4 1.5 0.2 0.8
0.75K 00038 1.5 3.8 1.5 3.5 0.75 2.5 0.4 1.5
1.5K 00052 2.2 5.2 2.2 4.8 1.5 4 0.75 2.5
2.2K 00083 3.7 8.3 3.7 7.6 2.2 6 1.5 4
3.7K 00126 5.5 12.6 5.5 11.5 3.7 9 2.2 6
5.5K 00170 7.5 17 7.5 16 5.5 12 3.7 9
7.5K 00250 11 25 11 23 7.5 17 5.5 12
11K 00310 15 31 15 29 11 23 7.5 17
15K 00380 18.5 38 18.5 35 15 31 11 23
18.5K 00470 22 47 22 43 18.5 38 15 31
22K 00620 30 62 30 57 22 44 18.5 38
30K 00770 37 77 37 70 30 57 22 44
37K 00930 45 93 45 85 37 71 30 57
45K 01160 55 116 55 106 45 86 37 71
55K 01800 75/90 180 75 144 55 110 45 86
75K 02160 110 216 90 180 75 144 55 110
90K 02600 132 260 110 216 90 180 75 144
110K 03250 160 325 132 260 110 216 90 180
132K 03610 185 361 160 325 132 260 110 216
160K 04320 220 432 185 361 160 325 132 260
185K 04810 250 481 220 432 185 361 160 325
220K 05470 280 547 250 481 220 432 185 361
250K 06100 315 610 280 547 250 481 220 432
280K 06830 355 683 315 610 280 547 250 481
315K 07700 400 770 355 683 315 610 280 547
355K 08660 450 866 400 770 355 683 315 610
400K 09620 500 962 450 866 400 770 355 683
450K 10940 560 1094 500 962 450 866 400 770
500K 12120 630 1212 560 1094 500 962 450 866
•Overload current rating

SLD 110% 60 s, 120% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 40°C
LD 120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C
ND 150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C
HD 200% 60 s, 250% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C
*1: The applicable motor capacity is the maximum applicable capacity of a Mitsubishi Electric 4-pole standard motor.
For selection of the DC reactor and the converter unit, refer to page 204.
16
Extensive lineup For the details of the lineup, please contact your sales representative.
•Standard model
F R - A 8 2 0 - 0.4K - 1 -
1
Communication
Symbol Voltage class Symbol Structure, functionality Symbol*1 Description Symbol Type*2 Symbol Circuit board coating Plated Symbol Function
Features
type
(IEC60721-3-3 3C2/3S2 compatible) conductor
2 200 V class 0 Standard model Inverter ND rated 1 FM None Standard type
0.4K to 280K capacity (kW) RS-485 None Without Without
4 400 V class 2 CA With built-in
60 With Without GF CC-Link IE Field
E1 FM
Ethernet 06*3 With With Network function
E2 CA
Three-phase 0.4K 0.75K 1.5K 2.2K 3.7K 5.5K 7.5K 11K 15K 18.5K 22K 30K 37K 45K 55K 75K 90K
200V class 00046 00077 00105 00167 00250 00340 00490 00630 00770 00930 01250 01540 01870 02330 03160 03800 04750
FR-A820-*4                 
0.4K 0.75K 1.5K 2.2K 3.7K 5.5K 7.5K 11K 15K 18.5K 22K 30K 37K 45K 55K 75K 90K
00023 00038 00052 00083 00126 00170 00250 00310 00380 00470 00620 00770 00930 01160 01800 02160 02600
Three-phase
                
400V class
FR-A840-*4 110K 132K 160K 185K 220K 250K 280K
03250 03610 04320 04810 05470 06100 06830
      
•Separated converter type
F R - A 8 4 2 - 315K - 1 -
Communication
Symbol Voltage class Symbol Structure, functionality Symbol*1 Description Symbol Type*2 type Symbol Circuit board coating Plated Symbol Function
(IEC60721-3-3 3C2/3S2 compatible) conductor
4 400 V class 2 Separated converter type Inverter ND rated 1 FM None Standard type
315K to 500K RS-485 None Without Without
capacity (kW) 2 CA With built-in
60 With Without GF CC-Link IE Field
E1 FM
315K 355K 400K 450K 500K Ethernet 06 With With Network function
Three-phase 400V class*5
07700 08660 09620 10940 12120
E2 CA
P Parallel operation
FR-A842-(-E)(-GF)     
FR-A842--P — —   
•Converter unit
F R - CC2 - H 315K - 60
Symbol Voltage class Symbol Description Symbol Circuit board coating Plated Symbol Function
H 400 V class 315K to 630K Applicable motor capacity (kW)
(IEC60721-3-3 3C2/3S2 compatible) conductor None Standard type
60 With Without
P Parallel operation
06 With With
Three-phase 400V class
315K 355K 400K 450K 500K 560K 630K
(with a built-in DC reactor)
FR-CC2-H       
FR-CC2-H-P — —     —
•IP55 compatible model
F R - A 8 4 6 - 7.5K - 1 - 60 C3
Communication
Symbol Voltage class Symbol**1 Description Symbol Type*2 type
4 400 V class 0.4K to 132K Inverter ND rated capacity (kW) 1 FM
RS-485 Circuit board coating Plated Symbol EMC filter
2 CA Symbol (IEC60721-3-3 3C2/3S2 compatible) conductor
Symbol Structure, functionality C2 Built-in C2 filter
E1 FM 60 With Without
6 IP55 compatible model Ethernet C3 Built-in C3 filter
E2 CA 06 With With
Three-phase 00023 00038 00052 00083 00126 00170 00250 00310 00380 00470 00620 00770 00930 01160 01800 02160 02600
400V class
                
FR-A846-
110K 132K
(with a built-in
DC reactor) 03250 03610
 
*1: Models can be alternatively indicated with the inverter rated current (SLD rating).
(For the FR-A842-P and the FR-A846, the current rating is LD or ND. However, the rated current used to represent the model is the SLD rated current of the standard model.)
*2: Specification differs by the type as follows.
Initial setting
Type Monitor output
Built-in EMC filter Control logic Rated frequency Pr.19 Base frequency voltage
FM Terminal FM (pulse train output) 9999
OFF Sink logic 60 Hz
(terminal FM equipped model) Terminal AM (analog voltage output (0 to ±10 VDC)) (same as the power supply voltage)
CA Terminal CA (analog current output (0 to 20 mADC)) 8888
ON Source logic 50 Hz
(terminal CA equipped model) Terminal AM (analog voltage output (0 to ±10 VDC)) (95% of the power supply voltage)
*3: Available for the 5.5K or higher.
*4: For using the 75K or higher inverter and a 75 kW or higher motor, always install a DC reactor (FR-HEL), which is available as an option.
*5: Always install the converter unit (FR-CC2(-P)). (Not required when a high power factor converter (FR-HC2) is used.) : Released model
17
Application example
BEST SUITED FOR EVERY MACHINE
Line Control (Winding and Unwinding)
2 Printing
section
Application Example, PLC Function, FR Configurator2
Deviation
IM sensor IM
(contactless
potentiometer)
Main speed
setter
PLC Dancer position
Main speed (0 to 10V)

Reference axis Intermediate axis
Material tension is kept constant by Dancer control NEW

t The dancer control detects the dancer roll positions and performs
Poin
employing speed control and torque control
to eliminate slack and uneven winding. PID operation to keep the sheet tension constant.
By using a motor with the speed ratio Traverse function NEW
most appropriate for the machine, the The traverse function, used for the traverse axis of spinning machine,
inverter capacity can be downsized. prevents uneven winding or collapsing.
Torque accuracy
Typical industries Real sensorless vector control Vector control
Torque control range 1 : 20 1 : 50
Textile industry Steel industry Absolute torque accuracy*1 ±20% ±10%*3
Repetitive torque accuracy*2 ±10% ±5%*3
Pulp, paper, paper products manufacturing industries *1: Difference between the actual torque and the torque command
*2: Fluctuation between the average of the actual torque and the actual measured torque (repeatability of the torque)
*3: When online auto tuning (adaptive magnetic flux observer) enabled
Cranes
Inverter
Traverse motor Lift motor

IM IM
Power Traveling
regeneration wheel
converter Traveling motor Traveling motor
IM
Crane IM
Rail
Relentless operation is possible with HD High torque at low speed

t
Poin
rating when lifting. And when traveling, [Starting torque] Real sensorless vector control 200% (ND rating)
vibrations applied to objects being conveyed Vector control 200% (ND rating)
(150% of initial setting for the 5.5K and higher)
are suppressed with anti-sway control,
[Zero-speed torque] Vector control: 200% (Select HD rating.)
facilitating efficient operation.
PLC function NEW
Typical industries By employing synchronous operation for gate-type cranes, positional
displacement of both axes is corrected during travel, achieving highly
Lumber, wood product accurate control without using an external controller.
manufacturing industries Steel industry
Warehousing Water transportation

Anti-sway control NEW
When an object is moved by a crane, swinging at the time of stopping
Textile industry Metal products manufacturing is suppressed on the crane's transverse axis or traveling axis.
This control cuts down the tact time and facilitates efficient operation.
18
Shield Machines
Enclosure Shield Machine 2

Inverter Motor Pinion
GOT Cutter

PLC IM section
R
IM
R
CC-Link IE
Inverters can be used to provide Real sensorless vector control

t Motors are controlled without encoders, which are
Poin
140
Torque (%)
high starting torque for digging, 130
and for transferring earth and sand susceptible to hazardous environment. Use of 120
such motors naturally provides higher reliability. 110

after digging. A lineup of products 100
Torque accuracy has also improved because the
compatible with the IP55 protective 90
temperature is better controlled. 80
structure is available as a separate
28.3
55.8
70.1
79.6
86.0
90.8
94.1
96.2
97.7
98.5
99.1
Temperature (°C)
series. Temperature/torque characteristics
Droop control
This function balances the load between motors when using multiple inverters.
Typical industries
CC-Link IE communication
Construction industry CC-Link IE communication enables a programmable controller or a GOT to
control multiple inverters. By using Ethernet cables, less wiring is required.
Machine Tools
Grindstone driving motor
Jig Grindstone
Insert a workpiece
Jig driving motor
The rotation speed can be set according High-speed operation

t
Poin
to the material being processed. Stable [Operating frequency] V/F control 590 Hz
high-speed rotation is also possible. Vector control 400 Hz
Real sensorless vector control 400 Hz
Typical industries Torque limit function

This is effective in preventing machine damage (tool damage
Metal products manufacturing prevention, etc.) due to sudden disturbance torque.
Orientation control (vector control)

The inverter can adjust the stop position (Orientation control) using an
encoder attached to a place such as the main shaft of the machine.
19
Application example
BEST SUITED FOR EVERY MACHINE
Wood Processing Machines
2 IM
Feeding table
Lumber
Speed setting
IM
Inverter
Even when processing areas of varying Real sensorless vector control, vector control
t Improved speed response to sudden load fluctuations when
Poin
hardness such as lumber knots,
processing time delays are suppressed compared with the previous model (FR-A700).
by minimizing reductions in motor speed. [Response speed]
Real sensorless vector control 50 Hz*1 (A700: 20 Hz)
Vector control 130 Hz (A700: 50 Hz)
Typical industries *1: At 3.7 kW with no load. Differs depending on the load conditions and motor capacity.
Lumber, wood product

Forestry
manufacturing industries
Torque limiting function
This function is effective in preventing machine damage (tool damage,
etc.) due to sudden disturbance torque.
Conveyance
Lift
Power regeneration Fork
converter Inverter
Move
Inverter

The new series offers a wealth of Multiple axes are strictly controlled to run at the same speed without
t
Poin
functionality suited to applications such using a driving belt. This control method provides driving accurate
as high-accuracy conveyance and target enough for transporting glass substrates without damaging them.
position stoppage, which contributes to Simple positioning control is also available.
reduction in tact time. (when high frequency superposition control selected in combination with MM-CF)
Increased magnetic excitation deceleration NEW

Typical industries Deceleration time can be reduced without a brake resistor.
Tact time can be eliminated at conveyor lines, etc.
Steel industry Metal products manufacturing
PLC function NEW
manufacturing industries Textile industry When a few sensors are used to check the presence of goods on a
Water transportation, conveyor and the arrival of such goods, the inverter can directly
fishing industry Warehousing receive such signals from the sensors for the PLC control.
20
Printing Machines
Ink roller
2

Water roller
Paper
The highly-accurate speed control

Speed control
t
Poin
Real sensorless vector control Vector control PM sensorless vector control
minimizes color unevenness and Speed response 50 Hz*1 130 Hz 50 Hz
displaced prints. 1:200 1:1500
Speed control 1:1000*3
(when power drive (both driving/
range (when HD rating selected)
at 0.3 Hz to 60 Hz) regeneration*2)
*1: At 3.7 kW with no load. Differs depending on the load conditions and motor capacity.
Typical industries *2: If using regeneration unit (option) during regeneration
*3: When high frequency superposition control selected in combination with the MM-CF
Printing and related industries
The speed fluctuations of the ink roller axis and water roller axis are
minimized to eliminate print unevenness.
[Speed fluctuation ratio] ±0.05% (Digital input)
"No encoder" means less trouble and higher reliability.
Compressors
Compressor
GOT
Tank
Inverter
The PM sensorless vector control is useful PM sensorless vector control

t Smooth operation is possible even at start-up under high load.
Poin
in generating high starting torque. By using
this control method with an IPM motor, [Starting torque] 1.5 kW or lower: 200%, 2.0 kW or higher: 150%
much power can be saved. This small When high frequency superposition control selected in combination
with MM-CF
motor also makes the machine small.
PID control
Typical industries Pressure can be automatically adjusted by converting signals from
the encoder to inverter input signals and feeding them back.
Steel industry Metal products manufacturing
Parallel operation function NEW
manufacturing industries Textile industry Even a large compressor can be operated by FR-A842-P inverters
Water transportation, with parallel operation function, which can operate a 630 kW or
fishing industry Warehousing higher motor.
21
PLC function
FREELY CONTROL MACHINES

The PLC function will help you to provide the control sequence best suited
for the machine specifications.
2 1 Inverter operation sequence customized for the machine

•A set of operations (operation at different signal inputs, signal and monitor outputs at different inverter status, etc.) can be freely
programmed in accordance with the machine specifications. For example, a shutter opening/closing can be performed based on a signal
from a sensor, or based on the opening/closing times.
Control programs can be created in sequence ladders using the inverter setup software (FR Configurator2).
2 Realizes the decentralized control 3 Automatic operation in accordance with the time
•The control of the whole system is decentralized to inverters that •With the real-time clock, automatic operation can be performed at
mange their subordinating devices individually. certain times (when the optional LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) is
•A group of dedicated sequence programs is created and saved in used).
each inverter. The master controller no longer has to process all
the sequence programs, and the decentralized system accepts
program changes more flexibly.
4 Useful functions
• User parameter • Inverter parameter read/write
Up to 50 parameters, which are linked with the data registers, Parameter settings can be changed using sequence programs.
can be saved. The variables (data registers) used in the PLC The acceleration/deceleration patterns can also be set with
function can be saved as inverter parameters. Furthermore, sequence programs to be changed at certain operation statuses.
parameter settings can be saved in the EEPROM of inverter. You can choose RAM or EEPROM to save the parameter settings.
When results of calculation using the PLC function are saved in When the settings are changed frequently, choose RAM.
the parameters, the data can be retained after the power is
turned OFF. • PID function
Two different loops of PID inverter operations can be pre-set, and
• User initiated fault those can be controlled using sequence programs.
Inverter output can be shut off under conditions other than those
of the existing protective functions. Up to five specific • Inverter operation lock
fault-initiating conditions can be set to activate a protective The inverter operation can be restricted for the command
function and shut off the inverter output. sources other than the sequence programs.
• Monitored item for the user

Special register values can be displayed for monitoring on the
operation panel. Arbitrary data designated by the user such as
results of calculation using the PLC function can be displayed.
PLC function
Item Description
I/O
General-purpose I/O Sequence programs enable I/O signal transmission to/from the inverter and its plug-in options.
Sequence programs enable reading of analog input values or analog output transmission by the inverter,
Analog I/O
and analog output transmission to the plug-in options.
Pulse train I/O Sequence programs enable pulse train inputs (to terminal JOG) and pulse train outputs (from terminal F/C(FM)).
Inverter parameter read/write Sequence programs enable inverter parameter write/read.
Fifty user parameters (Pr.1150 to Pr.1199) are available and are linked with the data registers D206 to D255,
User parameter
which accept direct access by sequence programs.
CC-Link A plug-in option (FR-A8NC) enables handling of remote registers as arbitrary data in the sequence programs.
Special function
PID operation Inverter's PID operations can be set (up to two loops).
User initiated fault Up to five fault-initiating conditions can be set to activate a protective function.
Fault clear The protective function occurring in the inverter can be reset.
Inverter operation lock Inverters can start up while the PLC function is running.
Monitored item for the user Desired data is displayable on the operation panel.
22
Application example
Crane control
Crane 2
t The traveled distance (total number of travel pulses)
Poin of each wheel is directly read from the encoder

installed at the wheel. The pulses from the two
wheels are then compared, and their speed is
adjusted to synchronize the wheel positions. Cran
e mo
veme
nt dir
There is no need to use an external controller to ectio
n
Stabilizer and
offset speed, allowing high accuracy control. encoder2
Stabilizer and
encoder1 Spring
Spring Travel wheel

User initiated fault Travel rail
Up to five protective functions operating under specific conditions can be set.
Protective functions can be triggered to block inverter output at such
Travel pulses Travel pulses
times as when positional displacements are not eliminated even after (FR-A8AP) (FR-A8TP)
*1 *2
offsetting speed over a fixed period of time, or pulses from the PLGs on
*1: FR-A8AP (Plug-in option)
Left edge wheel Right edge wheel
both wheels are not input. drive inverter drive inverter
*2: FR-A8TP
(Control terminal option)
Conveyor control
The workpiece positions detected by sensors are

t Y1
Poin
Extruding
directly reported to the inverter, and the inverter machine
X2
sends out the operation commands to the conveyor X1 Stop sensor
robot and to the extruding machine. Whole control Deceleration sensor
X0 Start sensor
can be performed by an inverter, in accordance
Workpiece
with the movement of its peripheral equipment.
Workpiece
Inverter parameter read/write Y0
Changes can be made to inverter parameters from the sequence program.
The acceleration/deceleration time and pattern can be set based on the Conveyor robot
type of workpiece.
Power supply
Inverter operation lock
Operation is possible only when the sequence function is enabled. Motor Inputs X0 to 2
Changes to settings caused by operator error can be avoided. Outputs Y0 to 1
Fan control
Signals sent via the enclosure (relay panel, etc.) such as input magnetic
t Enclosure
Poin
contactor signals, watt hour meter signals, and sensor signals can be
read directly into the inverter and controlled. A fan can be controlled in
Wh
accordance with the conditions without using relays, etc. Host PLC
Network
Furthermore, by using an external 24 VDC power source for the
control power supply, input machine signals can be turned ON and MC
OFF regardless of whether there is an input power source. And by
employing an external 24 VDC power supply for the control power,
input machine signals can be turned ON and OFF, regardless of the Sensor signal
existence of a main circuit power supply. Sensor
Power supply
for control circuit
CC-Link
24 VDC
A plug-in option (FR-A8NC) enables handling of remote registers as arbitrary data in the Power
sequence programs. supply
A variety of equipment inside the factory can be centrally controlled with a CC-Link Network. FAN
23
Inverter setup software
FR Configurator2 (SW1DND-FRC2)
DELIVERING A COMFORTABLE INVERTER

From inverter startup to maintenance,
this versatile software allows the user FR Configurator2
to specify settings easily at the computer. MADE IN JAPAN
2 SERIAL
＊＊＊
[Compatible operating systems]

Windows® 10, Windows® 8.1/Pro/Enterprise, Windows® 8, Windows® 7, (32-bit, 64-bit),

Windows Vista® (32-bit) MODEL SW1DND-FRC2-J
COPYRIGHT(C)2013
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Easy connection with a USB cable Intuitive user interface

A USB connector (Mini-B connector) is provided as standard. Connected inverters are displayed in tree view format.
Easy connection to the computer without the need for Windows for each function can be accessed by
a converter. changing the tab for maximum efficiency.
FR Configurator2 Tree view Tab change
Mini-B connector
Computer USB cable Inverter
Work can be carried out away from the equipment using a USB memory device
By loading trace data and parameter settings copied to a USB memory device into FR Configurator2, analysis and
adjustments can be carried out with ease away from the equipment.
USB memory device
Graph function Editing the USB memory parameter copy file
Sequence control (Developer function) Free trial version Supported

The Developer function is used for creating sequence The function with the marking above is available in the free trial version
programs and writing them to the inverter to enable the (usable free of charge with limited functions). It can be downloaded at
Mitsubishi Electric FA Global Website.
use of the PLC function of the inverter.
Free trial Free trial
Function version Function version
Parameter list Developer
Diagnosis USB memory
Graph parameter copy file edit
Batch monitor Ethernet parameter setting
Test operation iQSS backup file conversion
I/O terminal monitor Help
Convert : Available, : Not available
A full functional trial version, which has the same functionality as the release version, is
also offered for a limited period of 20 days.
24
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Startup
1 Efficient startup settings
System settings Free trial version Supported Conversion function Free trial version Supported
This sets the method used to Parameters can be set with the parameter auto conversion 2
connect the inverters and the function when renewing from the FR-A700 series or FR-A500

computer. Automatic recognition of series (to be supported soon).
connected inverters can also be set.
The station number, model, capacity,
and plug-in options of the connected
inverters can also be set manually.
Test operation Free trial version Supported

Computer
Operating commands, frequency FR-A500 FR-A700 FR-A800
(support scheduled)
settings, and the operating mode
can be set for the selected inverter.
Operation
2 Perform pre-operation adjustments and checks during operation with ease
Parameter list Free trial version Supported Batch monitor function

Parameters for selected station numbers can be displayed and changed. Multiple inverter monitor items can be
monitored simultaneously.
With a terminal monitor, the ON/OFF
status can be monitored.
I/O signals can be assigned using settings by function.

USB memory parameter copy file edit
Parameter settings (USB memory device parameter copy file)
Offline auto tuning read from the inverter to a USB memory device can be edited.
Tuning is performed in wizard format after specifying necessary With the iQSS backup file conversion function, the files in the
parameter settings. backup/restore format generated by the GOT can be converted
and edited.
Maintenance
3 Easy-to-follow platform facilitates easy maintenance
Diagnosis (faults history) Free trial version Supported Graph function

Inverter faults history can be read Inverter data can be sampled and
and displayed together with the displayed in a graphical format.
alarm occurrence time. Trace data can also be read and
Activating faults can be displayed, displayed in a graph.
and inverters can also be reset.
Help Free trial version Supported Life diagnosis [to be available soon] Free trial version Supported
Displays the content of inverter and Life information read from the inverter is displayed.
software Instruction Manuals. Check marks appear in the life alarm fields of inverter parts that
have exceeded their replacement schedule.
Diagnosis results can also be output to a file.
25
Connection Example
 Connection example for standard models

Three-phase AC power supply
Must be within the permissible power Inverter
supply specifications of the inverter. USB connector
(Refer to page 27) USB host
(A connector)
Communication USB
Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) status indicator (Refer to
or earth leakage current breaker (LED)(USB host) page 63)
(ELB), fuse
Must be selected carefully since an inrush USB devuce
current flows in the inverter at power ON. (Mini B connector)
(Refer to page 192)
Personal computer
Magnetic contactor (MC) (FR Configurator2)
(Refer to page 24)
Install this to ensure safety.
3
Do not use this to start and stop the inverter.
Doing so will shorten the life of the inverter.
(Refer to page 193)
Connection Example
AC reactor DC reactor
High-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR)
(FR-HAL) (FR-HEL)
(Refer to page 179)
(Refer to page 176) (Refer to page 177)
P/+(P3)
PR
IM connection PM connection
U VW U VW
R/L1S/L2T/L3
P/+ P1 P/+ N/-
For the FR-A820-
03800(75K) or higher, the EMC filter (ferrite core)
Line noise filter
FR-A840-02160(75K) or (FR-BSF01, FR-BLF)
(FR-BLF) Earth
higher, and when a 75 kW (Refer to page 179)
The FR-A820-03160(55K) or higher motor is used, (Ground)
or lower and the always connect a DC Contactor
FR-A840-01800(55K) or reactor. (IP55 compatible Example)
lower are equipped with models are equipped with
the common mode choke. No-fuse switch (DSN type)
the DC reactor.)
(Refer to page 179) Connect this for an
application where a PM
motor is driven by the
load even while the
inverter power is OFF.
Do not open or close the
Brake unit (FR-BU2) contactor while the
(Refer to page 180) Induction motor inverter is running
Earth (outputting).
(Ground) (Refer to page 199)
(Refer to page 204) IPM motor (MM-CF)
(Refer to page 220)
P/+ PR
P/+
PR
Earth (Ground)
High power factor Power regeneration Resistor unit
converter common converter (FR-BR, MT-BR5)
(FR-HC2) (FR-CV) (Refer to page 183) (Refer to page 180)
(Refer to page 185) Power regeneration
converter (MT-RC)
(Refer to page 184)
: Install these options as required.
26
Standard Specifications
 Rating (Standard model)

 200 V class
00046 00077 00105 00167 00250 00340 00490 00630 00770 00930 01250 01540 01870 02330 03160 03800 04750
Model FR-A820-[ ](-E)(GF)
SLD 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90/110 132
Applicable motor LD 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110
capacity (kW)  ND (initial setting) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90
HD 0.2  0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
SLD 1.8 2.9 4 6.4 10 13 19 24 29 35 48 59 71 89 120 145 181
Rated LD 1.6 2.7 3.7 5.8 8.8 12 17 22 27 32 43 53 65 81 110 132 165
capacity (kVA)
 ND (initial setting) 1.1 1.9 3 4.2 6.7 9.1 13 18 23 29 34 44 55 67 82 110 132
HD 0.6 1.1 1.9 3 4.2 6.7 9.1 13 18 23 29 34 44 55 67 82 110
SLD 4.6 7.7 10.5 16.7 25 34 49 63 77 93 125 154 187 233 316 380 475
Rated current LD 4.2 7 9.6 15.2 23 31 45 58 70.5 85 114 140 170 212 288 346 432
(A) ND (initial setting) 3 5 8 11 17.5 24 33 46 61 76 90 115 145 175 215 288 346
HD 1.5 3 5 8 11 17.5 24 33 46 61 76 90 115 145 175 215 288
Output

Overload LD 120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C
current rating
4
 ND (initial setting) 150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C
Rated voltage  Three-phase 200 to 240 V
Brake transistor Built-in FR-BU2 (Option)
100% torque/ 100% torque/ 10% torque/
Regenerative Maximum brake torque  150% torque/3%ED  20% torque/continuous
3%ED  2%ED  continuous
braking
FR-ABR 150% torque/
100% torque/10%ED 100% torque/6%ED ― ― ― ― ― ―
(when the option is used) 10%ED
Rated input
Three-phase 200 to 240 V 50 Hz/60 Hz
AC voltage/frequency
Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 170 to 264 V 50 Hz/60 Hz
Permissible frequency fluctuation ±5%
SLD 5.3 8.9 13.2 19.7 31.3 45.1 62.8 80.6 96.7 115 151 185 221 269 ― ― ―
LD 5 8.3 12.2 18.3 28.5 41.6 58.2 74.8 90.9 106 139 178 207 255 ― ― ―
Without DC
reactor ND
3.9 6.3 10.6 14.1 22.6 33.4 44.2 60.9 80 96.3 113 150 181 216 266 ― ―
(initial setting)
Rated input HD 2.3 3.9 6.3 10.6 14.1 22.6 33.4 44.2 60.9 80 96.3 113 150 181 216 ― ―
current (A)  SLD 4.6 7.7 10.5 16.7 25 34 49 63 77 93 125 154 187 233 316 380 475
Power supply
LD 4.2 7 9.6 15.2 23 31 45 58 70.5 85 114 140 170 212 288 346 432
With DC
reactor ND
3 5 8 11 17.5 24 33 46 61 76 90 115 145 175 215 288 346
(initial setting)
HD 1.5 3 5 8 11 17.5 24 33 46 61 76 90 115 145 175 215 288
SLD 2 3.4 5 7.5 12 17 24 31 37 44 58 70 84 103 ― ― ―
LD 1.9 3.2 4.7 7 11 16 22 29 35 41 53 68 79 97 ― ― ―
Without DC
reactor ND
1.5 2.4 4 5.4 8.6 13 17 23 30 37 43 57 69 82 101 ― ―
(initial setting)
Power supply HD 0.9 1.5 2.4 4 5.4 8.6 13 17 23 30 37 43 57 69 82 ― ―
capacity (kVA)
 SLD 1.8 2.9 4 6.4 10 13 19 24 29 35 48 59 71 89 120 145 181
LD 1.6 2.7 3.7 5.8 8.8 12 17 22 27 32 43 53 65 81 110 132 165
With DC
reactor ND
1.1 1.9 3 4.2 6.7 9.1 13 18 23 29 34 44 55 67 82 110 132
(initial setting)
HD 0.6 1.1 1.9 3 4.2 6.7 9.1 13 18 23 29 34 44 55 67 82 110
Protective structure (IEC 60529)  Enclose type (IP20) Open type (IP00)
Cooling system Self-cooling Forced air cooling
Approx. mass (kg) 2.0 2.2 3.3 3.3 3.3 6.7 6.7 8.3 15 15 15 22 42 42 54 74 74
 The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi Electric 4-pole standard motor.
 The 0.2 kW motor capacity is applicable under V/F control only.
 The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 220 V for 200 V class.
 The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time for the inverter
and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
 The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However, the maximum
point of the voltage waveform at the inverter output side is the power supply voltage multiplied by about .
 Value for the built-in brake resistor
 Value for the ND rating
 The rated input current indicates a value at a rated output voltage. The impedance at the power supply side (including those of the input reactor and cables) affects the
rated input current.
 The power supply capacity is the value when at the rated output current. It varies by the impedance at the power supply side (including those of the input reactor and
cables).
 FR-DU08: IP40 (except for the PU connector section)
27
 400 V class
00023 00038 00052 00083 00126 00170 00250 00310 00380 00470 00620 00770 00930 01160 01800 02160 02600 03250 03610 04320 04810 05470 06100 06830
0.4K 0.75K 1.5K 2.2K 3.7K 5.5K 7.5K 11K 15K 18.5K 22K 30K 37K 45K 55K 75K 90K 110K 132K 160K 185K 220K 250K 280K
75/
SLD 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 110 132 160 185 220 250 280 315 355
90
Applicable motor LD 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 250 280 315
capacity (kW) 
ND (initial setting) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 250 280
HD 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 250
SLD 1.8 2.9 4 6.3 10 13 19 24 29 36 47 59 71 88 137 165 198 248 275 329 367 417 465 521
Rated LD 1.6 2.7 3.7 5.8 8.8 12 18 22 27 33 43 53 65 81 110 137 165 198 248 275 329 367 417 465
capacity
(kVA)  ND (initial setting) 1.1 1.9 3 4.6 6.9 9.1 13 18 24 29 34 43 54 66 84 110 137 165 198 248 275 329 367 417
HD 0.6 1.1 1.9 3 4.6 6.9 9.1 13 18 24 29 34 43 54 66 84 110 137 165 198 248 275 329 367
SLD 2.3 3.8 5.2 8.3 12.6 17 25 31 38 47 62 77 93 116 180 216 260 325 361 432 481 547 610 683
Rated current LD 2.1 3.5 4.8 7.6 11.5 16 23 29 35 43 57 70 85 106 144 180 216 260 325 361 432 481 547 610
(A) ND (initial setting) 1.5 2.5 4 6 9 12 17 23 31 38 44 57 71 86 110 144 180 216 260 325 361 432 481 547
HD 0.8 1.5 2.5 4 6 9 12 17 23 31 38 44 57 71 86 110 144 180 216 260 325 361 432 481
Output

current rating
 ND (initial setting) 150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C
4 Rated voltage 
Three-phase 380 to 500 V
Brake transistor Built-in FR-BU2(Option)
Maximum brake torque  100% torque/2%ED  20% torque/continuous 10% torque/continuous

Regenerative
braking FR-ABR
(when the option is 100% torque/10%ED 100% torque/6%ED ―  ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
used)
Rated input
Three-phase 380 to 500 V 50 Hz/60 Hz 
Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 323 to 550 V 50 Hz/60 Hz
Permissible frequency fluctuation ±5%
SLD 3.2 5.4 7.8 10.9 16.4 22.5 31.7 40.3 48.2 58.4 76.8 97.6 115 141 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
LD 3 4.9 7.3 10.1 15.1 22.3 31 38.2 44.9 53.9 75.1 89.7 106 130 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
Without DC ND
reactor (initial 2.3 3.7 6.2 8.3 12.3 17.4 22.5 31 40.3 48.2 56.5 75.1 91 108 134 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
setting)
Rated input HD 1.4 2.3 3.7 6.2 8.3 12.3 17.4 22.5 31 40.3 48.2 56.5 75.1 91 108 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
current (A)  SLD 2.3 3.8 5.2 8.3 12.6 17 25 31 38 47 62 77 93 116 180 216 260 325 361 432 481 547 610 683
LD 2.1 3.5 4.8 7.6 11.5 16 23 29 35 43 57 70 85 106 144 180 216 260 325 361 432 481 547 610
Power supply
With DC ND
reactor (initial 1.5 2.5 4 6 9 12 17 23 31 38 44 57 71 86 110 144 180 216 260 325 361 432 481 547
setting)
HD 0.8 1.5 2.5 4 6 9 12 17 23 31 38 44 57 71 86 110 144 180 216 260 325 361 432 481
SLD 2.5 4.1 5.9 8.3 12 17 24 31 37 44 59 74 88 107 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
LD 2.3 3.7 5.5 7.7 12 17 24 29 34 41 57 68 81 99 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
Without DC ND
reactor (initial 1.7 2.8 4.7 6.3 9.4 13 17 24 31 37 43 57 69 83 102 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
setting)
Power supply HD 1.1 1.7 2.8 4.7 6.3 9.4 13 17 24 31 37 43 57 69 83 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
capacity
(kVA)  SLD 1.8 2.9 4 6.3 10 13 19 24 29 36 47 59 71 88 137 165 198 248 275 329 367 417 465 521
LD 1.6 2.7 3.7 5.8 8.8 12 18 22 27 33 43 53 65 81 110 137 165 198 248 275 329 367 417 465
With DC ND
reactor (initial 1.1 1.9 3 4.6 6.9 9.1 13 18 24 29 34 43 54 66 84 110 137 165 198 248 275 329 367 417
setting)
HD 0.6 1.1 1.9 3 4.6 6.9 9.1 13 18 24 29 34 43 54 66 84 110 137 165 198 248 275 329 367
Protective structure (IEC 60529)  Enclose type (IP20) Open type (IP00)
Cooling system Self-cooling Forced air cooling
Approx. mass (kg) 2.8 2.8 2.8 3.3 3.3 6.7 6.7 8.3 8.3 15 15 23 41 41 43 52 55 71 78 117 117 166 166 166
 The 0.2 kW motor capacity is applicable under V/F control only.
 The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 440 V for 400 V class.
 The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time for the inverter
and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
 The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However, the maximum
point of the voltage waveform at the inverter output side is the power supply voltage multiplied by about .
 Value for the built-in brake resistor
 Value for the ND rating
 The rated input current indicates a value at a rated output voltage. The impedance at the power supply side (including those of the input reactor and cables) affects the
rated input current.
 The power supply capacity is the value when at the rated output current. It varies by the impedance at the power supply side (including those of the input reactor and
cables).
 FR-DU08: IP40 (except for the PU connector section)
 For the power voltage exceeding 480 V, set Pr.977 Input voltage mode selection. (For details, refer to ).
 The regenerative braking capability of the inverter can be improved with a commercial brake resistor. For the details, please contact your sales representative.
28
 Rating (Separated converter types)
 400 V class (Standard type)
• Inverter
07700 08660 09620 10940 12120

315K 355K 400K 450K 500K
SLD 400 450 500 560 630
Applicable motor capacity LD 355 400 450 500 560
(kW)  ND (initial setting) 315 355 400 450 500
HD 280 315 355 400 450
SLD 587 660 733 834 924
Rated capacity (kVA) LD 521 587 660 733 834
 ND (initial setting) 465 521 587 660 733
HD 417 465 521 587 660
SLD 770 866 962 1094 1212
LD 683 770 866 962 1094
Rated current (A)
ND (initial setting) 610 683 770 866 962
HD 547 610 683 770 866
4
Output

Overload current LD 120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C
rating  ND (initial setting) 150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C
Rated voltage  Three-phase 380 to 500 V
Regenerative
braking torque 
Maximum brake
(When the converter 10% torque/continuous
torque
unit (FR-CC2) is
used)
DC power supply voltage 430 to 780 VDC
Input power
Control power supply auxiliary input Single phase 380 to 500 V 50 Hz/60 Hz 
Permissible control power supply auxiliary
Frequency 5%, voltage 10%
input fluctuation
Protective structure (IEC 60529)  Open type (IP00)
Cooling system Forced air cooling
Approx. mass (kg) 163 163 243 243 243
 The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 440 V.
 The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time
for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
 The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However,
the maximum point of the voltage waveform at the inverter output side is the power supply voltage multiplied by about .
 ND rating reference value
 FR-DU08: IP40 (except for the PU connector section)
 For the power voltage exceeding 480 V, set Pr.977 Input voltage mode selection.
• Converter unit (FR-CC2)
Model FR-CC2-H[ ] 315K 355K 400K 450K 500K 560K 630K

Applicable motor capacity (kW) 315 355 400 450 500 560 630
150% 60 s, 120% 60 s, 110% 60 s,
Output
Overload current rating  200% 60 s, 250% 3 s

200% 3 s 150% 3 s 120% 3 s
Rated voltage  430 to 780 VDC 
Rated input AC voltage/frequency Three-phase 380 to 500 V 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power supply
Permissible AC voltage fluctuation Three-phase 323 to 550 V 50 Hz/60 Hz

Permissible frequency fluctuation 5%
Rated input current (A) 610 683 770 866 962 1094 1212
Power supply capacity (kVA)  465 521 587 660 733 833 924
Protective structure (IEC 60529) Open type (IP00)
DC reactor Built-in
Approx. mass (kg) 210 213 282 285 288 293 294
 The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time
for the converter unit and the inverter to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
 The converter unit output voltage varies according to the input power supply voltage and the load. The maximum point of the voltage waveform at the
converter unit output side is approximately the power supply voltage multiplied by .
 The power supply capacity is the value when at the rated output current. It varies by the impedance at the power supply side (including those of the input
reactor and cables).
 The permissible voltage imbalance ratio is 3% or less. (Imbalance ratio = (highest voltage between lines - average voltage between three lines ) / average
voltage between three lines  100)
29
 400 V class (parallel operation function compatible model)
• Inverter
Two in parallel Three in parallel

Model FR-A842-[ ]-P 400K 450K 500K 400K 450K 500K
09620 10940 12120 09620 10940 12120
LD 710 800 900 1065 1200 1350
Applicable motor capacity (kW)
ND (initial setting) 630 710 800 945 1065 1200
LD 1056 1173 1334 1584 1759 2002
Rated capacity (kVA) 
LD 1386 1539 1750 2078 2309 2626
Rated current (A) 
Output
LD 120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C

Overload current rating 
ND (initial setting) 150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C
Rated voltage  Three-phase 380 to 500 V
Regenerative braking torque  Maximum brake

10% torque/continuous
(When the converter unit is used) torque
DC power supply voltage 430 to 780 VDC

Input power
4 Control power supply auxiliary input Single phase 380 to 500 V 50/60 Hz 
Permissible control power supply auxiliary input fluctuation Frequency 5%, voltage 10%
Protective structure (IEC 60529)  Open type (IP00)

Approx. mass (kg)  486 486 486 729 729 729
 The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 440 V.
 Total output current of the inverters operated in parallel.
 The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time
for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
 The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However,
the maximum point of the voltage waveform at the inverter output side is the power supply voltage multiplied by about .
 ND rating reference value.
 For the power voltage exceeding 480 V, set Pr.977 Input voltage mode selection.
 FR-DU08: IP40 (except for the PU connector section)
 Total mass of the inverters operated in parallel.
• Converter unit (FR-CC2)
Two in parallel Three in parallel

Model FR-CC2-H[]-P
400K 450K 500K 560K 400K 450K 500K 560K
Applicable motor capacity (kW) 630 710 800 900 945 1065 1200 1350
Overload current rating  150% 60 s, 200% 3 s
Output
Rated voltage  430 to 780 VDC 

Rated input AC voltage/frequency Three-phase 380 to 500 V 50/60 Hz
Power supply
Permissible AC voltage fluctuation Three-phase 323 to 550 V 50/60 Hz

Permissible frequency fluctuation 5%
Rated input current (A)  1232 1386 1539 1750 1848 2078 2309 2626
Power supply capacity (kVA)  939 1056 1173 1334 1409 1584 1759 2002
Protective structure (IEC 60529) Open type (IP00)
DC reactor Built-in
Approx. mass (kg)  564 570 576 586 846 855 864 879
 The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time
for the converter unit and the inverter to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
 The converter unit output voltage varies according to the input power supply voltage and the load. The maximum point of the voltage waveform at the
converter unit output side is approximately the power supply voltage multiplied by .
 The permissible voltage imbalance ratio is 3% or less. (Imbalance ratio = (highest voltage between lines - average voltage between three lines ) / average
voltage between three lines  100)
 The input current is the total current of the master and slave converter units during the parallel operation.
 The power supply capacity is the value when at the rated output current. It varies by the impedance at the power supply side (including those of the input
reactor and cables).
 The mass is the total mass of the master and slave converter units during the parallel operation.
30
 Rating (IP55 compatible model)
 400 V class
00023 00038 00052 00083 00126 00170 00250 00310 00380 00470 00620 00770 00930 01160 01800 02160 02600 03250 03610
Model FR-A846-[ ](-E)
0.4K 0.75K 1.5K 2.2K 3.7K 5.5K 7.5K 11K 15K 18.5K 22K 30K 37K 45K 55K 75K 90K 110K 132K
Applicable LD 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160
motor capacity ND
(kW) 
0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132
(initial setting)
Rated LD 1.6 2.7 3.7 5.8 8.8 12 18 22 27 33 43 53 65 81 110 137 165 198 248
capacity ND
(kVA) 
1.1 1.9 3 4.6 6.9 9.1 13 18 24 29 34 43 54 66 84 110 137 165 198
(initial setting)
LD 2.1 3.5 4.8 7.6 11.5 16 23 29 35 43 57 70 85 106 144 180 216 260 325
Rated
ND
current (A) 1.5 2.5 4 6 9 12 17 23 31 38 44 57 71 86 110 144 180 216 260
(initial setting)
Output

current ND
rating 
150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 40°C
(initial setting)
Rated voltage 
Maximum
Three-phase 380 to 500 V 4
Regenerative
brake torque 10% torque/continuous
braking

Rated input
Three-phase 380 to 500 V 50 Hz/60 Hz 
Permissible AC voltage
323 to 550 V 50 Hz/60 Hz
fluctuation
Permissible frequency
Power supply
±5%
fluctuation
LD 2.1 3.5 4.8 7.6 11.5 16 23 29 35 43 57 70 85 106 144 180 216 260 325
Rated input
ND
current (A)  1.5 2.5 4 6 9 12 17 23 31 38 44 57 71 86 110 144 180 216 260
(initial setting)
Power
LD 1.6 2.7 3.7 5.8 9 12 18 22 27 33 43 53 65 81 110 137 165 198 248
supply
capacity ND
1.1 1.9 3 4.6 6.9 9 13 18 24 29 34 43 54 66 102 110 137 165 198
(kVA)  (initial setting)
Protective IEC 60529 Dust- and water-proof type (IP55) 
structure UL50 UL Type12 
Cooling system Self cooling + internal fan Forced-air-cooling + internal fan
DC reactor Built-in
Approx. mass (kg) 15 15 15 15 16 17 26 26 27 27 59 60 63 64 147 150 153 189 193
 The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 440 V.
 The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty,
allow time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
 The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range.
However, the maximum point of the voltage waveform at the inverter output side is the power supply voltage multiplied by about .
 Value for the ND rating.
 The rated input current indicates a value at a rated output voltage. The impedance at the power supply side (including those of the input reactor
and cables) affects the rated input current.
 The power supply capacity is the value when at the rated output current. It varies by the impedance at the power supply side (including those of
the input reactor and cables).
 For the power voltage exceeding 480 V, set Pr.977 Input voltage mode selection.
 UL Type 12 Enclosure-Suitable for Installation in a Compartment Handling Conditioned Air (Plenum)
 For compliance with IP55, remove the protective bushes and install the recommended cable glands.
31
Common specifications (Standard type)
Soft-PWM control, high carrier frequency PWM control (selectable among V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector
Control method control, Real sensorless vector control, Optimum excitation control), vector control, and PM sensorless vector control
0.2 to 590 Hz (The upper-limit frequency is 400 Hz under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector
Output frequency range control, vector control, and PM sensorless vector control.)
0.015 Hz/60 Hz (0 to 10 V/12 bits for terminals 2 and 4)
Frequency Analog input 0.03 Hz/60 Hz (0 to 5 V/11 bits or 0 to 20 mA/approx. 11 bits for terminals 2 and 4, 0 to ±10 V/12 bits for terminal 1)
setting 0.06 Hz/60 Hz (0 to ±5 V/11 bits for terminal 1)
resolution
Digital input 0.01 Hz
Frequency Analog input
Control specifications
Within ±0.2% of the max. output frequency (25°C ± 10°C)

accuracy Digital input Within 0.01% of the set output frequency
Voltage/frequency Base frequency can be set from 0 to 590 Hz. Constant-torque/variable-torque pattern or adjustable 5 points V/F can be
characteristics selected.
SLD Rating:120% 0.3 Hz, LD Rating:150% 0.3 Hz, ND Rating:200% 0.3 Hz, HD Rating:250% 0.3 Hz
Starting torque  (Real sensorless vector control, vector control)
Torque boost Manual torque boost
Acceleration/deceleration 0 to 3600 s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually), linear or S-pattern acceleration/deceleration mode,
time setting backlash countermeasures acceleration/deceleration can be selected.
DC injection brake
Operation frequency (0 to 120 Hz), operation time (0 to 10 s), operation voltage (0 to 30%) variable
(induction motor)
4 Stall prevention Activation range of stall prevention operation (SLD rating: 0 to 120%, LD rating: 0 to 150%, ND rating: 0 to 220%,
HD rating: 0 to 280%). Whether to use the stall prevention or not can be selected. (V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux
operation level vector control)
Torque limit value can be set (0 to 400% variable). (Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector
Torque limit level
control)
Terminals 2 and 4: 0 to 10 V, 0 to 5 V, 4 to 20 mA (0 to 20 mA) are available.
Frequency Analog input Terminal 1: -10 to +10 V, -5 to +5 V are available.
setting
signal Input using the setting dial of the operation panel or parameter unit
Digital input Four-digit BCD or 16-bit binary (when used with option FR-A8AX)
Start signal Forward and reverse rotation or start signal automatic self-holding input (3-wire input) can be selected.
Low-speed operation command, Middle-speed operation command, High-speed operation command,
Second function selection, Terminal 4 input selection, Jog operation selection, Selection of automatic restart after
Input signals
instantaneous power failure, flying start, Output stop, Start self-holding selection, Forward rotation command, Reverse
(twelve terminals) rotation command, Inverter reset
Operation specifications
The input signal can be changed using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).
Pulse train input 100 kpps
Maximum and minimum frequency settings, multi-speed operation, acceleration/deceleration pattern, thermal protection, DC
injection brake, starting frequency, JOG operation, output stop (MRS), stall prevention, regeneration avoidance, increased
magnetic excitation deceleration, DC feeding, frequency jump, rotation display, automatic restart after instantaneous power
failure, electronic bypass sequence, remote setting, automatic acceleration/deceleration, retry function, carrier frequency
selection, fast-response current limit, forward/reverse rotation prevention, operation mode selection, slip compensation,
Operational functions droop control, load torque high-speed frequency control, speed smoothing control, traverse, auto tuning, applied motor
selection, gain tuning, RS-485 communication, Ethernet communication, PID control, PID pre-charge function, easy
dancer control, cooling fan operation selection, stop selection (deceleration stop/coasting), power-failure deceleration stop
function, stop-on-contact control, PLC function, life diagnosis, maintenance timer, current average monitor, multiple rating,
orientation control, speed control, torque control, position control, pre-excitation, torque limit, test run, 24 V power supply
input for control circuit, safety stop function, anti-sway control
Open collector output Inverter running, Up to frequency, Instantaneous power failure/undervoltage, Overload warning,
Output signal
(five terminals) Output frequency detection, Fault

Relay output The output signal can be changed using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection).
(two terminals) Fault codes of the inverter can be output (4 bits) from the open collector.
Pulse train output
50 kpps
(FM type)
Pulse train output Max. 2.4 kHz: one terminal (output frequency)
(FM type) The monitored item can be changed using Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selection.
For meter
Current output Max. 20 mADC: one terminal (output frequency)

(CA type) The monitored item can be changed using Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selection.
Indication
Max. 10 VDC: one terminal (output frequency)

Voltage output The monitored item can be changed using Pr.158 AM terminal function selection.
Operating Output frequency, Output current, Output voltage, Frequency setting value
Operation status The monitored item can be changed using Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selection.
panel
(FR-DU08) A fault record is displayed when a fault occurs. Past 8 fault records and the conditions immediately before the fault (output
Fault record voltage/current/frequency/cumulative energization time/year/month/date/time) are saved.
Overcurrent trip during acceleration, Overcurrent trip during constant speed, Overcurrent trip during deceleration or stop,
Regenerative overvoltage trip during acceleration, Regenerative overvoltage trip during constant speed, Regenerative
overvoltage trip during deceleration or stop, Inverter overload trip, Motor overload trip, Heatsink overheat, Instantaneous
power failure, Undervoltage, Input phase loss, Stall prevention stop, Loss of synchronism detection, Upper limit fault
detection, Lower limit fault detection, Brake transistor alarm detection, Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent, Output
Protective short circuit, Output phase loss, External thermal relay operation, PTC thermistor operation, Option fault, Communication
function option fault, Parameter storage device fault, PU disconnection, Retry count excess, CPU fault, Operation panel power
supply short circuit/RS-485 terminals power supply short circuit, 24 VDC power fault, Abnormal output current detection,
Protective/ Inrush current limit circuit fault, Communication fault, Analog input fault, USB communication fault, Safety circuit fault,
warning Overspeed occurrence, Speed deviation excess detection, Signal loss detection, Excessive position fault, Brake
function sequence fault, Encoder phase fault, 4 mA input fault, Pre-charge fault, PID signal fault, Opposite rotation
deceleration fault, Internal circuit fault, Abnormal internal temperature, Magnetic pole position unknown
Fan alarm, Stall prevention (overcurrent), Stall prevention (overvoltage), Regenerative brake pre-alarm, Electronic
thermal relay function pre-alarm, PU stop, Speed limit indication, Parameter copy, Safety stop, Maintenance signal
Warning output, USB host error, Home position return setting error, Home position return uncompleted, Home position return
function parameter setting error, Operation panel lock, Password locked, Parameter write error, Copy operation error, 24 V
external power supply operation, Internal fan alarm, Continuous operation during communication fault, Load fault
warning, Ethernet communication fault
32
Surrounding air -10°C to +50°C (0°C to +50°C for the FR-A800-GF) (non-freezing) (LD, ND, HD ratings)
temperature -10°C to +40°C (0°C to +40°C for the FR-A800-GF) (non-freezing) (SLD rating, IP55 compatible model)
Environment
95% RH or less (non-condensing) (With circuit board coating (conforming to IEC60721-3-3 3C2/3S2), IP55 compatible
Surrounding air humidity model)
90% RH or less (non-condensing) (Without circuit board coating)
Storage temperature  -20°C to +65°C
Atmosphere Indoors (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt, etc.)
Altitude/vibration Maximum 1000 m , 5.9 m/s2  or less at 10 to 55 Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)
 Available only when a vector control compatible option is installed. (The protective function may or may not be available depending on the type of the
connected communication option.)
 For PM sensorless vector control, refer to page 224.
 In the initial setting of the FR-A820-00340(5.5K) or higher and the FR-A840-00170(5.5K) or higher, it is limited to 150% by the torque limit level.
 Enabled only for standard models and IP55 compatible models.
 This protective function is not available in the initial status.
 Available for the standard model only.
 Available for the IP55 compatible model only.
 Temperature applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.
 For the installation at an altitude above 1,000 m up to 2,500 m, derate the rated current 3% per 500 m.
 2.9 m/s2 or less for the FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher.
 Available for the FR-A800-E only.
 PLC function specifications 4
Item A800 PLC function specifications
Control method Repeated operation (by stored program)
I/O control mode Refresh
Relay symbolic language (ladder)
Programming language
Function block
Sequence instructions 25
No. of
Basic instructions 84
instructions
Application instructions 37
Processing speed Sequence instructions 1.9 μs to 12 μs/step
128 (input: 64 points, output: 64 points)
19 points built-in (input: 12 points, output: 7 points)
Number of I/O device points FR-A8AX (input: 16 points)
FR-A8AY (output: 7 points)
FR-A8AR (output: 3 points)
3 input points built-in (Terminals 1, 2, and 4),
FR-A8AZ: 1 input point (Terminal 6)
Number of analog I/O points 2 output points built-in (Terminals F/C(FM/CA) and AM),
FR-A8AY: 2 output points (Terminals AM0 and AM1),
FR-A8AZ: 1 output point (Terminal DA1)
Input Terminal JOG maximum input pulse: 100k pulses/s 
Pulse train I/O
Output Terminal FM maximum output pulse: 50k pulses/s 
Watchdog timer 10 to 2000 ms
6K steps (24k bytes) (0 to 6144 steps can be set)
Program capacity
Contained in one program
Internal relay (M) 128 (M0 to M127)
Latch relay (L) Not used (Can be set with parameters but will not latch)
Number of points 16 (T0 to T15)
Timer (T) 100 ms timer: 0.1 to 3276.7 s can be set
Specifications
10 ms timer: 0.01 to 327.67 s can be set
Number of points 0 (up to 16 by parameter assignment)
Retentive
timer (ST) 100 ms retentive timer: 0.1 to 3276.7 s can be set
Device Specifications
10 ms retentive timer: 0.01 to 327.67 s can be set
Number of points 16 (C0 to C15)
Counter (C) Normal counter: Setting range 1 to 32767
Specifications
Interrupt program counter: Not used
Data register (D) 256 (D0 to D255)
Special relay (SM) 2048 (SM0 to SM2047) with limited functions
Special register (SD) 2048 (SD0 to SD2047) with limited functions
 The scan time is approximately 40 ms for 1K steps as inverter control is also performed in actual operations.
 The signals same as the ones assigned to the inverter I/O terminals are used.
One point is always required for a sequence start (RUN/STOP).
 Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selection must be set.
 There is no device latch function for power failures.
Use the Pr.1150 to Pr.1199 PLC function user parameters 1 to 50 (D206 to D255) to store device values in the EEPROM.
NOTE
• There is no buffer memory.
33
Outline Dimension Drawings
 Standard model
FR-A820-00046(0.4K), FR-A820-00077(0.75K)(-E)(GF)
(7.5)
2-φ6 hole
245
260

7.5
(1.5)
6 5
5
7.5 95 D1
110 D
Inverter model D D1
FR-A820-00046(0.4K) 110 20
FR-A820-00077(0.75K) 125 35
 The LED display cover attached to the FR-A800-GF in this position
has an additional 2.1 mm depth.
(Unit: mm)
FR-A820-00105(1.5K), 00167(2.2K), 00250(3.7K)(-E)(GF)

FR-A840-00023(0.4K), 00038(0.75K), 00052(1.5K), 00083(2.2K), 00126(3.7K)(-E)(GF)
7.5
2-φ6 hole

FAN
245
260

(7.5)
(1.5)
6 5
12.5 125 140
150
 FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to 00052(1.5K) are
not provided with a cooling fan.
 The LED display cover attached to the FR-
A800-GF in this position has an additional
2.1 mm depth.
45.5
(Unit: mm)
34
FR-A820-00340(5.5K), 00490(7.5K), 00630(11K)(-E)(GF)
FR-A840-00170(5.5K), 00250(7.5K), 00310(11K), 00380(15K)(-E)(GF)
(7.5)
2-φ6 hole
FAN
H1
H

2.3
7.5
H2
6
12.5 195
220 D
Inverter model
FR-A820-00340(5.5K), 00490(7.5K)
H H1 H2 D D1
5
260 245 1.5 170 84
FR-A840-00170(5.5K), 00250(7.5K)

FR-A820-00630(11K)
300 285 3 190 101.5
FR-A840-00310(11K), 00380(15K)
 The LED display cover attached to the FR-A800-GF in this position has an additional 2.1 mm
D1
depth.
(Unit: mm)
FR-A820-00770(15K), 00930(18.5K), 01250(22K)(-E)(GF)

FR-A840-00470(18.5K), 00620(22K)(-E)(GF)
2-φ10 hole
(10)
FAN

380
400
2.3
10
10
(1.5)
10 230
250 190
 The LED display cover attached to

the FR-A800-GF in this position has
an additional 2.1 mm depth.
93.3
(Unit: mm)
35
FR-A820-01540(30K)(-E)(GF)
FR-A840-00770(30K)(-E)(GF)
(10)
2-φ10 hole 4-φ20 hole for hanging 17
(15)
520
530
550 
5  The LED display cover attached to

the FR-A800-GF in this position has
15
10 3.2 an additional 2.1 mm depth.
10
270 195
325
(Unit: mm)
FR-A820-01870(37K), 02330(45K), 03160(55K), 03800(75K), 04750(90K)(-E)(GF)

FR-A840-00930(37K), 01160(45K), 01800(55K), 02160(75K), 02600(90K), 03250(110K), 03610(132K)(-E)(GF)
2-φ12 hole 4-φd hole D1
(18)
(15)
FAN
H2

H1
H
12 3.2
W1
10
18
W D
Inverter model W W1 H H1 H2 d D D1
FR-A820-01870(37K), 02330(45K)
435 380 550 525 514 25 250 24
FR-A840-00930(37K), 01160(45K), 01800(55K)
FR-A820-03160(55K) 465 410 700 675 664 25 250 22
FR-A820-03800(75K), 04750(90K) 465 400 740 715 704 24 360 22
FR-A840-02160(75K), 02600(90K) 465 400 620 595 584 24 300 22
FR-A840-03250(110K), 03610(132K) 465 400 740 715 704 25 360 22
 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, or whenever a 75 kW or higher motor is used, always connect a DC
reactor (FR-HEL), which is available as an option.
 The LED display cover attached to the FR-A800-GF in this position has an additional 2.1 mm depth.
(Unit: mm)
36
FR-A840-04320(160K), 04810(185K)(-E)(GF)
22
(15)
(13)
3-φ12 hole 4-φ16 hole
FAN

1010
984
985

12 3.2
200 200
10
380
13
498
Always connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL), which is available as an option.

 The LED display cover attached to the FR-A800-GF in this position has an additional 2.1 mm depth. (Unit: mm)
FR-A840-05470(220K), 06100(250K), 06830(280K)(-E)(GF)
22
(13)
3-φ12 hole
(13)
4-φ16 hole
FAN

1010
984
984
12 3.2
13
13
300 300
680 380
Always connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL), which is available as an option.

 The LED display cover attached to the FR-A800-GF in this position has an additional 2.1 mm depth. (Unit: mm)
37
 Separated converter type
 Inverter
FR-A842-07700(315K), 08660(355K)(-E)(GF)
185 23
(17)
(15)
1300
1330
1296

5
12 4.5 4.5
15
17
70 200 200 (70) 185

540 440
 The LED display cover attached to the FR-A800-GF in this position has an additional 2.1 mm depth.
(Unit: mm)
FR-A842-09620(400K), 10940(450K), 12120(500K)(-E)(GF)(-P)
185 23
(15)

(17)
1550
1580
1546

12 4.5 4.5
17
15
100 240 240 (100) 185

680 440
 The LED display cover attached to the FR-A800-GF in this position has an additional 2.1 mm depth.
(Unit: mm)
38
 Converter unit
Equipped with a DC reactor.
FR-CC2-H315K, H355K
185 23
(15)
(17)
∗1
∗1
1296
1300
1330

12 4.5 4.5
15
17
100 200 200 (100) 185
600 440
(Unit: mm)
FR-CC2-H400K(-P), H450K(-P), H500K(-P), H560K(-P), H630K
3-φ12 hole 185 23

(15)
8-φ25 hole
(17)
∗1
∗1
1546
1550
1580
12 4.5 4.5
15
17
100 200 200 (100) 185

600 440
(Unit: mm)
 Do not remove the cover on the side of the converter unit.
39
 IP55 compatible model
Equipped with a DC reactor.
FR-A846-00023(0.4K), 00038(0.75K), 00052(1.5K), 00083(2.2K), 00126(3.7K), 00170(5.5K)(-E)

2-φ8 hole
(7)
508
520
5
8 2.3
18.5 201 (18.5) 271
238
5
(Unit: mm)
FR-A846-00250(7.5K), 00310(11K), 00380(15K), 00470(18.5K)(-E)
23
(20)

(9)
FAN
632.5
650
610
8.5
10
20
18.5 201 (18.5) 2.3

238 285
(Unit: mm)
40
FR-A846-00620(22K), 00770(30K), 00930(37K), 01160(45K)(-E)
2-φ12 hole 4-φ25 hole 24
(10)
(18)
FAN
790
770
754
12 10
18
2.3
22.5 300 (22.5) 357
345
5

(Unit: mm)
FR-A846-01800(55K), 02160(75K), 02600(90K), 03250(110K), 03610(132K)(-E)
24
(23)
(H2)
FAN
H3
H1
H
10
15
23
35 175 175 (35) 2.3

456.6
420
Inverter model H H1 H2 H3
FR-A846-01800(55K) to 02600(90K) 1360 1334 16 1314
FR-A846-03250(110K), 03610(132K) 1510 1482 18 1464
(Unit: mm)
41
 Operation panel (FR-DU08, FR-LU08)
<Outline drawing> <Panel cutting dimension drawing>
Panel 120 or more∗1

3.2max 21 Operation 27.8
panel Operation panel connection
3
cable (FR-CB2[ ] ) (option)

72.5
78.5
20
72.5
5
22
Air-bleeding hole
2-M3 screw 66 Operation panel connection connector

3
(FR-ADP) (option)
3 66 3 16
∗1 Denotes the space required to connect an optional
72 17
operation panel connection cable (FR-CB2[ ]). When
using another cable, leave the space required for the
cable specification. (Unit: mm)
5
42
 Protruding the heatsink through the panel
When encasing the inverter or the converter unit in an enclosure, the heat generated in the enclosure can be greatly reduced by protruding
the heatsink of the inverter or the converter unit. When installing the inverter in a compact enclosure, etc., this installation method is
recommended. For the FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher, a heatsink can be protruded outside the enclosure without using an attachment.
 When using a panel through attachment (FR-A8CN)
For the FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to FR-A820-04750(90K) and FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to FR-A840-03610(132K), a heatsink can be protruded
outside the enclosure using a panel through attachment (FR-A8CN). Refer to the Instruction Manual of the panel through attachment (FR-
A8CN) for details.
• Drawing after attachment installation (when used with the FR-A8CN)
W D D1
Attachment
D2 Type W H H1 H2 H3 D D1 D2
Panel FR-A8CN01 150 389.5 260 111.5 18 97 48.4 24.3
FR-A8CN02 245 408.5 260 116.5 32 86 89.4 21.3
H2
FR-A8CN03 245 448.5 300 116.5 32 89 106.4 21.3

FR-A8CN04 280 554 400 113.5 32 96.7 102.4 40.6
FR-A8CN05 357 654 480 130 44 130.8 64.2 105
FR-A8CN06 478.2 650 465 145 40 96 154 55
H
(H1)
FR-A8CN07 510.2 805 610 150 45 130 120 105

FR-A8CN08 510.2 845 650 150 45 176.5 183.5 40
FR-A8CN09 510.2 725 530 150 45 152.3 147.7 65
(Unit: mm)
5
H3
Attachment Panel
• Enclosure cut dimensions (when used with the FR-A8CN)

FR-A8CN01 FR-A8CN02 FR-A8CN03 FR-A8CN04
112 175 175 200
90
40 102
100
102
102
90
90
90
244
365
367
407
517
265
265
305
280
280
320
335
440
6-M5 screw 6-M5 screw 6-M5 screw 6-M8 screw
12.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
40
136 195 195 230

145 (Unit: mm) 212 (Unit: mm) 212 (Unit: mm) 260 (Unit: mm)
FR-A8CN05 FR-A8CN06 FR-A8CN07

290 410 470
265 380 440

108
105
85
95
611
615
770
590
740
516
510
662
540
6-M8 screw 4-M10 screw 4-M10 screw

12
15
13
270 380 410

330 (Unit: mm) 440 477 (Unit: mm)
(Unit: mm)
FR-A8CN08 FR-A8CN09
470 470
440 440
108
108
690
810
780
660
702
582
4-M10 screw 4-M10 screw

13
13
400 400
477 (Unit: mm) 477 (Unit: mm)
For a compatibility table between the attachment and the inverter, refer to page 175.
43
 Heatsink protrusion through the panel for the FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher
• Enclosure cutting
Cut an enclosure according to the capacity of the inverter or the converter unit.
FR-A840-04320(160K) FR-A840-05470(220K) FR-A842-07700(315K) FR-A842-09620(400K)

FR-A840-04810(185K) FR-A840-06100(250K) FR-A842-08660(355K) FR-A842-10940(450K)
FR-A840-06830(280K) FR-A842-12120(500K)
6-M10 screw 6-M10 screw 6-M10 screw 6-M10 screw

520 660
484 662
200 200 240 240
300 300
15
200 200
15
15
13
954
Hole
984
954
985
Hole
Hole
1300
1270
1550
1520
Hole
5
18
15
15
15
FR-CC2-H315K FR-CC2-H400K
FR-CC2-H355K FR-CC2-H450K
FR-CC2-H500K
FR-CC2-H560K
FR-CC2-H630K
6-M10 screw 6-M10 screw
580 580
200 200
15
200 200
15
Hole
1300
1270
1550
1520
Hole
15
(Unit: mm)
15
44
• Shift and removal of a rear side installation frame
For the FR-A840-04320(160K) to FR-A840-06830(280K) For the FR-A842-07700(315K) to FR-A842-12120(500K),
FR-CC2-H315K to FR-CC2-H630K
One installation frame is attached to each of the upper and lower parts of Two installation frames are attached to each of the upper and
the inverter. Change the position of the rear side installation frame on the lower parts of the inverter or the converter unit. Remove the rear
upper and lower sides of the inverter to the front side as shown below. side installation frame on the upper and lower sides of the
When changing the installation frames, make sure that the installation inverter or the converter unit as shown below.
orientation is correct.
Removal
Shift
Upper Upper installation
installation frame (rear side)
frame
5
Lower
Lower installation

installation
Shift frame frame (rear side)
Removal
• Installation of the inverter or the converter unit

Push the inverter heatsink portion outside the enclosure and fix the enclosure and the inverter or the converter unit with upper and lower
installation frame.
Enclosure
Inside the
enclosure Exhausted air
There are finger guards behind the enclosure.

Therefore, the thickness of the panel should be
Inverter/ less than 10 mm (∗1) and also do not place
Converter unit anything around finger guards to avoid contact
with the finger guards.
Enclosure
Installation
frame Finger guard
10 mm∗1 140 mm
6 mm
Cooling Dimension of
wind the outside of
185 mm the enclosure
NOTE
• Having a cooling fan, the cooling section which comes out of the enclosure cannot be used in the environment of water drops, oil, mist, dust,
etc.
• Be careful not to drop screws, dust etc. into the inverter or the converter unit and the cooling fan section.
• The FR-A7CN panel through attachment cannot be installed on the FR-A800 series.
45
Terminal Connection Diagram
 Standard models and IP55 compatible models

 FM type
FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K),
FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K)
DC reactor Brake resistor∗8
(FR-HEL)∗1
DC reactor Brake resistor Brake unit
(FR-HEL)∗1 (FR-ABR)∗7∗8 (Option)
Sink logic Brake unit R
R (Option) Jumper
Main circuit terminal Earth
(Ground) ∗9
Control circuit terminal Jumper Jumper
Earth P1 P/+ P3 PR N/-
(Ground)
Inrush
P1 P/+ PX PR N/- current
limit circuit
MCCB MC R
R/L1 Inrush current U
Three-phase V Motor
S/L2 limit circuit M
AC power W
T/L3
supply ON ∗14
EMC filter Earth (Ground)
Jumper R1/L11 ON/OFF
∗2 S1/L21 OFF connecter
Earth
(Ground)
Main circuit
Control input signals Control circuit Relay output∗10
(No voltage input allowed)∗3
STF C1
Forward rotation start
STR B1
Reverse rotation start Relay output 1
A1 (Fault output)
STP(STOP)
Start self-holding selection
RH C2
High speed
RM B2
Multi-speed Middle speed Relay output 2
selection A2
RL
6
Low speed
JOG ∗4 RUN Open collector output∗11
Jog operation Running
RT SU
Second function selection Up to frequency
Terminal Connection Diagram, Terminal Specification Explanation
MRS IPF
Output stop Instantaneous
RES OL power failure
Reset Overload
Terminal 4 input selection AU FU
Frequency detection
SOURCE
(Current input selection)

Selection of automatic restart CS SE
SINK
Open collector output common

after instantaneous
power failure Sink/source common
SD
Contact input common 24V
24VDC power supply PC

(Common for external power supply transistor)
24V external power +24 PU
supply input
SD connector
Common terminal ∗5 Voltage/current
input switch
Frequency setting signals (Analog) 10E(+10V) ON F/C + - Indicator
OFF USB A (FM) (Frequency meter, etc.)
10(+5V) 2 4 connector ∗12
3 Calibration Moving-coil type
Frequency setting DC0 to 5V Initial value
2 SD resistor ∗13 1mA full-scale
potentiometer 2 DC0 to 10V selectable
∗5 USB
1/2W1kΩ∗6 DC0 to 20mA
1 5 mini B
(Analog common) AM (+)
connector Analog signal output
5 (0 to ±10VDC)
DC0 to ±10V Initial value (-)
Auxiliary (+) 1 DC0 to ±5V selectable
(-) ∗5
input RS-485 terminals
TXD+
DC4 to 20mA Initial value
Terminal 4 input (+) 4 Data
DC0 to 5V selectable ∗5 TXD-
(Current input) (-) DC0 to 10V transmission
RXD+
Connector for plug-in option connection Connector 1 Connector 2 Data
RXD-
reception
Connector 3 GND
(SG)
GND
Safety stop signal Shorting 24V
wire PC Terminating
VCC 5V
resistor
S1 (Permissible load current 100mA)
Safety stop input (Channel 1)
Safety stop input (Channel 2) S2 Output shutoff So (SO)

circuit Safety monitor output
SIC
Safety stop input common SOC
SD Safety monitor output common
 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, and when a 75 kW or higher motor is used, always connect a DC reactor (FR-
HEL), which is available as an option. (To select a DC reactor, refer to page 27, page 204, and select one according to the applicable motor capacity.)
When connecting a DC reactor, if a jumper is installed across terminals P1 and P/+, remove the jumper before installing the DC reactor.
The IP55 compatible model has a built-in DC reactor. (The jumper is not installed for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or
higher.)
 When using separate power supply for the control circuit, remove the jumper between R1/L11 and S1/L21. IP55 compatible models do not have terminals
R1/L11, S1/L21, and jumpers.
 The function of these terminals can be changed with the input terminal assignment (Pr.178 to Pr.189). (Refer to page 136.)
 Terminal JOG is also used as a pulse train input terminal. Use Pr.291 to choose JOG or pulse.
 Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input specification switchover (Pr.73, Pr.267). To input a voltage, set the voltage/current input
switch OFF. To input a current, set the voltage/current input switch ON. (Refer to page 123.)
 It is recommended to use 2 W 1 k when the frequency setting signal is changed frequently.
 If connecting a brake resistor, remove the jumper between PR and PX (FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 00490(7.5K), FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to 00250(7.5K)).
 Connect a brake resistor across terminals P/+ (P3) and PR. (Terminal PR is equipped in FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 01250(22K), FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to
01800(55K).) Install a thermal relay to prevent overheating and damage of discharging resistors.
 Do not connect the DC power supply (under DC feeding mode) to terminal P3.
 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.195, Pr.196). (Refer to page 137.)
 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.190 to Pr.194). (Refer to page 137.)
 Terminal F/C (FM) can be used to output pulse trains as open collector output by setting Pr.291.
 Not required when calibrating the scale with the operation panel.
 Do not change the initially set ON (enabled) position of the EMC filter ON/OFF connector in the case of the inverter with a built-in C2 filter (IP55 compatible
model). The Class C2 compatibility condition is not satisfied with the EMC filter OFF. The FR-A846-00250(7.5K)-C2 to FR-A846-00470(18.5K)-C2 are not
provided with the EMC filter ON/OFF connector. The EMC filter is always ON.
46
 CA type
FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K),
FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K)
(FR-HEL)∗1
Sourse logic Brake unit R
R (Option) Jumper
(Ground) ∗9
(Ground)
Inrush
limit circuit
MCCB MC R
Three-phase V Motor
AC power W
T/L3 ∗12
supply ON
EMC filter Earth (Ground)
Earth
(Ground)
Main circuit
(No voltage input allowed)∗3
STF C1
STR B1
A1 (Fault output)
STP(STOP)
RH C2
High speed
RM B2
Multi-speed Middle speed Relay output 2
selection A2
RL
Low speed
Second function selection

MRS
RT SU
IPF
Up to frequency 6
Output stop Instantaneous

RES OL power failure
Reset Overload
Terminal 4 input selection AU FU
Frequency detection
SOURCE

Selection of automatic restart CS SE
SINK

after instantaneous power failure Sink/source common
Common for external power SD
24V
supply transistor
Contact input common PC
24VDC power supply
24V external power +24

supply input PU
Common terminal
SD ∗5 Voltage/current connector
input switch
F/C
Frequency setting signals (Analog) 10E(+10V) ON (+)
(CA) Analog current output
OFF USB A
10(+5V) 2 4 connector (-) (0 to 20mADC)
3
Frequency setting 2 DC0 to 5V Initial value
∗5 USB AM (+)
1/2W1kΩ∗6 DC0 to 20mA Analog signal output
1 5 mini B
(Analog common) (DC0 to ±10V)
connector (-)
5
DC0 to ±10V Initial value
Auxiliary (+) 1 DC0 to ±5V selectable
(-) ∗5
input RS-485 terminals
TXD+
DC4 to 20mA Initial value
Terminal 4 input (+) 4 Data
DC0 to 5V selectable ∗5 TXD-
(Current input) (-) DC0 to 10V transmission
RXD+
Connector for plug-in option connection Connector 1 Connector 2 Data
RXD-
reception
Connector 3 GND
(SG)
GND
wire PC Terminating
VCC 5V
resistor
S1 (Permissible load current 100mA)
S2 Output shutoff So (SO)
SIC
higher.)
 Do not change the initially set ON (enabled) position of the EMC filter ON/OFF connector in the case of the inverter with a built-in C2 filter (IP55 compatible
47
 Separated converter type
 FM type
Sink logic
Main circuit terminal
Brake unit
Control circuit terminal (Option)
Converter
unit
R/L1 P/+ P/+ U

V Motor
S/L2 N/- M
T/L3 N/- W
Jumper Earth (Ground)
 R1/L11
S1/L21
Earth
(Ground)
Main circuit
RDI
Control circuit
Control input signals Relay output 
(No voltage input allowed)  STF C1
OH
RES STR B1
SD STP(STOP) (Fault output)
Start self-holding selection A1
PC
RH
+24 High speed C2
Multi-speed RM
C1 Middle speed B2
selection Relay output 2
RL
B1 Low speed A2
JOG 
6
A1 Jog operation
RT RUN Open collector output 
RDB Second function selection Running
Output stop MRS X10 SU
RDA 
Up to frequency
Reset RES
RSO IPF
AU 
IPF Terminal 4 input selection OL
SOURCE
Selection of automatic restart CS Overload

FAN
SINK
after instantaneous power failure FU

Contact input common SD Frequency detection
SE 24V
SE Open collector output common
PC
24VDC power supply Sink/source common
supply input
SD Voltage/current connector
Common terminal 
input switch + - Indicator
F/C (Frequency
Frequency setting signals (Analog) 10E(+10V) ON (FM)
USB A  Calibration meter, etc.)
OFF
10(+5V) 2 4 connector SD resistor  Moving-coil type
3
Frequency setting 2 0 to 5VDC Initial value 1mA full-scale
potentiometer 2 0 to 10VDC selectable  USB
1/2W1kΩ  0 to 20mADC AM (+)
1 5 mini B Analog signal output
(Analog common) connector 5 (0 to ±10VDC)
(-)
0 to ±10VDC Initial value
Auxiliary (+) 1
input (-) 0 to ±5VDC selectable 
TXD+ RS-485 terminals
4 to 20mADC Initial value Data
Terminal 4 input (+) 4 0 to 5VDC TXD-
(Current input) (-) selectable  transmission
0 to 10VDC
RXD+
Data
Connector for plug-in option connection Connector 1 Connector 2 RXD- reception
GND
Connector 3 (SG)
GND
wire PC Terminating
VCC 5V (Permissible load
resistor current 100mA)
S1
Output shutoff
S2 circuit So (SO)
Safety stop input (Channel 2) Safety monitor output
SIC
 Terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 are connected to terminals P/+ and N/- with a jumper respectively. When using separate power supply for the control circuit,
remove the jumpers from R1/L11 and S1/L21.
 The function of these terminals can be changed with the input terminal assignment (Pr.178 to Pr.189).
 Terminal JOG is also used as the pulse train input terminal. Use Pr.291 to choose JOG or pulse.
 The X10 signal (NC contact input specification) is assigned to terminal MRS in the initial setting. Set Pr.599 = "0" to change the input specification of the
X10 signal to NO contact.
switch OFF. To input a current, set the voltage/current input switch ON. Terminals 10 and 2 are also used as a PTC input terminal. (Pr.561)
 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.195, Pr.196).
 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.190 to Pr.194).
 No function is assigned in the initial setting. Use Pr.192 for function assignment.
 Terminal FM can be used to output pulse trains as open collector output by setting Pr.291.
 Not required when calibrating the scale with the operation panel.
48
 Converter unit (FR-CC2)
 When the sink logic is selected
Sink logic
Control circuit terminal Inverter
MCCB MC DC reactor
R/L1 Inrush current P/+
Three-phase limit circuit P/+
AC power S/L2 N/-
T/L3 N/-
supply
ON ON EMC filter
R1/L11 ON/OFF
Jumper
 S1/L21 OFF OFF connecter
Earth Main circuit
(Ground)
Control input signals Control circuit Open collector output 
(No voltage input allowed)  RES
Reset Inverter operation enable
OH RDA (NO contact) MRS
External thermal relay input 
(X10)
RDB Inverter operation enable
(NC contact)
RDI
RSO Inverter reset
Contact input RES
SOURCE
IPF Instantaneous
power failure
SINK
FAN
Contact input common SD Cooling fan fault
24V
PC SE
24VDC power supply SD
Sink/source common
6
Relay output 

supply input C1
SD
Common terminal
PU B1 Relay output
connector (Fault output)
A1
USB 
mini B TXD+ RS-485 terminals
connector
TXD- Data transmission
RXD+
RXD- Data reception
GND
(SG)
GND
Connector for manufacturer setting  Connector 1 Terminating
resistor
current 100mA)
88R

88S
 For a 12-phase application

Inverter
Control circuit terminal
MCCB MC DC reactor
limit circuit P/+
S/L2 N/-
Three-phase N/-
T/L3
AC power
supply R1/L11
Jumper Power circuit for
S1/L21 control circuit
∗1
MCCB MC
R2/L12
S2/L22
T2/L32
ON ON EMC filter
ON/OFF
Earth OFF OFF connecter
(Ground)
Main circuit
 When using separate power supply for the control circuit, remove the jumpers from R1/L11 and S1/L21.
 The function of these terminals can be changed with the input terminal assignment (Pr.178, Pr.187, Pr.189).
 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.195).
 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.190 to Pr.194).
 The connector is for manufacturer setting. Do not use.
 Plug-in options cannot be used.
 For manufacturer setting. Do not use.
 To use RDA signal of the converter unit, select the NC contact input specification for the input logic of MRS signal or X10 signal of the inverter.
To use RDB signal of the converter unit, select the NO contact input specification for the input logic of MRS signal or X10 signal of the inverter.
(For changing the input logic, refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter.)
49
 FR-A800-E
 FM type
FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K),
FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K)
DC reactor Brake resistor DC reactor
(FR-HEL)∗1 (FR-ABR)∗7∗8 Brake resistor∗8
(FR-HEL)∗1
Brake unit Brake unit
Sink logic R (Option) (Option)
Main circuit terminal R
Jumper Jumper Jumper
Control circuit terminal Earth Earth
(Ground) (Ground) ∗9
P1 P/+ PX PR N/- P1 P/+ P3 PR N/-

MCCB MC R Inrush
current
R/L1 Inrush current limit circuit
Three-phase
S/L2 limit circuit
AC power U
supply T/L3 ∗15
ON V Motor
EMC filter M
R1/L11 ON/OFF W
Jumper
∗2 S1/L21 OFF connecter Earth (Ground)
Earth
(Ground)
Main circuit
Control input signals
Control circuit Relay output∗10
(No voltage input allowed)∗3 STF C1
STR B1
STP(STOP) (Fault output)
RH
High speed C2
Multi-speed RM
Middle speed B2
RL
Low speed A2
JOG ∗4
Jog operation
6
RT RUN Open collector output∗11
Second function selection Running
MRS SU
Output stop Up to frequency
RES
Reset IPF
AU Instantaneous power failure

Terminal 4 input selection
(Current input selection) OL
SOURCE

SINK
after instantaneous FU
power failure SD Frequency detection
24VDC power supply PC
Sink/source common

supply input
SD connector
Common terminal ∗5 Voltage/current + - Indicator
input switch F/C (Frequency meter, etc.)
OFF USB A ∗12 Calibration Moving-coil type
3
10(+5V) 2 4 connector SD resistor ∗13 1mA full-scale
Frequency setting
2 DC0 to 5V Initial value
potentiometer 2 DC0 to 10V
1/2W1kΩ∗6 selectable ∗5 USB AM (+)
DC0 to 20mA mini B Analog signal output
1 5
(Analog common) connector 5 (0 to ±10VDC)
(-)
Auxiliary (+) DC0 to ±10V Initial value

1 DC0 to ±5V selectable Ethernet
input (-) ∗5
connector
DC4 to 20mA Initial value ∗14
Terminal 4 input (+) 4 DC0 to 5V selectable ∗5
(Current input) (-) DC0 to 10V
Connector for plug-in option connection Connector 1 Connector 2∗14

Connector 3

wire PC
S1
Output shutoff
S2 So (SO)
Safety stop input (Channel 2) circuit
Safety monitor output
SIC
higher.)
 It is recommended to use 2 W 1 kwhen the frequency setting signal is changed frequently.
 The option connector 2 cannot be used because the Ethernet board is installed in the initial status. The Ethernet board must be removed to install a plug-in
option to the option connector 2. (However, Ethernet communication is disabled in that case.)
 Do not change the initially set ON (enabled) position of the EMC filter ON/OFF connector in the case of the inverter with a built-in C2 filter (IP55 compatible
50
 CA type
FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K),
FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K)
Brake resistor
DC reactor DC reactor
(FR-ABR)∗7∗8 Brake resistor∗8
(FR-HEL)∗1 (FR-HEL)∗1
Sourse logic Brake unit Brake unit
R (Option) (Option)
Control circuit terminal R
Jumper Jumper Jumper
Earth Earth
(Ground) (Ground) ∗9
P1 P/+ PX PR N/- P1 P/+ P3 PR N/-

R Inrush
NFB MC current
Three-phase R/L1 Inrush current limit circuit
AC power S/L2 limit circuit
T/L3 U
supply ∗13 Motor
ON V
EMC filter M
Jumper R1/L11 ON/OFF W
∗2 S1/L21 OFF connecter Earth (Ground)
Earth
(Ground) Main circuit
(No voltage input allowed)∗3 STF C1
STR B1
STP(STOP) (Fault output)
RH
High speed C2
Multi-speed RM
Middle speed B2
RL
Low speed A2
JOG ∗4
Jog operation
RUN Open collector output∗11
RT Running
SU
6
MRS Up to frequency
Output stop
RES IPF
Reset Instantaneous power failure
Terminal 4 input selection AU OL

(Current input selection) Overload
SOURCE
Selection of automatic restart CS FU

SINK
after instantaneous power failure Frequency detection

24V SE Open collector output common
supply transistor
PC Sink/source common
Contact input common
24VDC power supply

supply input PU
SD connector
Common terminal ∗5 Voltage/current
input switch F/C
(+)
Frequency setting signals (Analog) 10E(+10V) ON (CA) Analog current output
OFF USB A (0 to 20mADC)
10(+5V) 2 4 (-)
3 connector
Frequency setting DC0 to 5V Initial value
2
∗5 USB
1/2W1kΩ∗6 DC0 to 20mA AM (+)
1 5 mini B Analog signal output
(Analog common) (0 to ±10VDC)
connector 5
(-)
DC0 to ±10V Initial value
Auxiliary (+) 1 DC0 to ±5V selectable ∗5 Ethernet
input (-) connector
DC4 to 20mA Initial value ∗12
Terminal 4 input (+) 4 DC0 to 5V selectable ∗5
(Current input) (-) DC0 to 10V
Connector for plug-in option connection Connector 1 Connector 2∗12

Connector 3

wire PC
S1
Output shutoff
S2 circuit So (SO)
Safety stop input (Channel 2) Safety monitor output
SIC
higher.)
01800(55K).) Install a thermal relay to prevent overheating and damage of discharging resistors. (Refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed).)
 The option connector 2 cannot be used because the Ethernet board is installed in the initial status. The Ethernet board must be removed to install a plug-in
option to the option connector 2. (However, Ethernet communication is disabled in that case.)
 Do not change the initially set ON (enabled) position of the EMC filter ON/OFF connector in the case of the inverter with a built-in C2 filter (IP55 compatible
51
 FR-A800-GF
 FM type
FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K),
FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K)
(FR-HEL)∗1
Sink logic Brake unit R
R (Option) Jumper
(Ground) ∗9
(Ground)
Inrush
limit circuit
MCCB MC R
Three-phase V Motor
AC power W
T/L3
supply ON EMC filter Earth (Ground)
Earth
(Ground)
Main circuit
(No voltage input allowed)∗3 C1
STF
B1 Relay output 1
STR
Reverse rotation start (Fault output)
A1
STP(STOP)
C2
RH
High speed
B2
RM Relay output 2
Multi-speed Middle speed A2
6
selection
RL
Low speed
SU
RT Up to frequency
IPF
MRS Instantaneous
Output stop
OL power failure
RES Overload
Reset
FU
Terminal 4 input selection AU Frequency detection
SOURCE

Selection of automatic restart CS SE Open collector output common
SINK
after instantaneous Sink/source common

power failure SD
PORT 1 CC-Link IE Field Network
24VDC power supply PC communication connector
PORT 2
24V external power +24 Connector 2 Connector for plug-in option
supply input connection
SD
Common terminal ∗5 Voltage/current Connector 3
input switch
Frequency setting signals (Analog) 10E(+10V) ON
OFF F/C + - Indicator
10(+5V) 2 4 (FM) (Frequency meter, etc.)
3 ∗12
Frequency setting 2 DC0 to 5V Initial value Calibration Moving-coil type
∗5 SD resistor ∗13 1mA full-scale
1 5
(Analog common)
AM (+) Analog signal output
DC0 to ±10V Initial value 5 (0 to ±10VDC)
Auxiliary (+) 1 DC0 to ±5V selectable (-)
(-) ∗5
input
DC4 to 20mA Initial value TXD+ RS-485 terminals
Terminal 4 input (+) 4 DC0 to 5V selectable ∗5 Data
(Current input) (-) DC0 to 10V TXD-
transmission
PU connector RXD+
Data
USB A connector RXD-
reception
GND
USB mini B connector (SG)
GND
Safety stop signal 24V
Shorting wire PC Terminating
VCC 5V
S1 resistor
Safety stop input (Channel 1) (Permissible load current 100mA)
Safety stop input (Channel 2) S2 Output shutoff So (SO)

SIC
Safety stop input common
SD SOC
Safety monitor output common
(The jumper is not installed for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.)
 When using separate power supply for the control circuit, remove the jumper between R1/L11 and S1/L21.
52
 CA type
FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K),
FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K)
(FR-HEL)∗1
Sourse logic Brake unit R
R (Option) Jumper
(Ground) ∗9
(Ground)
Inrush
limit circuit
MCCB MC R
Three-phase V Motor
AC power W
T/L3
supply ON EMC filter Earth (Ground)
Earth
(Ground)
Main circuit
(No voltage input allowed)∗3 C1
STF
B1 Relay output 1
STR
Reverse rotation start (Fault output)
A1
STP(STOP)
C2
RH
High speed B2
RM Relay output 2
Multi-speed Middle speed A2
selection
RL
Low speed

MRS
RT SU
IPF
Up to frequency
Instantaneous
6
Output stop
OL power failure

RES Overload
Reset
FU
Terminal 4 input selection AU Frequency detection
SOURCE

CS SE Open collector output common
Selection of automatic restart
SINK
after instantaneous power failure Sink/source common

24V
supply transistor PORT 1 CC-Link IE Field Network
Contact input common PC communication connector
PORT 2
24VDC power supply
Connector 2 Connector for plug-in option
supply input connection
Connector 3
Common terminal
SD ∗5 Voltage/current
input switch
Frequency setting signals (Analog) 10E(+10V) ON
OFF F/C
(+)
10(+5V) 2 4 (CA) Analog current output
3
Frequency setting 2 DC0 to 5V Initial value (0 to 20mADC)
(-)
∗5
1 5
(Analog common) AM (+)
Analog signal output
(DC0 to ±10V)
DC0 to ±10V Initial value (-)
Auxiliary (+) 1 DC0 to ±5V selectable 5
(-) ∗5
input
DC4 to 20mA Initial value TXD+ RS-485 terminals
Terminal 4 input (+) 4 DC0 to 5V selectable ∗5 Data
(Current input) (-) DC0 to 10V TXD-
transmission
PU connector RXD+
Data
USB A connector RXD-
reception
GND
USB mini B connector (SG)
GND
Safety stop signal Shorting wire 24V
PC
Terminating
VCC 5V
Safety stop input (Channel 1) S1 resistor
(Permissible load current 100mA)
S2 Output shutoff
Safety stop input (Channel 2) So (SO)
SIC
Safety stop input common
SD SOC
(The jumper is not installed for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.)
 When using separate power supply for the control circuit, remove the jumper between R1/L11 and S1/L21.
53
 Separated converter type (FR-A842-P)
 FM type
Sink logic
Converter Inverter
unit (Master)
(Master)
R/L1 P/+ P/+ U
S/L2 N/- V
To motor
T/L3 N/- W
Jumper
 R1/L11
S1/L21
Earth
(Ground)
Main circuit
RDI
Control circuit
Control input signals Relay output 
(No voltage input allowed)  STF C1
OH
RES STR B1
SD STP(STOP) (Fault output)
PC
RH
+24 High speed C2
Multi-speed RM
C1 Middle speed B2
RL
B1 Low speed A2
JOG 
A1 Jog operation
RT RUN Open collector output 
RDB Second function selection Running
Output stop MRS X10 SU
RDA  Up to frequency
6 RSO
IPF
Reset
Terminal 4 input selection

RES
AU
IPF
OL

SOURCE

FAN
SINK
after instantaneous power failure FU

Contact input common SD Frequency detection
SE 24V
PC
24VDC power supply Sink/source common
supply input
SD Voltage/current connector
Common terminal 
input switch + - Indicator
F/C (Frequency
USB A  Calibration meter, etc.)
OFF
10(+5V) 2 4 connector SD resistor  Moving-coil type
3
Frequency setting 2 0 to 5VDC Initial value 1mA full-scale
potentiometer 2 0 to 10VDC selectable 
1/2W1kΩ  0 to 20mADC AM (+)
1 5 Analog signal output
(Analog common) 5 (0 to ±10VDC)
(-)
0 to ±10VDC Initial value
Auxiliary (+) 1 Master/slave communication
input (-) 0 to ±5VDC selectable 
TXD+
4 to 20mADC Initial value Data
Terminal 4 input (+) 4 TXD-
0 to 5VDC selectable  transmission
(Current input) (-)
0 to 10VDC
RXD+
Data
Connector for plug-in option connection Connector 1 Connector 2 RXD- reception
GND
Connector 3 (SG)
GND
For manufacturer Shorting
wire PC Terminating
resistor current 100mA)
S1
S2 So (SO)
SIC
SOC
SD
 Terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 are connected to terminals P/+ and N/- with a jumper respectively. When using separate power supply for the control circuit,
remove the jumpers from R1/L11 and S1/L21.
 The function of these terminals can be changed with the input terminal assignment (Pr.178 to Pr.189).
 Terminal JOG is also used as the pulse train input terminal. Use Pr.291 to choose JOG or pulse.
 The X10 signal (NC contact input specification) is assigned to terminal MRS in the initial setting. Set Pr.599 = "0" to change the input specification of the
X10 signal to NO contact.
 Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input specification switchover (Pr.73, Pr.267). To input a voltage (0 to 5 V/0 to 10 V), set the
voltage/current input switch OFF. To input a current (4 to 20 mA), set the voltage/current input switch ON. Terminals 10 and 2 are also used as a PTC input
terminal. (Pr.561)
 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.195, Pr.196).
 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.190 to Pr.194).
 No function is assigned in the initial setting. Use Pr.192 for function assignment.
 Terminal F/C (FM) can be used to output pulse trains as open collector output by setting Pr.291.
 Not required when calibrating the scale with the operation panel.
NOTE
• For the system configuration for the parallel operation, refer to the FR-A802-P Instruction Manual (Hardware).
54
 Converter unit (FR-CC2-P)
 When the sink logic is selected
Sink logic
Control circuit terminal Converter unit Inverter
(Master) (Master)
MCCB MC DC reactor
Three-phase limit circuit P/+
AC power S/L2 N/-
T/L3 N/-
supply ON ON EMC filter
R1/L11 ON/OFF
Jumper
 S1/L21 OFF OFF connecter
Earth Main circuit
(Ground)
Control input signals Control circuit Open collector output 
(No voltage input allowed)  RES
Reset Inverter operation enable
OH RDA (NO contact) MRS 
External thermal relay input (X10)
RDB Inverter operation enable
(NC contact)
RDI
RSO Inverter reset
Contact input RES
SOURCE
IPF Instantaneous
power failure
SINK
FAN
Contact input common SD Cooling fan fault
24V
SE
24VDC power supply
PC

SD
6
Sink/source common

supply input C1 Relay output 
SD
Common terminal
PU B1 Relay output
connector (Fault output)
A1
USB 
mini B TXD+ Master/slave communication
connector
TXD- Data transmission
RXD+
RXD- Data reception
GND
(SG)
GND
Connector for manufacturer setting  Connector 1 Terminating
resistor
current 100mA)
88R

88S
 When using separate power supply for the control circuit, remove the jumpers from R1/L11 and S1/L21.
 The function of these terminals can be changed with the input terminal assignment (Pr.178, Pr.187, Pr.189).
 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.195).
 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.190 to Pr.194).
 The connector is for manufacturer setting. Do not use.
 Plug-in options cannot be used.
 For manufacturer setting. Do not use.
 To use the RDA signal of the converter unit, select the NC contact input specification for the input logic of MRS signal or X10 signal of the inverter.
To use the RDB signal of the converter unit, select the NO contact input specification for the input logic of MRS signal or X10 signal of the inverter. (For
changing the input logic, refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter.)
NOTE
• For the system configuration for the parallel operation, refer to the FR-CC2-P Instruction Manual.
55
 Connection of motor with encoder (vector control) (when the sink logic is selected
and the FR-A8AP is used)
 Speed control
Vector control dedicated motor
Standard motor with encoder (SF-JR) and 5 V differential line driver (SF-V5RU, SF-THY) and 12 V complementary
SF-JR motor MCCB MC

OCR SF-V5RU, SF-THY
*7 A
MCCB MC Inverter with encoder Three-phase
AC power B
R/L1 U U FAN
Three-phase supply C
AC power S/L2 V V
IM U U
supply T/L3 W W Inverter
V V
E IM
W W
Forward rotation start STF Earth E
Earth
FR-A8AP (Ground) (Ground) Thermal
Reverse rotation start STR PA1 C ∗1 External PC
protector
thermal RH(OH) 2W1kΩ G1
Contact input common SD PA2 R relay input *8 SD G2
FR-A8AP
PA1 A *1
PB1 A
PA2 B
PB2 N
PB1 C
10 Differential PLG
Frequency command 3 PZ1 B PB2 D
Frequency setting 2 F
PLG
2 PZ2 P ∗2 Differential PZ1
potentiometer PZ2 G *2
1/2W1kΩ 1 5 Complementary
PG H Complementary PG S
Terminating SD K Terminating SD R
resistor
resistor ON PG
Torque limit PG ON
(+) 1 SD *3
6
command (-) ∗3 12VDC power
SD *4 *6 (+) (-) supply *5
(±10V) (+) (-) 5VDC power supply OFF
OFF ∗6
∗5
∗4
 Torque control
Standard motor with encoder (SF-JR) and 5 V differential line driver
(SF-V5RU, SF-THY) and 12 V complementary
SF-JR motor *7
MCCB MC
OCR SF-V5RU, SF-THY
MCCB MC Inverter with encoder Three-phase
A
AC power B
R/L1 U U FAN
Three-phase supply C
AC power S/L2 V V
IM
supply T/L3 W W Inverter U U
V V
E W W
IM
Forward rotation start STF Earth E

FR-A8AP (Ground) Earth
Reverse rotation start STR PA1 C ∗1 External PC (Ground) Thermal
2W1kΩ G1 protector
Contact input common thermal RH(OH)
SD PA2 R relay input *8 SD G2
FR-A8AP
*1
PB1 A PA1 A
PA2 B
PB2 N
10 PB1 C
Speed limit command 3 Differential PLG
PZ1 B PB2 D
Frequency setting 2 PLG
2 PZ2 P ∗2 Differential PZ1 F
potentiometer
Complementary PZ2 G *2
1/2W1kΩ 1 5 PG H
Complementary PG S
Terminating SD K Terminating SD R
resistor ON resistor
Torque command (+) 1 PG ON PG
(±10V) (-) ∗3 SD *3 12VDC power
SD *4 *6 (+) (-) supply *5
(+) (-) 5VDC power supply OFF
OFF ∗6
∗5
∗4
56
 Position control
Vector control dedicated motor (SF-V5RU, SF-THY) and 12 V complementary
MCCB MC OCR SF-V5RU, SF-THY

∗7 A
Positioning unit Three-phase B
MELSEC iQ-R RD75P[ ] FAN
AC power supply C
MELSEC-Q QD75P[ ]N/QD75P[ ]
MELSEC-L LD75P[ ] MCCB MC
Three-phase R/L1 Inverter U U
AC power S/L2 V V
supply IM
T/L3 W W
FLS
E
RLS Earth
DOG (ground) Thermal
External thermal protector PC protector
STOP relay input ∗8 RH(OH) 2W1kΩ G1
Forward stroke end SD G2
STF
Reverse stroke end FR-A8AP
STR PA1 A ∗1
Pre-excitation/servo on
LX ∗9 PA2 B
Clear signal
CLEAR CLR ∗9 C
PB1
Pulse train
PULSE F JOG ∗10 PB2 D
Sign signal
PULSE R NP ∗9 Differential PLG
24VDC power supply line driver PZ1 F
CLRCOM PC PZ2 G ∗2
PULSE COM SE
Complementary PG S
RDYCOM
COM
Terminating
resistor
SD R 6
Preparation ready signal ON PG
READY RDY ∗11

SD ∗3
5 12VDC
∗4 ∗6 (+) (-) power supply ∗5
OFF
Torque limit command (+) 1
(±10V) (-)
 The pin number differs according to the encoder used.

Speed, control, torque control, and position control by pulse train input are available with or without the Z-phase being connected.
 Connect the encoder so that there is no looseness between the motor and motor shaft. Speed ratio must be 1:1.
 Earth (ground) the shield of the encoder cable to the enclosure using a tool such as a P-clip. (Refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed).)
 For the complementary, set the terminating resistor selection switch to OFF position. (Refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed).)
 A separate power supply of 5 V/12 V/15 V/24 V is necessary according to the encoder power specification.
When the encoder output is the differential line driver type, only 5 V can be input.
Make the voltage of the external power supply the same as the encoder output voltage, and connect the external power supply across PG and SD.
 For terminal compatibility of the FR-JCBL, FR-V7CBL, and FR-A8AP, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed).
 For the fan of the 7.5 kW or lower dedicated motor, the power supply is single phase. (200 V/50 Hz, 200 to 230 V/60 Hz)
 Connect the recommended 2W1kΩ resistor between terminals PC and OH. (Recommended
When OH signal is assigned to terminal RH
product: MOS2C102J 2W1kΩ by KOA Corporation) (Pr.182 = "7")
Insert the input line and the resistor to a 2-wire blade terminal, and connect the blade terminal to PC RH (OH)
terminal OH.
Insulate the lead wire of the resistor, for example by applying a contraction tube, and shape the 2-wire blade terminal
wires so that the resistor and its lead wire will not touch other cables. Caulk the lead wire securely
Insulate To thermal protector
together with the thermal protector input line using a 2-wire blade terminal.
Resistor (2 W1kΩ)
(Do not subject the lead wire's bottom area to an excessive pressure.)
Insulate
To use a terminal as terminal OH, assign the OH (external thermal O/L relay input) signal to an
input terminal. (Set "7" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189. For details, refer to page 136.)
 Assign the function using Pr.178 to Pr.184, Pr.187 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).
 When position control is selected, terminal JOG function is invalid and simple position pulse train input terminal becomes valid.
 Assign the function using Pr.190 to Pr.194 (output terminal function selection).
57
Terminal Specification Explanation
 Inverter
indicates that terminal functions can be selected from Pr.178 to Pr.196 (I/O terminal function selection).
Terminal names and terminal functions are those of the factory set.
Terminal
Type Terminal Name Description
Symbol
R/L1, S/L2,
AC power input Connect to the commercial power supply.
T/L3
U, V, W Inverter output Connect a three-phase squirrel-cage motor or PM motor.
R1/L11, Power supply for Connected to the AC power supply terminals R/L1 and S/L2. To retain alarm display and alarm output, apply external
S1/L21 control circuit power to this terminal.
P/+, PR Brake resistor Connect an optional brake resistor across terminals P/+ and PR. Remove the jumper across terminals PR and PX for
 connection the inverter capacity that has terminal PX. (FR-A820-00630(11K) or lower, FR-A840-00380(15K) or lower)
P3, PR Brake resistor Connect an optional brake resistor across terminals P3 and PR. (FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K), FR-A840-
 connection 00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K))
Main circuit
P/+, N/- Brake unit connection Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2), power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) or regeneration common converter
(MT-RC) and high power factor converter (FR-HC2).
Do not connect the DC power supply between terminals P3 and N/-. Use terminals P/+ and N/- for DC feeding.
P3, N/- Brake unit connection Connect the separated converter type to terminals P/+ and N/- of the converter unit. (Wire one terminal P/+ to another
terminal P/+, and do likewise for terminal N/-.)
Remove the jumper across terminals P/+-P1 and connect a DC reactor. For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, the FR-
P/+, P1 DC reactor connection A840-02160(75K) or higher, and when a 75 kW or higher motor is used, always connect a DC reactor, which is available as
an option. (The jumper is not installed for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.)
PR, PX Built-in brake circuit When the jumper is connected across terminals PX and PR (initial status), the built-in brake circuit is valid. The built-in
 connection brake circuit is equipped in the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower.
Earth (Ground) For earthing (grounding) the inverter chassis. Must be earthed (grounded).
STF Forward rotation start Turn on the STF signal to start forward rotation and turn it off to stop. When the STF and STR signals
are turned on simultaneously,
STR Reverse rotation start Turn on the STR signal to start reverse rotation and turn it off to stop. the stop command is given.
STP Start self-holding
Turn on the STOP signal to self-hold the start signal.
(STOP) selection
6 RH, RM, RL Multi-speed selection

Jog mode selection
Multi-speed can be selected according to the combination of RH, RM and RL signals.
Turn on the JOG signal to select Jog operation (initial setting) and turn on the start signal (STF or STR) to start Jog
operation.
JOG
JOG terminal can be used as pulse train input terminal. To use as pulse train input terminal, the Pr.291 setting needs to
Pulse train input

be changed. (maximum input pulse: 100k pulses/s)
Turn on the RT signal to select second function selection
Second function
RT When the second function such as “Second torque boost” and “Second V/F (base frequency)” are set, turning on the RT
selection
signal selects these functions.
Turn on the MRS signal (2 ms or more) to stop the inverter output.
MRS Output stop
Use to shut off the inverter output when stopping the motor by electromagnetic brake.
Output stop Connect to terminal RDA of the converter unit (FR-CC2). When the RDA signal is turned OFF, the inverter output is shut
MRS
Contact input
(Inverter operation off. The X10 signal (NC contact) is assigned to terminal MRS in the initial setting. Use Pr.599 to change the specification
(X10)
enable) to NO contact.
Used to reset alarm output provided when protective circuit is activated. Turn on the RES signal for more than 0.1s, then
RES Reset
turn it off. Recover about 1s after reset is cancelled.
Terminal 4 input Terminal 4 is made valid only when the AU signal is turned on.
AU
selection Turning the AU signal on makes terminal 2 invalid.
Selection of automatic
restart after When the CS signal is left on, the inverter restarts automatically at power restoration. Note that restart setting is
CS
instantaneous power necessary for this operation. In the initial setting, a restart is disabled.
failure
Common terminal for the contact input terminal (sink logic) and terminal FM.
(sink)
Control circuit/input signal
External transistor Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal of a transistor output (open collector output) device, such as
SD
common (source) a programmable controller, in the source logic to avoid malfunction by undesirable current.
24 VDC power supply Common terminal for the 24 VDC power supply (terminal PC, terminal +24)
common Isolated from terminals 5 and SE.
External transistor Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal of a transistor output (open collector output) device, such as
common (sink) a programmable controller, in the sink logic to avoid malfunction by undesirable currents.
PC Contact input common
Common terminal for contact input terminal (source logic).
(source)
24 VDC power supply Can be used as 24 VDC 0.1 A power supply.
10 VDC, permissible load
10E When connecting a frequency setting potentiometer at an initial status, connect it to
Frequency setting current 10 mA
terminal 10.
power supply 5 VDC, permissible load current
10 Change the input specifications of terminal 2 when connecting it to terminal 10E.
10 mA
Inputting 0 to 5 VDC (or 0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA) provides the maximum output
Frequency setting frequency at 5 V (10 V, 20 mA) and makes input and output proportional. Use Pr.73 to Voltage input:
2
Frequency setting
(voltage) switch from among input 0 to 5 VDC (initial setting), 0 to 10 VDC, and 4 to 20 mA. Set Input resistance 10 k 1 k
the voltage/current input switch in the ON position to select current input (0 to 20 mA). Maximum permissible voltage
Inputting 4 to 20 mADC (or 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V) provides the maximum output 20 VDC
frequency at 20 mA and makes input and output proportional. This input signal is valid Current input:
Frequency setting only when the AU signal is on (terminal 2 input is invalid). Use Pr.267 to switch from Input resistance 245  5 
4
(current) among input 4 to 20 mA (initial setting), 0 to 5 VDC, and 0 to 10 VDC. Set the voltage/ Maximum permissible current
current input switch in the OFF position to select voltage input (0 to 5 V/0 to 10 V). 30 mA
Use Pr.858 to switch terminal functions.
Inputting 0 to ±5 VDC or 0 to ±10 VDC adds this signal to terminal 2 or 4 frequency Input resistance 10 k±1 k
Frequency setting
1 setting signal. Use Pr.73 to switch between input 0 to ±5 VDC and 0 to ±10 VDC Maximum permissible voltage
auxiliary
(initial setting) input. ±20 VDC
Frequency setting Common terminal for frequency setting signal (terminal 2, 1 or 4) and analog output terminal AM, CA. Do not earth
5
common (ground).
Thermistor
Applicable PTC thermistor

10 For receiving PTC thermistor outputs.
specification Overheat detection
PTC thermistor input When PTC thermistor is valid (Pr.561  "9999"), terminal 2 is not available for
resistance: 500  to 30 k
2 frequency setting.
(Set by Pr.561)
supply input
For connecting 24 V external power supply.

Power
24 V external power Input voltage 23 to 25.5 VDC

+24 If the 24 V external power supply is connected, power is supplied to the control circuit
supply input Input current 1.4 A or less
while the main power circuit is OFF.
58
Terminal
Type Terminal Name Description
Symbol
1 changeover contact output indicates that the inverter protective function has
Relay output 1 Contact capacity 230 VAC
Relay
A1, B1, C1 activated and the output stopped. Alarm: discontinuity across B-C (continuity across
(alarm output) 0.3 A (power factor =0.4)
A-C), Normal: continuity across B-C (discontinuity across A-C)
30 VDC 0.3 A
A2, B2, C2 Relay output 2 1 changeover contact output
Switched low when the inverter output frequency is equal to or higher than the starting
RUN Inverter running frequency (initial value 0.5 Hz). Switched high during stop or DC injection brake
operation.
Switched low when the output frequency reaches within the
SU Up to frequency range of ±10% (initial value) of the set frequency. Switched Permissible load
high during acceleration/deceleration and at a stop. 24 VDC (maximum 27 VDC)
Switched low when stall prevention is activated by the stall 0.1 A
Open collector
OL Overload alarm prevention function. Switched high when stall prevention is (The voltage drop is 2.8 V at
maximum while the signal is ON.)
Control circuit/output signal
cancelled. Alarm code (4 bit) LOW is when the open collector

Instantaneous power Switched low when an instantaneous power failure and output output transistor is ON
IPF
failure under voltage protections are activated. (Refer to page 124.) (conducted). HIGH is when the
No function is assigned in the initial setting. transistor is OFF (not conducted).
IPF Open collector output
The function can be assigned setting Pr.192.
Switched low when the inverter output frequency is equal to
FU Frequency detection or higher than the preset detected frequency and high when
less than the preset detected frequency.
Open collector output
SE Common terminal for terminals RUN, SU, OL, IPF, FU
common
Output item: output frequency (initial setting),
For meter permissible load current 2 mA,
Pulse
FM For full scale1440 pulses/s

NPN open collector Select one e.g. output frequency from monitor items. (The Signals can be output from the open collector terminals
output signal is not output during an inverter reset.) by setting Pr.291. (maximum output pulse: 50kpulses/s)
The output signal is proportional to the magnitude of the
corresponding monitoring item. Output item: output frequency (initial setting),
The output signal is proportional to the magnitude of the output signal 0 to ±10 VDC,
AM Analog voltage output corresponding monitoring item.Use Pr.55, Pr.56, and Pr.866 permissible load current 1 mA
Analog
to set full scales for the monitored output frequency, output (load impedance 10 k or more),
current, and torque. resolution 8 bit
CA Analog current output

Output item: output frequency (initial setting),
Load impedance 200  to 450 
Output signal 0 to 20 mADC
6
With the PU connector, communication can be made through RS-485. (1:1 connection only)

— PU connector • Conforming standard: EIA-485(RS-485) • Communication speed: 4800 to 115200 bps
• Transmission format: Multi-drop link • Wiring length: 500 m
TXD+, Inverter transmission With the RS-485 terminals, communication can be made through RS-485. (The FR-A800-E inverter does not have the
TXD- terminal interface.)
terminals
RXD+, Inverter reception • Conforming standard: EIA-485(RS-485) • Communication speed: 300 to 115200 bps
RS-485
RXD- terminal • Transmission format: Multi-drop link • Overall extension: 500 m

Two inverters in parallel connection have the RS-485 communication via the RS-485 terminals on each inverter. (FR-
GND
Earth (Ground) A842-P)
Communication
(SG)
• Total wiring length: 5 m or less
A connector (receptacle).
USB A connector
A USB memory device enables parameter copies and the trace function. Interface: Conforms to USB1.1
— Mini B connector (receptacle). (USB2.0 full-speed compatible).
USB B connector Connected to a personal computer via USB to enable setting, monitoring, test Transmission speed: 12 Mbps
operations of the inverter by FR Configurator2.
Connector for
CC-Link IE
CON1 communication
(Port 1) Communication can be made via the CC-Link IE Field Network.
(The FR-A800-GF inverter has the connectors. For other inverters, the communication option FR-A8NCE is available for
Connector for the CC-Link IE Field Network communication.)
CON2 communication
(Port 2)
Using Ethernet communication, the inverter's status can be monitored or the parameters can be set via Internet. (Only
— Ethernet connector
the FR-A800-E inverter has the interface.)
Safety stop input Terminals S1 and S2 are used for the safety stop input signal for the safety relay
S1 module. Terminals S1 and S2 are used at the same time (dual channel). Inverter
(Channel 1) Input resistance 4.7 k
output is shutoff by shortening/opening between terminals S1 and SIC, or between S2
Input current 4 to 6 mADC
Safety stop input and SIC. In the initial status, terminals S1 and S2 are shorted with terminal PC by
S2 (with 24 VDC input)
(Channel 2) shorting wires. Terminal SIC is shorted with terminal SD. Remove the shorting wires
Safety stop signal
and connect the safety relay module when using the safety stop function.
Safety stop input
SIC Common terminal for terminals S1 and S2. —
terminal common
Indicates the safety stop input signal status.
Permissible load
Switched to LOW when the status is other than the internal safety circuit failure.
24 VDC (maximum 27 VDC)
Switched to HIGH during the internal safety circuit failure status.
Safety monitor output 0.1 A
So (SO) (LOW is when the open collector output transistor is ON (conducted). HIGH is when
(open collector output) (The voltage drop is 3.4 V at
the transistor is OFF (not conducted).)
maximum while the signal is
Refer to the Safety Stop Function Instruction Manual (BCN-A23228-001) when the
ON.)
signal is switched to HIGH while both terminals S1 and S2 are open.
Safety monitor output
SOC Common terminal for terminal So (SO). —
terminal common
 Terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, PR, P3, P1, and PX are not provided in the separated converter type.
 Terminals R1/L11, S1/L21, PR, P3, and PX are not provided for the IP55 compatible model.
 Available for the FR-A820-00770(15K) to FR-A820-01250(22K), and the FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to FR-A840-01800(55K).
 The sink logic is initially set for the FM-type inverter.
 The source logic is initially set for the CA-type inverter.
 Terminal FM is provided in the FM-type inverter.
 Terminal CA is provided in the CA-type inverter.
 Function and name of the separated converter type.
 The terminals are for manufacturer setting for the FR-A842-P. Do not connect anything to these. Doing so may damage the inverter.
Do not remove the shorting wires across the terminals S1 and PC, the terminals S2 and PC, and the terminals SIC and SD. Removing either shorting wire
disables the inverter operation.
59
 Converter unit (FR-CC2)
indicates that terminal functions can be selected from Pr.178, Pr.187, Pr.189 to Pr.195 (I/O terminal function selection).
Terminal names and terminal functions are those of the factory set.
Type Terminal Symbol Terminal Name Description
Connect these terminals to the commercial power supply.
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 For 12-phase applications, use these terminals for connection with a 12-phase rectifier power
(R2/L12, S2/L22, AC power input
T2/L32) transformer (3-winding transformer).
For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the converter unit.
Main circuit
Connected to the AC power supply terminals R/L1 and S/L2. To retain the fault display and fault
Power supply for the
R1/L11,S1/L21 control circuit
output, remove the jumpers across terminals R/L1 and R1/L11 and across S/L2 and S1/L21 and
supply external power to these terminals.
Connect to terminals P/+ and N/- of the inverter. (Wire one terminal P/+ to another terminal P/+,
P/+, N/- Inverter connection
and do likewise for terminal N/-.)
Earth (ground) For earthing (grounding) the converter unit chassis. This must be earthed (grounded).
Use this signal to reset a fault output provided when a protective function is activated. Turn ON
the RES signal for 0.1 s or longer, then turn it OFF.
RES Reset
In the initial setting, reset is always enabled. By setting Pr.75, reset can be set enabled only at
fault occurrence of the converter unit. The inverter recovers about 1 s after the reset is released.
The external thermal relay input (OH) signal is used when using an external thermal relay or a
External thermal relay thermal protector built into the motor to protect the motor from overheating.
OH input When the thermal relay is activated, the inverter trips by the external thermal relay operation
(E.OHT).
RDI Contact input The function can be assigned by setting Pr.178.
Contact input

Control circuit/input signal
Common terminal for contact input terminal (sink logic).

(sink) (Initial setting)
6 SD
External transistor
Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal of a transistor output (open collector
output) device, such as a programmable controller, in the source logic to avoid malfunction by
common (source)
undesirable current.
24 VDC power supply Common terminal for the 24 VDC power supply (terminal PC, terminal +24)
common Isolated from terminals 5 and SE.
External transistor Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal of a transistor output (open collector
common (sink) (Initial output) device, such as a programmable controller, in the source logic to avoid malfunction by
setting) undesirable current.
PC Contact input common Common terminal for contact input terminal (source logic).
(source)
24 VDC power supply
Can be used as a 24 VDC 0.1 A power supply.
common
Power supply
For connecting a 24 V external power supply.

input
24 V external power
+24 If a 24 V external power supply is connected, power is supplied to the control circuit while the
supply input
main power circuit is OFF.
1 changeover contact output that indicates that the protective function Contact capacity 230
Relay output 1 of the converter unit has been activated and the outputs are stopped. VAC 0.3 A (power factor
A1, B1, C1
Relay
(fault output) Fault: discontinuity across B and C (continuity across A and C), = 0.4)
Normal: continuity across Band C (discontinuity across A and C) 30 VDC 0.3 A
88R, 88S For manufacturer setting. Do not use.
Control circuit/output signal
Switched to LOW when the converter unit operation is ready. Permissible load
Inverter operation
RDA enable (NO contact) Assign the signal to terminal MRS (X10) of the inverter. 24 VDC (maximum 27
The inverter can be started when the RDA status is LOW. VDC)
Switched to LOW when a converter unit fault occurs or the converter is 0.1 A
Inverter operation (The voltage drop is 2.8
RDB enable (NC contact) reset.
V at maximum while the
Open collector
The inverter can be started when the RDB status is HIGH.

signal is ON.)
Switched to LOW when the converter is reset (RES-ON). LOW is when the open
RSO Inverter reset Assign the signal to terminal RES of the inverter. collector output
The inverter is reset when it is connected with the RSO status LOW. transistor is ON
Instantaneous power (conducted).
IPF Switched to LOW when an instantaneous power failure is detected.
failure HIGH is when the
transistor is OFF (not
FAN Cooling fan fault Switched to LOW when a cooling fan fault occurs. conducted).
SE Open collector output

Common terminal for terminals RDA, RDB, RSO, IPF, FAN
common
With the PU connector, communication can be made through RS-485. (For connection on a 1:1
basis only)
• Conforming standard: EIA-485 (RS-485)
— PU connector
• Transmission format: Multidrop link
Communication
• Communication speed: 4800 to 115200 bps

• Wiring length: 500 m
TXD+ Converter unit The RS-485 terminals enable the communication by RS-485.
TXD- transmission terminal • Conforming standard: EIA-485 (RS-485)
• Transmission format: Multidrop link
RS-485 RXD+ Converter unit reception • Communication speed: 300 to 115200 bps
terminals RXD- terminal • Overall length: 500 m
Two inverters in parallel connection have the RS-485 communication via the RS-485 terminals on
GND each inverter. (FR-CC2-P)
Earthing (grounding)
(SG) • Total wiring length : 5 m or less
60
Operation Panel (FR-DU08(-01))
 Components of the operation panel

(a) (b) (c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(j) (g)
(k)
(l)
(m)
(h)
(i)
The operation panel of the inverter can be used for the converter unit.
No. Component  Name Description
FR-DU08 FR-DU08-01 PU/HAND: ON to indicate the PU operation mode.
Operation mode indicator EXT/AUTO: ON to indicate the External operation mode. (ON at power-ON in the initial setting.)
(a)
 NET: ON to indicate the Network operation mode.
PU and EXT: ON to indicate the External/PU combined operation mode 1 or 2.
(b)
Operation panel status
indicator
MON: ON to indicate the monitoring mode. Quickly flickers twice intermittently while the
protective function is activated.
PRM: ON to indicate the parameter setting mode.
7
IM: ON to indicate the induction motor control.
Operation Panel (FR-DU08(-01)), LCD operation panel (FR-LU08(-01))

(c) Control motor indicator  PM: ON to indicate the PM sensorless vector control.
The indicator flickers when test operation is selected.
Frequency unit indicator
(d) ON to indicate frequency. (Flickers when the set frequency is displayed in the monitor.)

Shows the frequency, parameter number, etc.

(e) Monitor (5-digit LED)
(Using Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, the monitored item can be changed.)
(f) PLC function indicator  ON to indicate that the PLC function is operating.
FWD key: Starts forward rotation. The LED is lit during forward operation.
REV key: Starts reverse rotation. The LED is lit during reverse operation.
The LED flickers under the following conditions.
(g) FWD key, REV key 
• When the frequency command is not given even if the forward/reverse command is given.
• When the frequency command is the starting frequency or lower.
• When the MRS signal is being input.
Stops the operation commands.

(h) STOP/RESET key
Resets the inverter when the protection function is activated.
The setting dial of the Mitsubishi Electric inverters. The setting dial is used to change the
frequency and parameter settings.
Press the setting dial to perform the following operations:
(i) Setting dial • To display a set frequency in the monitoring mode (the setting can be changed using
Pr.992.)
• To display the present setting during calibration
• To display a fault history number in the faults history mode
Switches to different modes.
(j) MODE key Switches to the easy setting mode by pressing simultaneously with .
Holding this key for 2 seconds locks the operation. The key lock is invalid when Pr.161="0
(initial setting)".
Enters each setting. Initial setting in the monitor mode
If pressed during operation, the monitored Output frequency Output current Output voltage
(k) SET key
item changes.
(Using Pr.52 and Pr.774-Pr.776, the monitored item can be changed.)
Goes back to the previous display.
(l) ESC key
Holding this key for a longer time changes the mode back to the monitor mode.
FR-DU08 FR-DU08-01 Switches between the PU operation mode, the PUJOG operation mode, and the External
operation mode.
(m) HAND
PU/EXT key 
AUTO
Switches to the easy setting mode by pressing simultaneously with .
Cancels the PU stop also.
 The FR-DU08-01 is an operation panel for IP55 compatible models.
 Not available for the converter unit.
61
 Basic operation(FR-DU08)
Operation mode switchover/Frequency setting

External operation mode∗1(At power-ON) PU operation mode∗1 PU Jog operation mode∗1
Alternate display
(Example)
Value change Frequency setting has been

written and completed.
Monitor
Second screen Third screen

(Output current∗2 monitoring) (Output voltage∗2 monitoring)
First screen (Output frequency∗2 monitoring)
Parameter setting
7 Display the present

setting
Alternate display
(Example)
Value change Parameter write is completed.
∗5
Parameter clear All parameter clear Faults history clear Parameter copy
Group parameter setting Automatic parameter setting  IPM initialization  Initial value change list

Function
Trace function∗3
(Example) (Example) (Example)

Blinking Blinking Blinking
Faults history
Faults history 1 ∗4 Faults history 2 ∗4 Faults history 8 ∗4

[Operation for displaying faults history]
Past eight faults can be displayed.
(The latest fault is ended by ".".)
When no fault history exists, is displayed.
Hold down
 For the details of operation modes, refer to page 125.

 Monitored items can be changed.(Refer to page 116.)
 For the details of the trace function, refer to page 163.
 While a fault is displayed, the display shifts as follows by pressing : Output frequency at the fault → Output current → Output voltage → Energization
time → Year → Month → Date → Time. (After Time, it goes back to a fault display.) Pressing the setting dial shows the fault history number.
 The USB memory mode will appear if a USB memory device is connected. (Refer to page 63.)
 Not available for the converter unit.
62
 Parameter copy to the USB memory device
Insert the USB memory in the inverter. The USB memory mode is displayed and USB memory operations are possible.
Monitor mode Parameter setting mode Function mode Faults history mode
USB memory mode
Copy the parameter setting

from the inverter to the USB
memory device. 7

Overwrite the inverter parameter setting onto the
designated file in the USB memory device.
Write the designated

parameter setting file of
Parameter setting the USB memory device
file number saved in to a parameter file of the
the USB memory inverter.
device Verify the designated
(up to 99) parameter setting file of
the USB memory device
against the parameter file
of the inverter.
63
 Group parameter display
Parameter numbers can be changed to grouped parameter numbers.
Parameters are grouped by their functions. The related parameters can be set easily.
(1) Changing to the grouped parameter numbers
Pr.MD setting value Description

0 No change
1 Parameter display by parameter number
2 Parameter display by function group
Operation
Screen at power-ON
1.
The monitor display appears.
Parameter setting mode
2.
Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)
Selecting the parameter number
3. Turn until " " (parameter display method) appears.
Press ." " (initial value) will appear.
Changing to the group parameter display
4.
7 Turn to change the set value to " " (group parameter display). Press to select the group parameter setting. " "
and " " flicker alternately after the setting is completed.

(2) Changing parameter settings in the group parameter display
Changing example Change the P.H400(Pr.1) Maximum frequency.
Operation
Screen at power-ON
1.
Changing the operation mode
2.
Press to choose the PU operation mode. [PU] indicator is lit.

3.
Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)
Parameter group selection
Press several times until " " appears.

4.
(No need to press if the previously read parameter is one of " " to " ". Skip this operation and
proceed to step 5..)
Parameter group selection
5. Turn until " " (protective function parameter 4) appears. Press to display " " and make
the group parameters of the protective function parameter 4 selectable.
Parameter selection
6. Turn until " " (P.H400 Maximum frequency) appears. Press to read the present set value.
" " (initial value) appears.

Changing the setting value
7. Turn to change the set value to " ". Press to enter the setting. " " and " " flicker
alternately after the setting is completed.
64
LCD operation panel (FR-LU08(-01))
• The FR-LU08 is an optional operation panel adopting an LCD panel capable of displaying text and menus.
• Replacement with the operation panel (FR-DU08) and installation on the enclosure surface using a connection cable (FR-CB2) are
possible. (To connect the FR-LU08, an optional operation panel connection connector (FR-ADP) is required.)
• Parameter settings for up to three inverters can be saved.
• When the FR-LU08 is connected to the inverter, the internal clock of the inverter can be synchronized with the clock of FRLU08. (Real time
clock function)
With a battery (CR1216), the FR-LU08 time count continues even if the main power of the inverter is turned OFF. (The time count of the
inverter internal clock does not continue when the inverter power is turned OFF.)
• The FR-LU08-01 meets the IP55 rating (except for the PU connector). It can be directly installed to the IP55 compatible model.
Hz Out 1:00
Count-up Hz Out 2:00
Count-up Hz Out 3:00
0. 00 Hz 0. 00 Hz 0. 00 Hz
−−− STOP PU −−− STOP PU −−− STOP PU
1:00
PREV SET NEXT
2:00
PREV SET NEXT
3:00
PREV SET NEXT
Synchronization Synchronization
1:00 1:00 3:00

Power-OFF Power-ON
Inverter internal clock Inverter internal clock Inverter internal clock
 Appearance and parts name

Symbol Name Description
a Power lamp ON when the power is turned ON.
b Alarm lamp ON when an inverter alarm occurs.
Shows the frequency, parameter number, etc.
c Monitor
7
(a)
(Using Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, the monitored item can be changed.)
(b) (j) (k) (l)
(c) FWD key: Starts the forward operation.
d FWD key, REV key
REV key: Starts the reverse operation.

(i) Used to stop operation commands.
(d) e STOP/RESET key
(h) Used to reset the inverter when the protective function is activated.
(g) (e) The setting dial is used to change the frequency and parameter settings.
f Setting dial
Pressing the dial shows details of the faults history mode.
Switches between the PU mode, the PUJOG mode, and the External operation
(f) g PU/EXT key 
mode.
h MON key Shows the first monitored item.
Displays the quick menu.
i MENU key
Pressing the key while the quick menu is displayed displays the function menu.
j Software key (F1)
k Software key (F2) Select a guidance displayed on the monitor.
l Software key (F3)
 HAND/AUTO key for the FR-LU08-01.
 Switching the main monitor data

When Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selection is set to "0", by pressing (PREV)
or (NEXT)
6 types of monitor data are displayed in order.
Turn ON the power, or press .
When the output frequency When the output current When the output voltage
is the first monitor data (initial setting) is the first (initial setting) is the first
(initial setting) monitor data monitor data
Hz Out 12: 34 I Out 12: 34 V Out 12: 34

(NEXT) (NEXT)
0.00 Hz 0.00 A 0.0 V
STOP PU STOP PU STOP PU

PREV SET NEXT PREV SET NEXTT PREV SET NEXT
(PREV) (PREV)
First monitor Second monitor Third monitor
(PREV) (NEXT)
(NEXT) (PREV)
Alarm History 12: 34 Set Hz 12: 34 12: 34

1 OHT 4 OV2 7 OV3 (PREV) (PREV) Hz Out 0.00Hz The first monitor data and the
2 SER 5 OV2 8 I Out 0.00A top two monitor data among
3 OV2 6 OV2 60.00 Hz
V Out 0.0V output current, output frequency,
STOP PU STOP PU STOP PU and output voltage are displayed
PREV CLR NEXT PREV SET NEXT PREV SET NEXT in rows.
(NEXT) (NEXT)
Faults history monitor Fourth monitor 3-line monitor
(Displayed only when monitor data other
than the first, second, or third monitor
data is set as the first priority monitor.)
When the first monitor data
is other than output frequency,
output current, and output voltage
65
Parameter List
 Inverter parameter list (by parameter number)

For simple variable-speed operation of the inverter, the initial value of the parameters may be used as they are. Set the necessary
parameters to meet the load and operational specifications. Parameter setting, change and check can be made from the operation panel (FR-
DU08).
NOTE
• Simple indicates simple mode parameters. Use Pr.160 User group read selection to indicate the simple mode
parameters only.
• Parameter setting may be restricted in some operating statuses. Use Pr.77 Parameter write selection to change the setting.
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
Pr. Name Setting range setting to
group FM CA
increments page
6% 
4% 
0 G000 Torque boost Simple 0 to 30% 0.1% 3%  108
2% 
1% 
120 Hz 
1 H400 Maximum frequency Simple 0 to 120 Hz 0.01 Hz 108
60 Hz 
2 H401 Minimum frequency Simple 0 to 120 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 108
3 G001 Base frequency Simple 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 108

Basic functions
Multi-speed setting (high speed)

4 D301 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 109
Simple
Multi-speed setting (middle speed)
5 D302 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 30 Hz 109
Simple
Multi-speed setting (low speed)
8 6 D303
Simple
0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 10 Hz 109
5 s 
7 F010 Acceleration time Simple 0 to 3600 s 0.1 s 109
Parameter List
15 s 
5 s 
8 F011 Deceleration time Simple 0 to 3600 s 0.1 s 109
15 s 
0 to 500 A 0.01 A 
H000 Electronic thermal O/L relay Simple Inverter rated
9 110
C103 Rated motor current Simple current
0 to 3600 A 0.1 A 
DC injection brake operation
10 G100 0 to 120 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 3 Hz 110
DC injection
frequency
11 G101
brake
DC injection brake operation time 0 to 10 s, 8888 0.1 s 0.5 s 110

4% 
12 G110 DC injection brake operation voltage 0 to 30% 0.1% 2%  110
1% 
─ 13 F102 Starting frequency 0 to 60 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.5 Hz 111
─ 14 G003 Load pattern selection 0 to 5, 12 to 15 1 0 111
operation
15 D200 Jog frequency 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 5 Hz 111

Jog
16 F002 Jog acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 3600 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 111
─ 17 T720 MRS input selection 0, 2, 4 1 0 112

120 Hz 
─ 18 H402 High speed maximum frequency 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 108
60 Hz 
0 to 1000 V, 8888,
─ 19 G002 Base frequency voltage 0.1 V 9999 8888 108
9999
Acceleration/
Acceleration/deceleration reference
deceleration
20 F000 1 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 109

frequency
times
Acceleration/deceleration time
21 F001 0, 1 1 0 109
increments
Stall prevention operation level

prevention
22 H500 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 112

(Torque limit level)
Stall

23 H610 0 to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 112
compensation factor at double speed
66
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
group FM CA
increments page
Multi-speed
D304
setting
24 to Multi-speed setting (4 speed to 7

to 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 109
27 speed)
D307
Multi-speed input compensation

─ 28 D300 0, 1 1 0 109
selection
Acceleration/deceleration pattern
─ 29 F100 0 to 6 1 0 113
selection
0 to 2, 10, 11, 20, 21,
100 to 102, 110, 111, 1 0
120, 121 
─ 30 E300 Regenerative function selection 2, 10, 11, 102, 110, 114
1 10
111 
0, 2, 10, 20, 100, 102,
1 0
110, 120 
31 H420 Frequency jump 1A 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 115
32 H421 Frequency jump 1B 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 115
Frequency
33 H422 Frequency jump 2A 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999

jump
115
35 H424 Frequency jump 3A 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 115
─ 37 M000 Speed display 0, 1 to 9998 1 0 115
41 M441 Up-to-frequency sensitivity 0 to 100% 0.1% 10% 116

Frequency
detection
42 M442 Output frequency detection 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 6 Hz 116 8

Output frequency detection for
Parameter List
43 M443 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 116
reverse rotation
Second acceleration/deceleration
44 F020 0 to 3600 s 0.1 s 5s 109
time
45 F021 Second deceleration time 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 109
46 G010 Second torque boost 0 to 30%, 9999 0.1% 9999 108
Second functions
47 G011 Second V/F (base frequency) 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 108
Second stall prevention operation
48 H600 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 112
level
49 H601 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 112
frequency
50 M444 Second output frequency detection 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 30 Hz 116
H010 Second electronic thermal O/L relay 0 to 500 A, 9999  0.01 A

51 9999 110
C203 Rated second motor current 0 to 3600 A, 9999  0.1 A
0, 5 to 14, 17 to 20,
22 to 36, 38 to 46,
Operation panel main monitor
52 M100 50 to 57, 61, 62, 64, 1 0 116
selection
67, 71 to 74, 87 to 98,
Monitor functions
100
1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18,
21, 24, 32 to 34, 36,
54 M300 FM/CA terminal function selection 46, 50, 52, 53, 61, 62, 1 1 116
67, 70, 87 to 90, 92,
93, 95, 97, 98
55 M040 Frequency monitoring reference 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 118
0 to 500 A  0.01 A Inverter rated
56 M041 Current monitoring reference 118
0 to 3600 A  0.1 A current
Automatic
57 A702 Restart coasting time 0, 0.1 to 30 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 119

restart
58 A703 Restart cushion time 0 to 60 s 0.1 s 1s 119
─ 59 F101 Remote function selection 0 to 3, 11 to 13 1 0 120

─ 60 G030 Energy saving control selection 0, 4, 9 1 0 120
67
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
group FM CA
increments page
0 to 500 A, 9999  0.01 A 

61 F510 Reference current 9999 121
0 to 3600 A, 9999  0.1 A 
acceleration/
deceleration
Automatic
62 F511 Reference value at acceleration 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 121
63 F512 Reference value at deceleration 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 121
64 F520 Starting frequency for elevator mode 0 to 10 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 121
─ 65  H300 Retry selection 0 to 5 1 0 121

Stall prevention operation reduction
─ 66 H611 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 112
starting frequency
67  H301 Number of retries at fault occurrence 0 to 10, 101 to 110 1 0 121
Retry
68  H302 Retry waiting time 0.1 to 600 s 0.1 s 1s 121

69  H303 Retry count display erase 0 1 0 121
─ 70  G107 Special regenerative brake duty 0 to 100% 0.1% 0% 114
0 to 6, 13 to 16, 20,
23, 24, 30, 33, 34, 40,
43, 44, 50, 53, 54, 70,
─ 71 C100 Applied motor 1 0 122
73, 74, 330, 333, 334,
8090, 8093, 8094,
9090, 9093, 9094
0 to 15 
─ 72  E600 PWM frequency selection 1 2 122
0 to 6, 25 
─ 73 T000 Analog input selection 0 to 7, 10 to 17 1 1 123
─ 74 T002 Input filter time constant 0 to 8 1 1 123
0 to 3, 14 to 17 
8 -
Reset selection/disconnected PU
detection/PU stop selection
0 to 3, 14 to 17,
100 to 103, 114 to 117
14

Parameter List
1
─ 75 E100 Reset selection 124
0
E101 Disconnected PU detection 0, 1
E102 PU stop selection 1
0 
E107 Reset limit 1 0
0, 1 
─ 76 M510 Fault code output selection 0 to 2 1 0 124
─ 77 E400 Parameter write selection 0 to 2 1 0 125
Reverse rotation prevention
─ 78 D020 0 to 2 1 0 125
selection
─ 79 D000 Operation mode selection Simple 0 to 4, 6, 7 1 0 125
68
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
group FM CA
increments page
0.4 to 55 kW, 9999  0.01 kW 

80 C101 Motor capacity 9999 126
0 to 3600 kW, 9999  0.1 kW 
81 C102 Number of motor poles 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 9999 1 9999 126
0 to 500 A, 9999  0.01 A 
82 C125 Motor excitation current 9999 127
0 to 3600 A, 9999  0.1 A 
200 V 
83 C104 Rated motor voltage 0 to 1000 V 0.1 V 127
400 V 
84 C105 Rated motor frequency 10 to 400 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 127
85 G201 Excitation current break point 0 to 400 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 128
Motor constants
Excitation current low speed scaling

86 G202 0 to 300%, 9999 0.1% 9999 128
factor
Speed control gain (Advanced
89 G932 0 to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 126
magnetic flux vector)
0 to 50 Ω, 9999  0.001 Ω 
90 C120 Motor constant (R1) 9999 127
0 to 400 mΩ, 9999  0.01 mΩ 
0 to 50 Ω, 9999  0.001 Ω 
91 C121 Motor constant (R2) 9999 127
0 to 400 mΩ, 9999  0.01 mΩ 
Motor constant (L1)/d-axis 0 to 6000mH, 9999  0.1 mH 
92 C122 9999 127
inductance (Ld) 0 to 400mH, 9999  0.01 mH 
Motor constant (L2)/q-axis 0 to 6000mH, 9999  0.1 mH 
93 C123 9999 127
inductance (Lq) 0 to 400mH, 9999  0.01 mH 
0.1% 
94 C124 Motor constant (X) 0 to 100%, 9999
0.01% 
9999 127
8
95 C111 Online auto tuning selection 0 to 2 1 0 129
Parameter List
96 C110 Auto tuning setting/status 0, 1, 11, 101 1 0 127
100 G040 V/F1 (first frequency) 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 129
101 G041
Adjustable 5 points V/F
V/F1 (first frequency voltage) 0 to 1000 V 0.1 V 0V 129

102 G042 V/F2 (second frequency) 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 129
103 G043 V/F2 (second frequency voltage) 0 to 1000 V 0.1 V 0V 129
104 G044 V/F3 (third frequency) 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 129
105 G045 V/F3 (third frequency voltage) 0 to 1000 V 0.1 V 0V 129
106 G046 V/F4 (fourth frequency) 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 129
107 G047 V/F4 (fourth frequency voltage) 0 to 1000 V 0.1 V 0V 129
108 G048 V/F5 (fifth frequency) 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 129
109 G049 V/F5 (fifth frequency voltage) 0 to 1000 V 0.1 V 0V 129
110 F030 Third acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 109
111 F031 Third deceleration time 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 109
Third functions
112 G020 Third torque boost 0 to 30%, 9999 0.1% 9999 108
113 G021 Third V/F (base frequency) 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 108
114 H602 Third stall prevention operation level 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 112
Third stall prevention operation
115 H603 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 112
frequency
116 M445 Third output frequency detection 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 116
117 N020 PU communication station number 0 to 31 1 0 129
48, 96, 192, 384, 576,
118 N021 PU communication speed
PU connector communication
1 192 129
768, 1152
PU communication stop bit length /
- 0, 1, 10, 11 1
data length
119 N022 PU communication data length 0, 1
1
0
129
N023 PU communication stop bit length 0, 1 1

120 N024 PU communication parity check 0 to 2 1 2 129
121 N025 PU communication retry count 0 to 10, 9999 1 1 129
PU communication check time
122 N026 0, 0.1 to 999.8 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 129
interval
PU communication waiting time
123 N027 0 to 150 ms, 9999 1 ms 9999 129
setting
124 N028 PU communication CR/LF selection 0 to 2 1 1 129
69
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
group FM CA
increments page
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain

─ 125 T022 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 132
frequency Simple
─ 126 T042 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 132
frequency Simple
PID control automatic switchover
127 A612 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 133
frequency
0, 10, 11, 20, 21,
40 to 43, 50, 51, 60,
61, 70, 71, 80, 81, 90,
128 A610 PID action selection 91, 100, 101, 1000, 1 0 133
PID operation
1001, 1010, 1011,

2000, 2001, 2010,
2011
129 A613 PID proportional band 0.1 to 1000%, 9999 0.1% 100% 133
130 A614 PID integral time 0.1 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 1s 133
131 A601 PID upper limit 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 133
132 A602 PID lower limit 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 133
133 A611 PID action set point 0 to 100%, 9999 0.01% 9999 133
134 A615 PID differential time 0.01 to 10 s, 9999 0.01 s 9999 133
Electronic bypass sequence
135 A000 0, 1 1 0 134
selection
136 A001 MC switchover interlock time 0 to 100 s 0.1 s 1s 134
Bypass
137 A002 Start waiting time 0 to 100 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 134

138 A003 Bypass selection at a fault 0, 1 1 0 134
8 139 A004
Automatic switchover frequency
from inverter to bypass operation
0 to 60 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 134
Backlash acceleration stopping

Parameter List
140 F200 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 1 Hz 113

frequency
measures
Backlash
141 F201 Backlash acceleration stopping time 0 to 360 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 113
Backlash deceleration stopping
142 F202 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 1 Hz 113
frequency
143 F203 Backlash deceleration stopping time 0 to 360 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 113
0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12,
─ 144 M002 Speed setting switchover 102, 104, 106, 108, 1 4 115
110, 112
PU
145 E103 PU display language selection 0 to 7 1 ─ 134
Acceleration/deceleration time
─ 147 F022 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 109
switching frequency
148 H620 Stall prevention level at 0 V input 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 112
Current detection
149 H621 Stall prevention level at 10 V input 0 to 400% 0.1% 200% 112
150 M460 Output current detection level 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 134
Output current detection signal delay
151 M461 0 to 10 s 0.1 s 0s 134
time
152 M462 Zero current detection level 0 to 400% 0.1% 5% 134
153 M463 Zero current detection time 0 to 10 s 0.01 s 0.5 s 134
Voltage reduction selection during
─ 154 H631 0, 1, 10, 11 1 1 112
stall prevention operation
RT signal function validity condition
─ 155 T730 0, 10 1 0 135
selection
─ 156 H501 Stall prevention operation selection 0 to 31, 100, 101 1 0 112
─ 157 M430 OL signal output timer 0 to 25 s, 9999 0.1 s 0s 112
1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18,
21, 24, 32 to 34, 36,
─ 158 M301 AM terminal function selection 46, 50, 52 to 54, 61, 1 1 116
62, 67, 70, 87 to 90,
91 to 98
Automatic switchover frequency
─ 159 A005 range from bypass to inverter 0 to 10 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 134
operation
─ 160 E440 User group read selection Simple 0, 1, 9999 1 0 135
70
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
group FM CA
increments page
Frequency setting/key lock operation

─ 161 E200 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 135
selection
Automatic restart after instantaneous
162 A700 0 to 3, 10 to 13 1 0 119
power failure selection
Automatic
functions
restart
163 A704 First cushion time for restart 0 to 20 s 0.1 s 0s 119

164 A705 First cushion voltage for restart 0 to 100% 0.1% 0% 119
Stall prevention operation level for
165 A710 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 119
restart
Output current detection signal
detection
166 M433 0 to 10 s, 9999 0.1 s 0.1 s 134

Current
retention time
Output current detection operation
167 M464 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 134
selection
E000
─ 168
E080
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
E001
─ 169
E081
Cumulative
170 M020 Watt-hour meter clear 0, 10, 9999 1 9999 116

monitor
clear
171 M030 Operation hour meter clear 0, 9999 1 9999 116
User group registered display/batch

172 E441 9999, (0 to 16) 1 0 135
group
clear
User
173 E442 User group registration 0 to 1999, 9999 1 9999 135

174 E443 User group clear 0 to 1999, 9999
0 to 20, 22 to 28, 37,
1 9999 135
8
42 to 48, 50 to 53,
Parameter List
178 T700 STF terminal function selection 57 to 60, 62, 64 to 74, 1 60 136
76 to 80, 85, 87 to 89,
92 to 96, 9999
Input terminal function assignment
0 to 20, 22 to 28, 37,

42 to 48, 50 to 53,
57 to 59, 61, 62,
179 T701 STR terminal function selection 1 61 136
64 to 74, 76 to 80, 85,
87 to 89, 92 to 96,
9999
180 T702 RL terminal function selection 1 0 136
181 T703 RM terminal function selection 1 1 136
182 T704 RH terminal function selection 1 2 136
183 T705 RT terminal function selection 0 to 20, 22 to 28, 37, 1 3 136
184 T706 AU terminal function selection 42 to 48, 50 to 53, 1 4 136
185 T707 JOG terminal function selection 57 to 59, 62, 64 to 74, 1 5 136
186 T708 CS terminal function selection 76 to 80, 85, 87 to 89, 1 6 136
92 to 96, 9999
24 
187 T709 MRS terminal function selection 1 136
10 
188 T710 STOP terminal function selection 1 25 136
189 T711 RES terminal function selection 1 62 136
71
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
group FM CA
increments page
0 to 8, 10 to 20, 22,
190 M400 RUN terminal function selection 25 to 28, 30 to 36, 1 0 137
38 to 57, 60, 61, 63,
64, 67, 68, 70, 79, 80,
84, 85, 90 to 99,
191 M401 SU terminal function selection 100 to 108, 1 1 137
110 to 116, 120, 122,
125 to 128,
2 
130 to 136,
192 M402 IPF terminal function selection 1 137
138 to 157, 160, 161,
9999 
163, 164, 167, 168,
170, 179, 180, 184,
Output terminal function assignment
193 M403 OL terminal function selection 185, 190 to 199, 1 3 137

200 to 208,
211 to 213,
300 to 308,
194 M404 FU terminal function selection 311 to 313, 9999 1 4 137

0 to 8, 10 to 20, 22,
25 to 28, 30 to 36,
38 to 57, 60, 61, 63,
64, 67, 68, 70, 79, 80,
195 M405 ABC1 terminal function selection 84, 85, 90, 91, 94 to 1 99 137
99, 100 to 108,
110 to 116, 120, 122,
125 to 128,
130 to 136,
8 138 to 157, 160, 161,
163, 164, 167, 168,
170, 179, 180, 184,
Parameter List
185, 190, 191,

194 to 199,
196 M406 ABC2 terminal function selection 200 to 208,
1 9999 137
211 to 213,
300 to 308,
311 to 313, 9999

Multi-speed
D308
setting
232 to Multi-speed setting (8 speed to 15

to 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 109
239 speed)
D315
─ 240 E601 Soft-PWM operation selection 0, 1 1 1 122

─ 241 M043 Analog input display unit switchover 0, 1 1 0 132
Terminal 1 added compensation
─ 242 T021 0 to 100% 0.1% 100% 123
amount (terminal 2)
Terminal 1 added compensation
─ 243 T041 0 to 100% 0.1% 75% 123
amount (terminal 4)
─ 244 H100 Cooling fan operation selection 0, 1, 101 to 105 1 1 138
compensation
245 G203 Rated slip 0 to 50%, 9999 0.01% 9999 138

Slip
246 G204 Slip compensation time constant 0.01 to 10 s 0.01 s 0.5 s 138
Constant-power range slip

247 G205 0, 9999 1 9999 138
compensation selection
─ 248 A006 Self power management selection 0 to 2 1 0 138
─ 249 H101 Earth (ground) fault detection at start 0, 1 1 0 138
0 to 100 s,
─ 250 G106 Stop selection 1000 to 1100 s, 8888, 0.1 s 9999 138
9999
Output phase loss protection
─ 251 H200 0, 1 1 1 139
selection
72
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
group FM CA
increments page
compensation
252 T050 Override bias

Frequency
0 to 200% 0.1% 50% 123

function
253 T051 Override gain 0 to 200% 0.1% 150% 123
─ 254 A007 Main circuit power OFF waiting time 1 to 3600 s, 9999 1s 600 s 138
255 E700 Life alarm status display (0 to 15) 1 0 139

Life check
256  E701 Inrush current limit circuit life display (0 to 100%) 1% 100% 139
257 E702 Control circuit capacitor life display (0 to 100%) 1% 100% 139
258  E703 Main circuit capacitor life display (0 to 100%) 1% 100% 139
259  E704 Main circuit capacitor life measuring 0, 1 1 0 139
PWM frequency automatic
─ 260  E602 0, 1 1 1 122
switchover
261 A730 Power failure stop selection 0 to 2, 11, 12, 21, 22 1 0 139
Power failure stop
Subtracted frequency at deceleration

262 A731 0 to 20 Hz 0.01 Hz 3 Hz 139
start
263 A732 Subtraction starting frequency 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 139
264 A733 Power-failure deceleration time 1 0 to 3600 s 0.1 s 5s 139
265 A734 Power-failure deceleration time 2 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 139
Power failure deceleration time
266 A735 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 139
switchover frequency
─ 267 T001 Terminal 4 input selection 0 to 2 1 0 123
─ 268 M022 Monitor decimal digits selection 0, 1, 9999 1 9999 116
─ 269 E023 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set. 8
Stop-on contact/load torque high-
─ 270 A200 0 to 3, 11, 13 1 0 140
Parameter List
speed frequency control selection
271 A201 High-speed setting maximum current 0 to 400% 0.1% 50% 140
frequency control
Load torque
high speed
Middle-speed setting minimum

272 A202 0 to 400% 0.1% 100% 140
current
273 A203 Current averaging range 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 140
274 A204 Current averaging filter time constant 1 to 4000 1 16 140
Stop-on contact excitation current

275 A205
Stop-on
0 to 300%, 9999 0.1% 9999

contact
141
control
low-speed multiplying factor

PWM carrier frequency at stop-on 0 to 9, 9999 
276  A206 1 9999 141
contact 0 to 4, 9999 
278 A100 Brake opening frequency 0 to 30 Hz 0.01 Hz 3 Hz 141
Brake sequence function
279 A101 Brake opening current 0 to 400% 0.1% 130% 141

280 A102 Brake opening current detection time 0 to 2 s 0.1 s 0.3 s 141
281 A103 Brake operation time at start 0 to 5 s 0.1 s 0.3 s 141
282 A104 Brake operation frequency 0 to 30 Hz 0.01 Hz 6 Hz 141
283 A105 Brake operation time at stop 0 to 5 s 0.1 s 0.3 s 141
Deceleration detection function
284 A106 0, 1 1 0 141
selection
A107 Overspeed detection frequency
141,
285 Speed deviation excess detection 0 to 30 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999
H416 143
frequency
286 G400 Droop gain 0 to 100% 0.1% 0% 143
control
Droop
287 G401 Droop filter time constant 0 to 1 s 0.01 s 0.3 s 143

288 G402 Droop function activation selection 0 to 2, 10, 11, 20 to 22 1 0 143
─ 289 M431 Inverter output terminal filter 5 to 50 ms, 9999 1 ms 9999 137
─ 290 M044 Monitor negative output selection 0 to 7 1 0 116
[FM Type]
0, 1, 10, 11, 20, 21,
─ 291 D100 Pulse train I/O selection 100 1 0 144
[CA Type]
0, 1
73
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
group FM CA
increments page
A110
─ 292 Automatic acceleration/deceleration 0, 1, 3, 5 to 8, 11 1 0 121
F500
Acceleration/deceleration separate
─ 293 F513 0 to 2 1 0 121
selection
─ 294 A785 UV avoidance voltage gain 0 to 200% 0.1% 100% 139
Frequency change increment amount
─ 295 E201 0, 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10 0.01 0 135
setting
0 to 6, 99, 100 to 106,
Password
296 E410 Password lock level 1 9999

function
144
199, 9999
(0 to 5), 1000 to 9998,
297 E411 Password lock/unlock 1 9999 144
9999
─ 298 A711 Frequency search gain 0 to 32767, 9999 1 9999 127
Rotation direction detection
─ 299 A701 0, 1, 9999 1 0 119
selection at restarting
0 to 8, 10 to 20, 22,
25 to 28, 30 to 36,
313  M410 DO0 output selection 38 to 57, 60, 61, 63,
1 9999 137
64, 68, 70, 79, 80,

84 to 99, 100 to 108,
CC-Link IE
110 to 116, 120, 122,

314  M411 DO1 output selection 125 to 128, 1 9999 137
130 to 136,
138 to 157, 160, 161,
163, 164, 168, 170,
8 315  M412 DO2 output selection 179, 180, 184 to 199,
200 to 208,
1 9999 137
300 to 308, 9999 

Parameter List
331 RS-485 communication station

N030 0 to 31 (0 to 247) 1 0 129
 number
3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96,
332
N031 RS-485 communication speed 192, 384, 576, 768, 1 96 129

1152
RS-485 communication stop bit
- 0, 1, 10, 11 1 1
333 length / data length
129
 N032 PU communication data length 0, 1 1 0
N033 PU communication stop bit length 0, 1 1 1
334 RS-485 communication parity check
N034 0 to 2 1 2 129
 selection
RS-485 communication
335
N035 RS-485 communication retry count 0 to 10, 9999 1 1 129

336 RS-485 communication check time
N036 0 to 999.8 s, 9999 0.1 s 0s 129
 interval
337 RS-485 communication waiting time
N037 0 to 150 ms, 9999 1 ms 9999 129
 setting
Communication operation command
338 D010 0, 1 1 0 145
source
Communication speed command
339 D011 0 to 2 1 0 145
source
Communication startup mode
340 D001 0 to 2, 10, 12 1 0 125
selection
341 RS-485 communication CR/LF
N038 0 to 2 1 1 129
 selection
Communication EEPROM write
342 N001 0, 1 1 0 129
selection
343
N080 Communication error count - 1 0 129

─ 349  N010 Communication reset selection 0, 1 1 0 129
74
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
group FM CA
increments page
350  A510 Stop position command selection 0, 1, 9999 1 9999 145

351  A526 Orientation speed 0 to 30 Hz 0.01 Hz 2 Hz 145
352  A527 Creep speed 0 to 10 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.5 Hz 145
353  A528 Creep switchover position 0 to 16383 1 511 145
354  A529 Position loop switchover position 0 to 8191 1 96 145
355  A530 DC injection brake start position 0 to 255 1 5 145
Orientation control
356  A531 Internal stop position command 0 to 16383 1 0 145

357  A532 Orientation in-position zone 0 to 255 1 5 145
358  A533 Servo torque selection 0 to 13 1 1 145
359  C141 Encoder rotation direction 0, 1, 100, 101 1 1 145
360  A511 16-bit data selection 0 to 127 1 0 145
361  A512 Position shift 0 to 16383 1 0 145
362  A520 Orientation position loop gain 0.1 to 100 0.1 1 145
363  A521 Completion signal output delay time 0 to 5 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 145
364  A522 Encoder stop check time 0 to 5 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 145
365  A523 Orientation limit 0 to 60 s, 9999 1s 9999 145
366  A524 Recheck time 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 145
367  G240 Speed feedback range 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 146
Encoder feedback
368  G241 Feedback gain 0 to 100 0.1 1 146

369  C140 Number of encoder pulses 0 to 4096 1 1024 146
374 H800 Overspeed detection level 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 146
Encoder signal loss detection

376  C148 0, 1 1 0 146
enable/disable selection
8
380 F300 Acceleration S-pattern 1 0 to 50% 1% 0%
deceleration C
113
acceleration/
Parameter List
S-pattern
381 F301 Deceleration S-pattern 1 0 to 50% 1% 0% 113
382 F302 Acceleration S-pattern 2 0 to 50% 1% 0% 113
383 F303 Deceleration S-pattern 2 0 to 50% 1% 0% 113
384 D101 Input pulse division scaling factor 0 to 250 1 0 144

Pulse
input
train
385 D110 Frequency for zero input pulse 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 144
386 D111 Frequency for maximum input pulse 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 144
393  A525 Orientation selection 0 to 2, 10 to 12 1 0 145
394  A540 Number of machine side gear teeth 0 to 32767 1 1 145
Orientation
395  A541 Number of motor side gear teeth 0 to 32767 1 1 145

control
396  A542 Orientation speed gain (P term) 0 to 1000 1 60 145

397  A543 Orientation speed integral time 0 to 20 s 0.001 s 0.333 s 145
398  A544 Orientation speed gain (D term) 0 to 100 0.1 1 145
399  A545 Orientation deceleration ratio 0 to 1000 1 20 145
─ 413  M601 Encoder pulse division ratio 1 to 32767 1 1 158
414 A800 PLC function operation selection 0 to 2 1 0 146
function
415 A801 Inverter operation lock mode setting 0, 1 1 0 146

PLC
416 A802 Pre-scale function selection 0 to 5 1 0 146

417 A803 Pre-scale setting value 0 to 32767 1 1 146
75
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
group FM CA
increments page
0 to 2, 10, 100, 110, 147,

419 B000 Position command source selection 1 0
1110 148
Command pulse scaling factor
420 B001 numerator (electronic gear 1 to 32767 1 1 149
numerator)
Command pulse multiplication
421 B002 denominator (electronic gear 1 to 32767 1 1 149
denominator)
422 B003 Position control gain 0 to 150 sec-1 1 sec-1 25 sec-1 149
Position control
423 B004 Position feed forward gain 0 to 100% 1% 0% 149

Position command acceleration/
424 B005 0 to 50 s 0.001 s 0s 149
deceleration time constant
425 B006 Position feed forward command filter 0 to 5 s 0.001 s 0s 149
426 B007 In-position width 0 to 32767 pulse 1 pulse 100 pulse 149
427 B008 Excessive level error 0 to 400K pulse, 9999 1K pulse 40K pulse 149
428 B009 Command pulse selection 0 to 5 1 0 148
429 B010 Clear signal selection 0, 1 1 1 148
0 to 5, 12, 13,
100 to 105, 112, 113,
1000 to 1005, 1012,
430 B011 Pulse monitor selection 1 9999 148
1013, 1100 to 1105,
1112, 1113, 8888,
9999
─ 432  D120 Pulse train torque command bias 0 to 400% 1% 0% 155
─ 433  D121 Pulse train torque command gain 0 to 400% 1% 150% 155
8
CC-Link IE
434  N110 Network number (CC-Link IE) 0 to 255 1 0 129

Parameter List
435  N111 Station number (CC-Link IE) 0 to 255 1 0 129
─ 446 B012 Model position control gain 0 to 150 sec-1 1 sec-1 25 sec-1 149
0, 1, 3 to 6, 13 to 16,
20, 23, 24, 30, 33, 34,
40, 43, 44, 50, 53, 54,
450 C200 Second applied motor 70, 73, 74, 330, 333, 1 9999 122
334, 8093, 8094,
9090, 9093, 9094,
9999
0 to 6, 10 to 14, 20,
Second motor control method
451 G300 100 to 106, 1 9999 126
selection
110 to 114, 9999
0.4 to 55 kW, 9999  0.01 kW 
453 C201 Second motor capacity 9999 126
0 to 3600 kW, 9999  0.1 kW 
Second motor constants
454 C202 Number of second motor poles 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 9999 1 9999 126
0 to 500 A, 9999  0.01 A 
455 C225 Second motor excitation current 9999 127
0 to 3600 A, 9999  0.1 A 
200 V 
456 C204 Rated second motor voltage 0 to 1000 V 0.1 V 127
400 V 
457 C205 Rated second motor frequency 10 to 400 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 127
0 to 50 Ω, 9999  0.001 Ω 
458 C220 Second motor constant (R1) 9999 127
0 to 400 mΩ, 9999  0.01 mΩ 
0 to 50 Ω, 9999  0.001 Ω
459 C221 Second motor constant (R2) 9999 127
0 to 400 mΩ, 9999  0.01 mΩ 
Second motor constant (L1) / d-axis 0 to 6000mH, 9999  0.1 mH 
460 C222 9999 127
inductance (Ld) 0 to 400mH, 9999  0.01 mH 
Second motor constant (L2) / q-axis 0 to 6000mH, 9999  0.1 mH 
461 C223 9999 127
inductance (Lq) 0 to 400mH, 9999  0.01 mH 
0.1% 
462 C224 Second motor constant (X) 0 to 100%, 9999 9999 127
0.01% 
Second motor auto tuning setting/
463 C210 0, 1, 11, 101 1 0 127
status
76
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
group FM CA
increments page
Digital position control sudden stop

464 B020 0 to 360 s 0.1 s 0s 147
deceleration time
465 B021 First target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 147
466 B022 First target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 147
467 B023 Second target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 147
468 B024 Second target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 147
469 B025 Third target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 147
470 B026 Third target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 147
471 B027 Fourth target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 147
472 B028 Fourth target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 147
473 B029 Fifth target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 147
474 B030 Fifth target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 147
475 B031 Sixth target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 147
476 B032 Sixth target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 147
477 B033 Seventh target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 147
Seventh target position upper 4
478 B034 0 to 9999 1 0
Simple position control
147
digits
479 B035 Eighth target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 147
480 B036 Eighth target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 147
481 B037 Ninth target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 147
482 B038 Ninth target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 147
483 B039 Tenth target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 147
484 B040 Tenth target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 147
485 B041
Eleventh target position lower 4
digits
0 to 9999 1 0 147 8
Eleventh target position upper 4
486 B042 0 to 9999 1 0 147
Parameter List
digits
487 B043 Twelfth target position lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 147
488 B044 Twelfth target position upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 147
Thirteenth target position lower 4
489 B045 0 to 9999 1 0 147
digits
Thirteenth target position upper 4
490 B046 0 to 9999 1 0 147
digits
Fourteenth target position lower 4
491 B047 0 to 9999 1 0 147
digits
Fourteenth target position upper 4
492 B048 0 to 9999 1 0 147
digits
Fifteenth target position lower 4
493 B049 0 to 9999 1 0 147
digits
Fifteenth target position upper 4
494 B050 0 to 9999 1 0 147
digits
495 M500 Remote output selection 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 149
Remote
output
496 M501 Remote output data 1 0 to 4095 1 0 149
497 M502 Remote output data 2 0 to 4095 1 0 149

0, 9696
─ 498 A804 PLC function flash memory clear 1 0 146
(0 to 9999)
Communication error execution
─ 500  N011 0 to 999.8 s 0.1 s 0s 129
waiting time
Communication error occurrence
─ 501  N012 0 1 0 129
count display
Stop mode selection at
─ 502 N013 0 to 4 1 0 129
communication error
Maintenance
503 E710 Maintenance timer 1 0 (1 to 9998) 1 0 150
Maintenance timer 1 warning output

504 E711 0 to 9998, 9999 1 9999 150
set time
─ 505 M001 Speed setting reference 1 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 115
77
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
group FM CA
increments page
S-pattern time at a start of

516 F400 0.1 to 2.5 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 113
acceleration
deceleration D
acceleration/
S-pattern time at a completion of

S-pattern
517 F401 0.1 to 2.5 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 113

acceleration
S-pattern time at a start of
518 F402 0.1 to 2.5 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 113
deceleration
519 F403 0.1 to 2.5 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 113
deceleration
─ 522 G105 Output stop frequency 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 150
539 MODBUS RTU communication check
─ N002 0 to 999.8 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 129
 time interval
─ 541  N100 Frequency command sign selection 0, 1 1 0 129
547 N040 USB communication station number 0 to 31 1 0 150
USB
USB communication check time

548 N041 0 to 999.8 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 150
interval
549
Communication
N000 Protocol selection 0, 1 1 0 129


NET mode operation command
550  D012 0, 1, 9999  1 9999 145
source selection
PU mode operation command source
551 D013 1 to 3, 9999  1 9999 145
selection
─ 552 H429 Frequency jump range 0 to 30 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 115
553 A603 PID deviation limit 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999

control
133
PID
8 554 A604 PID signal operation selection 0 to 3, 10 to 13 1 0 133
555 E720 Current average time 0.1 to 1 s 0.1 s 1s

Parameter List
150
Current average
value monitor
556 E721 Data output mask time 0 to 20 s 0.1 s 0s 150
0 to 500 A  0.01 A 
Current average value monitor signal Inverter rated
557 E722 150
output reference current current
0 to 3600 A  0.1 A 
─ 560 A712 Second frequency search gain 0 to 32767, 9999 1 9999 127
─ 561 H020 PTC thermistor protection level 0.5 to 30 kΩ, 9999 0.01 kΩ 9999 110
Energization time carrying-over
─ 563 M021 (0 to 65535) 1 0 116
times
─ 564 M031 Operating time carrying-over times (0 to 65535) 1 0 116
Second motor excitation current
─ 565 G301 0 to 400 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 128
break point
Second motor excitation current low-
─ 566 G302 0 to 300%, 9999 0.1% 9999 128
speed scaling factor
constants
Second
motor
569 G942 Second motor speed control gain 0 to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 126
Multiple
0 to 3 
rating
570 E301 Multiple rating setting 1 2 151

1, 2 
─ 571 F103 Holding time at a start 0 to 10 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 111

A680
─ 573 4 mA input check selection 1 to 4, 9999 1 9999 151
T052
─ 574 C211 Second motor online auto tuning 0 to 2 1 0 129
575 A621 Output interruption detection time 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 1s 133
control
PID
576 A622 Output interruption detection level 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 133

577 A623 Output interruption cancel level 900 to 1100% 0.1% 1000% 133
78
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
group FM CA
increments page
592 A300 Traverse function selection 0 to 2 1 0 151

Traverse function
593 A301 Maximum amplitude amount 0 to 25% 0.1% 10% 151

Amplitude compensation amount
594 A302 0 to 50% 0.1% 10% 151
during deceleration
595 A303 0 to 50% 0.1% 10% 151
during acceleration
596 A304 Amplitude acceleration time 0.1 to 3600 s 0.1 s 5s 151
597 A305 Amplitude deceleration time 0.1 to 3600 s 0.1 s 5s 151
175 to 215 VDC, 9999

─ 598  H102 Undervoltage level 0.1 V 9999 151
350 to 430 VDC, 9999

0 
─ 599 T721 X10 terminal input selection 0, 1 1 114
1 
First free thermal reduction
600 H001 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999
Electronic thermal
110
frequency 1
601 H002 First free thermal reduction ratio 1 1 to 100% 1% 100% 110
O/L relay

602 H003 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 110
frequency 2
603 H004 First free thermal reduction ratio 2 1 to 100% 1% 100% 110
604 H005 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 110
frequency 3
Power failure stop external signal
─ 606 T722 0, 1 1 1 139
input selection
─ 607 H006 Motor permissible load level 110 to 250% 1% 150% 110
─ 608 H016 Second motor permissible load level
PID set point/deviation input
110 to 250%, 9999 1% 9999 110 8
control
609 A624 1 to 5 1 2 133

selection
PID
Parameter List
610 A625 PID measured value input selection 1 to 5 1 3 133
─ 611 F003 Acceleration time at a restart 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 119
Reverse rotation excitation current
─ 617 G080 0 to 300%, 9999 0.1% 9999 128
low-speed scaling factor
Cumulative pulse clear signal
635  M610 0 to 3 1 0 148
pulse monitor
selection
Cumulative
Cumulative pulse division scaling

636  M611 1 to 16384 1 1 148
factor
Control terminal option-Cumulative
637  M612 1 to 16384 1 1 148
pulse division scaling factor
638  M613 Cumulative pulse storage 0 to 3 1 0 148
639 A108 Brake opening current selection 0, 1 1 0 141
640 A109 Brake operation frequency selection 0, 1 1 0 141
Second brake sequence operation
641 A130 0, 7, 8, 9999 1 0 141
selection
642 A120 Second brake opening frequency 0 to 30 Hz 0.01 Hz 3 Hz 141

643 A121 Second brake opening current 0 to 400% 0.1% 130% 141
Second brake opening current
644 A122 0 to 2 s 0.1 s 0.3 s 141
detection time
645 A123 Second brake operation time at start 0 to 5 s 0.1 s 0.3 s 141
646 A124 Second brake operation frequency 0 to 30 Hz 0.01 Hz 6 Hz 141
647 A125 Second brake operation time at stop 0 to 5 s 0.1 s 0.3 s 141
Second deceleration detection
648 A126 0, 1 1 0 141
function selection
650 A128 0, 1 1 0 141
selection
Second brake operation frequency
651 A129 0, 1 1 0 141
selection
smoothing
653 G410 Speed smoothing control 0 to 200% 0.1% 0% 152

control
Speed
654 G411 Speed smoothing cutoff frequency 0 to 120 Hz 0.01 Hz 20 Hz 152
79
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
group FM CA
increments page
655 M530 Analog remote output selection 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 152

output function
Analog remote
656 M531 Analog remote output 1 800 to 1200% 0.1% 1000% 152
excitation deceleration
Increased magnetic excitation

660 G130 0, 1 1 0
Increased magnetic
153
deceleration operation selection
661 G131 Magnetic excitation increase rate 0 to 40%, 9999 0.1% 9999 153

662 G132 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 153
current level
Control circuit temperature signal

─ 663 M060 0 to 100°C 1°C 0°C 153
output level
Regeneration avoidance frequency
─ 665 G125 0 to 200% 0.1% 100% 159
gain
─ 668 A786 Power failure stop frequency gain 0 to 200% 0.1% 100% 139
SF-PR slip amount adjustment
─ 673  G060 2, 4, 6, 9999 1 9999 153
operation selection
─ 674  G061 SF-PR slip amount adjustment gain 0 to 500% 0.1% 100% 153
679 G420 Second droop gain 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 143
8
Second droop
680 G421 Second droop filter time constant 0 to 1 s, 9999 0.01 s 9999 143
control
Second droop function activation 0 to 2, 10, 11,

681 G422 1 9999 143
Parameter List
selection 20 to 22, 9999

682 G423 Second droop break point gain 0.1 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 143
683 G424 Second droop break point torque 0.1 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 143
─ 684 C000 Tuning data unit switchover 0, 1 1 0 127
Maintenance

687 E713 0 to 9998, 9999 1 9999 150
set time
689 E715 0 to 9998, 9999 1 9999 150
set time
─ 690 H881 Deceleration check time 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 1s 153
Second free thermal reduction
692 H011 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999
Electronic thermal
110
frequency 1
693 H012 Second free thermal reduction ratio 1 1 to 100% 1% 100% 110
O/L relay

694 H013 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 110
frequency 2
695 H014 Second free thermal reduction ratio 2 1 to 100% 1% 100% 110
696 H015 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 110
frequency 3
─ 699 T740 Input terminal filter 5 to 50 ms, 9999 1 ms 9999 136
80
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
group FM CA
increments page
702  C106 Maximum motor frequency 0 to 400 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 127
0 to 5000 mV/(rad/s), 0.1 mV/
706  C130 Induced voltage constant (phi f) 9999 127
9999 (rad/s)
707 C107 Motor inertia (integer) 10 to 999, 9999 1 9999 127
711  C131 Motor Ld decay ratio 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 127
712  C132 Motor Lq decay ratio 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 127
Starting resistance tuning
717  C182 0 to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 127
compensation
Starting magnetic pole position 0 to 6000 μs, 10000 to
721  C185 1 μs 9999 127
detection pulse width 16000 μs, 9999
Motor constants
724 C108 Motor inertia (exponent) 0 to 7, 9999 1 9999 127

725  C133 Motor protection current level 100 to 500%, 9999 0.1% 9999 127
Second motor induced voltage 0 to 5000 mV/(rad/s), 0.1 mV/
738  C230 9999 127
constant (phi f) 9999 (rad/s)
739  C231 Second motor Ld decay ratio 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 127
740  C232 Second motor Lq decay ratio 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 127
Second starting resistance tuning
741  C282 0 to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 127
compensation
Second motor magnetic pole 0 to 6000 μs, 10000 to
742  C285 1 μs 9999 127
detection pulse width 16000 μs, 9999
743  C206 Second motor maximum frequency 0 to 400 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 127
744 C207 Second motor inertia (integer) 10 to 999, 9999 1 9999 127
745 C208 Second motor inertia (exponent) 0 to 7, 9999 1 9999 127
Second motor protection current
746  C233 100 to 500%, 9999 0.1% 9999 127
level
─ 747  G350

Second motor low-speed range
0, 9999 1 9999 154
8
torque characteristic selection
Parameter List
0, 10, 11, 20, 21, 50,
51, 60, 61, 70, 71, 80,
81, 90, 91, 100, 101,
753 A650 Second PID action selection 1 0 133
1000, 1001, 1010,
1011, 2000, 2001,
PID control
2010, 2011
Second PID control automatic
754 A652 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 133
755 A651 Second PID action set point 0 to 100%, 9999 0.01% 9999 133
756 A653 Second PID proportional band 0.1 to 1000%, 9999 0.1% 100% 133
757 A654 Second PID integral time 0.1 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 1s 133
758 A655 Second PID differential time 0.01 to 10 s, 9999 0.01 s 9999 133
759 A600 PID unit selection 0 to 43, 9999 1 9999 133
760 A616 Pre-charge fault selection 0, 1 1 0 154
761 A617 Pre-charge ending level 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 154
PID pre-charge function
762 A618 Pre-charge ending time 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 154
763 A619 Pre-charge upper detection level 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 154
764 A620 Pre-charge time limit 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 154
765 A656 Second pre-charge fault selection 0, 1 1 0 154
766 A657 Second pre-charge ending level 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 154
767 A658 Second pre-charge ending time 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 154
Second pre-charge upper detection
768 A659 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 154
level
769 A660 Second pre-charge time limit 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 154
774 M101 Operation panel monitor selection 1 1 to 3, 5 to 14, 1 9999 116

function
Monitor
17 to 20, 22 to 36,
775 M102 Operation panel monitor selection 2 38 to 46, 50 to 57, 61, 1 9999 116
62, 64, 67, 71 to 74,
776 M103 Operation panel monitor selection 3 87 to 98, 100, 9999
1 9999 116
A681 4 mA input check operation

─ 777 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 151
T053 frequency
A682
─ 778 4 mA input check filter 0 to 10 s 0.01 s 0s 151
T054
81
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
group FM CA
increments page
Operation frequency during

─ 779 N014 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 129
communication error
Low speed range torque
─ 788  G250 0, 9999 1 9999 154
characteristic selection
─ 791  F070 Acceleration time in low-speed range 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 109
─ 792  F071 Deceleration time in low-speed range 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 109
Pulse increment setting for output 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000
─ 799 M520 0.1 kWh 1 kWh 154
power kWh
0 to 6, 9 to 14, 20,
─ 800 G200 Control method selection 1 20 126
100 to 106, 109 to 114
─ 801 H704 Output limit level 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 113
─ 802 G102 Pre-excitation selection 0, 1 1 0 110
Constant output range torque 113,
803 G210 0 to 2, 10, 11 1 0
characteristic selection 155
command
113,
804 D400 Torque command source selection 0 to 6 1 0
Torque
155
113,
805 D401 Torque command value (RAM) 600 to 1400% 1% 1000%
155
Torque command value (RAM, 113,
806 D402 600 to 1400% 1% 1000%
EEPROM) 155
807 H410 Speed limit selection 0 to 2 1 0 155
Speed limit
Forward rotation speed limit/speed

808 H411 0 to 400 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 155
limit
Reverse rotation speed limit/reverse-
809 H412 0 to 400 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 155
side speed limit
8 810 H700 Torque limit input method selection 0 to 2 1 0 113

113,
811 D030 Set resolution switchover 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0
115
Torque limit
Parameter List
812 H701 Torque limit level (regeneration) 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 113
813 H702 Torque limit level (3rd quadrant) 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 113
814 H703 Torque limit level (4th quadrant) 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 113
815 H710 Torque limit level 2 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 113
816 H720 Torque limit level during acceleration 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 113
817 H721 Torque limit level during deceleration 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 113
Easy gain tuning response level

Easy gain
818 C112 1 to 15 1 2 156

setting
tuning
819 C113 Easy gain tuning selection 0 to 2 1 0 156
820 G211 Speed control P gain 1 0 to 1000% 1% 60% 156

821 G212 Speed control integral time 1 0 to 20 s 0.001 s 0.333 s 156
822 T003 Speed setting filter 1 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.001 s 9999 123
823  G215 Speed detection filter 1 0 to 0.1 s 0.001 s 0.001 s 156
Torque control P gain 1 (current loop
824 G213 0 to 500% 1% 100% 156
proportional gain)
Torque control integral time 1
825 G214 0 to 500 ms 0.1 ms 5 ms 156
(current loop integral time)
Adjustment function
826 T004 Torque setting filter 1 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.001 s 9999 123

827 G216 Torque detection filter 1 0 to 0.1 s 0.001 s 0s 156
828 G224 Model speed control gain 0 to 1000% 1% 60% 157
Number of machine end encoder
829  A546 0 to 4096 1 9999 145
pulses
830 G311 Speed control P gain 2 0 to 1000%, 9999 1% 9999 156
831 G312 Speed control integral time 2 0 to 20 s, 9999 0.001 s 9999 156
832 T005 Speed setting filter 2 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.001 s 9999 123
833  G315 Speed detection filter 2 0 to 0.1 s, 9999 0.001 s 9999 156
834 G313 Torque control P gain 2 0 to 500%, 9999 1% 9999 156
835 G314 Torque control integral time 2 0 to 500 ms, 9999 0.1 ms 9999 156
836 T006 Torque setting filter 2 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.001 s 9999 123
837 G316 Torque detection filter 2 0 to 0.1 s, 9999 0.001 s 9999 156
82
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
group FM CA
increments page
840 G230 Torque bias selection 0 to 3, 24, 25, 9999 1 9999 157
841 G231 Torque bias 1 600 to 1400%, 9999 1% 9999 157
842 G232 Torque bias 2 600 to 1400%, 9999 1% 9999 157
Torque bias
843 G233 Torque bias 3 600 to 1400%, 9999 1% 9999 157

844 G234 Torque bias filter 0 to 5s, 9999 0.001 s 9999 157
845 G235 Torque bias operation time 0 to 5s, 9999 0.01 s 9999 157
846 G236 Torque bias balance compensation 0 to 10 V, 9999 0.1 V 9999 157
847 G237 Fall-time torque bias terminal 1 bias 0 to 400%, 9999 1% 9999 157
848 G238 Fall-time torque bias terminal 1 gain 0 to 400%, 9999 1% 9999 157
849 T007 Analog input offset adjustment 0 to 200% 0.1% 100% 123
850 G103 Brake operation selection 0 to 2 1 0 110
Control terminal option-Number of
851  C240 0 to 4096 1 2048 145
encoder pulses
Control terminal option-Encoder
852  C241 0, 1, 100, 101 1 1 145
rotation direction
853  H417 Speed deviation time 0 to 100 s 0.1 s 1s 143
Additional function
854 G217 Excitation ratio 0 to 100% 1% 100% 158

Control terminal option-Signal loss
855  C248 0, 1 1 0 146
detection enable/disable selection
858 T040 Terminal 4 function assignment 0, 1, 4, 9999 1 0 158
Torque current/Rated PM motor 0 to 500 A, 9999  0.01 A 
859 C126 9999 127
current 0 to 3600 A, 9999  0.1 A 
Second motor torque current/Rated 0 to 500 A, 9999  0.01 A 
860 C226 9999 127
PM motor current 0 to 3600 A, 9999  0.1 A 
862  C242 Encoder option selection 0, 1 1 0 145 8
863  M600 1 to 32767 1 1 158
pulse division ratio
Parameter List
864 M470 Torque detection 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 158
865 M446 Low speed detection 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 1.5 Hz 116
Indication
function
866 M042 Torque monitoring reference 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 118
─ 867 M321 AM output filter 0 to 5 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 160

─ 868 T010 Terminal 1 function assignment 0 to 6, 9999 1 0 158
─ 869 M334 Current output filter 0 to 5 s 0.01 s - 0.02 s 160
─ 870 M440 Speed detection hysteresis 0 to 5 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 116
872  H201 Input phase loss protection selection 0, 1 1 0 139
Protective
Functions
873  H415 Speed limit 0 to 400 Hz 0.01 Hz 20 Hz 143

874 H730 OLT level setting 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 113
875 H030 Fault definition 0, 1 1 0 158
─ 876  H022 Thermal protector input 0, 1 1 1 110
Speed feed forward control/model
Regeneration avoidance Control system
877 G220 0 to 2 1 0 157

adaptive speed control selection
functions
878 G221 Speed feed forward filter 0 to 1 s 0.01 s 0s 157

879 G222 Speed feed forward torque limit 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 157
880 C114 Load inertia ratio 0 to 200 times 0.1 times 7 times 157
881 G223 Speed feed forward gain 0 to 1000% 1% 0% 157
Regeneration avoidance operation
882 G120 0 to 2 1 0 159
selection
Regeneration avoidance operation DC380 V 
883 G121 300 to 1200 V 0.1V 159
level DC760 V 
function
Regeneration avoidance at
884 G122 0 to 5 1 0 159
deceleration detection sensitivity
Regeneration avoidance
885 G123 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 6 Hz 159
compensation frequency limit value
886 G124 Regeneration avoidance voltage gain 0 to 200% 0.1% 100% 159
83
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
group FM CA
increments page
parameters
888 E420 Free parameter 1 0 to 9999 1 9999 159

Free
889 E421 Free parameter 2 0 to 9999 1 9999 159
Cumulative power monitor digit 116,

891 M023 0 to 4, 9999 1 9999
shifted times 159
892 M200 Load factor 30 to 150% 0.1% 100% 159
Energy saving monitor
Energy saving monitor reference 0.1 to 55 kW  0.01 kW  Inverter rated

893 M201 159
(motor capacity) 0 to 3600 kW  0.1 kW  capacity
Control selection during commercial
894 M202 0 to 3 1 0 159
power-supply operation
895 M203 Power saving rate reference value 0, 1, 9999 1 9999 159
896 M204 Power unit cost 0 to 500, 9999 0.01 9999 159
897 M205 Power saving monitor average time 0 to 1000 h, 9999 1h 9999 159
Power saving cumulative monitor
898 M206 0, 1, 10, 9999 1 9999 159
clear
899 M207 Operation time rate (estimated value) 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 159
C0
(900) M310 FM/CA terminal calibration - - - 160

C1
(901) M320 AM terminal calibration - - - 160

C2 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
(902)
8 
T200
frequency
0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 132
C3
Parameter List
(902) T201 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 0 to 300% 0.1% 0% 132


125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
(903) T202 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 132
frequency

C4
(903) T203 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 132

Calibration parameters
C5 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias

(904) T400 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 132
frequency

C6
(904) T401 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 0 to 300% 0.1% 20% 132

126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
(905) T402 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 132
frequency

C7
(905) T403 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 132

C12
(917) T100 Terminal 1 bias frequency (speed) 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 132

C13
(917) T101 Terminal 1 bias (speed) 0 to 300% 0.1% 0% 132

C14
(918) T102 Terminal 1 gain frequency (speed) 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 132

C15
(918) T103 Terminal 1 gain (speed) 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 132

C16 Terminal 1 bias command (torque/
(919) T110 0 to 400% 0.1% 0% 132
magnetic flux)

84
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
group FM CA
increments page
C17 Terminal 1 bias (torque/magnetic

(919) T111 0 to 300% 0.1% 0% 132
flux)

C18 Terminal 1 gain command (torque/
(920) T112 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 132
magnetic flux)

C19 Terminal 1 gain (torque/magnetic
(920) T113 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 132
flux)

C8
(930) M330 Current output bias signal 0 to 100% 0.1% - 0% 160

C9
(930) M331 Current output bias current 0 to 100% 0.1% - 0% 160

C10
(931) M332 Current output gain signal 0 to 100% 0.1% - 100% 160

Calibration parameters
C11
(931) M333 Current output gain current 0 to 100% 0.1% - 100% 160

C38 Terminal 4 bias command (torque/
(932) T410 0 to 400% 0.1% 0% 132
magnetic flux)

C39 Terminal 4 bias (torque/magnetic
(932) T411 0 to 300% 0.1% 20% 132
flux)

C40
(933) T412
Terminal 4 gain command (torque/
0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 132
8
magnetic flux)

Parameter List
C41 Terminal 4 gain (torque/magnetic
(933) T413 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 132
flux)

C42
(934) A630 PID display bias coefficient 0 to 500, 9999 0.01 9999 133

C43
(934) A631 PID display bias analog value 0 to 300% 0.1% 20% 133

C44
(935) A632 PID display gain coefficient 0 to 500, 9999 0.01 9999 133

C45
(935) A633 PID display gain analog value 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 133

─ 977 E302 Input voltage mode selection 0, 1 1 0 160
10  10 
─ 989 E490 Parameter copy alarm release 1 160
100  100 
990 E104 PU buzzer control 0, 1 1 1 161
PU
991 E105 PU contrast adjustment 0 to 63 1 58 161

0 to 3, 5 to 14,
function
Monitor
17 to 20, 22 to 36,
Operation panel setting dial push
992 M104 38 to 46, 50 to 57, 61, 1 0 116
monitor selection
62, 64, 67, 71 to 74,
87 to 98, 100
994 G403 Droop break point gain 0.1 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999
control
143
Droop
995 G404 Droop break point torque 0.1 to 100% 0.1% 100% 143
─ 997 H103 Fault initiation 0 to 255, 9999 1 9999 161

0, 3003, 3103, 8009,
─ 998  E430 PM parameter initialization Simple 8109, 9009, 9109
1 0 222
1, 2, 10, 11, 12, 13,

─ 999 E431 Automatic parameter setting Simple 1 9999 161
20, 21, 9999
─ 1000 E108 Direct setting selection 0 to 2 1 0 161
85
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
group FM CA
increments page
1002 Lq tuning target current adjustment

─ C150 50 to 150%, 9999 0.1% 9999 127
 coefficient
1003 G601 Notch filter frequency 0, 8 to 1250 Hz 1 Hz 0

Additional
162
function
1004 G602 Notch filter depth 0 to 3 1 0 162
1005 G603 Notch filter width 0 to 3 1 0 162
1006 E020 Clock (year) 2000 to 2099 1 2000 162

function
Clock
1007 E021 Clock (month, day) 1/1 to 12/31 1 101 162
1008 E022 Clock (hour, minute) 0:00 to 23:59 1 0 162

Integral stop selection at limited
─ 1015 A607 0 to 2, 10 to 12 1 0 133
frequency
PTC thermistor protection detection
─ 1016 H021 0 to 60 s 1s 0s 110
time
─ 1018 M045 Monitor with sign selection 0, 9999 1 9999 116
1020 A900 Trace operation selection 0 to 4 1 0 163
1021 A901 Trace mode selection 0 to 2 1 0 163
1022 A902 Sampling cycle 0 to 9 1 2 163
1023 A903 Number of analog channels 1 to 8 1 4 163
1024 A904 Sampling auto start 0, 1 1 0 163
1025 A905 Trigger mode selection 0 to 4 1 0 163
1026 A906 Number of sampling before trigger 0 to 100% 1% 90% 163
8 1027 A910 Analog source selection (1ch)

1 to 3, 5 to 14,
201 163
1028 A911 Analog source selection (2ch) 202 163

17 to 20, 22 to 24,
Parameter List
1029 A912 Analog source selection (3ch) 32 to 36, 39 to 42, 46, 203 163
1030 A913 Analog source selection (4ch) 52 to 54, 61, 62, 64, 204 163
67, 71 to 74, 1
1031 A914 Analog source selection (5ch) 87 to 98, 201 to 213, 205 163
Trace function
1032 A915 Analog source selection (6ch) 222 to 227, 206 163
230 to 232,
1033 A916 Analog source selection (7ch) 235 to 238
207 163
1034 A917 Analog source selection (8ch) 208 163
1035 A918 Analog trigger channel 1 to 8 1 1 163
1036 A919 Analog trigger operation selection 0, 1 1 0 163
1037 A920 Analog trigger level 600 to 1400 1 1000 163
1038 A930 Digital source selection (1ch) 1 163

1 to 255 1
1046 A938 Digital trigger channel 1 to 8 1 1 163
1047 A939 Digital trigger operation selection 0, 1 1 0 163
─ 1048 E106 Display-off waiting time 0 to 60 min 1 min 0 min 163
─ 1049 E110 USB host reset 0, 1 1 0 163
86
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
group FM CA
increments page
DC brake judgment time for anti-

1072 A310 0 to 10 s 0.1 s 3s 163
sway control operation
Anti-sway control operation
1073 A311 0, 1 1 0 163
Anti-sway control
selection
1074 A312 Anti-sway control frequency 0.05 to 3 Hz, 9999 0.001 Hz 1 Hz 163
1075 A313 Anti-sway control depth 0 to 3 1 0 163
1076 A314 Anti-sway control width 0 to 3 1 0 163
1077 A315 Rope length 0.1 to 50 m 0.1 m 1m 163
1078 A316 Trolley weight 1 to 50000 kg 1 kg 1 kg 163
1079 A317 Load weight 1 to 50000 kg 1 kg 1 kg 163
─ 1103 F040 Deceleration time at emergency stop 0 to 3600 s 0.1 s 5s 163
1106 M050 Torque monitor filter 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.01 s 9999 116

function
Monitor
1107 M051 Running speed monitor filter 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.01 s 9999 116
1108 M052 Excitation current monitor filter 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.01 s 9999 116
─ 1113 H414 Speed limit method selection 0 to 2, 10, 9999 1 0 155
─ 1114 D403 Torque command reverse selection 0, 1 1 1 155

Speed control integral term clear
─ 1115 G218 0 to 9998 ms 1 ms 0s 156
time
Constant output range speed control
─ 1116 G206 0 to 100% 0.1% 0% 156
P gain compensation
Speed control P gain 1 (per-unit
─ 1117 G261 0 to 300, 9999 0.01 9999 156
system)
─ 1118 G361
system)
0 to 300, 9999 0.01 9999 156 8
Model speed control gain (per-unit
Parameter List
─ 1119 G262 0 to 300, 9999 0.01 9999 157
system)
Per-unit speed control reference 120 Hz  156,
─ 1121 G260 0 to 400 Hz 0.01 Hz
frequency 60 Hz  157
1134 A605 PID upper limit manipulated value 0 to 100% 0.1% 100% 133
1135 A606 PID lower limit manipulated value 0 to 100% 0.1% 100% 133
1136 A670 Second PID display bias coefficient 0 to 500, 9999 0.01 9999 133
Second PID display bias analog
1137 A671 0 to 300% 0.1% 20% 133
value
1138 A672 Second PID display gain coefficient 0 to 500, 9999 0.01 9999 133
Second PID display gain analog
1139 A673 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 133
value
Second PID set point/deviation input
1140 A664 1 to 5 1 2 133
selection
PID control
Second PID measured value input

1141 A665 1 to 5 1 3 133
selection
1142 A640 Second PID unit selection 0 to 43, 9999 1 9999 133
1143 A641 Second PID upper limit 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 133
1144 A642 Second PID lower limit 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 133
1145 A643 Second PID deviation limit 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 133
1146 A644 Second PID signal operation selection 0 to 3, 10 to 13 1 0 133

Second output interruption detection
1147 A661 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 1s 133
time
1148 A662 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 133
level
Second output interruption cancel
1149 A663 900 to 1100% 0.1% 1000% 133
level
1150 A810
function
PLC
to to PLC function user parameters 1 to 50 0 to 65535 1 0 146

1199 A859
─ 1220 B100 Parameter for manufacturer setting.
87
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
group FM CA
increments page
Start command edge detection

1221 B101 0, 1 1 0 147
selection
1222 B120 First positioning acceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 147
1223 B121 First positioning deceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 147
1224 B122 First positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 147

0 to 2, 10 to 12,
1225 B123 First positioning sub-function 1 10 147
100 to 102, 110 to 112
1226 B124 Second positioning acceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 147
1227 B125 Second positioning deceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 147
1228 B126 Second positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 147

0 to 2, 10 to 12,
1229 B127 Second positioning sub-function 1 10 147
100 to 102, 110 to 112
1230 B128 Third positioning acceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 147
1231 B129 Third positioning deceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 147
1232 B130 Third positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 147

0 to 2, 10 to 12,
1233 B131 Third positioning sub-function 1 10 147
100 to 102, 110 to 112
1234 B132 Fourth positioning acceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 147
1235 B133 Fourth positioning deceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 147
1236 B134 Fourth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 147

0 to 2, 10 to 12,
1237 B135 Fourth positioning sub-function 1 10 147
100 to 102, 110 to 112
8 1238 B136 Fifth positioning acceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 147
1239 B137 Fifth positioning deceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 147
Parameter List
1240 B138 Fifth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 147

0 to 2, 10 to 12,
1241 B139 Fifth positioning sub-function 1 10 147
100 to 102, 110 to 112
1242 B140 Sixth positioning acceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 147
1243 B141 Sixth positioning deceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 147
1244 B142 Sixth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 147

0 to 2, 10 to 12,
1245 B143 Sixth positioning sub-function 1 10 147
100 to 102, 110 to 112
Seventh positioning acceleration
1246 B144 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 147
time
Seventh positioning deceleration
1247 B145 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 147
time
1248 B146 Seventh positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 147
0 to 2, 10 to 12,
1249 B147 Seventh positioning sub-function 1 10 147
100 to 102, 110 to 112
1250 B148 Eighth positioning acceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 147
1251 B149 Eighth positioning deceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 147
1252 B150 Eighth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 147

0 to 2, 10 to 12,
1253 B151 Eighth positioning sub-function 1 10 147
100 to 102, 110 to 112
1254 B152 Ninth positioning acceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 147
88
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
group FM CA
increments page
1255 B153 Ninth positioning deceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 147
1256 B154 Ninth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 147

0 to 2, 10 to 12,
1257 B155 Ninth positioning sub-function 1 10 147
100 to 102, 110 to 112
1258 B156 Tenth positioning acceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 147
1259 B157 Tenth positioning deceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 147
1260 B158 Tenth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 147

0 to 2, 10 to 12,
1261 B159 Tenth positioning sub-function 1 10 147
100 to 102, 110 to 112
Eleventh positioning acceleration
1262 B160 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 147
time
Eleventh positioning deceleration
1263 B161 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 147
time
1264 B162 Eleventh positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 147
0 to 2, 10 to 12,
1265 B163 Eleventh positioning sub-function 1 10 147
100 to 102, 110 to 112
1266 B164 Twelfth positioning acceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 147
1267 B165 Twelfth positioning deceleration time 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 147
1268 B166 Twelfth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 147

0 to 2, 10 to 12,
1269 B167 Twelfth positioning sub-function 1 10 147
100 to 102, 110 to 112
Thirteenth positioning acceleration
1270 B168 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 147
time
1271 B169
Thirteenth positioning deceleration
time
0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 147 8
1272 B170 Thirteenth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms
Parameter List
147
0 to 2, 10 to 12,
1273 B171 Thirteenth positioning sub-function 1 10 147
100 to 102, 110 to 112
Fourteenth positioning acceleration
1274 B172 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 147
time
Fourteenth positioning deceleration
1275 B173 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 147
time
1276 B174 Fourteenth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 147
0 to 2, 10 to 12,
1277 B175 Fourteenth positioning sub-function 1 10 147
100 to 102, 110 to 112
Fifteenth positioning acceleration
1278 B176 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 147
time
Fifteenth positioning deceleration
1279 B177 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 147
time
1280 B178 Fifteenth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 147
0, 2, 10, 12, 100, 102,
1281 B179 Fifteenth positioning sub-function 1 10 147
110, 112
Home position return method
1282 B180 0 to 6 1 4 147
selection
1283 B181 Home position return speed 0 to 30 Hz 0.01 Hz 2 Hz 147
1284 B182 Home position return creep speed 0 to 10 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.5 Hz 147
Home position shift amount lower 4
1285 B183 0 to 9999 1 0 147
digits
Home position shift amount upper 4
1286 B184 0 to 9999 1 0 147
digits
Travel distance after proximity dog
1287 B185 0 to 9999 1 2048 147
ON lower 4 digits
Travel distance after proximity dog
1288 B186 0 to 9999 1 0 147
ON upper 4 digits
89
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
group FM CA
increments page
1289 B187 Home position return stopper torque 0 to 200% 0.1% 40% 147
Home position return stopper waiting
1290 B188 0 to 10 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 147

time
Position control terminal input
1292 B190 0, 1 1 0 147
selection
1293 B191 Roll feeding mode selection 0, 1 1 0 147
1294 B192 Position detection lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 149
1295 B193 Position detection upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 149
1296 B194 Position detection selection 0 to 2 1 0 149
1297 B195 Position detection hysteresis width 0 to 32767 1 0 149
─ 1298 B013 Second position control gain 0 to 150 s-1 1 s-1 25 s-1 149
─ 1299 G108 Second pre-excitation selection 0, 1 1 0 110

1300 N500
to to
1343, N543, Communication option parameters.
─
1350 N550 For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the option.
to to
1359 N559
─ 1410 A170 Starting times lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 164
─ 1411 A171 Starting times upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 164

1412 Motor induced voltage constant (phi
─ C135 0 to 2, 9999 1 9999 127
f) exponent
8 
1413 Second motor induced voltage
─ C235 0 to 2, 9999 1 9999 127
 constant (phi f) exponent
Parameter List
1480 Load characteristics measurement

H520 0, 1 (2 to 5, 81 to 85) 1 0 165
 mode
1481 0 to 400%, 8888,
H521 Load characteristics load reference 1 0.1% 9999 165
 9999
1482 0 to 400%, 8888,
 9999
1483 0 to 400%, 8888,
 9999
Load characteristics fault detection
1484 0 to 400%, 8888,

 9999
1485 0 to 400%, 8888,
 9999
1486 Load characteristics maximum
H526 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 165
 frequency
1487 Load characteristics minimum
H527 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 6 Hz 165
 frequency
1488
H531 Upper limit warning detection width 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 20% 165

1489
H532 Lower limit warning detection width 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 20% 165

1490
H533 Upper limit fault detection width 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 165

1491
H534 Lower limit fault detection width 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 165

1492 Load status detection signal delay

H535 time / load reference measurement 0 to 60 s 0.1 s 1s 165
 waiting time
─ 1499 E415 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
90
Initial value
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
group FM CA
increments page
Pr.CLR Parameter clear (0), 1 1 0 160

parameters
Clear
ALL.CL All parameter clear (0), 1 1 0 160
Err.CL Fault history clear (0), 1 1 0 160
─ Pr.CPY Parameter copy (0), 1 to 3 1 0 160

─ Pr.CHG Initial value change list ─ 1 0 160
─ IPM IPM initialization 0, 3003 1 0 222
─ AUTO Automatic parameter setting ─ ─ ─ 161
─ Pr.MD Group parameter setting (0), 1, 2 1 0 64
 Differ according to capacities.

6%: FR-A820-00077(0.75K) or lower, FR-A840-00038(0.75K) or lower
4%: FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to FR-A820-00250(3.7K), FR-A840-00052(1.5K) to FR-A840-00126(3.7K)
3%: FR-A820-00340(5.5K), FR-A820-00490(7.5K), FR-A840-00170(5.5K), FR-A840-00250(7.5K)
2%: FR-A820-00630(11K) to FR-A820-03160(55K), FR-A840-00310(11K) to FR-A840-01800(55K)
1%: FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher
 The setting range or initial value for the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.
 The setting range or initial value for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
 The initial value for the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower.
 The initial value for the FR-A820-00630(11K) or higher and FR-A840-00310(11K) or higher.
 Differ according to capacities.
4%: FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower, FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower
2%: FR-A820-00630(11K) to FR-A820-03160(55K), FR-A840-00310(11K) to FR-A840-01800(55K)
 The value for the 200 V class.
 The value for the 400 V class.
 The setting is available only when a vector control compatible option is installed. Refer to the Instruction Manual of each option for details.
 The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the LCD operation panel and the parameter unit.
 The setting range or initial value for the standard model.
 The setting range or initial value for the separated converter type.


The setting range or initial value for the IP55 compatible model.
The setting is available for the standard model only. 8
 The setting is available only for standard models and IP55 compatible models.
 The setting is available only with the 400 V class.
Parameter List
 The setting is available only for the FR-A800-GF or when a compatible plug-in option is installed.
 The setting range differs for the FR-A800-E. (Refer to page 92.)
 The setting is not available for the FR-A800-E.
 Parameter for manufacturer setting for the FR-A842-P. Do not set.
 The setting range differs for the FR-A842-P. (Refer to page 92.)
 The setting is not available for the FR-A842-P.
91
 List of parameters for the FR-A800-E Ethernet communication (by parameter
number)
The following table shows the extended parameters for the FR-A800-E as compared to the standard inverters. Set the parameters according
to the application.
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
Pr. Name Setting range setting Initial value to
group
increments page
190 M400 RUN terminal function selection 1 0 137

191 M401 SU terminal function selection 1 1 137
function assignment
2 
192 M402 IPF terminal function selection 1 137
Output terminal
9999 
242, 342 
193 M403 OL terminal function selection 1 3 137
194 M404 FU terminal function selection 1 4 137
195 M405 ABC1 terminal function selection 1 99 137
313 M410 DO0 output selection 1 9999 137
314 M411 DO1 output selection 242, 342  1 9999 137
315 M412 DO2 output selection 1 9999 137
NET mode operation command
550 D012 source selection
0, 1, 5, 9999 1 9999 145
PU mode operation command

551 D013 source selection 1 to 3, 5, 9999 1 9999 145
Station number in inverter-to-

1124 N681 inverter link
0 to 5, 9999 1 9999 164
Number of inverters in inverter-

1125 N682 to-inverter link system
2 to 6 1 2 164
Ethernet communication network

1424 N650 1 to 239 1 1 129
8 number
Ethernet communication station
1425 N651 number
1 to 120 1 1 129
Parameter List
Link speed and duplex mode

1426 N641 selection 0 to 4 1 0 129
502, 5000 to 5002,

5006 to 5008,
1427 N630 Ethernet function selection 1 1 5001 129
5010 to 5013, 9999,
45237
502, 5000 to 5002,
5006 to 5008,
5010 to 5013, 9999,
Ethernet communication
45237
502, 5000 to 5002,
5006 to 5008,
5010 to 5013, 9999,
45237
Ethernet signal loss detection
1431 N643 function selection
0 to 3 1 0 129
Ethernet communication check

1432 N644 time interval
0 to 999.8 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 129
1434 N600 Ethernet IP address 1 0 to 255 1 192 129

1438 N610 Subnet mask 1 0 to 255 1 255 129
1439 N611 Subnet mask 2 0 to 255 1 255 129
1440 N612 Subnet mask 3 0 to 255 1 255 129
1441 N613 Subnet mask 4 0 to 255 1 0 129
1442 N660 Ethernet IP filter address 1 0 to 255 1 0 129
Ethernet IP filter address 2 range
1446 N664 specification
0 to 255, 9999 1 9999 129

1447 N665 specification
0 to 255, 9999 1 9999 129

1448 N666 specification 0 to 255, 9999 1 9999 129
92
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
group
increments page
Ethernet command source

1449 N670 selection IP address 1 0 to 255 1 0 129

Ethernet communication
1450 N671 selection IP address 2

0 to 255 1 0 129

1451 N672 selection IP address 3
0 to 255 1 0 129

1452 N673 selection IP address 4 0 to 255 1 0 129

1453 N674 selection IP address 3 range 0 to 255, 9999 1 9999 129
specification
1454 N675 selection IP address 4 range 0 to 255, 9999 1 9999 129
specification
1455 N642 Keepalive time 1 to 7200 s 1s 3600 s 129
 Setting values not mentioned above are the same as those of the standard inverters.
 The initial value is for the standard models and the IP55 compatible models.
 The initial value is for the separated converter types.
 List of parameters for the FR-A842-P parallel operation (by parameter number)
The following table shows the extended parameters for the FR-A842-P as compared to the standard inverters.
Customer
Function
Minimum Refer
setting
Pr.
group
increments page
190 M400 RUN terminal function selection 1 0 137

8
function assignment
191 M401 SU terminal function selection 1 1 137

Output terminal
192 M402 IPF terminal function selection 1 9999 137
Parameter List
193 M403 OL terminal function selection
227, 327 
1 3 137
194 M404 FU terminal function selection 1 4 137
Parallel operation
652 N092 0, 0.1 to 120 s 0.1 s 1s
Parallel operation
152
communication check time
function
1001 E390 Parallel operation selection 1, 2, 100, 200, 300 1 100 162
 Setting values not mentioned above are the same as those of the standard inverters.
93
 Inverter parameter list (by function group)
 E: Environment setting parameters Pr.
Pr. Name
Refer
Parameters that set the inverter operation characteristics. group to page
Maintenance timer 3 warning output set
E715 689 time
150
Pr. Refer
group Pr. Name to page E720 555 Current average time 150
E000 168 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set. E721 556 Data output mask time 150
E001 169 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set. Current average value monitor signal
E722 557 output reference current
150
E020 1006 Clock (year) 162
E021 1007 Clock (month, day) 162  F: Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and
E022 1008 Clock (hour, minute) 162 acceleration/deceleration pattern
E023 269 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set. Parameters that set the motor acceleration/deceleration
E080 168 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set. characteristics.
E081 169 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set. Pr. Refer
group Pr. Name to page
E100 75 Reset selection 124
Acceleration/deceleration reference
E101 75 Disconnected PU detection 124 F000 20 109
frequency
E102 75 PU stop selection 124 Acceleration/deceleration time
E103 145 PU display language selection 134 F001 21 increments
109
E104 990 PU buzzer control 161 F002 16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time 111
E105 991 PU contrast adjustment 161 F003 611 Acceleration time at a restart 119
E106 1048 Display-off waiting time 163 F010 7 Acceleration time Simple 109
E107 75 Reset limit 124
F011 8 Deceleration time Simple 109
E108 1000 Direct setting selection 161
F020 44 Second acceleration/deceleration time 109
E110 1049 USB host reset 163
F021 45 Second deceleration time 109
Frequency setting/key lock operation
E200 161 135 Acceleration/deceleration time
selection F022 147 switching frequency
109
Frequency change increment amount
E201 295
8 E300 30
setting
Regenerative function selection
135
114
F030
F031
110
111
Third acceleration/deceleration time
Third deceleration time
109
109
E301 570 Multiple rating setting 151 F040 1103 Deceleration time at emergency stop 163
Parameter List
E302 977 Input voltage mode selection 160 F070 791  Acceleration time in low-speed range 109
E400 77 Parameter write selection 125 F071 792  Deceleration time in low-speed range 109
Acceleration/deceleration pattern
E410 296 Password lock level 144 F100 29 selection
113
E411 297 Password lock/unlock 144
F101 59 Remote function selection 120
E415 1499 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
F102 13 Starting frequency 111
E420 888 Free parameter 1 159 F103 571 Holding time at a start 111
Backlash acceleration stopping
F200 140 frequency
113
E421 889 Free parameter 2 159
F201 141 Backlash acceleration stopping time 113
E430 998  PM parameter initialization Simple 222
F202 142
Backlash deceleration stopping
113
frequency
E431 999 Automatic parameter setting Simple 161 F203 143 Backlash deceleration stopping time 113
E440 160 User group read selection Simple 135 F300 380 Acceleration S-pattern 1 113
User group registered display/batch F301 381 Deceleration S-pattern 1 113
E441 172 135
clear F302 382 Acceleration S-pattern 2 113
E442 173 User group registration 135 F303 383 Deceleration S-pattern 2 113
E443 174 User group clear 135 F400 516 S-pattern time at a start of acceleration 113
E490 989 Parameter copy alarm release 160 S-pattern time at a completion of
F401 517 113
E600 72  PWM frequency selection 122 acceleration
E601 240 Soft-PWM operation selection 122 F402 518 S-pattern time at a start of deceleration 113
E602 260  PWM frequency automatic switchover 122 F403 519 113
deceleration
E700 255 Life alarm status display 139
F500 292 Automatic acceleration/deceleration 121
E701 256  Inrush current limit circuit life display 139
F510 61 Reference current 121
E702 257 Control circuit capacitor life display 139
E703 258  Main circuit capacitor life display 139 F511 62 Reference value at acceleration 121
E704 259  Main circuit capacitor life measuring 139 F512 63 Reference value at deceleration 121
E710 503 Maintenance timer 1 150 Acceleration/deceleration separate
F513 293 selection
121
E711 504 time
150
F520 64 Starting frequency for elevator mode 121
E712 686 Maintenance timer 2 150
E713 687 time
150
E714 688 Maintenance timer 3 150
94
 D: Operation command and frequency Pr. Pr. Name Refer
group to page
command H016 608 Second motor permissible load level 110
Parameters that specify the inverter's command source, and H020 561 PTC thermistor protection level 110
parameters that set the motor driving frequency and torque.
PTC thermistor protection detection
H021 1016 time
110
Pr. Refer
Pr. Name H022 876  Thermal protector input 110
group to page
D000 79 Operation mode selection Simple 125 H030 875 Fault definition 158
D001 340 Communication startup mode selection 125 H100 244 Cooling fan operation selection 138
Communication operation command H101 249 Earth (ground) fault detection at start 138
D010 338 145
source H102 598  Undervoltage level 151
Communication speed command H103 997 Fault initiation 161
D011 339 source
145
H200 251 Output phase loss protection selection 139
NET mode operation command source
D012 550  selection
145 H201 872  Input phase loss protection selection 139
PU mode operation command source H300 65  Retry selection 121
D013 551 selection
145
H301 67  Number of retries at fault occurrence 121
D020 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection 125 H302 68  Retry waiting time 121
D030 811 Set resolution switchover 113, 115 H303 69  Retry count display erase 121
D100 291 Pulse train I/O selection 144
H400 1 Maximum frequency Simple 108
D101 384 Input pulse division scaling factor 144
D110 385 Frequency for zero input pulse 144 H401 2 Minimum frequency Simple 108
D111 386 Frequency for maximum input pulse 144 H402 18 High speed maximum frequency 108
D120 432  Pulse train torque command bias 155 H410 807 Speed limit selection 155
D121 433  Pulse train torque command gain 155 H411 808 Forward rotation speed limit/speed limit 155
D200 15 Jog frequency 111 H412 809
Reverse rotation speed limit/reverse-
155
Multi-speed input compensation side speed limit
D300 28 selection
109 H414 1113 Speed limit method selection 155
Multi-speed setting (high speed) H415 873  Speed limit 143
D301 4 109 Speed deviation excess detection
Simple H416 285 141, 143
D302 5
Multi-speed setting (middle speed)
109 H417 853 
frequency
Speed deviation time 143
8
Simple
H420 31 Frequency jump 1A 115
Parameter List
Multi-speed setting (low speed)
D303 6 109 H421 32 Frequency jump 1B 115
Simple
D304 H423 34 Frequency jump 2B 115
24 to
to Multi-speed setting (4 speed to 7 speed) 109
27
D307 H425 36 Frequency jump 3B 115
D308
232 to Multi-speed setting (8 speed to 15 H429 552 Frequency jump range 115
to 109
239 speed)
H500 22
Stall prevention operation level (Torque
112
D315 limit level)
D400 804 Torque command source selection 113, 155 H501 156 Stall prevention operation selection 112
D401 805 Torque command value (RAM) 113, 155 1480 Load characteristics measurement
Torque command value (RAM,
H520 mode
165
D402 806 113, 155 
EEPROM)
1481
D403 1114 Torque command reverse selection 155 H521 Load characteristics load reference 1 165

1482
 H: Protective function parameter H522 Load characteristics load reference 2 165

Parameters to protect the motor and the inverter.
1483
H523 Load characteristics load reference 3 165
Pr.
Pr. Name
Refer 
group to page
1484
H000 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay Simple 110 H524 Load characteristics load reference 4 165

H001 600 First free thermal reduction frequency 1 110 1485
H525 Load characteristics load reference 5 165
H002 601 First free thermal reduction ratio 1 110 
H003 602 First free thermal reduction frequency 2 110 1486 Load characteristics maximum
H526 165
H004 603 First free thermal reduction ratio 2 110  frequency
H005 604 First free thermal reduction frequency 3 110 1487 Load characteristics minimum
H527 frequency
165
H006 607 Motor permissible load level 110 
H010 51 Second electronic thermal O/L relay 110 1488
H531 Upper limit warning detection width 165
Second free thermal reduction 
H011 692 frequency 1
110
1489
H012 693 Second free thermal reduction ratio 1 110 H532 Lower limit warning detection width 165

H013 694 110 1490
frequency 2 H533 Upper limit fault detection width 165

H014 695 Second free thermal reduction ratio 2 110
1491
H015 696
110 H534 Lower limit fault detection width 165
frequency 3 
95
Pr. Pr. Name Refer Pr. Pr. Name Refer
group to page group to page
Load status detection signal delay time Control selection during commercial
1492 M202 894 159
H535 / load reference measurement waiting 165 power-supply operation
 time M203 895 Power saving rate reference value 159
H600 48 Second stall prevention operation level 112 M204 896 Power unit cost 159
H601 49 112 M205 897 Power saving monitor average time 159
frequency
H602 114 Third stall prevention operation level 112
M206 898 Power saving cumulative monitor clear 159
Third stall prevention operation M207 899 Operation time rate (estimated value) 159
H603 115 frequency
112
M300 54 FM/CA terminal function selection 116
H610 23
112 M301 158 AM terminal function selection 116
compensation factor at double speed
C0
Stall prevention operation reduction
H611 66 starting frequency
112 M310 (900) FM/CA terminal calibration 160
H620 148 Stall prevention level at 0 V input 112 
H621 149 Stall prevention level at 10 V input 112 C1
Voltage reduction selection during stall M320 (901) AM terminal calibration 160
H631 154 prevention operation
112

H700 810 Torque limit input method selection 113 M321 867 AM output filter 160
H701 812 Torque limit level (regeneration) 113 C8
H702 813 Torque limit level (3rd quadrant) 113 M330 (930) Current output bias signal 160
H703 814 Torque limit level (4th quadrant) 113 
H704 801 Output limit level 113 C9
H710 815 Torque limit level 2 113 M331 (930) Current output bias current 160
H720 816 Torque limit level during acceleration 113 
H721 817 Torque limit level during deceleration 113 C10
H730 874 OLT level setting 113 M332 (931) Current output gain signal 160
H800 374 Overspeed detection level 146 
H881 690 Deceleration check time 153 C11
M333 (931)
8  M: Monitor display and monitor output signal 
Current output gain current 160
Parameters regarding the inverter's operating status. These

M334 869 Current output filter 160
Parameter List
parameters are used to set the monitors and output signals. M400 190 RUN terminal function selection 137
M401 191 SU terminal function selection 137
Pr. Pr. Name Refer M402 192 IPF terminal function selection 137
group to page
M000 37 Speed display 115 M403 193 OL terminal function selection 137
M001 505 Speed setting reference 115 M404 194 FU terminal function selection 137
M002 144 Speed setting switchover 115 M405 195 ABC1 terminal function selection 137
M020 170 Watt-hour meter clear 116 M406 196 ABC2 terminal function selection 137
M021 563 Energization time carrying-over times 116 M410 313  DO0 output selection 137
M022 268 Monitor decimal digits selection 116 M411 314  DO1 output selection 137
Cumulative power monitor digit shifted M412 315  DO2 output selection 137
M023 891 116, 159
times M430 157 OL signal output timer 112
M030 171 Operation hour meter clear 116 M431 289 Inverter output terminal filter 137
M031 564 Operating time carrying-over times 116 Output current detection signal
M433 166 134
M040 55 Frequency monitoring reference 118 retention time
M041 56 Current monitoring reference 118 M440 870 Speed detection hysteresis 116
M042 866 Torque monitoring reference 118 M441 41 Up-to-frequency sensitivity 116
M043 241 Analog input display unit switchover 132 M442 42 Output frequency detection 116
M044 290 Monitor negative output selection 116 Output frequency detection for reverse
M443 43 rotation
116
M045 1018 Monitor with sign selection 116
M444 50 Second output frequency detection 116
M050 1106 Torque monitor filter 116
M445 116 Third output frequency detection 116
M051 1107 Running speed monitor filter 116
M446 865 Low speed detection 116
M052 1108 Excitation current monitor filter 116
M460 150 Output current detection level 134
Control circuit temperature signal
M060 663 153 Output current detection signal delay
output level M461 151 time
134
M100 52 Operation panel main monitor selection 116
M462 152 Zero current detection level 134
M101 774 Operation panel monitor selection 1 116
M463 153 Zero current detection time 134
M102 775 Operation panel monitor selection 2 116
Output current detection operation
M103 776 Operation panel monitor selection 3 116 M464 167 selection
134
Operation panel setting dial push M470 864 Torque detection 158
M104 992 monitor selection
116
M500 495 Remote output selection 149
M200 892 Load factor 159
Energy saving monitor reference (motor
M501 496 Remote output data 1 149
M201 893 capacity)
159 M502 497 Remote output data 2 149
M510 76 Fault code output selection 124
96
M520 799
Pulse increment setting for output
154 C18
power Terminal 1 gain command (torque/
T112 (920) magnetic flux)
132
M530 655 Analog remote output selection 152 
M531 656 Analog remote output 1 152 C19
M532 657 Analog remote output 2 152 T113 (920) Terminal 1 gain (torque/magnetic flux) 132
M533 658 Analog remote output 3 152 
M534 659 Analog remote output 4 152 C2
Control terminal option-Encoder pulse Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
M600 863  158 T200 (902) frequency
132
division ratio

M601 413  Encoder pulse division ratio 158
C3
M610 635  Cumulative pulse clear signal selection 148
T201 (902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 132
Cumulative pulse division scaling
M611 636  factor
148 
Control terminal option-Cumulative 125
M612 637  pulse division scaling factor
148
T202 (903)
132
frequency
M613 638  Cumulative pulse storage 148 
C4
 T: Multi-function input terminal parameters T203 (903) Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 132
Parameters for the input terminals where inverter commands are 
received through.
C5
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
Pr. Refer T400 (904) frequency
132
Pr. Name
group to page 
T000 73 Analog input selection 123 C6
T001 267 Terminal 4 input selection 123 T401 (904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 132
T002 74 Input filter time constant 123 
T003 822 Speed setting filter 1 123 126
T004 826 Torque setting filter 1 123 T402 (905) 132
frequency
T005 832 Speed setting filter 2 123 
T006 836 Torque setting filter 2 123 C7 8
T007 849 Analog input offset adjustment 123 T403 (905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 132
Parameter List
T010 868 Terminal 1 function assignment 158 
Terminal 1 added compensation C38
T021 242 amount (terminal 2)
123 Terminal 4 bias command (torque/
132
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 
T022 125 132
frequency Simple C39
T040 858 Terminal 4 function assignment 158 T411 (932) Terminal 4 bias (torque/magnetic flux) 132
Terminal 1 added compensation 
T041 243 amount (terminal 4)
123
C40
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain Terminal 4 gain command (torque/
T042 126 132 T412 (933) magnetic flux)
132
frequency Simple 
T050 252 Override bias 123 C41
T051 253 Override gain 123 T413 (933) Terminal 4 gain (torque/magnetic flux) 132
T052 573 4 mA input check selection 151 
T053 777 4 mA input check operation frequency 151 T700 178 STF terminal function selection 136
T054 778 4 mA input check filter 151 T701 179 STR terminal function selection 136
C12 T702 180 RL terminal function selection 136
T100 (917) Terminal 1 bias frequency (speed) 132 T703 181 RM terminal function selection 136
 T704 182 RH terminal function selection 136
C13 T705 183 RT terminal function selection 136
T101 (917) Terminal 1 bias (speed) 132 T706 184 AU terminal function selection 136
 T707 185 JOG terminal function selection 136
C14 T708 186 CS terminal function selection 136
T102 (918) Terminal 1 gain frequency (speed) 132 T709 187 MRS terminal function selection 136

T710 188 STOP terminal function selection 136
C15 T711 189 RES terminal function selection 136
T103 (918) Terminal 1 gain (speed) 132
T720 17 MRS input selection 112

T721 599 X10 terminal input selection 114
C16 Power failure stop external signal input
Terminal 1 bias command (torque/ T722 606 139
132 selection
 RT signal function validity condition
T730 155 135
C17 selection
T111 (919) Terminal 1 bias (torque/magnetic flux) 132 T740 699 Input terminal filter 136

97
 C: Motor constant parameters Pr. Pr. Name Refer
Parameters for the applied motor setting. group to page
Second motor induced voltage constant
C230 738  (phi f)
127
Pr. Pr. Name Refer
group to page C231 739  Second motor Ld decay ratio 127
C000 684 Tuning data unit switchover 127 C232 740  Second motor Lq decay ratio 127
C100 71 Applied motor 122 C233 746  Second motor protection current level 127
C101 80 Motor capacity 126 1413 Second motor induced voltage constant
C102 81 Number of motor poles 126 C235 (phi f) exponent
127

C103 9 Rated motor current Simple 110
C240 851 
Control terminal option-Number of
145
encoder pulses
C104 83 Rated motor voltage 127
C105 84 Rated motor frequency 127 C241 852  rotation direction
145
C106 702  Maximum motor frequency 127 C242 862  Encoder option selection 145
C107 707 Motor inertia (integer) 127
C248 855 
Control terminal option-Signal loss
145
C108 724 Motor inertia (exponent) 127 detection enable/disable selection
Second starting resistance tuning
C110 96 Auto tuning setting/status 127 C282 741  compensation
127
C111 95 Online auto tuning selection 129 Second motor magnetic pole detection
C285 742  127
C112 818 Easy gain tuning response level setting 156 pulse width
C113 819 Easy gain tuning selection 156
C114 880 Load inertia ratio 157
 A: Application parameters
Parameters to set a specific application.
C120 90 Motor constant (R1) 127
C121 91 Motor constant (R2) 127 Pr.
Pr. Name
Refer
group to page
Motor constant (L1)/d-axis inductance
C122 92 (Ld)
127 A000 135 Electronic bypass sequence selection 134
C123 93
Motor constant (L2)/q-axis inductance
127
A001 136 MC switchover interlock time 134
(Lq) A002 137 Start waiting time 134
C124 94 Motor constant (X) 127
A003 138 Bypass selection at a fault 134
C125 82 Motor excitation current 127 Automatic switchover frequency from
C126 859 Torque current/Rated PM motor current 127
A004 139 inverter to bypass operation
134
8 C130 706  Induced voltage constant (phi f) 127 A005 159

Automatic switchover frequency range
from bypass to inverter operation
134
C131 711  Motor Ld decay ratio 127
A006 248 Self power management selection 138
Parameter List
C132 712  Motor Lq decay ratio 127

A007 254 Main circuit power OFF waiting time 138
C133 725  Motor protection current level 127
A100 278 Brake opening frequency 141
1412 Motor induced voltage constant (phi f)
C135 exponent
127 A101 279 Brake opening current 141

A102 280 Brake opening current detection time 141
C140 369  Number of encoder pulses 146
A103 281 Brake operation time at start 141
C141 359  Encoder rotation direction 145
Encoder signal loss detection enable/
A104 282 Brake operation frequency 141
C148 376  disable selection
146 A105 283 Brake operation time at stop 141
1002 Lq tuning target current adjustment A106 284
Deceleration detection function
141
C150 coefficient
127 selection

Starting resistance tuning A107 285 Overspeed detection frequency 141, 143
C182 717  compensation
127
A108 639 Brake opening current selection 141
C185 721 
Starting magnetic pole position
127 A109 640 Brake operation frequency selection 141
detection pulse width
A110 292 Automatic acceleration/deceleration 121
C200 450 Second applied motor 122
A120 642 Second brake opening frequency 141
C201 453 Second motor capacity 126
A121 643 Second brake opening current 141
C202 454 Number of second motor poles 126
C203 51 Rated second motor current 110 A122 644 detection time
141
C204 456 Rated second motor voltage 127 A123 645 Second brake operation time at start 141
C205 457 Rated second motor frequency 127 A124 646 Second brake operation frequency 141
C206 743  Second motor maximum frequency 127 A125 647 Second brake operation time at stop 141
C207 744 Second motor inertia (integer) 127
A126 648
Second deceleration detection function
141
selection
C208 745 Second motor inertia (exponent) 127
Second motor auto tuning setting/ A128 650 Second brake opening current selection 141
C210 463 status
127 Second brake operation frequency
A129 651 selection
141
C211 574 Second motor online auto tuning 129
Second brake sequence operation
C220 458 Second motor constant (R1) 127 A130 641 selection
141
C221 459 Second motor constant (R2) 127 A170 1410 Starting times lower 4 digits 164
Second motor constant (L1) / d-axis
C222 460 127 A171 1411 Starting times upper 4 digits 164
inductance (Ld)
Stop-on contact/load torque high-speed
C223 461
Second motor constant (L2) / q-axis
127 A200 270 frequency control selection
140
inductance (Lq)
C224 462 Second motor constant (X) 127
A201 271 High-speed setting maximum current 140
C225 455 Second motor excitation current 127

A202 272 Middle-speed setting minimum current 140
Second motor torque current/Rated PM A203 273 Current averaging range 140
C226 860 motor current
127
A204 274 Current averaging filter time constant 140
98
A205 275
Stop-on contact excitation current low-
141 A618 762 Pre-charge ending time 154
speed multiplying factor
A619 763 Pre-charge upper detection level 154
PWM carrier frequency at stop-on
A206 276  contact
141 A620 764 Pre-charge time limit 154
A300 592 Traverse function selection 151 A621 575 Output interruption detection time 133
A301 593 Maximum amplitude amount 151 A622 576 Output interruption detection level 133
Amplitude compensation amount A623 577 Output interruption cancel level 133
A302 594 151
during deceleration A624 609 PID set point/deviation input selection 133
A303 595 151 A625 610 PID measured value input selection 133
during acceleration
C42
A304 596 Amplitude acceleration time 151
A630 (934) PID display bias coefficient 133
A305 597 Amplitude deceleration time 151
DC brake judgment time for anti-sway 
A310 1072 control operation
163 C43
A311 1073 Anti-sway control operation selection 163 A631 (934) PID display bias analog value 133
A312 1074 Anti-sway control frequency 163 
A313 1075 Anti-sway control depth 163 C44
A314 1076 Anti-sway control width 163 A632 (935) PID display gain coefficient 133
A315 1077 Rope length 163 
A316 1078 Trolley weight 163 C45
A317 1079 Load weight 163 A633 (935) PID display gain analog value 133
A510 350  Stop position command selection 145 
A511 360  16-bit data selection 145 A640 1142 Second PID unit selection 133
A512 361  Position shift 145 A641 1143 Second PID upper limit 133
A520 362  Orientation position loop gain 145 A642 1144 Second PID lower limit 133
A521 363  Completion signal output delay time 145
A643 1145 Second PID deviation limit 133
A522 364  Encoder stop check time 145
A523 365  Orientation limit 145 A644 1146 Second PID signal operation selection 133
A524 366  Recheck time 145 A650 753 Second PID action selection 133 8
A525 393  Orientation selection 146 A651 755 Second PID action set point 133
Parameter List
Second PID control automatic
A526 351  Orientation speed 145 A652 754 133
A527 352  Creep speed 145
A653 756 Second PID proportional band 133
A528 353  Creep switchover position 145
A654 757 Second PID integral time 133
A529 354  Position loop switchover position 145
A655 758 Second PID differential time 133
A530 355  DC injection brake start position 145
A656 765 Second pre-charge fault selection 154
A531 356  Internal stop position command 145
A657 766 Second pre-charge ending level 154
A532 357  Orientation in-position zone 145
A658 767 Second pre-charge ending time 154
A533 358  Servo torque selection 145 Second pre-charge upper detection
A540 394  Number of machine side gear teeth 145 A659 768 level
154
A541 395  Number of motor side gear teeth 145 A660 769 Second pre-charge time limit 154
A542 396  Orientation speed gain (P term) 146 A661 1147
133
time
A543 397  Orientation speed integral time 146
A544 398  Orientation speed gain (D term) 146 A662 1148 level
133
A545 399  Orientation deceleration ratio 146 A663 1149 Second output interruption cancel level 133
A546 829  Number of machine end encoder pulses 145 Second PID set point/deviation input
A600 759 PID unit selection 133 A664 1140 selection
133
A601 131 PID upper limit 133 A665 1141
Second PID measured value input
133
selection
A602 132 PID lower limit 133
A603 553 PID deviation limit 133 A670 1136 Second PID display bias coefficient 133
A604 554 PID signal operation selection 133 A671 1137 Second PID display bias analog value 133
A605 1134 PID upper limit manipulated value 133 A672 1138 Second PID display gain coefficient 133
A606 1135 PID lower limit manipulated value 133 A673 1139 Second PID display gain analog value 133
A607 1015
Integral stop selection at limited
133 A680 573 4 mA input check selection 151
frequency
A681 777 4 mA input check operation frequency 151
A610 128 PID action selection 133
A682 778 4 mA input check filter 151
A611 133 PID action set point 133 Automatic restart after instantaneous
PID control automatic switchover A700 162 power failure selection
119
A612 127 frequency
133
Rotation direction detection selection at
A613 129 PID proportional band 133 A701 299 restarting
119
A614 130 PID integral time 133 A702 57 Restart coasting time 119
A615 134 PID differential time 133 A703 58 Restart cushion time 119
A616 760 Pre-charge fault selection 154 A704 163 First cushion time for restart 119
A617 761 Pre-charge ending level 154 A705 164 First cushion voltage for restart 119
99
Stall prevention operation level for Command pulse scaling factor
A710 165 restart
119 B001 420 numerator (electronic gear numerator)
149
A711 298 Frequency search gain 127 Command pulse multiplication
A712 560 Second frequency search gain 127 B002 421 denominator (electronic gear 149
denominator)
A730 261 Power failure stop selection 139
B003 422 Position control gain 149
Subtracted frequency at deceleration
A731 262 start
139 B004 423 Position feed forward gain 149
Position command acceleration/
A732 263 Subtraction starting frequency 139 B005 424 149
deceleration time constant
A733 264 Power-failure deceleration time 1 139
B006 425 Position feed forward command filter 149
A734 265 Power-failure deceleration time 2 139
B007 426 In-position width 149
Power failure deceleration time
A735 266 switchover frequency
139 B008 427 Excessive level error 149
A785 294 UV avoidance voltage gain 139 B009 428 Command pulse selection 148
A786 668 Power failure stop frequency gain 139 B010 429 Clear signal selection 148
A800 414 PLC function operation selection 146 B011 430 Pulse monitor selection 148
A801 415 Inverter operation lock mode setting 146 B012 446 Model position control gain 148
A802 416 Pre-scale function selection 146 B013 1298 Second position control gain 149
Digital position control sudden stop
A803 417 Pre-scale setting value 146 B020 464 147
deceleration time
A804 498 PLC function flash memory clear 146
B021 465 First target position lower 4 digits 147
A810 1150 B022 466 First target position upper 4 digits 147
to to PLC function user parameters 1 to 50 146
B023 467 Second target position lower 4 digits 147
A859 1199
B024 468 Second target position upper 4 digits 147
A900 1020 Trace operation selection 163
B025 469 Third target position lower 4 digits 147
A901 1021 Trace mode selection 163 B026 470 Third target position upper 4 digits 147
A902 1022 Sampling cycle 163 B027 471 Fourth target position lower 4 digits 147
A903 1023 Number of analog channels 163 B028 472 Fourth target position upper 4 digits 147
B029 473 147
8
Fifth target position lower 4 digits
A904 1024 Sampling auto start 163
B030 474 Fifth target position upper 4 digits 147
A905 1025 Trigger mode selection 163
B031 475 Sixth target position lower 4 digits 147
Parameter List
A906 1026 Number of sampling before trigger 163 B032 476 Sixth target position upper 4 digits 147
A910 1027 Analog source selection (1ch) 163 B033 477 Seventh target position lower 4 digits 147
A911 1028 Analog source selection (2ch) 163 B034 478 Seventh target position upper 4 digits 147
B035 479 Eighth target position lower 4 digits 147
A912 1029 Analog source selection (3ch) 163
B036 480 Eighth target position upper 4 digits 147
A913 1030 Analog source selection (4ch) 163 B037 481 Ninth target position lower 4 digits 147
A914 1031 Analog source selection (5ch) 163 B038 482 Ninth target position upper 4 digits 147
A915 1032 Analog source selection (6ch) 163 B039 483 Tenth target position lower 4 digits 147

B040 484 Tenth target position upper 4 digits 147
B041 485 Eleventh target position lower 4 digits 147
B042 486 Eleventh target position upper 4 digits 147
A918 1035 Analog trigger channel 163 B043 487 Twelfth target position lower 4 digits 147
A919 1036 Analog trigger operation selection 163 B044 488 Twelfth target position upper 4 digits 147
A920 1037 Analog trigger level 163 B045 489 Thirteenth target position lower 4 digits 147
B046 490 Thirteenth target position upper 4 digits 147
A930 1038 Digital source selection (1ch) 163
B047 491 Fourteenth target position lower 4 digits 147
A931 1039 Digital source selection (2ch) 163 Fourteenth target position upper 4
B048 492 digits
147
B049 493 Fifteenth target position lower 4 digits 147
B050 494 Fifteenth target position upper 4 digits 147
B100 1220 Parameter for manufacturer setting.
A935 1043 Digital source selection (6ch) 163 Start command edge detection
B101 1221 selection
147
B120 1222 First positioning acceleration time 147
B121 1223 First positioning deceleration time 147
A938 1046 Digital trigger channel 163
B122 1224 First positioning dwell time 147
A939 1047 Digital trigger operation selection 163
B123 1225 First positioning sub-function 147
 B: Position control parameters B124 1226 Second positioning acceleration time 147
Parameters for the position control setting.
B125 1227 Second positioning deceleration time 147
Pr. Pr. Name Refer B126 1228 Second positioning dwell time 147
group to page
B000 419 Position command source selection 147, 148 B127 1229 Second positioning sub-function 147
100
B128 1230 Third positioning acceleration time 147 B177 1279 Fifteenth positioning deceleration time 147
B129 1231 Third positioning deceleration time 147 B178 1280 Fifteenth positioning dwell time 147
B130 1232 Third positioning dwell time 147 B179 1281 Fifteenth positioning sub-function 147
B131 1233 Third positioning sub-function 147 B180 1282 Home position return method selection 147
B132 1234 Fourth positioning acceleration time 147 B181 1283 Home position return speed 147
B133 1235 Fourth positioning deceleration time 147 B182 1284 Home position return creep speed 147
B134 1236 Fourth positioning dwell time 147 Home position shift amount lower 4
B183 1285 digits
147
B135 1237 Fourth positioning sub-function 147 Home position shift amount upper 4
B184 1286 digits
147
B136 1238 Fifth positioning acceleration time 147
Travel distance after proximity dog ON
B137 1239 Fifth positioning deceleration time 147 B185 1287 lower 4 digits
147
B138 1240 Fifth positioning dwell time 147 Travel distance after proximity dog ON
B186 1288 upper 4 digits
147
B139 1241 Fifth positioning sub-function 147
B187 1289 Home position return stopper torque 147
B140 1242 Sixth positioning acceleration time 147 Home position return stopper waiting
B188 1290 time
147
B141 1243 Sixth positioning deceleration time 147
Position control terminal input
B142 1244 Sixth positioning dwell time 147 B190 1292 selection
147
B143 1245 Sixth positioning sub-function 147 B191 1293 Roll feeding mode selection 147
B144 1246 Seventh positioning acceleration time 147 B192 1294 Position detection lower 4 digits 149
B145 1247 Seventh positioning deceleration time 147 B193 1295 Position detection upper 4 digits 149
B146 1248 Seventh positioning dwell time 147 B194 1296 Position detection selection 149
B147 1249 Seventh positioning sub-function 147 B195 1297 Position detection hysteresis width 149
B148 1250 Eighth positioning acceleration time 147
 N: Operation via communication and its
B149 1251 Eighth positioning deceleration time 147
settings 8
B150 1252 Eighth positioning dwell time 147 Parameters for communication operation. These parameters set the
communication specifications and operation.
Parameter List
B151 1253 Eighth positioning sub-function 147
B152 1254 Ninth positioning acceleration time 147 Pr.
Pr. Name
Refer
group to page
B153 1255 Ninth positioning deceleration time 147 549
N000 Protocol selection 129
B154 1256 Ninth positioning dwell time 147 
Communication EEPROM write
B155 1257 Ninth positioning sub-function 147 N001 342 129
selection
B156 1258 Tenth positioning acceleration time 147 539 MODBUS RTU communication check
N002 time interval
129
B157 1259 Tenth positioning deceleration time 147 
B158 1260 Tenth positioning dwell time 147 N010 349  Communication reset selection 129
Communication error execution waiting
B159 1261 Tenth positioning sub-function 147 N011 500  time
129
B160 1262 Eleventh positioning acceleration time 147 Communication error occurrence count
N012 501  display
129
B161 1263 Eleventh positioning deceleration time 147 Stop mode selection at communication
N013 502 error
129
B162 1264 Eleventh positioning dwell time 147
Operation frequency during
B163 1265 Eleventh positioning sub-function 147 N014 779 communication error
129
B164 1266 Twelfth positioning acceleration time 147 N020 117 PU communication station number 129
B165 1267 Twelfth positioning deceleration time 147

N021 118 PU communication speed 129
N022 119 PU communication data length 129
B166 1268 Twelfth positioning dwell time 147
N023 119 PU communication stop bit length 129
B167 1269 Twelfth positioning sub-function 147 N024 120 PU communication parity check 129
B168 1270 Thirteenth positioning acceleration time 147 N025 121 PU communication retry count 129
B169 1271 Thirteenth positioning deceleration time 147 N026 122 PU communication check time interval 129
N027 123 PU communication waiting time setting 129
B170 1272 Thirteenth positioning dwell time 147
N028 124 PU communication CR/LF selection 129
B171 1273 Thirteenth positioning sub-function 147
331
Fourteenth positioning acceleration N030 RS-485 communication station number 129
B172 1274 147 
time
Fourteenth positioning deceleration 332
B173 1275 147 N031 RS-485 communication speed 129
time 
B174 1276 Fourteenth positioning dwell time 147 333
N032 PU communication data length 129

B175 1277 Fourteenth positioning sub-function 147
333
B176 1278 Fifteenth positioning acceleration time 147 N033 PU communication stop bit length 129

101
334 RS-485 communication parity check G120 882
Regeneration avoidance operation
159
N034 selection
129 selection

335 G121 883 Regeneration avoidance operation level 159
N035 RS-485 communication retry count 129 Regeneration avoidance at deceleration
 G122 884 detection sensitivity
159
336 RS-485 communication check time Regeneration avoidance compensation
N036 interval
129 G123 885 159
 frequency limit value
337 RS-485 communication waiting time G124 886 Regeneration avoidance voltage gain 159
N037 129
 setting G125 665 Regeneration avoidance frequency gain 159
341 G130 660
153
N038 RS-485 communication CR/LF selection 129 deceleration operation selection

N040 547 USB communication station number 150 G131 661 Magnetic excitation increase rate 153
Increased magnetic excitation current
N041 548 USB communication check time interval 150 G132 662 level
153
343 G200 800 Control method selection 126
N080 Communication error count 129

G201 85 Excitation current break point 128
N100 541  Frequency command sign selection 129 Excitation current low speed scaling
N110 434  Network number (CC-Link IE) 129 G202 86 factor
128
N111 435  Station number (CC-Link IE) 129 G203 245 Rated slip 138
N500 1300 G204 246 Slip compensation time constant 138
to to G205 247
Constant-power range slip
138
N543, 1343, Communication option parameters. compensation selection
For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the Constant output range speed control P
N550 1350 option. G206 1116 gain compensation
156
to to Constant output range torque
N559 1359 G210 803 characteristic selection
113, 155
G211 820 Speed control P gain 1 156
 G: Control Parameter G212 821 Speed control integral time 1 156
Parameters for motor control. Torque control P gain 1 (current loop
G213 824 proportional gain)
156
8 Pr.
group
Pr. Name
Refer
to page G214 825
Torque control integral time 1 (current
loop integral time)
156
G000 0 Torque boost Simple 108
G215 823  Speed detection filter 1 156
Parameter List
G001 3 Base frequency Simple 108 G216 827 Torque detection filter 1 156
G002 19 Base frequency voltage 108 G217 854 Excitation ratio 158
G003 14 Load pattern selection 111 G218 1115 Speed control integral term clear time 156
G010 46 Second torque boost 108 Speed feed forward control/model
G220 877 adaptive speed control selection
157
G011 47 Second V/F (base frequency) 108
G221 878 Speed feed forward filter 157
G020 112 Third torque boost 108
G222 879 Speed feed forward torque limit 157
G021 113 Third V/F (base frequency) 108
G223 881 Speed feed forward gain 157
G030 60 Energy saving control selection 120
G224 828 Model speed control gain 157
G040 100 V/F1 (first frequency) 129
G230 840 Torque bias selection 157
G041 101 V/F1 (first frequency voltage) 129
G231 841 Torque bias 1 157
G042 102 V/F2 (second frequency) 129
G043 103 V/F2 (second frequency voltage) 129
G044 104 V/F3 (third frequency) 129
G234 844 Torque bias filter 157
G045 105 V/F3 (third frequency voltage) 129
G235 845 Torque bias operation time 157
G046 106 V/F4 (fourth frequency) 129
G236 846 Torque bias balance compensation 157
G047 107 V/F4 (fourth frequency voltage) 129
G237 847 Fall-time torque bias terminal 1 bias 157
G048 108 V/F5 (fifth frequency) 129
G238 848 Fall-time torque bias terminal 1 gain 157
G049 109 V/F5 (fifth frequency voltage) 129
G240 367  Speed feedback range 146
SF-PR slip amount adjustment
G060 673  operation selection
153 G241 368  Feedback gain 146
G061 674  SF-PR slip amount adjustment gain 153 Low speed range torque characteristic
G250 788  selection
154
Reverse rotation excitation current low-
G080 617 128 Per-unit speed control reference
speed scaling factor G260 1121 frequency
156, 157
G100 10 DC injection brake operation frequency 110
G101 11 DC injection brake operation time 110 G261 1117 system)
156
G102 802 Pre-excitation selection 110 Model speed control gain (per-unit
G262 1119 system)
157
G103 850 Brake operation selection 110
G105 522 Output stop frequency 150 G300 451 Second motor control method selection 126
Second motor excitation current break
G106 250 Stop selection 138 G301 565 point
128
G107 70  Special regenerative brake duty 114 Second motor excitation current low-
G302 566 speed scaling factor
128
G108 1299 Second pre-excitation selection 110
G311 830 Speed control P gain 2 156
G110 12 DC injection brake operation voltage 110
G312 831 Speed control integral time 2 156
102
Pr. Pr. Name Refer
group to page
G313 834 Torque control P gain 2 156
G314 835 Torque control integral time 2 156
G315 833  Speed detection filter 2 156
G316 837 Torque detection filter 2 156
Second motor low-speed range torque
G350 747  characteristic selection
154
G361 1118 system)
156
G400 286 Droop gain 143
G401 287 Droop filter time constant 143
G402 288 Droop function activation selection 143
G403 994 Droop break point gain 143
G404 995 Droop break point torque 143
G410 653 Speed smoothing control 152
G411 654 Speed smoothing cutoff frequency 152
G420 679 Second droop gain 143
G421 680 Second droop filter time constant 143
Second droop function activation
G422 681 selection
143
G423 682 Second droop break point gain 143
G424 683 Second droop break point torque 143
G601 1003 Notch filter frequency 162
G602 1004 Notch filter depth 162
G603 1005 Notch filter width 162
Speed control gain (Advanced magnetic
G932 89 flux vector)
126
G942 569 Second motor speed control gain 126
 The setting is available only when a plug-in option that supports the vector
8
control is installed. Refer to the Instruction Manual of each option for details.
Parameter List
 The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the LCD
operation panel and the parameter unit.
 Setting can be made only for the standard model.
 Setting can be made only for the standard model and the IP55 compatible
model.
 The setting is available only with the 400 V class.
 The setting is available only for the FR-A800-GF or when a compatible plug-in
option is installed.
 The setting is not available for the FR-A800-E.
 Parameter for manufacturer setting for the FR-A842-P. Do not set.
 The setting is not available for the FR-A842-P.
103
 List of parameters for the FR-A800-E Pr.
group
Pr. Name
Refer
to page
Ethernet communication (by function Ethernet IP filter address 4 range
N666 1448 129
group) specification
Ethernet command source selection IP
N670 1449 129
 D: Operation command and frequency address 1
command Ethernet command source selection IP
N671 1450 address 2
129
Parameters that specify the inverter's command source, and
Ethernet command source selection IP
parameters that set the motor driving frequency and torque. N672 1451 address 3
129
Pr. Refer Ethernet command source selection IP
group
Pr. Name
to page N673 1452 address 4
129
NET mode operation command source Ethernet command source selection IP
D012 550 selection
145 N674 1453 129
address 3 range specification
PU mode operation command source Ethernet command source selection IP
D013 551 selection
145 N675 1454 129
address 4 range specification
Station number in inverter-to-inverter
 M: Monitor display and monitor output signal N681 1124 link
164
Parameters regarding the inverter's operating status. These Number of inverters in inverter-to-
parameters are used to set the monitors and output signals. N682 1125 inverter link system
164
Pr. Pr. Name Refer

group to page
M400 190 RUN terminal function selection 137  List of parameters for the FR-A842-P
M401 191 SU terminal function selection 137 parallel operation (by function group)
M402 192 IPF terminal function selection 137
 E: Environment setting parameters
M403 193 OL terminal function selection 137 Parameters that set the inverter operation characteristics.
M404 194 FU terminal function selection 137 Pr. Refer
Pr. Name
M405 195 ABC1 terminal function selection 137 group to page
M406 196 ABC2 terminal function selection 137 E390 1001 Parallel operation selection 162
M410 313 DO0 output selection 137  M: Monitor display and monitor output signal
M411 314 Parameters regarding the inverter's operating status. These
8
DO1 output selection 137
parameters are used to set the monitors and output signals.
M412 315 DO2 output selection 137
Pr. Refer
Pr. Name
Parameter List
group to page
settings M400 190 RUN terminal function selection 137
Parameters for communication operation. These parameters set the M401 191 SU terminal function selection 137
communication specifications and operation.
M402 192 IPF terminal function selection 137
Pr. Refer
group Pr. Name to page M403 193 OL terminal function selection 137
N600 1434 Ethernet IP address 1 129 M404 194 FU terminal function selection 137
N601 1435 Ethernet IP address 2 129 M405 195 ABC1 terminal function selection 137
N602 1436 Ethernet IP address 3 129 M406 196 ABC2 terminal function selection 137
N603 1437 Ethernet IP address 4 129
N610 1438 Subnet mask 1 129
settings
Parameters for communication operation. These parameters set the
N612 1440 Subnet mask 3 129 communication specifications and operation.
Pr. Refer
Pr. Name
N630 1427 Ethernet function selection 1 129 group to page
N631 1428 Ethernet function selection 2 129 Parallel operation communication
N092 652 check time
152
N632 1429 Ethernet function selection 3 129
N641 1426 Link speed and duplex mode selection 129
N642 1455 Keepalive time 129
Ethernet signal loss detection function
N643 1431 selection
129
Ethernet communication check time
N644 1432 interval
129
Ethernet communication network
N650 1424 number
129
Ethernet communication station
N651 1425 number
129
N660 1442 Ethernet IP filter address 1 129
N664 1446 specification
129
N665 1447 specification
129
104
 Converter unit parameter list (by parameter number)
Set the necessary parameters to meet the load and operational specifications. Parameter setting, change and check can be performed from
the operation panel (FR-DU08).
Minimum Customer
Pr. Initial
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group value setting
increments
Reset selection during power supply to main
─ 30 E300 circuit
0, 100 1 0
Automatic
restart
57 A702 Restart selection 0, 9999 1 9999
─ 65  H300 Retry selection 0 to 4 1 0

67  H301 Number of retries at fault occurrence 0 to 10, 101 to 110 1 0
Retry
68  H302 Retry waiting time 0.1 to 600 s 0.1 s 1s

69  H303 Retry count display erase 0 1 0
Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/
─ reset limit
14 to 17, 114 to 117 14
─ 75 E100 Reset selection 1

E101 Disconnected PU detection 0, 1 0
E107 Reset limit
─ 77 E400 Parameter write selection 1, 2 1 2
117 N020 PU communication station number 0 to 31 1 0
118 N021 PU communication speed 48, 96, 192, 384, 576, 768, 1152 1 192
PU communication stop bit length / data
─ 0, 10 1
communication
length
PU connector
119 N022 PU communication data length 0, 1

1
0
N023 PU communication stop bit length 0, 1 1
120 N024 PU communication parity check 0 to 2 1 2 8
121 N025 Number of PU communication retries 0 to 10, 9999 1 1
Parameter List
122 N026 PU communication check time interval 0, 0.1 to 999.8 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999
123 N027 PU communication waiting time setting 0 to 150 ms, 9999 1 ms 9999
124 N028 PU communication CR/LF selection 0 to 2 1 1
─ 161 E200 Key lock operation selection 0, 10 1 0
E000
─ 168
E080
Parameter for manufacturer setting.
E001
─ 169
E081
Cumulative
monitor
clear
170 M020 Watt-hour meter clear 0, 10, 9999 1 9999
178 T700
Input terminal
RDI terminal function selection 1 9999

assignment
function
187 T709 OH terminal function selection 7, 62, 9999 1 7
189 T711 RES terminal function selection 1 62
190 M400 RDB terminal function selection 1 111

function assignment
Output terminal
191 M401 RDA terminal function selection 1 11

2, 8, 11, 17, 25, 26, 64, 68, 90, 94,
95, 98, 99, 102, 108, 111, 125,
192 M402 IPF terminal function selection
126, 164, 168, 190, 194, 195,
1 2
198, 199, 206, 207, 209, 210,
193 M403 RSO terminal function selection
214, 227, 306, 307, 309, 310,
1 209
327, 9999
194 M404 FAN terminal function selection 1 25
195 M405 ABC1 terminal function selection 1 99
─ 248 A006 Self power management selection 0 to 2 1 0
255 E700 Life alarm status display (0 to 15) 1 0

check
Life
256 E701 Inrush current limit circuit life display (0 to 100%) 1% 100%
257 E702 Control circuit capacitor life display (0 to 100%) 1% 100%
105
Minimum
Pr. Initial Customer
group value setting
increments
─ 261 A730 Power failure stop selection 0, 1, 2, 21, 22 1 0
─ 268 M022 Monitor decimal digits selection 0, 1, 9999 1 9999
─ 269 E023 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
─ 290 M044 Monitor negative output selection 0, 2, 4, 6 1 0
0 to 3, 5, 6, 100 to 103, 105, 106,

Password
296 E410
function
Password lock level 1 9999

9999
297 E411 Password lock/unlock (0 to 5), 1000 to 9998, 9999 1 9999
331  N030 RS-485 communication station number 0, 31 (0, 247) 1 0

3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96, 192, 384, 576,
332  N031 RS-485 communication speed
768, 1152
1 96
RS-485 communication stop bit length / data
RS-485 communication
─ length
0, 1, 10, 11 1 1
333  N032 RS-485 communication data length 0, 1 1 0
N033 RS-485 communication stop bit length 0, 1 1 1
RS-485 communication parity check
334  N034 selection
0 to 2 1 2
335  N035 RS-485 communication retry count 0 to 10, 9999 1 1

336  N036 RS-485 communication check time interval 0 to 999.8 s, 9999 0.1 s 0s
337  N037 RS-485 communication waiting time setting 0 to 150 ms, 9999 1 ms 9999
341  N038 RS-485 communication CR/LF selection 0 to 2 1 1
342 N001 Communication EEPROM write selection 0, 1 1 0
343  N080 Communication error count ─ 1 0
Maintenance
503 E710 Maintenance timer 1 0 (1 to 9998) 1 0
8 504 E711 Maintenance timer 1 warning output set time 0 to 9998, 9999 1 9999
Parameter List
MODBUS RTU communication check time

─ 539  N002 interval
0 to 999.8 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999
Communication
549  N000 Protocol selection 0, 1 1 0
─ 563 M021 Energization time carrying-over times (0 to 65535) 1 0

─ 598 H102 Undervoltage level 350 to 430 V, 9999 0.1 V 9999
Parallel operation communication check
─ 652  N092 time
0, 0.1 to 120 s, 9999 0.1 s 1s
Control circuit temperature signal output

─ 663 M060 level
0 to 100°C 1°C 0°C

Maintenance
687 E713 Maintenance timer 2 warning output set time 0 to 9998, 9999 1 9999
689 E715 Maintenance timer 3 warning output set time 0 to 9998, 9999 1 9999
774 M101 Operation panel monitor selection 1 1 9999

Functions function
Protective Monitor
2, 8, 13, 20, 25, 43, 44, 55, 62, 98,

775 M102 Operation panel monitor selection 2
9999
1 9999
776 M103 Operation panel monitor selection 3 1 9999
872 H201 Input phase loss protection selection 0, 1 1 0
─ 876 T723 OH input selection 0 to 2 1 0
106
Minimum
Pr. Initial Customer
group value setting
increments
parameters
888 E420 Free parameter 1 0 to 9999 1 9999

Free
889 E421 Free parameter 2 0 to 9999 1 9999

monitor
Energy
saving
Cumulative power monitor digit shifted

891 M023 times
0, 4, 9999 1 9999
PU
990 E104 PU buzzer control 0, 1 1 1

function
Monitor
Operation panel setting dial push monitor

992 M104 selection
2, 8, 13, 20, 25, 43, 44, 55, 62, 98 1 8
─ 997 H103 Fault initiation 0 to 255, 9999 1 9999

function operation
Parallel
1001
E390 Parallel operation selection 1, 2, 100, 200, 300 1 100

1006 E020 Clock (year) 2000 to 2099 1 2000

Clock
1007 E021 Clock (month, day) 1/1 to 12/31 1 101
1008 E022 Clock (hour, minute) 0:00 to 23:59 1 0
─ 1048 E106 Display-off waiting time 0 to 60 min 1 min 0
Pr.CLR
8
Parameter clear (0), 1 1 0
parameters
Clear
ALL.CL All parameter clear (0), 1 1 0
Parameter List
Err.CL Fault history clear (0), 1 1 0
─ Pr.CPY Parameter copy (0), 1 to 3 1 0

─ Pr.CHG Initial value change list ─ 1 0
─ Pr.MD Group parameter setting (0), 1, 2 1 0
 Parameter for manufacturer setting for the FR-CC2-P. Do not set.
 The parameter is available for the FR-CC2-P only.
107
Explanations of Parameters
The following marks are used to show the applicable control method: for V/F control, for Advanced magnetic flux
vector control, for Real sensorless vector control, for vector control, and for PM sensorless vector control.
(Parameters without any mark are valid for all controls.)
Pr. ……denotes parameter numbers, and GROUP ……denotes group parameter numbers.
Connection diagrams appear with the control logic of the input terminals as sink logic, unless otherwise specified.
Manual torque boost Base frequency, voltage

Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name
0 G000 Torque boost 46 G010 Second torque boost Base frequency
3 G001 Base frequency 19 G002
112 G020 Third torque boost voltage
Second V/F (base Third V/F (base
Voltage drop in the low-frequency range can be compensated, 47 G011
frequency)
113 G021
frequency)
improving reduction of the motor torque in the low-speed range.
• Motor torque in the low-frequency range can be adjusted Use this function to adjust the inverter outputs (voltage, frequency)
according to the load, in order to increase the motor torque at to match with the motor rating.
start. • When operating a standard motor, generally set the rated
• The RT and X9 signals enable the switching between 3 types of frequency of the motor in Pr.3 Base frequency. When running
torque boost. the motor using commercial power supply-inverter switch-over
• Available during V/F control. operation, set Pr.3 to the same value as the power supply
frequency.
100%
• When you want to change the base frequency when switching
Output
multiple motors with one inverter, etc., use the Pr.47 Second V/F
voltage (base frequency) and Pr.113 Third V/F (base frequency).
• Set the rated voltage (rated motor voltage, etc.) to the Pr.19 Base
Pr.0
Pr.46
Setting frequency voltage.
Pr.112 range • Available during V/F control.
0 Output Base
Output voltage (V)
frequency frequency
(Hz)
Pr.19
Limiting the output frequency Output frequency
(Hz)
(maximum/minimum frequency) Pr.3

Pr.47
Pr.113
Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name
9 1
18
H400 Maximum frequency
H402
High speed
maximum frequency
2 H401 Minimum frequency
Motor speed can be limited.

• Clamp the upper and lower limits of the output frequency.
• To operate at a frequency higher than 120 Hz, adjust the
maximum output frequency with Pr.18.
(If a frequency is set in Pr.18, the Pr.1 setting automatically
changes to the frequency set in Pr.18. Also, if a frequency is set
in Pr.1, the Pr.18 setting automatically changes to the frequency
set in Pr.1.)
• During position control under vector control, the maximum
frequency is valid for the speed command calculated considering
the droop pulses. The lower frequency limit is disabled.
Clamped at the
Output frequency maximum frequency
(Hz)
Pr.1
Pr.18
Pr.2 Frequency setting
0 5, 10V
Clamped at the (4mA) (20mA)
minimum frequency
108 When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions.
Multi-speed setting operation Acceleration/deceleration time
Multi-speed setting Multi-speed setting 7 F010 Acceleration time 8 F011 Deceleration time
4 D301 5 D302
(high speed) (middle speed) Acceleration/ Acceleration/
Multi-speed setting Multi-speed setting 20 F000 deceleration 21 F001 deceleration time
6 D303 24 D304
(low speed) (speed 4) reference frequency increments
Multi-speed setting Multi-speed setting Second acceleration/ Second deceleration
25 D305 26 D306 44 F020 45 F021
(speed 5) (speed 6) deceleration time time
Multi-speed input Third acceleration/ Third deceleration
Multi-speed setting 110 F030 111 F031
27 D307 28 D300 compensation deceleration time time
(speed 7)
selection Acceleration/
Acceleration time in
Multi-speed setting Multi-speed setting 147 F022 deceleration time 791 F070
232 D308 233 D309 low-speed range
(speed 8) (speed 9) switching frequency
Multi-speed setting Multi-speed setting Deceleration time in
234 D310 235 D311 792 F071
(speed 10) (speed 11) low-speed range
Multi-speed setting Multi-speed setting
236 D312 237 D313 The following parameters are used to set motor acceleration/
(speed 12) (speed 13)
Multi-speed setting Multi-speed setting deceleration time.
238 D314 239 D315 Set a larger value for a slower acceleration/deceleration, and a
(speed 14) (speed 15)
smaller value for a faster acceleration/deceleration.
Use these parameters to change among pre-set operation speeds
with contact signals. The speeds are pre-set with parameters. • Use Pr.7 Acceleration time to set the acceleration time required
to reach Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency
Any speed can be selected by simply turning ON/OFF the contact
from a stop status.
signals (RH, RM, RL, and REX signals). • Use Pr.8 Deceleration time to set the deceleration time required
• The inverter operates at the frequency set in Pr.4 when RH signal to reach a stop status from Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration
is ON, Pr.5 when RM signal is ON and Pr.6 when RL signal is reference frequency.
ON.
Pr.20
• The frequency from 4th speed to 15th speed can be set in (60Hz/50Hz) Running
accordance with the combination of the RH, RM, RL, and REX frequency
frequency (Hz)
signals. Set the running frequencies in Pr.24 to Pr.27 and Pr.232
to Pr.239. (In the initial status, 4th speed to 15th speed are Output
invalid.) Time
Output frequency (Hz)
Speed 1 Acceleration Pr.7 Deceleration Pr.8

(High speed) Speed 10 time Pr.44 time Pr.45
Speed 5 Speed 11
Speed 2 Pr.110 Pr.111
Speed 6 Speed 9 Speed 12
(Middle speed)
Speed 13
Speed 3 Speed 4
9
Speed 8
(Low speed) Speed 14 Pr.21 setting Description
Speed 7 Speed 15
0 Set the increment for the
(initial value) Increment: 0.1 s
Time acceleration/deceleration time
setting.
RH ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 1 Increment: 0.01 s
ON ON ON ON
RM ON ON ON ON
• Pr.44 and Pr.45 are valid when the RT signal is ON or when the
RL
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON output frequency is equal to or higher than the frequency set in
REX
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Pr.147 Acceleration/deceleration time switching
∗1 frequency.Pr.110 and Pr.111 are valid when the X9 signal is ON.
 Operates at the frequency set in Pr.6 when RH, RM, or RL is OFF Output frequency
(Hz)
and REX is ON while Pr.232 Multi-speed setting (speed 8) = Set
"9999". frequency
• Speed (frequency) can be compensated for the multi-speed Pr. 147

setting and the remote setting by inputting the frequency setting setting
Time
compensation signal (terminals 1, 2). Pr.7 Pr.44 Pr.110 Pr.111 Pr.44
(Pr.45)
Pr.8 Pr.7 Pr.44 Pr.44
(Pr.45)
Pr.8
Pr.28 setting Description RT signal ON
X9 signal ON
0 (initial value) Without compensation
• If torque is required in the low-speed range (less than 10% of the
1 With compensation rated motor frequency) under PM sensorless vector control, set
the Pr.791 Acceleration time in low-speed range and Pr.792
Deceleration time in low-speed range settings higher than the
Pr.7 Acceleration time and Pr.8 Deceleration time settings so
that the mild acceleration/deceleration is performed in the low-
speed range. Enabled especially under the current
synchronization operation.
(This function is not available for the FR-A842-P.)
frequency (Hz)
Output
Low-speed range
(rated motor frequency/10)
Time
Acceleration time Deceleration time
in low-speed range in low-speed range
Slope set by Pr. 791 Slope set by Pr.792
Slope set by Pr.7 Slope set by Pr.8
When setting parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) and understand instructions. 109
Overheat protection of the motor DC injection brake, zero speed control,
(electronic thermal O/L relay) and servo lock
Electronic thermal O/L Second electronic DC injection brake DC injection brake
9 H000 51 H010 10 G100 11 G101
relay thermal O/L relay operation frequency operation time
PTC thermistor First free thermal DC injection brake Pre-excitation
561 H020 600 H001 12 G110 802 G102
protection level reduction frequency 1 operation voltage selection
First free thermal First free thermal Brake operation Second pre-
601 H002 602 H003 850 G103 1299 G108
reduction ratio 1 reduction frequency 2 selection excitation selection
First free thermal First free thermal
603 H004 604 H005 When stopping a motor, DC injection brake is applied to adjust the
reduction ratio 2 reduction frequency 3
Motor permissible Second motor braking torque and timing to stop the motor.
607 H006 608 H016 • By setting the frequency to
load level permissible load level
(Hz)
Output
frequency
Second free thermal Second free thermal operate the DC injection
692 H011 693 H012
reduction frequency 1 reduction ratio 1 brake (zero speed control
Second free thermal Second free thermal and servo lock) to Pr.10
694 H013 695 H014
reduction frequency 2 reduction ratio 2 DC injection brake Pr. 10 Operation
696 H015
Second free thermal
876 H022
Thermal protector operation frequency, the frequency
Time
reduction frequency 3 input DC injection brake (zero DC injection Pr.12
Operation
PTC thermistor speed control and servo
brake
voltage voltage
Time
1016 H021 protection detection lock) will operate when it
time
reaches this frequency at Pr. 11 Operation time
Set the current for the electronic thermal O/L relay to protect the the time of deceleration.
motor from overheating. Such a setting will provide the optimum • Set the time applying the DC injection brake (zero speed control
protective characteristic considering the low cooling capability of the and servo lock) to Pr.11 DC injection brake operation time.
motor during low-speed operation. • Pr.12 DC injection brake operation voltage will set the percent
against the power supply voltage. (Not used at the time of zero
• This function detects the overload (overheat) of the motor and
speed control or servo lock)
trips the inverter by stopping the operation of the transistor at the
• Under Real sensorless vector control, Pr.850 can be used to
inverter output side.
select DC injection brake (setting value "0", initial value), zero
• Set the rated motor current (A) in Pr.9.
speed control (setting value "1"), or magnetic flux decay output
(If the motor has both 50 Hz and 60 Hz ratings and the Pr.3 Base
shutoff (setting value "2").
frequency is set to 60 Hz, set to 1.1 times the 60 Hz rated motor
• When speed control is selected under vector control or PM
current.
sensorless vector control, pre-excitation braking operation by the
• Set "0" in Pr.9 to avoid activating the electronic thermal relay
LX signal can either be zero speed control or servo lock control.
function; for example, when using an external thermal relay for
Pre-excitation is valid at LX signal ON.
9 the motor. (Note that the output transistor protection of the
inverter is enabled. (E.THT)) Pr.802
• Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor (Pr.1299) Braking
Description
Setting operation
Set one of "1, 13 to 18, 50, 53, or 54" in Pr.71. (This setting will value
enable the 100% constant-torque characteristic in the low-speed
range.) It will try to maintain 0 r/min so the motor shaft will
0 Zero
not rotate even when a load is applied. However, it
• When using an IPM motor (MM-CF), perform IPM parameter (initial speed
will not return to its original position when the shaft
initialization to automatically set the rated current of the IPM value) control
moves due to external force.
motor.
It will try to maintain the position of the motor shaft
• The outputs from the PTC thermistor built into the motor can be Servo even if a load is applied. When the shaft moves due
input to terminals 2 and 10. When the input from the PTC 1
lock to external force, it will return to its original position
thermistor reaches the resistance value set in Pr.561, PTC after the external force is removed.
thermistor operation (E.PTC) will be activated to shut off the
inverter outputs. • For the vector control and PM sensorless vector control, set the
• When the PTC thermistor protection level setting is used, use frequency at where the zero speed control or servo lock control
Pr.1016 to set the time from when the resistance of the PTC activates (Pr.10) and the operating period of the control (Pr.11).
thermistor reaches the protection level until the protective Use Pr.802 to select whether the zero speed control or servo lock
function (E.PTC) is activated. control. During vector control, the initial value of Pr.10 is
• The activation level of the electronic thermal O/L relay Pr.600 to automatically set to 0.5 Hz.
Pr.604 (Pr.692 to Pr.696) can be varied according to the thermal • Turning ON the RT signal enables the second pre-excitation
characteristic of the motor. selection.
• While the RT signal is ON, the setting values of Pr.51 and Pr.692
to Pr.696 are referred to provide thermal protection. Use the
electronic thermal O/L relay function to drive two motors of
different current ratings by one inverter. (To rotate two motors at
once, use an external thermal relay.)
• To change the operational characteristic of the electronic thermal
O/L relay, set the permissible load level in Pr.607 or Pr.608
according to the motor characteristics.
• Use Pr.876 to set valid/invalid status of terminal OH function
when the FR-A8TP is installed.
• Vertical lift load applications (setting value "2, 3")
Starting frequency and start-time hold Set "2" for a vertical lift load that is in power driving at forward
rotation and in regenerative driving at reverse rotation.
function Pr.0 Torque boost is valid during forward rotation, and torque
boost is automatically changed to "0%" during reverse rotation.
Set "3" for the counterweight system, etc. that is in power driving
Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name at reverse rotation and in regenerative driving at forward rotation,
Holding time at a according to the load weight.
13 F102 Starting frequency 571 F103
start
Pr.14 = 2 Pr.14 = 3
The starting frequency can be set and the starting frequency can be
For vertical lift loads For vertical lift loads
held for a certain period of time. At forward rotation boost...Pr.0 setting At forward rotation boost...0%
Set these functions when starting Output
At reverse rotation boost...0% At reverse rotation boost...Pr.0 setting
torque is needed or the motor frequency

(Hz) 100% 100%
drive at start needs smoothing. 60
Setting range
Forward Reverse
voltage
voltage
Output
Output
rotation rotation
Pr.13
Reverse Forward
0
Time Pr.0 rotation Pr.0 rotation
Pr. 571 setting time Base frequency Base frequency
STF ON
• Switching applied load selection with a terminal (setting value "4,

Minimum frequency at motor start and 5")
start-time hold function The RT and X17 signals enable the switching between the
constant-torque load operation and lift operation.
Pr.14 RT(X17)
Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name Setting output characteristic
signal
value
Holding time at a
13 F102 Starting frequency 571 F103 For constant-torque load
start ON
(same as the setting value "0")
Set the frequency where the PM motor starts running. 4
For lift, boost at reverse rotation 0%
• When setting a frequency with OFF
Output (same as the setting value "2")
analog input, set the deadband frequency
For constant-torque load
in the low-speed range to (Hz)
60 ON
(same as the setting value "0")
Setting range
eliminate noise and offset Set frequency

5
For lift, boost at reverse rotation 0%
deviation. Output OFF
frequency (same as the setting value "3")
• When the low-speed range Pr.13
high-torque characteristic 0
JOG operation
Time
function is enabled (Pr.788 =
9
Output from 0.01Hz
"9999"), the frequency level of STF ON
0.01 Hz is held for the time

period of Pr.571 after turning ON the start signal. Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name
Jog acceleration/
15 D200 Jog frequency 16 F002
deceleration time
V/F patterns for various applications
The frequency and acceleration/deceleration time for JOG operation
can be set. JOG operation is possible in both External operation and
PU.
JOG operation can be used for conveyor positioning, test operation,
Pr. GROUP Name etc.
Load pattern
14 G003
selection Output frequency(Hz)
Pr.20
Optimal output characteristics (V/F characteristics) for application or
Pr.15 Forward
load characteristics can be selected. Available during V/F control. setting range rotation
Time
Reverse
• Constant-torque load application rotation
Pr.16
(setting "0", initial value)
100%
The output voltage will change linearly JOG signal ON
against the output frequency at the base
Output voltage
Forward rotation STF ON

frequency or lower.
Set this parameter when driving a load Reverse rotation STR ON
that has constant load torque even when
Pr. 3 Base frequency the rotation speed is changed, such as a
Output frequency (Hz) conveyor, dolly, or roll drive.
• Variable-torque load applications
(setting value "1")
100%
The output voltage will change in square
Output voltage
curve against the output frequency at

the base frequency or lower.
Set this parameter when driving a load
with load torque change proportionally
Pr. 3 Base frequency against the square of the rotation speed,
Output frequency (Hz) such as a fan or pump.
• For Pr.22, set the ratio of the output current to the inverter rated
Inverter output shutoff signal current at which the stall prevention operation will be activated.
Normally, this should be set at 150% (initial value).
For the FR-A820-00250(3.7K) or lower and FR-A840-
Pr. GROUP Name 00126(3.7K) or lower, when the control method is changed from
17 T720 MRS input selection V/F control or Advanced magnetic flux vector control to Real
sensorless vector control, or vector control, the Pr.22 setting
The inverter output can be shut off with the MRS signal. The logic of changes from 150% (initial value) to 200%.
the MRS signal can also be selected. • To set the stall prevention operation level with the analog signal
When Pr.17="4", the MRS signal from an external terminal is be set via terminal 1 (terminal 4), set Pr.868 (Pr.858)="4". Use Pr.148
as the normally closed (NC contact) input, and the MRS signal and Pr.149 to adjust gain and bias for the analog signals.
(output stop) via communication as the normally open (NO contact) • When operating at the rated motor frequency or higher,
input. acceleration may not be made because the motor current does
not increase. Also, when operating in the high-frequency range,
Motor coasts Setting value "0" (Initial Setting value "2" the current flowing to the locked motor becomes less than the
to stop
Inverter
value)
Inverter
rated output current of the inverter; and even if the motor is
stopped, the protective function will not operate (OL).
MRS MRS In a case like this, the stall prevention level can be reduced in the
SD (PC) SD (PC) high-frequency range to improve the motor's operating
characteristics. This is useful when operating up to the high
Time speed range, such as when using a centrifuge. Normally, set
Pr.66 to 60 Hz, and Pr.23 to 100%.
MRS signal ON • When Pr.23="9999" (initial value), the stall prevention operation
STF (STR) level is constant at the Pr.22 level up to 590 Hz.
signal ON
Always at the Pr.22 level

when Pr.23 = "9999"
Pr.22
Pr. 18 Refer to the page on Pr.1
Stall prevention operation
Pr. 20, 21 Refer to the page on Pr.7

level (%)

as set in Pr.23
Pr.66 400Hz
Stall prevention operation • By setting Pr.49="9999" and turning ON the RT signal, Pr.48 will be
enabled.
• To enable Pr.114, set Pr.115 "0" and turn ON the X9 signal.
9 Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name

• Use Pr.48 (Pr.114) to set the stall prevention operation level
applicable in the range between 0 Hz and the frequency set in
Pr.49 (Pr.115).
Stall prevention

operation current
22 H500 23 H610
Stall prevention
Output
operation level compensation factor During acceleration
Output
frequency (Hz)
frequency (Hz) Output
frequency
Output
at double speed Pr.49(Pr.115)
frequency Set frequency
Pr.49(Pr.115)
Second stall Second stall Set frequency
48 H600 prevention operation 49 H601 prevention operation Pr.48 During deceleration/constant speed Stall
prevention
Time
Stall
Time
level frequency Pr.114

Pr.49 Running frequency
level prevention
level
Pr.22 used
Pr.22 used Pr.48(Pr.114) used Pr.48(Pr.114) used
Stall prevention Pr.115
Third stall prevention Set frequency is Pr.49(Pr.115) or less Set frequency exceeds Pr.49(Pr.115)
66 H611 operation reduction 114 H602
operation level
starting frequency
Pr.49 Pr.115
Third stall prevention Stall prevention level Operation
115 H603 148 H620 setting setting
operation frequency at 0 V input
The second (third) stall prevention function
Voltage reduction 0 (initial value)
Stall prevention level disabled.
149 H621 154 H631 selection during stall
at 10 V input The second (third) stall prevention function
prevention operation 0.01 Hz to 590 Hz
Stall prevention OL signal output operates according to the frequency.
156 H501 157 M430
operation selection timer The second stall prevention function operates
Terminal 4 function Terminal 1 function Setting not according to the RT signal.
858 T040 868 T010 9999 available
assignment assignment RT signal ON: stall level Pr.48
RT signal OFF: stall level Pr.22
This function monitors the output current and automatically changes
the output frequency to prevent the inverter from tripping due to • Use Pr.154 to further suppress the activation of the protective
overcurrent, overvoltage, etc. It can also limit the stall prevention function (E.OC[], E.OV[]) during stall prevention operation.
• Use Pr.156 to suppress the stall prevention operation and the
and fast-response current limit operation during acceleration/
fast-response current limit in accordance with the operating
deceleration and power/regenerative driving. status.
This function is disabled during Real sensorless vector control, • When Real sensorless vector control, vector control or PM
vector control and PM sensorless vector control. sensorless vector control is selected using Pr.800, Pr.22 serves
• Stall prevention as the torque limit level.
If the output current exceeds the stall prevention operation level,
the output frequency of the inverter is automatically changed to
reduce the output current. Also the second and third stall
prevention functions can limit the output frequency range in which
the stall prevention function is enabled.
• Fast-response current limit
If the current exceeds the limit value, the output of the inverter is
shut off to prevent an overcurrent. (This function is not available
for the FR-A842-P.)
• For the torque limit operation during Real sensorless vector control
Setting the torque limit level under and vector control, use Pr.803 to change the torque characteristic in
the low-speed range and in the constant output range.
speed control Torque characteristic in constant-
Torque outpu range
Pr.803
characteristic in
setting Torque
low-speed range Output limit
Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name characteristic
Stall prevention Torque changes
OL signal output 0
22 H500 operation level 157 M430 according to the Constant motor
timer (initial ―
(Torque limit level) value) scaling factor set in output
Constant output range Pr.86. 
801 H704 Output limit level 803 G210 torque characteristic 1 Constant torque Constant torque Without
selection
2 Constant torque Constant torque With
Torque command Torque command
804 D400 805 D401 Constant motor
source selection value (RAM) 10 Constant torque ―
Torque command output
Torque limit input
806 D402 value (RAM, 810 H700 Torque changes
method selection
EEPROM) according to the
11 Constant torque Without
Set resolution Torque limit level scaling factor set in
811 D030 812 H701
switchover (regeneration) Pr.86. 
Torque limit level Torque limit level (4th
813 H702 814 H703  This function is only available under Real sensorless vector
(3rd quadrant) quadrant) control. The upper limit of the torque at 0 Hz is determined by
Torque limit level multiplying the torque limit in the constant-torque range by the
815 H710 Torque limit level 2 816 H720
during acceleration scaling factor set in Pr.86.
Torque limit level Terminal 4 function
817 H721 858 T040
during deceleration assignment • The inverter can be set to trip at activation of torque limit
Terminal 1 function operation and stalling of the motor. Use Pr.874 to set the output
868 T010 874 H730 OLT level setting
assignment
torque where the protective function activates.
During speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector • Use Pr.811 to change the parameter setting increment for the
control and PM sensorless vector control, the output torque is limited torque limit setting from 0.1% to 0.01%.
to prevent it from exceeding a specified value. • If Pr.800 is used to select V/F control or Advanced magnetic flux
• The torque limit level can be set in a range of 0 to 400% using Pr.22. vector control, the Pr.22 setting operates as the stall prevention
When the TL signal is ON, the torque limit level 2 (Pr.815) is operation level.
enabled. Pr. 24 to 28
• The torque limit level can be selected by setting it with a Refer to the page on Pr.4
parameter, or by using analog input terminals (terminals 1, 4).
Also, the torque limit level at forward rotation (power driving/
regenerative driving) and reverse rotation (power driving/ Acceleration/deceleration pattern and
regenerative driving) can be set individually.
backlash measures
Pr. Setting range Description 9
0
Torque limit by parameter setting Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name
(initial value)
810 Torque limit using the analog signals input to Acceleration/ Backlash
1
terminals 1 and 4. 29 F100 deceleration pattern 140 F200 acceleration
2 Torque limit by communication options selection stopping frequency
Backlash Backlash
Set the torque limit level for forward rotation 141 F201 acceleration 142 F202 deceleration
0 to 400%
regenerative driving. stopping time stopping frequency
812
9999 Backlash
Limit using Pr.22 or the analog terminal values. Acceleration S-
(initial value) 143 F203 deceleration 380 F300
pattern 1
Set the torque limit level for reverse rotation stopping time
0 to 400% Deceleration S- Acceleration S-
power driving. 381 F301 382 F302
813 pattern 1 pattern 2
9999
Limit using Pr.22 or the analog terminal values. Deceleration S- S-pattern time at a
(initial value) 383 F303 516 F400
pattern 2 start of acceleration
Set the torque limit level for reverse rotation S-pattern time at a
0 to 400% S-pattern time at a
regenerative driving. 517 F401 completion of 518 F402
814 start of deceleration
9999 acceleration
Limit using Pr.22 or the analog terminal values.
(initial value) S-pattern time at a
519 F403 completion of
• When inputting an analog signal from terminal 1 (4) to set the
deceleration
torque limit level, set Pr.810="1" or Pr.868 (Pr.858)="4".
• The torque limit value can be input via CC-Link (using the FR- The acceleration/deceleration pattern can be set according to the
A8NC) or CC-Link IE Field network (using the FR-A8NCE or FR- application.
A800-GF) communication. In addition, the backlash measures, which stop acceleration/
• Use Pr.816 and Pr.817 to set the torque limit value during deceleration at certain frequency or time set in parameters during
acceleration/deceleration. acceleration/deceleration, can be set.
• To avoid overload or overcurrent of the inverter or motor, use
Pr.801 Output limit level to limit the torque current. • Linear acceleration/deceleration (setting
Setting value "0"
value "0", initial value)
Output frequency
Pr.801 setting Description [Linear acceleration

/ deceleration] When the frequency is changed for
0 to 400% Set the torque current limit level. acceleration, deceleration, etc. during
Torque current limit using torque limit setting value (Pr.22, inverter operation, the output frequency is
9999
Pr.812 to Pr.817, etc.) changed linearly (linear acceleration/
(Hz)
Time deceleration) to reach the set frequency

without straining the motor and inverter.
• S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A (setting
Selecting the regenerative brake and DC
Output frequency
[S-pattern acceleration
/deceleration A]
value "1")
For the main shaft of a machine, etc.
Use this when quick acceleration/ feeding
fb deceleration is required to reach a high-
(Hz)
speed area equal to or higher than the base

frequency. Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name
Time
• S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B (setting Regenerative Special regenerative
30 E300 70 G107
[S-pattern acceleration function selection brake duty
/deceleration B] value "2")
X10 terminal input
This is useful for preventing stacks from 599 T721
Set frequency
selection
collapsing on a conveyor, etc.
S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B can • By using the optional high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR) or the
(Hz)
reduce the impact during acceleration/ brake unit (FR-BU2, BU, FR-BU), the regenerative brake duty can
deceleration by accelerating/decelerating in be increased for the operation with frequent starts and stops.
f1
Output frequency
an S-pattern from the present frequency (f2) • The power regeneration common converter (FR-CV 55K or lower)
to the target frequency (f1). or power regeneration converter (MT-RC 75K or higher) is used for
f2 the continuous operation in the regenerative status.
(Hz)
To further suppress harmonics or improve the power factor, use a

Time
high power factor converter (FR-HC2).
• Backlash measures (setting value "3", Pr.140 to Pr.143) • For standard models and IP55 compatible models, it is possible to
To avoid backlash, acceleration/deceleration is temporarily choose between the DC feeding mode 1, which will operate with
stopped. Set the acceleration/deceleration stopping frequency and DC power supply (terminals P and N), and DC feeding mode 2,
time in Pr.140 to Pr.143. which will normally operate in AC power supply (terminals R, S,
and T) and operate in DC power supply (terminal P and N), such as
batteries, at the time of power failure.

[Anti-backlash measure • Standard model
function]
Pr. 142
For FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or
lower
Pr. 140
Pr. 13 Pr.30 Pr.70
Power supply
Time Regeneration unit to the inverter
setting setting
Pr. 141 Pr. 143 value value
• S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C (setting value "4", Pr.380 to 0 (initial Brake duty
R, S, T
Pr.383) When the built-in brake, value), 100 differs
The acceleration/deceleration curve is switched by the S-pattern Brake unit P, N 10, 110 according to
(FR-BU2, BU, FR-BU ) the
acceleration/deceleration C switchover (X20) signal.
R, S, T/P, N 20, 120 capacity.
Set the ratio (%) of time for drawing an S-shape in Pr.380 to Pr.383
with the acceleration time as 100%. R, S, T 1, 101
High-duty brake resistor 10%
Frequency P, N 11, 111
(FR-ABR) 6%
9
Pr.381
Pr.382 R, S, T/P, N 21, 121
Output frequency High power factor
Pr.383
converter (FR-HC2), 0% (initial
Set frequency
Power regeneration P, N 2, 102
common converter value)
Pr.380
(FR-CV)
S-pattern Time
acceleration/
OFF ON OFF FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher
deceleration
C switchover Pr.30 Pr.70
(X20) Power supply
Regeneration unit setting setting
to the inverter value value
• S-pattern acceleration/deceleration D (setting value "5", Pr.516 to
Pr.519) 0 (initial
R, S, T
Set the time required for S-pattern operation part of S-pattern value), 100
acceleration/deceleration with Pr.516 to Pr.519. No regenerative function ―
P, N 10, 110
R, S, T/P, N 20, 120
Output frequency
Pr.516 Pr.517 Pr.518 Pr.519
R, S, T 1, 101
0% (initial
Brake unit (FR-BU2) P, N 11, 111
value)
R, S, T/P, N 21, 121
Time
Power regeneration 0% (initial
Start signal ON R, S, T 1, 101
converter (MT-RC) value)
• Variable-torque acceleration/deceleration (Pr.29="6")
High power factor
This function is useful for variable-torque load such as a fan or converter (FR-HC2) P, N 2, 102 ―
blower to accelerate/decelerate in short time.
In areas where output frequency > base frequency, the speed • Separated converter type
accelerates/decelerates linearly. Power supply Pr.30
Regeneration unit
[Variable-torque acceleration/deceleration] to the inverter setting value
Output frequency
No regenerative function
(FR-CC2) P, N 10 (initial value), 110
Set frequency
Pr.3 Base frequency Brake unit (FR-CC2+FR-BU2) P, N 11, 111

High power factor converter P, N 2, 102
(FR-HC2)
Pr.7 Pr.8 Time

• IP55 compatible model
Regeneration unit Power supply Pr.30 Speed display and speed setting
to the inverter setting value
R, S, T 0 (initial value), 100
Brake unit Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name
P, N 10, 110
(FR-BU2, BU, FR-BU)
Speed setting
R, S, T/P, N 20, 120 37 M000 Speed display 144 M002
switchover
High power factor converter Speed setting Set resolution
(FR-HC2), 505 M001 811 D030
P, N 2, 102 reference switchover
Power regeneration common
converter (FR-CV) The monitor display unit and the frequency setting on PU(FR-DU08/
 Used in combination with GZG, GRZG, or FR-BR. FR-PU07) can be switched to motor speed and machine speed.
 Used in combination with MT-BR5 • The setting increment for each monitor is determined by the
 Setting for the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-
00250(7.5K) or lower
combination of Pr.37 and Pr.144. (The initial values are shown
 Setting for the FR-A820-00630(11K) or higher and FR-A840- within the thick lines.)
00310(11K) or higher • Use Pr.811 to change the increment for the running speed
monitor and speed setting monitor (r/min) from 1 r/min to 0.1 r/
• When set to Pr.599 = "1", X10 signal can be changed to normally min.
closed (NC contact) input specification. • Changing the number of motor poles using Pr.81 Number of
motor poles will change the Pr.144 setting value.
Avoiding machine resonance points Pr.37 Pr.144 Output Set Running Frequency
setting
setting setting frequency frequency speed
(frequency jump) value value monitor monitor monitor parameter
setting
0 0.01 Hz 0.01 Hz 1 r/min  0.01 Hz
Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name 0 (initial 2 to 12 0.01 Hz 0.01 Hz 1 r/min  0.01 Hz
value)
31 H420 Frequency jump 1A 32 H421 Frequency jump 1B 102 to 1 r/min 
1 r/min  1 r/min  1 r/min 
112
33 H422 Frequency jump 2A 34 H423 Frequency jump 2B
35 H424 Frequency jump 3A 36 H425 Frequency jump 3B 1 (machine
0 0.01 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.01 Hz
Frequency jump speed) 
552 H429
range 1 to 1 (machine 1 (machine 1 (machine 1 (machine
9998 2 to 12
speed)  speed)  speed)  speed) 
When it is desired to avoid 102 to 0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz 1 r/min  0.01 Hz
resonance attributable to
Frequency jump 112
Pr.36
the natural frequency of a  Conversion formula to the motor speed r/min
frequency jump (Hz)
Set frequency after
Pr.35
Frequency  120 / number of motor poles (Pr.144)
mechanical system, these Pr.33 Conversion formula to machine speed
parameters allow resonant Pr.34 Pr.37  Frequency / Pr.505
frequencies to be jumped. Pr.32
Pr.31
For Pr.144 in the above formula, the value is "Pr.144 - 100" when
"102 to 110" is set in Pr.144; and the value is "4" when Pr.37=0 9
and Pr.144=0.
Input set frequency (Hz)
 Use Pr.811 to change the increment from 1 r/min to 0.1 r/min.
• Up to three areas can be set, with the jump frequencies set to
either the top or bottom point of each area.
• The frequency jumps 1A, 2A, 3A can be set and operation is
performed at these frequencies in the jump areas.
• At the initial setting "9999", frequency jumps are not performed.
• During acceleration/deceleration, the running frequency within
the set area is valid.
• A total of six jump areas can be set Pr.552 by setting the common
jump range for the frequencies set in Pr.31 to Pr.36.
Pr. 44 to 45
Output frequency detection Refer to the page on Pr.7

Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name Pr. 47 Refer to the page on Pr.3
Up-to-frequency Output frequency
41 M441 42 M442
sensitivity detection Pr. 48 to 49 Refer to the page on Pr.22
Output frequency
Second output
43 M443 detection for reverse 50 M444 Pr. 50 Refer to the page on Pr.41
frequency detection
rotation
Third output Pr. 51 Refer to the page on Pr.9
116 M445 865 M446 Low speed detection
frequency detection
Speed detection
870 M400
hysteresis
The output frequency of the inverter is detected to output as an
Monitor display selection
output signal.
• The Pr.41 value can be adjusted within the range 1% to 100% Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name
considering the set frequency as 100%.
Operation panel main FM/CA terminal
• This parameter can be used to check whether the set frequency 52 M100
monitor selection
54 M300
function selection
has been reached, and provide signals such as the operation AM terminal function
start signal for related equipment. 158 M301 170 M020 Watt-hour meter clear
selection
Set frequency Adjustment Operation hour meter Monitor decimal
171 M030 268 M022
Output frequency
range Pr.41
clear digits selection
Monitor negative Energization time
290 M044 563 M021
output selection carrying-over times
Operating time Operation panel
(Hz)
564 M031 774 M101

Time carrying-over times monitor selection 1
Operation panel Operation panel
775 M102 776 M103
SU
OFF ON OFF monitor selection 2 monitor selection 3
Cumulative power Operation panel
• Output frequency detection signal (FU, FB) is output when the 891 M023 monitor digit shifted 992 M104 setting dial push
output frequency reaches the Pr.42 setting or higher. times monitor selection
This function can be used for electromagnetic brake operation, Monitor with sign
open signal, etc. 1018 M045 1106 M050 Torque monitor filter
selection
• Frequency detection dedicated to reverse rotation can also be set Running speed Excitation current
1107 M051 1108 M052
by setting the detection frequency to Pr.43. This is useful for monitor filter monitor filter
changing the timing of the electromagnetic brake for forward Use Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, Pr.992 to select a monitored item to be
rotation (lifting) and reverse rotation (lowering) in operations such
displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU08) and parameter unit
as a lift operation.
9 • When outputting a frequency detection signal separately from the
FU (FB) signal, set the detection frequency in Pr.50 or Pr.116.
(FR-PU07).
Refer to the following table and set the monitor to be displayed. (The
When the output frequency reaches the Pr.50 setting or higher, items with ---- are not available for monitoring. The circle in the
the FU2 (FB2) signal is output (when it reaches the Pr.116 setting display/output column denotes availability of the minus sign display/
or higher, the FU3 (FB3) signal is output). output.)
Forward
rotation Pr.52, Pr.54
Minus
Pr.774 to (FM/CA)
Output frequency
Pr.116 (-)
Pr.776, Pr.158 Terminal FM, CA, AM display
Pr.50 Monitored item Unit
Pr.992 (AM) full-scale value
/output
Pr.42 setting
DU PU 
Pr.43 Time value
Pr.50 Output
(Hz) frequency/ 0.01 Hz
Pr.116
Rotation 
1/0/100 1 Pr.55 
Output Reverse
signal rotation speed
FU/FB OFF ON OFF ON OFF Output 0.01 A/
current 2/0/100 2 Pr.56
0.1 A 
FU2/FB2 OFF ON OFF ON OFF
Output 200 V class: 400 V
voltage 0.1 V 3/0/100 3
FU3/FB3 OFF ON OFF ON OFF
400 V class: 800 V
Fault or alarm
• During Real sensorless vector control and vector control, FU ---- 0/100 ---- ----
indication
(FU2, FU3) signal is output when the output frequency reaches Frequency 0.01 Hz
the specified speed, and FB (FB2, FB3) signal is output when the setting value/ 5  5 Pr.55

actual motor speed (estimated actual rotations per minute) speed setting
reaches the specified speed. Setting value of
1
Running speed 6  6 Pr.55 converted by 
(Output timings of FU and FB signals are the same under V/F (r/min)
Pr.37 and Pr.144.
control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, and encoder
Motor torque 0.1% 7  7 Pr.866 
feedback control.)
Converter 200 V class: 400 V
• During Real sensorless vector control, vector control, and PM output voltage 0.1 V 8  8
400 V class: 800 V
sensorless vector control, the LS signal is output when the output Brake duty
frequency drops to Pr.865 or lower. Regenerative
brake duty 0.1% 9  9 determined by Pr.30
During inverter operation, signals are output by the following and Pr.70
conditions. Electronic Electronic thermal
thermal O/L 0.1% 10  10
Output frequency
relay load factor O/L relay (100%)

Output current 0.01 A/
11  11 Pr.56
Pr.865 peak value 0.1 A 
Converter
(Hz)
200 V class: 400 V

output voltage 0.1 V 12  12
peak value 400 V class: 800 V
Time
LS ON OFF ON
0.01 kW/ Rated inverter
Input power 13  13
0.1 kW  power  2
0.01 kW/ Rated inverter
Output power 14  14
0.1 kW  power  2
Pr.52, Pr.54 Pr.52, Pr.54
Pr.774 to (FM/CA) Minus Pr.774 to (FM/CA) Minus
(-) (-)
Pr.776, Pr.158 Terminal FM, CA, AM Pr.776, Pr.158 Terminal FM, CA, AM
Monitored item Unit Pr.992 (AM) full-scale value
display Monitored item Unit Pr.992 (AM) full-scale value
display
setting /output setting /output
DU PU value  DU PU value 
Load meter 0.1% 17 17 Pr.866 Option input

Motor excitation 0.01 A/ terminal status
18 18 Pr.56 2 (for ---- ----  ----  ----
current 0.1 A 
communication)
Position pulse ---- 19 ---- ----
Option output
Cumulative terminal status ----
energization 1h 20 ---- ---- 1 (for ----  ----  ----
time communication)
Reference Motor thermal
---- ---- 21 ---- Motor thermal 0.1%
voltage output 61 61 activation level
Orientation load factor
1 22 ---- ---- (100%)
status
Inverter thermal
Actual Inverter thermal
0.1% 62 62 activation level
operation 1h 23 ---- ---- load factor
time (100%)
Motor load PTC thermistor 0.01 k 64 ---- ----
0.1% 24 24 200% resistance
factor
0.01 kWh/ PID measured
Cumulative 0.1% 67 67 100%
25 ---- ---- value 2
power 0.1 kWh
PLC function
Position 0.1% ---- 70 100% 
command
1 26 ---- ----  analog output
Cumulative
Position pulse ---- 71 ---- ---- 
command 1 27 ---- ---- 
(upper digits) Cumulative
pulse overflow ---- 72 ---- ---- 
Current position 1 28 ---- ----  times
Current position Cumulative
(upper digits)
1 29 ---- ---- 
pulse (control
---- 73 ---- ---- 
Droop pulse 1 30 ---- ----  terminal
Droop pulse option)
(upper digits)
1 31 ---- ----  Cumulative
Torque pulse overflow
command
0.1% 32 32 Pr.866  times (control ---- 74 ---- ---- 
terminal
Torque current option)
command
0.1% 33 33 Pr.866 
32-bit
0.01 kW/ Rated motor cumulative
Motor output 34 34 1 kWh ----  ----  ----
0.1 kW  capacity power (lower 16
Feedback bits)
---- 35 ---- ----
pulse 32-bit
Torque momitor
(driving/
regenerative 0.1% 36 36 Pr.866 
cumulative
power (upper 16
bits)
1 kWh ----  ----  ----
9
polarity 32-bit
switching) cumulative 0.01 kWh/
----  ----  ----
Trace status 1 38 ---- ---- power (lower 16 0.1 kWh 
SSCNET III(/H) bits)
communication 1 39 ---- ---- 32-bit
status cumulative 0.01 kWh/
---- ----  ----
PLC function power (upper 16 0.1 kWh 
user monitor 1 40 ---- ---- bits)
Increment Remote output
PLC function 0.1% 87 87 1000%
user monitor 2 set in 41 ---- ---- value 1
SD1215 Remote output
PLC function 0.1% 88 88 1000%
user monitor 3 42 ---- ---- value 2

Station number Remote output
value 3 0.1% 89 89 1000%
(RS-485 1 43 ---- ----
terminals) Remote output
value 4 0.1% 90 90 1000%
Station number
(PU) 1 44 ---- ---- PID manipulated
variable 0.1% 91 91 100% 
Station number
(CC-Link) 1 45 ---- ---- Second PID set
point 0.1% 92 92 100%
Motor
temperature 1°C 46 46 Pr.751  Second PID
measured value 0.1% 93 93 100%
Energy saving Changeable 50 50 Inverter capacity
effect by Second PID
deviation 0.1% 94 94 100% 
Cumulative parameter
energy saving 51 ---- ---- Second PID
setting
measured value 0.1% 95 95 100%
PID set point 0.1% 52 52 100% 2
PID measured Second PID
value 0.1% 53 53 100%
manipulated 0.1% 96 96 100% 
PID deviation 0.1% 54 54 100%  variable
Input terminal Dancer main
----  ---- ---- 0.01 Hz 97 97 Pr.55
status speed setting
55
Output terminal Control circuit
status
----  ---- ----
temperature
1°C 98 98 100C 
Option input  To display the monitored items from the frequency setting value to
terminal ---- 56 ─ ---- ---- the output terminal status on a parameter unit (FR-PU07), select
status "other monitor".
Option output  The cumulative energization time and actual operation time are
terminal ---- 57 ─ ---- ---- accumulated from 0 to 65535 hours, then cleared, and
status accumulated again from 0.
Option input  The actual operation time does not increase if the cumulative
terminal status running time before power OFF is less than an hour.
---- ----  ----  ----
1 (for  When using the parameter unit (FR-PU07), "kW" is displayed
communication)  Differs according to capacities. (FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower
and FR-A840-01800(55K)or lower/FR-A820-03800(75K) or
higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher)
 Since the voltage and current displays on the operation panel • Depending on the Pr.290 setting, negative output can be selected
(FR-DU08) are shown in four digits, a monitor value of more than for terminal AM (analog voltage output), and display with a minus
"9999" is displayed as "----".
 When the output current is less than the specified current level
sign is enabled for the operation panel and a communication
(5% of the inverter rated current), the output current is monitored option.
as 0 A.Therefore, the monitored value of an output current and
output power may be displayed as "0" when using a much Pr.290 Terminal AM Operation panel Monitoring on the
setting output display communication
smaller-capacity motor compared to the inverter or in other
option
instances that cause the output current to fall below the specified
value. 0 (initial
- - -
 Available when the option is connected. value)
 When Pr.37="1 to 9998" or Pr.144="2 to 12, 102 to 112", 1 Output with a
increment is used. (Refer to page 115) 1 - -
minus sign
 The monitored values are retained even if an inverter fault occurs.
Resetting will clear the retained values. Displayed with a
2 - -
 Can be set for the AM (Pr.158) only. minus sign
 Can be set or monitored only via communication. Output with a Displayed with a
 The setting is available for the standard model only. 3 -
minus sign minus sign
 Setting Pr.290  0 enables the display/output with a minus sign.
 Setting Pr.1018 = 0 enables the display/output with a minus sign. Displayed with a
4 - -
 Negative values are not displayed on the operation panel. The minus sign
values "-1 to -32767" are displayed as "65535 to 32769" on the
Output with a Displayed with a
operation panel. 5 -
 The speed is not displayed on the FR-A842-P.
 Not available for the FR-A842-P. Displayed with a Displayed with a
6 -
• Pr.774 sets the output frequency monitor, Pr.775 sets the output Output with a Displayed with a Displayed with a
7
current monitor, and Pr.776 sets the monitor description to be minus sign minus sign minus sign
displayed at the output voltage monitor position. When Pr.774 to
Pr.776="9999" (initial value), the Pr.52 setting value is used. (For
the monitor display sequence, refer to page page 62.) Reference for monitor value output from
• Digits in the cumulative power monitor can be shifted to the right
by the number set in Pr.891.
terminal FM/CA, AM
• Writing "0" in Pr.170 clears the cumulative power monitor.
• Pr.563 allows the user to check how many times the cumulative Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name
energization time monitor has exceeded 65535 h. Pr.564 allows
the use to check how many times the actual operation time Frequency Current monitoring
55 M040 56 M041
monitor has exceeded 65535 h . monitoring reference reference
• Writing "0" in Pr.171 clears the actual operation time monitor. Torque monitoring
866 M042
reference
Pr.268 setting Description
Full scales can be set for the values output from terminal FM/CA and
9999 AM.
No function
(initial value)
9 When monitoring with the first or second decimal place

(0.1 increments or 0.01 increments), the 0.1 decimal
Monitor
Frequency
Reference parameter
Pr.55
Initial value
FM type, 60 Hz
place or lower is dropped to display an integral value (1 CA type 50 Hz
0
increments).
Current Pr.56 Inverter rated current

The monitor value equal to or smaller than 0.99 is
displayed as 0. torque Pr.866 150%
When monitoring with the second decimal place (0.01  For the monitored item names, refer to the page on Pr.52.
increments), the 0.01 decimal place is dropped and the
1 monitor displays the first decimal place (0.1 increments). Pulse speed(terminal FM) Output Current(terminal CA)
When monitoring with the first decimal place, the display 2400
will not change. pulses/s
DC20mA
• When Pr.52="100", the set frequency is displayed during stop, 1440
pulses/s
and output frequency is displayed during running. (LED of Hz
flickers during stop and is lit during operation.)
Output frequency Pr.55 590Hz Pr.55 590Hz
Pr.52 0 100 reference Pr.56 500A
Output current Pr.56 500A Pr.866 400%
Operating During running/
During stop Running reference
status stop Output torque Pr.866 400%
reference
Output
Output frequency Set frequency Output frequency
frequency Output voltage(terminal AM)
Output
Output current
current DC10V
Output
Output voltage
voltage Pr.55
Pr.56
Fault or Pr.866
alarm Fault or alarm indication
Pr.55 590Hz
indication Pr.56 500A
Pr.866 400%
• The monitored item to be displayed at the operation panel (FR- *2
DU08)'s setting dial push can be selected with Pr.992. -DC10V

Pr.992 0 100  Minus-sign output is enabled when Pr.290 Monitor negative output
selection = "1 and 3".
Operating status During running/ During stop Running
stop
Set frequency
Monitor displayed by Output
(PU direct-in Set frequency
the setting dial push frequency
frequency)
<Connection diagram>
Automatic restart after instantaneous
power failure with an induction motor MC2
MCCB MC1 MC3

R/L1 U
S/L2 V IM
T/L3 W
R1/L11
Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name S1/L21
STF
57 A702 Restart coasting time 58 A703 Restart cushion time CS
SD
MC
switchover
Automatic restart
sequence
With electronic bypass sequence

after instantaneous First cushion time for
162 A700 163 A704 For use for only automatic
power failure restart CS
restart after instantaneous
SD
selection power failure or flying start,
turn ON the CS signal in
Stall prevention
First cushion voltage advance.
164 A705 165 A710 operation level for Only with restart after instantaneous power failure
for restart
restart
Rotation direction • Pr.162="0 (initial value), 3, 10, or 13", the motor speed is detected
Acceleration time at at power restoration to start the motor smoothly.
299 A701 detection selection at 611 F003
a restart
restarting • During encoder feedback control with Pr.162 = "2 or 12" or during
The inverter can be restarted without stopping the motor in the vector control, the motor starts at power restoration based on the
motor speed and rotation direction detected by the encoder. (This
following conditions:
operation is available when a vector control compatible option is
• When switching from commercial power supply operation over to installed.)
inverter operation • Setting Pr.162 = "3, 13" will lead to better-absorbed impacts and
• When an instantaneous power failure occurs during inverter smoother motor start (Reduced impact restart) than the Pr.162 =
operation "0, 10" setting does. (Offline auto tuning)
• When the motor is coasting at start Under Real sensorless vector control, the reduced impact restart
is applied, independently of the Pr.162 setting.
Setting
Pr. range Description • The encoder also detects the rotation direction during reverse
rotation so that the inverter can re-start smoothly. (Pr.299
0
(initial Frequency search only performed at the first start Rotation direction detection selection at restarting to enable/
value) disable the rotation direction detection)
Reduced voltage start only at the first start (no frequency V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control
1
search) Instantaneous (power failure) time
Power supply
2 Encoder detection frequency search (R/L1, S/L2,
162 Frequency search only performed at the first start (reduced T/L3)
3
impact restart) Motor speed N
(r/min)
10 Frequency search at every start
9
Inverter output *
11 Reduced voltage start at every start (no frequency search) frequency f(Hz)
Inverter output
12 Encoder detection frequency search at every start voltage E(V)
13 Frequency search at every start (reduced impact restart) Speed Restart cushion
Coasting time (Pr.58 setting)
0 + detection
time (Pr.57) time
(initial Without rotation direction detection
value) * The output shut off timing differs Acceleration time
according to the load condition. at a restart
1 With rotation direction detection (Pr.611 setting)
299
When Pr.78 Reverse rotation prevention selection = "0", Real sensorless vector control
with rotation direction detection Instantaneous (power failure) time
9999 Power supply
Pr.78 Reverse rotation prevention selection = "1, 2", (R/L1, S/L2,
without rotation direction detection T/L3)
0 Coasting time differs according to the inverter capacity. Motor speed N

(r/min)
Set the waiting time for the inverter to perform a restart
0.1 to
after the power lost by an instantaneous power failure
30s Inverter output
57 restores. frequency f(Hz)
output voltage *
9999 E(V)
(initial No restart Speed
value) Coasting
time (Pr.57)
+ detection Acceleration time
time at a restart
58 0 to 60 s Set the voltage cushion time for restart. (Pr.611 setting)
* The output shut off timing differs
163 0 to 20 s Set the voltage cushion time for restart. according to the load condition.
0 to Set a value considering the load amount (moment of
164 inertia, torque).
100%
0 to Set the stall prevention level at restart considering the
165
400% inverter rated current as 100%.
Set the acceleration time that takes to reach Pr.20
0 to
Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency setting
3600 s
at a restart.
611
9999
Normal acceleration time setting (settings like Pr.7 ) is
(initial
applied as the acceleration time for restart.
value)
 The coasting time when Pr.57="0" is as shown below. (When
Pr.162 is set to the initial value and the ND rating is selected. )
FR-A820-00105(1.5K) or lower and, FR-A840-00052(1.5K) or lower: 0.5s
FR-A820-00167(2.2K) to FR-A820-00490(7.5K) and
FR-A840-00083(2.2K) to FR-A840-00250(7.5K):1 s
FR-A820-00630(11K) to FR-A820-03160(55K) and
FR-A840-00310(11K) to FR-A840-01800(55K): 3.0 s
FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher
: 5.0 s
• When Pr.162 = "1" or "11", automatic restart operation is
performed in a reduced voltage system, where the voltage is Remote setting function
gradually risen with the output frequency unchanged from prior to
an instantaneous power failure independently of the coasting
speed of the motor. Pr. GROUP Name
During Real sensorless vector control, the output frequency and Remote function
voltage before an instantaneous power failure are output. (The 59 F101
selection
Pr.58 setting is disabled.)
Even if the operation panel is located away from the enclosure,
V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control
contact signals can be used to perform continuous variable-speed
Instantaneous (power failure) time
operation, without using analog signals.
Power supply
(R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) By simply setting this parameter, the acceleration, deceleration and setting
clear functions of the remote speed setter (FR-FK) become available.
Motor speed N
(r/min)
Description
Inverter output ∗
Pr.59 Deceleration to
frequency f (Hz) RH, RM, RL
setting Frequency setting the frequency
signal
Inverter output
function storage lower than the
voltage E (V) set frequency
0 (initial Multi-speed
Coasting time -
Pr.57 setting Restart cushion time value) setting
(Pr.58 setting)
Remote
1 With
∗ The output shut off timing differs according to the load condition. setting
Remote Not available
2 Not used
Automatic restart after instantaneous setting
Not used
Remote
power failure with a PM motor 3
setting
(Turning STF/STR OFF clears
remotely set frequency.)
Remote
11 With
setting
Remote
12 Not used
Automatic restart setting Available
after instantaneous Not used
57 A702 Restart coasting time 162 A700 Remote
power failure 13 (Turning STF/STR OFF clears
selection setting
remotely set frequency.)
Acceleration time at
611 F003
a restart
Output frequency
While using an IPM motor MM-CF, the inverter can be restarted When Pr.59 = "1, 2, 11, 12" When Pr.59 = "1, 11"
(Hz)
without stopping the motor. When Pr.59 = "3, 13"
9
When Pr.59 = "2, 3, 12, 13"
By enabling the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
function in the following conditions, the motor can be restarted. Set frequency
∗1
• When an instantaneous power failure occurs during inverter 0 0Hz Time
operation Acceleration (RH) ON ON ON
• When the motor is coasting at start Deceleration (RM) ON

Clear (RL) ON
Pr. Setting range Description Forward rotation (STF) ON ON ON ON

Power supply ON ON
0 No waiting time ∗1 External operation frequency (other than multi-speed) or PU running frequency
Set the waiting time for the inverter to
57 0.1 to 30 s perform a restart after the power lost by an
instantaneous power failure restores.
9999 (initial value) No restart Energy saving control selection
Frequency search only performed at the
0 (initial value), 1, 2, 3
162 first start
10, 11, 12, 13 Frequency search at every start
Set the acceleration time that takes to Pr. GROUP Name
0 to 3600 s reach Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration
reference frequency at a restart. Energy saving
60 G030
611 control selection
Standard acceleration time (for example,
9999 (initial value) Pr.7) s applied as the acceleration time at Inverter will perform energy saving control automatically even when
restart. the detailed parameter settings are made.
 Selection for the automatic restart (Pr.162) It is appropriate for an application such as a fan or pump.
The motor speed is detected (frequency search) at power Pr.60 setting Description
restoration to start the motor smoothly. 0(initial value) Normal operation
The encoder also detects the rotation direction during reverse
Energy saving operation
rotation so that the inverter can re-start smoothly. With the energy saving operation, the inverter will
Instantaneous (power failure) time
automatically control the output voltage so the
4
Power supply inverter output power during the constant-speed
(R/L1,S/L2,T/L3) operation will become minimal.
Motor (Available during V/F control)
speed N (r/min)
Optimum excitation control
Inverter output *
frequency f (Hz) The Optimum excitation control is a control
method to decide the output voltage by controlling
Inverter output 9 the excitation current so the efficiency of the
voltage E (V)
motor is maximized.
Coasting
Speed (Available during V/F control or Advanced
+ detection magnetic flux vector control)
time (Pr.57) time
Acceleration time
at a restart
* The output shut off timing differs (Pr.611 setting)
 Output current may increase slightly with the energy saving
according to the load condition operation or the Optimum excitation control since the output
voltage is controlled.
Automatic acceleration/deceleration Retry function
Number of retries at
Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name 65 H300 Retry selection 67 H301
fault occurrence
Reference value at Retry count display
61 F510 Reference current 62 F511 68 H302 Retry waiting time 69 H303
acceleration erase
Reference value at Starting frequency
63 F512
deceleration
64 F520
for elevator mode This function allows the inverter to reset itself and restart at
Automatic Acceleration/ activation of the protective function (fault indication). The retry
292 F500 acceleration/ 293 F513 deceleration separate generating faults can be also selected.
deceleration selection (This function is not available for the FR-A842-P.)
The inverter can be operated with the auto-adjusted parameters. When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
• Without setting the acceleration/deceleration time or the V/F function is selected (Pr.57 Restart coasting time  9999), the
pattern, the inverter can be operated as if the appropriate value is restart operation is also performed after a retry operation as well as
set to each parameter.This function is useful for operating the after an instantaneous power failure.
inverter without setting detailed parameters. • Using Pr.65, you can select the fault that will cause a retry.
• Even if automatic acceleration/deceleration has been selected, “●” indicates the faults selected for retry.
inputting the JOG signal, RT signal (second function selection), or
X9 signal (third function selection) during an inverter stop will Retry target Fault Pr.65 setting
indication 0 1 2 3 4 5
switch to the normal operation and give priority to JOG operation,
second function selection or third function selection. E.OC1 ● ● ● ● ●
After the motor is started by the automatic acceleration/ E.OC2 ● ● ● ●
deceleration, none of JOG, RT, or X9 signal is accepted. E.OC3 ● ● ● ● ●
E.OV1 ● ● ● ●
Automatic E.OV2 ● ● ● ●
Pr.292 setting Operation
setting Pr. E.OV3 ● ● ● ●
0 E.THM ●
(initial value
─ ─ E.THT ●
normal
operation) E.IPF ● ●
1 E.UVT ● ●
Without brake
(shortest Set this parameter to E. BE ● ●
resistor or the
acceleration/ accelerate/decelerate E. GF ● ●
deceleration) brake unit
the motor at the shortest E.OHT ●
Pr.7, Pr.8
11 time.
With brake E.OLT ● ●
(shortest (Stall prevention
resistor, brake E.OPT ● ●
acceleration/ operation level 150%)
unit
deceleration)
3
Optimal operation that fully uses the Pr.0, Pr.7,
E.OP1
E. PE
●
●
●
● 9
(optimum E.MB1 ● ●
acceleration/ inverter's capability is performed. Pr.8
deceleration) E.MB2 ● ●
E.MB3 ● ●
Stall
5 prevention E.MB4 ● ●
The inverter output
(lift mode) operation level voltage is controlled so E.MB5 ● ●
150% that enough torque is Pr.0, Pr.13, E.MB6 ● ●
Stall provided during power Pr.19 E.MB7 ● ●
6 prevention driving and regenerative E.OS ● ●
(lift mode 2) operation level driving.
E.OSD ● ●
180%
E.PTC ●
With machine E.CDO ● ●
7 brake opening
(Brake sequence In this operation mode, E.SER ● ●
mode 1) completion
signal operation timing signals E.USB ● ●
of the mechanical brake E.ILF ● ●
Without ─
are output from the E.PID ● ●
8 machine brake inverter, such as for lift
(Brake sequence opening application. E.PCH ● ●
mode 2) completion E.SOT ● ● ● ● ●
signal E.LCI ● ●
• Pr.61 to Pr.63 can be used to change the reference current for E.LUP ● ●
the shortest acceleration/deceleration and the optimal E.LDN ● ●
acceleration/deceleration operation. E.EHR ● ●
• Use Pr.64 to set the starting frequency for the lift operation.
• Acceleration/deceleration times can be individually calculated. • For Pr.67, set the number of retries at a fault occurrence.
Such a setting can be enabled/disabled for the shortest
acceleration/deceleration operation and the optimum
acceleration/deceleration. 0 (initial value) No retry function
Set the number of retries at fault occurrence.
1 to 10
A fault output is not provided during the retry operation.
Set the number of retries at fault occurrence. (The
Both the acceleration and deceleration times are 101 to 110 setting value minus 100 is the number of retries.)
0 (initial value)
calculated. A fault output is provided during the retry operation.
1 Only the acceleration time is calculated.
• For Pr.68, set the waiting time (0.1 to 600 s) from a protective
2 Only the deceleration time is calculated. function activation to a retry.
• By reading Pr.69, the number of successful restarts made by
retries can be obtained.
Pr. 66 Refer to the page on Pr.22 Carrier frequency and Soft-PWM
Pr. 67 to 69 Refer to the page on Pr.65 selection
Applicable motor 72 E600
PWM frequency
240 E601
Soft-PWM operation
selection selection
PWM frequency
260 E602
Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name automatic switchover
71 C100 Applied motor 450 C200

Second applied The motor sound can be changed.
motor
Pr. Setting range Description
Setting of the applied motor selects the thermal characteristic The PWM carrier frequency can be changed. The
0 to 15
appropriate for the motor. When using a constant-torque or PM setting displayed is in [kHz]. Note that 0 indicates 0.7
72
motor, the electronic thermal O/L relay is set according to the used kHz, 15 indicates 14.5 kHz, and 25 indicates 2.5 kHz.
0 to 6, 25
motor. (When using an optional sine wave filter, set "25".)
0 Soft-PWM disabled
Operational 240
for motor constant
Setting increment
characteristic of 1 (initial value) Soft-PWM enabled

the electronic PWM carrier frequency automatic reduction
thermal O/L relay 0
Pr.71 Pr.450 Applied motor function disabled (for the LD, ND, or HD rating)
260
Constant-
Standard
PWM carrier frequency automatic reduction

torque
1 (initial value)
PM
function enabled
 The setting range for the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-
0 A840-01800(55K) or lower.
(Pr.71 initial Standard motor (such as SF-JR) ○
value)  The setting range for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-
A840-02160(75K) or higher.
Constant-torque motor
(SF-JRCA, etc.)  Not available for the FR-A842-P.
1 ○
SF-V5RU
(except for 1500 r/min series) • Under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, and PM
Standard motor (such as SF-JR) sensorless vector control, the following carrier frequencies are used.
2 ― Adjustable 5 points V/F ○ (For the control method and fast-response operation selection, refer
(Refer to page 129) to Pr.800 Control method selection refer to page 126
Mitsubishi Electric standard motor
20 ○ Carrier frequency (kHz)
(SF-JR 4P 1.5kW or lower) Pr.72
setting Real sensorless vector control, PM sensorless fast-response
Vector control dedicated motor vector control vector control operation selection
SF-V5RU
30 ○ 0 to 5 2 6
(1500 r/min series)
SF-THY Ω,mΩ, 6, 7
mH,%, 6 6
9 40
Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency motor A,mV
SF-HR
○
8, 9
10 to 13 10 10
4
14, 15 14 14
Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor
50 ○
SF-HRCA  When low-speed range high-torque characteristic is disabled

(Pr.788="0"), 2 kHz is used.
Mitsubishi Electric high-performance
70 energy-saving motor ○  In the low-speed range (3 Hz or lower) under Real sensorless
SF-PR vector control, the carrier frequency is automatically changed to 2
kHz. (For FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-
330 IPM motor MM-CF ○ 00250(7.5K) or lower)
• PWM carrier frequency automatic reduction function (Pr.260)

8090 IPM motor (other than MM-CF) ○ Setting Pr.260="1 (initial value)" will enable the PWM carrier
frequency auto-reduction function. If a heavy load is continuously
9090 SPM motor ○ applied while the inverter carrier frequency is set to 3 kHz or
higher (Pr.72  "3"), the carrier frequency is automatically
3, 4 Standard motor (such as SF-JR) ○
Constant-torque motor
reduced to prevent occurrence of the inverter overload trip
(SF-JRCA, etc.) (electronic thermal O/L relay function) (E.THT). The carrier
13, 14 ○
SF-V5RU frequency is reduced to as low as 2 kHz. (Motor noise increases,
(except for 1500 r/min series) but not to the point of failure.)
Mitsubishi Electric standard motor • When the PWM carrier frequency automatic reduction function is
23, 24 ○
(other than SF-JR 4P 1.5kW)
used, the operation with the carrier frequency set to 3 kHz or
SF-V5RU higher (Pr.72  "3") automatically reduces the carrier frequency
33, 34 ○
(1500 r/min series) for heavy-load operation as shown below.
SF-THY Internal
Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency motor data Pr.260 Pr.570
Carrier frequency automatic reduction operation
43, 44 ○
SF-HR setting setting FR-A820-04750(90K) or lower, FR-A840-03250(110K) or higher
FR-A840-02600(90K) or lower
Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor
53, 54 ○ 0 (SLD), Continuous operation with the 85% or higher inverter rated current
SF-HRCA
Mitsubishi Electric high-performance 1 (LD) reduces the carrier frequency automatically.
73, 74 energy-saving motor ○ 1 Operation with the 150% or Continuous operation with the
SF-PR 2 (ND), higher inverter rated current for 85% or higher inverter rated
333, 334 IPM motor MM-CF ○ 3 (HD) the ND rating reduces the carrier current reduces the carrier
frequency automatically. frequency automatically.
8093, 8094 IPM motor (other than MM-CF) ○
Continuous operation with the 85% or higher inverter rated current
9093, 9094 SPM motor ○ 0 (SLD)
reduces the carrier frequency automatically.
5 Standard motor Star ○
Without carrier frequency automatic reduction
15 Constant-torque motor connection ○
Ω,mΩ,A 1 (LD) (Perform continuous operation with the carrier frequency set to 2 kHz
6 Standard motor Delta ○ or lower or with less than 85% of the rated inverter current.)
16 Constant-torque motor connection ○ 0 Without carrier frequency
9999 automatic reduction
― (initial No second applied motor 2 (ND), Without carrier frequency (Perform continuous operation
value) 3 (HD) automatic reduction with the carrier frequency set to 2
 The setting is available for FR-A820-00630(11K) or lower. kHz or lower or with less than
85% of the rated inverter current.)
• When initial values are set in Pr.0 and Pr.12, the Pr.0 and Pr.12 • In the low-speed range (about 10 Hz or lower), the carrier
settings are automatically changed by changing the Pr.71 setting. frequency may be automatically lowered. Motor noise increases,
but not to the point of failure.
• Override function (Pr.252, Pr.253)
Analog input selection When the override setting is selected, terminal 1 or 4 is set to the
main speed setting, and terminal 2 is set to the override signal. (If
the main speed of terminal 1 or 4 is not input, the compensation
Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name by terminal 2 is disabled.)
Analog input Terminal 4 input

73 T000 267 T001 200
selection selection
Override value (%)

Terminal 1 added Terminal 1 added 150
242 T021 compensation 243 T041 compensation
amount (terminal 2) amount (terminal 4) Pr.252
Initial value
100 (50% to 150%)
252 T050 Override bias 253 T051 Override gain Pr.253
The analog input terminal specifications, the override function, and 50

the function to switch forward/reverse rotation by the input signal
polarity can be set. 0
0V 2.5V 5V
Concerning terminals 2 and 4 used for analog input, the voltage (5V) (10V)
input (0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V) and current input (0 to 20 mA) are Voltage across terminals 2 and 5
selectable. To input a voltage (0 to 5 V/ 0 to 10 V), set the voltage/ • When Pr.868 (Pr.858) = "4", the terminal 1 (terminal 4) values are
current input switch OFF. To input a current (0 to 20 mA), set the set to the stall prevention operation level.
voltage/current input switch ON and change the parameters (Pr.73,
Pr.267).
Addition compensation or fixed ratio analog compensation (override) Analog input responsiveness and noise
with terminal 2 set to auxiliary input is applicable to the multi-speed
operation or terminal 2/terminal 4 speed setting signal (main speed).
elimination
(Bold frame indicates the main speed setting.)
Compensation
Pr.73 Terminal 2 Switch Terminal 1 input terminal Polarity Input filter time
setting input 1 input compensation reversible 74 T002 822 T003 Speed setting filter 1
method constant
0 0 to 10 V OFF 0 to 10 V 826 T004 Torque setting filter 1 832 T005 Speed setting filter 2
1 Not applied Analog input offset
Terminal 1 836 T006 Torque setting filter 2 849 T007
(initial 0 to 5 V OFF 0 to 10 V (state in adjustment
value) Addition
which a
compensation The frequency command/torque command response level and
2 0 to 10 V OFF 0 to 5 V negative
3 0 to 5 V OFF 0 to 5 V polarity stability are adjustable by using the analog input (terminals 1, 2, and
4 0 to 10 V OFF 0 to10 V
frequency 4) signal.
Terminal 2 command
Override • Pr.74 is effective to eliminate noise on the frequency setting
0 to 5 V
9
5 0 to 5 V OFF signal is not circuit.
6 0 to 20 mA ON 0 to 10 V accepted )
Increase the filter time constant if steady operation cannot be
7 0 to 20 mA ON 0 to 5 V performed due to noise, etc.
Terminal 1
10 0 to 10 V OFF 0 to 10 V A larger setting results in slower response. (The time constant
Addition
11 0 to 5 V OFF 0 to 10 V compensation can be between 0 and 8, which are about 5 ms to 1 s.)
12 0 to 10 V OFF 0 to 5 V • Set the primary delay filter time constant to the external speed
13 0 to 5 V OFF 0 to 5 V command (analog input command) by using Pr.822 or Pr.832.
14 0 to 10 V OFF 0 to 10 V Terminal 2 Applied Set a larger time constant when delaying the speed command
15 0 to 5 V OFF 0 to 5 V Override tracking or the analog input voltage is unstable.
• Set the primary delay filter time constant to the external torque
16 0 to 20 mA ON 0 to 10 V Terminal 1
Addition command (analog input command) by using Pr.826 or Pr.836.
17 0 to 20 mA ON 0 to 5 V compensation Set a larger time constant when delaying the torque command
tracking or the analog input voltage is unstable.
• Turning ON the Terminal 4 input selection (AU) signal sets • Set a value other than "9999" in Pr.832 and Pr.836, which are
terminal 4 to the main speed. enabled when the RT signal is ON.
• Set the Pr.267 and voltage/current input switch setting according • Setting Pr.849 will offset the analog speed input (terminal2) and
to the table below. avoid the occurrence of a frequency command due to noise when
Pr.267 setting Terminal 4 input Switch 2 the 0-speed command is given.
0 (initial value) 4 to 20 mA ON The offset voltage is positive when 100% < Pr.849 and negative
1 0 to 5 V OFF when Pr.849 < 100%.The detailed calculation of the offset voltage
is as described below:
2 0 to 10 V OFF
Offset voltage [V] =
• Addition compensation (Pr.242, Pr.243) Voltage at the time of 100% (5 V or 10 V)  (Pr.849 - 100)/100
A compensation signal is addable to the main speed setting for  It depends on the Pr.73 setting.
such as synchronous or continuous speed control operation.
Output frequency Output frequency Frequency
When voltage across When voltage across command Slope determined
terminals 2 and 5 is 2.5V terminals 2 and 5 is 2.5V according to Pr.125
(5V) (5V) and C2 to C4
When voltage
When voltage Slope does not
across terminals change.
across terminals
2 and 5 is 0V
2 and 5 is 0V
-5V -2.5V 0 +2.5V +5V Terminal 1 -5V -2.5V 0 +2.5V +5V Terminal 1 0% 100% Speed setting
(-10V) (-5V) (+5V) (+10V) (-10V) (-5V) (+5V) (+10V) (10V or 5V) signal
0% 100% 200% Pr.849 setting
Forward rotation Reverse rotation Forward rotation
STF Signal STF Signal
ON ON
Forward rotation Reverse rotation Forward rotation

STF Signal STF Signal
ON ON
(a) When Pr.73 setting is 0 to 3 (b) When Pr.73 setting is 10 to 13
Terminal 1 (frequency setting auxiliary input) is added to terminal

2 or 4 main speed setting signal.
Reset selection/disconnected PU Fault code output function
detection/PU stop selection
Pr. GROUP Name
Fault code output

76 M510
Pr. GROUP Name selection
75 E100 Reset selection

When a fault occurs, the corresponding data can be output as a 4-bit
digital signal using via an open collector output terminal.
75 E101 Disconnected PU detection
The fault code can be read using a programmable controller, etc.,
75 E102 PU stop selection
and countermeasures can be displayed on the HMI (Human
75 E107 Reset limit Machine Interface), etc.
Reset selection/
75 - disconnected PU detection/ Pr.76 setting Description
PU stop selection 0 (initial value) Without fault code output
The reset input acceptance, disconnected PU (FR-DU08/FR-PU07) 1 With fault code output (Refer to the table below.)
connector detection function and PU stop function can be selected. 2
Fault code is output only when a fault occurs.
(Refer to the table below.)
Pr.75 Reset selection Disconnected PU PU stop selection
setting detection • The fault codes that can be output are shown in the table below.
Reset input always (0: Output transistor OFF, 1: Output transistor ON)
0, 100 Operation
enabled
continues even Operation panel Output terminal operation
Reset input enabled when PU is Decelerates to a indication (FR- Fault code
1, 101 only when protective DU08) SU IPF OL FU
disconnected.
function activated stop when
Normal  0 0 0 0 0
Reset input always is input in PU
2, 102 E.OC1
enabled Inverter output shut operation mode 0 0 0 1 1
E.OCT
off when PU only.
Reset input enabled E.OC2 0 0 1 0 2
3, 103 only when protective disconnected.
function activated E.OC3 0 0 1 1 3
14 E.OV1 to E.OV3
0 1 0 0 4
(Initial Reset input always E.OVT
value), enabled Operation E.THM 0 1 0 1 5
114 continues even Decelerates to a
when PU is E.THT 0 1 1 0 6
Reset input enabled
disconnected. stop when E.IPF 0 1 1 1 7
15, 115 only when protective
function activated is input in any of E.UVT 1 0 0 0 8
the PU, external
Reset input always E.FIN 1 0 0 1 9
9 16, 116
enabled
Reset input enabled
Inverter output shut
off when PU
and communication
operation modes. E.BE 1 0 1 0 A
E. GF 1 0 1 1 B
17, 117 only when protective disconnected.
function activated E.OHT 1 1 0 0 C

E.OLT 1 1 0 1 D
• Reset selection (P.E100)
When P.E100 = "1" or Pr.75 = "1, 3, 15, 17, 100, 101, 103, 115, or E.OPT
1 1 1 0 E
E.OP1
117" is set, reset (reset command via RES signal or
communication) input is enabled only when the protective Other than the
1 1 1 1 F
above
function is activated.
• Disconnected PU detection (P.E101)  When Pr.76 = "2", the terminal outputs the signal assigned by
Pr.191 to Pr.194 in normal operation.
If the PU (FR-DU08/FR-PU07) is detected to be disconnected
from the inverter for 1 s or longer while P.E101 = "1" or Pr.75 = "2,
3, 16, 17, 102, 103, 116, or 117", PU disconnection (E.PUE) is
displayed and the inverter output is shut off.
• PU stop selection (P.E102)
Stop can be performed by inputting from the PU in any of
the operation modes of PU operation, External operation and
network operation.
• Reset limit function (P.E107)
When Pr.75 = any of "100 to 103 and 114 to 117", if an electronic
thermal O/L relay or an overcurrent protective function (E.THM,
E.THT, E.OC[]) is activated while one of them has been already
activated within 3 minutes, the inverter will not accept any reset
command (RES signal, etc.) for about 3 minutes from the second
activation.
The reset limit function is available with the FR-A820-03800(75K)
or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
Parameter write selection Operation mode selection
Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name
Parameter write Operation mode Communication startup

77 E400 79 D000 340 D001
selection selection mode selection
Whether to enable the writing to various parameters or not can be Select the operation mode of the inverter.
selected. Use this function to prevent parameter values from being The mode can be changed among operations using external signals
rewritten by misoperation. (External operation), operation by operation panel (FR-DU08) or
parameter unit (FR-PU07) (PU operation), combined operation of
Pr.77 PU operation and External operation (External/PU combined
Description
setting
operation), and Network operation (when RS-485 terminals or
0 (initial communication option is used).
Writing is enabled only during stop.
value)
1 Parameter writing is disabled. LED display
Parameter writing is enabled in any operation mode Pr.79
Description : OFF
setting
2 regardless of the operation status. (Writing is disabled for : ON
some parameters.)
PU operation
mode
Reverse rotation prevention selection

Use the External/PU switchover mode ( ) External
0 to switch between the PU and External operation mode
(initial
value) operation mode.
Pr. GROUP Name At power ON, the inverter is in the External
operation mode. NET operation
Reverse rotation
78 D020 mode
prevention selection
This function can prevent reverse rotation fault resulting from the
incorrect input of the start signal.
Operation Frequency Start
mode command command
Operation panel or PU operation
0 (initial value) Both forward and reverse rotations allowed
(FR-DU08) mode
PU operation
1 Reverse rotation disabled 1 and on PU
mode fixed
2 Forward rotation disabled PU(FR-PU07) (FR-DU08/FR-
9
. PU07)
External
operation External
operation mode
mode fixed.
External signal
The operation
input (terminal 2 External signal
can be
and 4, input
2 performed by
JOG, multi- (terminal STF, NET operation
switching
speed selection, STR) mode
between the
etc.)
External and
NET operation
modes.
PU (FR-DU08/
External/PU FR-PU07) or External signal
combined external signal input
3
operation input (multi- (terminal STF, External/PU
mode 1 speed setting, STR) combined
terminal 4) operation mode
External signal or
External/PU
input (terminal 2
combined
4 and 4, JOG, on PU
operation
multi-speed (FR-DU08/FR-
mode 2
selection, etc.)
PU07)
Switchover mode PU operation
6 Switching of PU, External, and NET operation mode
modes can be performed during operation.
External operation mode (PU operation External

interlock) operation mode
X12 signal ON: Switchover to PU operation
7 mode enabled (during External operation,
output shutoff) NET operation
X12 signal OFF: Switchover to PU operation mode
mode disabled
• Selecting the operation mode for power-ON (Pr.340)
When power is switched ON or when power comes back ON after Changing the control method
an instantaneous power failure, the inverter can be started up in
the Network operation mode.
After the inverter starts up in Network operation mode, parameter Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name
writing and operation can be commanded from programs.
71 C100 Applied motor 80 C101 Motor capacity
Set this mode when performing communication operation using
the RS-485 terminals or a communication option. 81 C102 Number of motor poles 83 C104 Rated motor voltage
Use Pr.79 and Pr.340 to set the operation mode at power-ON Speed control gain
(reset). 84 C105 Rated motor frequency 89 G932 (Advanced magnetic
flux vector)
Operation mode at Second motor control
Pr.340 Pr.79 power-ON, at power 450 C200 Second applied motor 451 G300
method selection
setting setting restoration, or after a Operation mode switching
reset. Number of second
453 C201 Second motor capacity 454 C202
motor poles
0
(initial Follows the Pr.79 setting. Second motor speed Control method
value) 569 G942 800 G200
control gain selection
Switching among the Encoder option
External, PU, and NET 862 C242
0 NET operation mode selection
operation modes is
enabled Select the inverter control method.
1 PU operation mode PU operation mode fixed Pr.80
(Pr.453), Pr.71 Pr.800 Pr.451
Switching between the setting setting Control method Control mode
External and NET operation Pr.81 (Pr.450)  
(Pr.454)
2 NET operation mode modes is enabled.
Switching to PU operation 0, 100 Speed control
mode is disabled 1, 101 Torque control
External/PU combined Operation mode switching is Speed control/
3, 4
1, 2  operation mode disabled 2, 102 torque control
Switching among the switchover
External, PU, and NET 3, 103 Position control
6 NET operation mode
operation mode is enabled Speed control/
while running. 4, 104 Vector control position control
Switching among the switchover
X12 (MRS) signal ON External, PU, and NET Position control/
NET operation mode operation modes is enabled 5, 105 torque control
 switchover
7
X12 (MRS) signal Torque control
External operation mode
OFF Induction (variable-
fixed (Forcibly switched to 6, 106
External operation
9 mode
External operation mode)
Switching between the PU

motor current limiter
control)
9, 109 - Vector control test operation
0 NET operation mode and NET operation mode is
10, 110 Speed control

enabled 
11, 111 Torque control
1 PU operation mode PU operation mode fixed Real sensorless
vector control Speed control/
2 NET operation mode NET operation mode fixed 12, 112 torque control
External/PU combined Operation mode switching is switchover
3, 4
10, 12  operation mode disabled 20 Advanced
Switching between the PU (initial 20 magnetic flux Speed control
6 NET operation mode and NET operation mode is value) vector control
enabled while running Other 9999
than Advanced magnetic flux vector
External operation mode 9999 - (initial
External operation control for the second motor
7 fixed (Forcibly switched to value)
mode
External operation mode) PM sensorless vector control test
9, 109 -
 Use Pr.340 = "2 or 12" setting to perform communication with the operation
RS-485 terminals. Position
Even if an instantaneous power failure occurs while Pr.57 Restart
13, 113
control
coasting time "9999" (with automatic restart after IPM
Speed control/
instantaneous power failure), the inverter continues operation at motor
14, 114 position control
the condition before the instantaneous failure. (MM-CF) PM sensorless
switchover
 The operation mode cannot be directly changed between the PU
 vector control
20
operation mode and Network operation mode. (initial
 Switching between the PU and NET operation modes is available 20, 110 Speed control
value),
with the key on the operation panel (FR-DU08) and the 110
X65 signal. PM sensorless vector control test
9, 109 -
operation
IPM/SPM 20
motor (initial PM sensorless
20, 110 Speed control
(other value), vector control
than MM- 110
CF) Vector control (Refer to the
0 to 6, 100 to 106 Instruction Manual of the FR-
A8APR.)
The setting value of Pr.800 is used
9999 for the second motor.
IPM/SPM
- (initial (PM sensorless vector control
motor
value) (speed control) when Pr.800="9 or
109")
9999
(initial - - V/F control
value)
 The setting values of 100 and above are used when the fast-
response operation is selected.
 A vector control compatible option is required. Offline auto tuning
 For induction motors, the operation for the setting of Pr.800
(Pr.451) = "10 or 110", speed control under Real sensorless
vector control, is performed when Pr.800 (Pr.451) = "13, 14, 113,
or 114".
 For IPM motors (MM-CF), the operation for the setting of Pr.800
Motor excitation
(Pr.451) = "20 or 110", speed control under PM sensorless vector 82 C125 83 C104 Rated motor voltage
control, is performed when a value other than "9, 13, 14, 109,
current
113, 114, or 9999" is set in Pr.800 (Pr.451). Rated motor
 For IPM/SPM motors (other than MM-CF), the operation for the 84 C105 90 C120 Motor constant (R1)
frequency
setting of Pr.800 (Pr.451) = "20 or 110", speed control under PM
sensorless vector control, is performed when a value other than
Motor constant (L1)/
"9, 109, or 9999" is set in Pr.800 (Pr.451). 91 C121 Motor constant (R2) 92 C122 d-axis inductance
 V/F control when Pr.80 or Pr.81 is "9999", regardless of the (Ld)
Pr.800 setting. When Pr.71 is set to the IPM motor MM-CF, PM Motor constant (L2)/
sensorless vector control is enabled even if Pr.80  "9999" or 93 C123 q-axis inductance 94 C124 Motor constant (X)
Pr.81 = "9999". (Lq)
 Setting Pr.788 (Pr.747)Low speed range torque characteristic
selection = "0" (lLow-speed range high-torque characteristic Auto tuning setting/ Second motor
96 C110 455 C225
disabled) selects speed control. status excitation current
Rated second motor Rated second motor
456 C204 457 C205
• Set Pr.89 (Pr.569) to make adjustments to keep the motor speed voltage frequency
constant during variable load operation under Advanced Second motor Second motor
458 C220 459 C221
magnetic flux vector control. constant (R1) constant (R2)
• The second motor control method can also be selected by the RT Second motor Second motor
signal. 460 C222 constant (L1) / d-axis 461 C223 constant (L2) / q-axis
• The Pr.22 function changes according to the Pr.800 setting (stall inductance (Ld) inductance (Lq)
prevention operation level/torque limit level). Second motor Second motor auto
• Setting Pr.800 (Pr.451) = "any of 100 to 105 or 109 to 114" 462 C224 463 C210
constant (X) tuning setting/status
selects the fast-response operation. The fast-response operation Second motor torque
is available during vector control, Real sensorless vector control, Torque current/Rated
859 C126 860 C226 current/Rated PM
and PM sensorless vector control. PM motor current
motor current
(During fast-response operation, the carrier frequency is always 4 Electronic thermal O/ Second electronic
kHz. During fast-response operation, continuous operation with 9 C103 51 C203
L relay thermal O/L relay
100% inverter rated current is not possible. (E.THT is likely to
71 C100 Applied motor 80 C101 Motor capacity
occur.))
• Using the FR-A8TP together with the FR-A8AP/FR-A8AL/FR- Number of motor Frequency search
81 C102 298 A711
poles gain
A8APR enables vector control by switching between two
encoder-equipped motors. Second applied Second motor
450 C200 453 C201
motor capacity
9
Number of second Second frequency
454 C202 560 A712
motor poles search gain
Tuning data unit Maximum motor
684 C000 702 C106
Induced voltage Motor inertia
706 C130 707 C107
constant (phi f) (integer)
711 C131 Motor Ld decay ratio 712 C132 Motor Lq decay ratio
Starting magnetic
Starting resistance
717 C182 721 C185 pole position
tuning compensation
Motor inertia Motor protection
724 C108 725 C133
(exponent) current level
Second motor
Second motor Ld
738 C230 induced voltage 739 C231
decay ratio
constant (phi f)
Second starting
Second motor Lq
740 C232 741 C282 resistance tuning
decay ratio
compensation
Second motor
Second motor
742 C285 magnetic pole 743 C206
maximum frequency
Second motor inertia Second motor inertia
744 C207 745 C208
(integer) (exponent)
Second motor Lq tuning target
746 C233 protection current 1002 C150 current adjustment
level coefficient
Second motor
Motor induced
induced voltage
1412 C135 voltage constant (phi 1413 C235
constant (phi f)
f) exponent
exponent
Offline auto tuning operation can be executed to automatically
calculate the motor constant under Advanced magnetic flux vector
control, Real sensorless vector control, vector control, or PM
sensorless vector control.
Offline tuning is necessary under Real sensorless vector control.
Also, when the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure or
flying start function is used under V/F control or with an IPM motor
MM-CF, offline auto tuning improves the precision of the frequency
search for motor speed detection.
Pr. 96 setting Description
Excitation current low-speed scaling
0
No offline auto tuning
(initial value)
factor
1  Performs offline auto tuning without rotating the motor
101  Performs offline auto tuning by rotating the motor
Performs offline auto tuning without rotating the motor Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name
11  (V/F control, PM sensorless vector control (IPM motor
Excitation current
MM-CF)). Excitation current
85 G201 86 G202 low speed scaling
break point
 For Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless factor
vector control and vector control
Reverse rotation
 For V/F control and PM sensorless vector control Second motor
excitation current
• The offline tuning data (motor constants) can be copied to 617 G080
low-speed scaling
565 G301 excitation current
another inverter with the operation panel (FR-DU08). break point
factor
• Even if a motor other than Mitsubishi Electric standard motors
Second motor
(SF-JR 0.4 kW or higher), high-efficiency motors (SF-HR 0.4 kW excitation current Load pattern
or higher), Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motors (SF-JRCA 566 G302 14 G003
low-speed scaling selection
4P, SF-HRCA 0.4 kW to 55 kW), Mitsubishi Electric high- factor
performance energy-saving motor SF-PR, or Mitsubishi Electric
vector-dedicated motors (SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series)), such as Under Advanced magnetic flux vector control or Real sensorless
other manufacturers' induction motors, SF-JRC, SF-TH, etc., is vector control, the excitation current scaling factor in the low-speed
used, or when the wiring length is long (approx. 30 m or longer), range can be adjusted.
an inductive motor can run with the optimum operation
characteristics by using the offline auto tuning function. Setting
Pr. Description
range
• The offline auto tuning enables the operation with SPM motors
and IPM motors other than MM-CF when using the PM motor. 0 (initial
For constant-torque load
When using a PM motor other than the IPM motor MM-CF series, value)
offline auto tuning must be performed. 1 For variable-torque load
• When using an induction motor, the motor rotation can be locked For constant-torque lift (boost at reverse
2 Excitation
(Pr.96 = "1, 11") or unlocked (Pr.96 = "101"). rotation: 0%)
The tuning is more accurate when the motor can rotate current
low-speed For constant-torque lift (boost at forward
(unlocked). 3
scaling rotation: 0%)
• Requirements for offline auto tuning factor: RT signal ON...for constant-torque load
• A motor is connected. 4 Pr.86 RT signal OFF...for constant-torque lift
• For the motor capacity, the rated motor current should be (boost at reverse rotation: 0%)
equal to or less than the inverter rated current. (It must be 0.4 RT signal ON...for constant-torque load
kW or higher.) 5 RT signal OFF...for constant-torque lift
Using a motor with the rated current substantially lower than (boost at forward rotation: 0%)
the inverter rated current will cause torque ripples, etc. and
9 degrade the speed and orque accuracies. As a reference,
select the motor with the rated motor current that is about
14
12
Forward rotation excitation current low-speed scaling
factor: Pr.86
Reverse rotation excitation current low-speed scaling
40% or higher of the inverter rated current. factor: Pr.617
• The highest frequency is 400 Hz. Forward rotation excitation current low-speed scaling
• The target motor is other than a high-slip motor, a high-speed factor: Pr.617
13
motor, or a special motor. Reverse rotation excitation current low-speed scaling
• When using an induction motor, check the following points if Pr.96 factor: Pr.86
(Pr.463) = "101" (Perform offline auto tuning by rotating the motor) Forward rotation excitation current low-speed scaling
is selected. factor: Pr.86
14
• Torque is not sufficient during tuning. Reverse rotation excitation current low-speed scaling
• The motor can be rotated up to the frequency close to the factor: Pr.617 (X17-OFF), Pr.86 (X17 signal-ON)
motor rated frequency (Pr.84 setting value). Forward rotation excitation current low-speed scaling
• The brake is released. 15
factor: Pr.617 (X17-OFF), Pr.86 (X17 signal-ON)
• The motor may rotate slightly even if Pr.96 (Pr.463) = "1, 11" Reverse rotation excitation current low-speed scaling
(performs tuning without rotating the motor) is selected. Fix the factor: Pr.86
motor securely with a mechanical brake, or before tuning, make 0 to 400 Hz
Set the frequency at which increased excitation is
sure that it is safe even if the motor rotates. started.
Make sure to perform the above especially in vertical lift 85 SF-PR/SF-HR/SF-HRCA motor: The predetermined
9999 (initial
applications. value)
frequency is applied.
Note that if the motor runs slightly, tuning performance is Motor other than the above: 10 Hz is applied.
unaffected. 0 to 300% Set an excitation current scaling factor at 0 Hz.
86 SF-PR/SF-HR/SF-HRCA motor: The predetermined
9999 (initial
scaling factor is applied.
value)
Motor other than the above: 130% is applied.
Set an excitation current scaling factor when different
0 to 300% excitation current scaling factors are used for forward
and reverse rotation.
617
SF-PR/SF-HR/SF-HRCA motor: The predetermined
9999 (initial
value)
Motor other than the above: 130% is applied.
Set an excitation current break point when the RT
0 to 400 Hz
signal is ON.
9999 (initial
frequency is applied.
value)
Motor other than the above: 10 Hz is applied.
Setting
Pr. range Description
Set an excitation current low-speed scaling factor when

Adjustable 5 points V/F
0 to 300%
the RT signal is ON.
9999 (initial Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name
value)
Motor other than the above: 130% is applied. 71 C100 Applied motor 100 G040 V/F1 (first frequency)
 The setting is applied to the operation under V/F control. V/F1 (first frequency V/F2 (second
 The setting is valid only under Advanced magnetic flux vector 101 G041 102 G042
voltage) frequency)
control or Real sensorless vector control. When Pr.14 = "12 to 15"
and V/F control is selected, the operation is the same as the one V/F2 (second V/F3 (third
103 G043 104 G044
for constant-torque load (Pr.14 = "0"). frequency voltage) frequency)
V/F3 (third frequency V/F4 (fourth
105 G045 106 G046
Pr. 89 voltage) frequency)
Refer to the page on Pr.80.
V/F4 (fourth frequency
107 G047 108 G048 V/F5 (fifth frequency)
voltage)
Online auto tuning 109 G049
V/F5 (fifth frequency
voltage)
By setting a desired V/F characteristic from the start up to the base
frequency or base voltage with the V/F control (frequency voltage/
Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name frequency), a dedicated V/F pattern can be generated.
Optimal V/F patterns that match the torque characteristics of the
Online auto tuning Second motor online
95 C111 574 C211 facility can be set.
selection auto tuning
• Set Pr.71 = "2" and set a voltage and frequency in Pr.100 to
If online auto tuning is selected, favorable torque accuracy is Pr.109.
retained by adjusting temperature even when the resistance value • Read only error ( ) is generated when the frequency value
varies due to increase in the motor temperature. for each point is the same. Also, set the frequency and voltage
When vector control is used, select the magnetic flux observer. within the range of Pr.3 Base frequency and Pr.19 Base
frequency voltage.
Pr.95 Pr.574 Description Voltage
0 (initial value) Do not perform online auto tuning Base
frequency
1 Perform online auto tuning at startup voltage
V/F5
Pr.19
2 Magnetic flux observer (tuning always)
V/F4
V/F3
• Perform offline auto tuning before performing online auto tuning Torque
boost V/F1
at startup. Pr.0 V/F2 Frequency
• When performing the online auto tuning at start for a lift, consider 0 Base
9
V/F Characteristic frequency
utilization of a brake sequence function for the brake opening Pr.3
timing at a start or tuning using the external terminal. The tuning
• At the time of Pr.19 Base frequency voltage = "8888, 9999",
is completed in approximately 500 ms at the maximum after the
setting of Pr.71 = "2" cannot be made. When setting Pr.71 = "2",
start. Not enough torque may be provided during that period.
set the rated voltage value in Pr.19.
Caution is required to prevent the object from dropping.
• Offline auto tuning is not necessary if selecting magnetic flux
observer for the SF-V5RU, SF-JR (with encoder), SF-HR (with
encoder), SF-JRCA (with encoder) or SF-HRCA (with encoder). Pr. 110, 111 Refer to the page on Pr.7.
(However, when the wiring length is long (30 m or longer as a Pr. 112 Refer to the page on Pr.0.
reference), perform offline auto tuning so that the resistance for
the wiring length can be reflected to the control.) Pr. 113 Refer to the page on Pr.3.
Pr. 114, 115 Refer to the page on Pr.22.
Pr. 96 Refer to the page on Pr.82.
Initial settings for communication
PU communication PU communication
117 N020 118 N021
station number speed
119 N022 119 N023
data length stop bit length
PU communication
PU communication
119 - stop bit length / data 120 N024
parity check
length
121 N025 122 N026
retry count check time interval
123 N027 124 N028
waiting time setting CR/LF selection
RS-485 RS-485
331 N030 communication 332 N031 communication
station number speed
RS-485 RS-485
333 N032 communication data 333 N033 communication stop
length bit length
Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name  Initial settings and specifications of RS-485
communication (Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.331 to Pr.337,
RS-485 RS-485
communication stop communication Pr.341)
333 - 334 N034 Use the following parameters to perform required settings for the
bit length / data parity check
length selection RS-485 communication between the inverter and a personal
RS-485 RS-485 computer. (Setting Pr.331 to Pr.337, Pr.341, Pr.343, Pr.539, or
335 N035 communication retry 336 N036 communication Pr.549 is not available for the FR-A800-E.)
count check time interval • There are two types of communication, communication using
RS-485 RS-485 the inverter's PU connector and communication using the RS-
337 N037 communication 341 N038 communication CR/ 485 terminals.
waiting time setting LF selection • Parameter setting, monitoring, etc. can be performed using
Communication the Mitsubishi inverter protocol or MODBUS RTU
Communication error communication protocol.
342 N001 EEPROM write 343 N080
count
selection • To establish communication between the computer and
Communication reset Network number (CC- inverter, setting of the communication specifications must be
349 N010 434 N110 made to the inverter in advance.
selection Link IE)
Communication error • Data communication cannot be established if the initial
Station number (CC- settings are not made or if there is any setting error.
435 N111 500 N011 execution waiting
Link IE)
time
Communication error Stop mode selection
Specify the inverter station number.
501 N012 occurrence count 502 N013 at communication
117 0 to 31 Set the inverter station numbers when two or
display error
331 (0 to 247) more inverters are connected to one personal
MODBUS RTU computer.
Frequency command
539 N002 communication 541 N100 Set the communication speed.
sign selection
check time interval 48, 96, 192, 384, 576, The setting value  100 equals the
CC-Link extended 118 768, 1152 communication speed.
544 N103 549 N000 Protocol selection 332
setting (3, 6, 12, 24) For example, if 192 is set, the communication
Operation frequency speed is 19200 bps.
779 N014 during 1434 N600 Ethernet IP address 1 E022 0 (initial value) Data length 8 bits
communication error N032 1 Data length 7 bits
1435 N601 Ethernet IP address 2 1436 N602 Ethernet IP address 3 E023 0 Stop bit length 1 bit
1437 N603 Ethernet IP address 4 1438 N610 Subnet mask 1 N033 1 (initial value) Stop bit length 2 bit
1439 N611 Subnet mask 2 1440 N612 Subnet mask 3 Stop bit length Data length
0 1 bit
Ethernet function 119 8 bits
1441 N613 Subnet mask 4 1427 N630 1 (initial value) 2 bits
selection 1 333
Ethernet function Ethernet function 10 1 bit
1428 N631 1429 N632 7 bits
selection 2 selection 3 11 2 bits
9 Link speed and
1426 N641 duplex mode 1455 N642 Keepalive time
120
0
1
Without parity check
With odd parity check
334
selection 2 (initial value) With even parity check
Ethernet signal loss Ethernet Set the permissible number of retries for
1431 N643 detection function 1432 N644 communication unsuccessful data reception. If the number of
0 to 10
selection check time interval 121 consecutive errors exceeds the permissible
Ethernet Ethernet 335 value, the inverter will trip.
1424 N650 communication 1425 N651 communication If a communication error occurs, the inverter
9999
network number station number will not trip.
Ethernet IP filter Ethernet IP filter No PU connector communication (Pr.122)
1442 N660 1443 N661 Communication is available using the RS-485
address 1 address 2 0
terminals, but the inverter trips in the NET
Ethernet IP filter Ethernet IP filter operation mode. (Pr.336)
1444 N662 1445 N663
336 Set the interval of the communication check
Ethernet IP filter Ethernet IP filter (signal loss detection) time.
1446 N664 address 2 range 1447 N665 address 3 range 0.1 to 999.8 s
If a no-communication state persists for longer
specification specification than the permissible time, the inverter will trip.
Ethernet IP filter Ethernet command 9999 (initial value) No communication check (signal loss detection)
1448 N666 address 4 range 1449 N670 source selection IP Set the waiting time between data transmission
specification address 1 123 0 to 150 ms
to the inverter and the response.
337
Ethernet command Ethernet command 9999 (initial value) Set with communication data.
1450 N671 source selection IP 1451 N672 source selection IP 0 Without CR/LF
1 (initial value) With CR
341
Ethernet command 2 With CR/LF
Ethernet command
source selection IP
1452 N673 source selection IP 1453 N674  When communication is made from the RS-485 terminal using
address 3 range
address 4 the MODBUS RTU protocol, the setting range in parentheses is
specification
applied to Pr.331.
Ethernet command  Values in parentheses are added to the Pr.332 setting range.
source selection IP
1454 N675
address 4 range  Communication EEPROM write selection (Pr.342)
specification
When parameter write is performed via communication, the
Set the action when the inverter is performing operation via parameters storage device can be changed from EEPROM +
communication. RAM to RAM only. If parameter settings are changed frequently,
set "1" in Pr.342.
 Operation selection at a communication error (Pr.502,  Initial settings and specifications of Ethernet
Pr.779) communication (FR-A800-E)
You can select the inverter's operation when a communication Use the following parameters to perform required settings for
error occurs during communication other than the one through the Ethernet communication between the inverter and other devices.
PU connector. The operation is active under the Network
operation mode. Pr. Setting range Description
1434
Pr. Setting range At fault occurrence At fault removal 1435 Enter the IP address of the inverter to be
0 to 255
Coasts to stop 1436 connected to Ethernet.
0 Stays stopped (E.SER
E.SER display 
(initial value) display ) 1437
ALM signal output
Deceleration stop 1438
E.SER display after stop  Stays stopped (E.SER 1439 Enter the subnet mask of the network to which the
1 0 to 255
ALM signal output after display ) 1440 inverter belongs.
stop
1441
502 Deceleration stop
2 Automatic restart 502,
E.SER display after stop  1427
5000 to 5002,
Operation continued at the 5006 to 5008,
3 set frequency of Pr.779 1428 Set the application, protocol, etc.
5010 to 5013,
Normal indication 9999, 45237,
Normal operation 1429
Operation continued at the 61450
4 set frequency of Pr.779 Set the communication speed and the
"CF" indication 1426 0 to 4
communication mode (full-duplex/half-duplex).
Set the frequency to be run at a communication error When no response is returned for an alive check
0 to 590 Hz
occurrence. message (KeepAlive ACK) for the time (s) set in
779 1455 1 to 7200 s
9999 The motor runs at the frequency used before the Pr.1455 multiplied by 4 elapsed, the connection
(initial value) communication error. will be forced to be closed.
 The "E.EHR" indication appears during Ethernet communication Signal loss detection
0 (initial value)
(for the FR-A800-E only). If in communication by the disabled.
communication option, E.OP1 is displayed.
Set the availability of
A warning (EHR) is the signal loss
1
output for a signal loss. detection and select
 MODBUS RTU communication specification (Pr.343, 1431 A warning (EHR) and the the action when
2 Alarm (LF) signal are Ethernet
Pr.539, Pr.549) communication is
output for a signal loss.
The MODBUS RTU protocol is valid only in communication from interrupted by physical
the RS-485 terminals. (The setting is not available for the FR- A protective function
factors.
3 (E.EHR) is activated for a
A800-E.)
signal loss.
Pr. Setting range Description Ethernet communication is available, but the
N033
0 Stop bit length 1 bit Valid when Pr.N034
(Pr.334) = "0"
0
inverter trips in the NET operation mode.
Set the interval of the communication check
9
1 (initial value) Stop bit length 2 bits
(signal loss detection) time for all devices with IP
0 Stop bit length 1 bit
addresses in the range specified for Ethernet
1 (initial value) Stop bit length 2 bits 1432 0.1 to 999.8 s
command source selection (Pr.1449 to Pr.1454).
333 Valid when Pr.334 = "0" If a no-communication state persists for the
10 Stop bit length 1 bit
permissible time or longer, the inverter will trip.
11 Stop bit length 2 bits
9999 (initial
Without parity check No communication check (signal loss detection)
value)
0 The stop bit length is selectable between 1 bit and
2 bits (according to Pr.333). 1424 1 to 239 Enter the network number.
334 With parity check at odd numbers 1425 1 to 120 Enter the station number.
1
Stop bit length 1 bit 1442
With parity check at even numbers 1443
2 (initial value) 0 to 255
Stop bit length 1 bit Set the range of connectable IP addresses for the
1444
Displays the communication error count during network devices.
343 - 1445
MODBUS RTU communication. Read-only. (When Pr.1442 to Pr.1445 = "0 (initial value)", the
1446 function is invalid.)
MODBUS RTU communication, but the inverter
0 1447 0 to 255, 9999
trips in the NET operation mode.
Set the interval of the communication check (signal 1448
539 0.1 to 999.8 s loss detection) time. (the same specifications as
Pr.122) 1449 Set the range of IP addresses to limit the network
devices that can be used as a command source
9999 during Ethernet communication (with MODBUS/
No communication check (signal loss detection) 1450
(initial value) TCP or CC-Link IE Field Network Basic).
0 (initial value) Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link) 0 to 255 When Pr.1449 to Pr.1452 = "0 (initial value)", no
549 1451 IP address is specified for sending commands
1 MODBUS RTU protocol
through the Ethernet network. In this case,
operation through the Ethernet network
1452
(MODBUS/TCP or CC-Link IE Field Network
Basic) is not available.
1453 When four or more clients attempt a connection to
the inverter during MODBUS/TCP communication,
0 to 255, 9999 the connection attempted from outside of the IP
address range set for Ethernet command source
1454
selection may be forced to be closed.
 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic function setting (FR- (C18 (Pr.920), C40 (Pr.933))
To change only the torque/magnetic flux command of the
A800-E) maximum analog input voltage (current), set to C18 (Pr.920), C40
The CC-Link IE Field Network Basic enables CC-Link IE (Pr.933). (Other calibration parameter settings do not need to be
communication using the general-purpose Ethernet-based changed.)
technology. The CC-Link IE Field Network Basic is suited to • Calibration of analog input bias and gain (C2 (Pr.902) to C7
small-scale equipment for which high-speed control is not (Pr.905), C16 (Pr.919) to C19 (Pr.920), C38 (Pr.932) to C41
necessary, and can coexist with the standard Ethernet TCP/IP (Pr.933))
(HTTP, FTP, etc.). (Pr.544 can be set only when the FR-A800-E is The "bias" and "gain" functions are used to adjust the relationship
used or a compatible plug-in option is installed.) between the output frequency (torque/magnetic flux) and the
setting input signal, such as 0 to 5 V DC/0 to 10 V DC or 4 to 20
mA DC, entered from outside to set the output frequency (torque/
0 (initial value) Frequency command without sign magnetic flux).
541
1 Frequency command with sign
Initial value
Output frequency
0 (initial value), 1, 12, The function of the remote registers can be 60Hz
544 14, 18, 24, 28, 100, extended when the CC-Link IE Field (50Hz)
(Hz)
112, 114, 118, 128 Network Basic is used.
 CC-Link IE Field Network function setting Gain

Pr.125
(FR-A800-GF) Bias C14(Pr.918)
Use the following parameters to perform required settings for CC- C2
C12(Pr.917)
Link IE Field Network communication between the inverter and 0 100%
other stations. (Pr.349, Pr.500, and Pr.501 can be set only when 0 Frequency setting signal 5V
0 10V
the FR-A800-GF inverter is used or when a compatible plug-in 0 20mA
option is installed to the FR-A800 inverter.) C3(Pr.902) C4(Pr.903)
C13(Pr.917) C15(Pr.918)
Pr. Setting range Description Initial value

434 0 to 255 Set the inverter network number. 60 Hz
(50 Hz)
435 0 to 255 Set the inverter station number.
Output frequency
0 (initial value) Frequency command without sign (Hz)
541
1 Frequency command with sign
Gain Pr.126
Bias
Changing and adjusting (calibrating) the C5

(Pr.904)
0 20 100%
frequency (speed) and torque/magnetic 0
0
4
1 Frequency setting signal
20 mA
5V
flux using analog input 0 2
C6(Pr.904)
10 V
C7(Pr.905)
9 400
Torque(%)

Terminal 2 frequency Terminal 4 frequency 150

Gain
125 T202 126 T402
setting gain setting gain (-5V) C18(Pr.920)
(903) T022 (905) T042 (-10V) Bias Initial value
frequency frequency -100% C16(Pr.919)
Terminal 2 frequency 0 100%
C2 C3 Terminal 2 frequency
T200 setting bias T201 0 Torque setting signal 5V
(902) (902) setting bias 0 10V
frequency C17(Pr.919) C19(Pr.920)
-150
Terminal 4 frequency
C4 Terminal 2 frequency C5
T203 T400 setting bias
(903) setting gain (904) Calibration example of terminal 1
frequency
C6 Terminal 4 frequency C7 Terminal 4 frequency
T401 T403 400
(904) setting bias (905) setting gain
Torque(%)
C12 Terminal 1 bias C13 Terminal 1 bias

T100 T101
(917) frequency (speed) (917) (speed) 150 Gain
C40
C14 Terminal 1 gain C15 Terminal 1 gain
T102 T103 (Pr.933)
(918) frequency (speed) (918) (speed)
Bias Initial value
Terminal 1 bias Terminal 1 bias C38
C16 C17
T110 command (torque/ T111 (torque/magnetic (Pr.932)
(919) (919) 0 20 100%
magnetic flux) flux)
0 4 20mA
Torque setting signal
Terminal 1 gain Terminal 1 gain C39(Pr.932) C41(Pr.933)
C18 C19
T112 command (torque/ T113 (torque/magnetic
(920) (920) Calibration example of terminal 4
Terminal 4 bias Terminal 4 bias • Analog input display unit changing (Pr.241)
C38 C39
T410 command (torque/ T411 (torque/magnetic The analog input display unit (%/V/mA) for analog input bias and
(932) (932)
gain calibration can be changed.
Terminal 4 gain Terminal 4 gain
C40 C41
T412 command (torque/ T413 (torque/magnetic
(933) (933)
Analog input display
241 M043
unit switchover
The degree (slope) of the output frequency (speed, torque/magnetic
flux) to the frequency/torque setting signal (0 to 5 V DC, 0 to 10 V
DC or 4 to 20 mA) is selectable to a desired amount.
• To change the frequency (speed) for the maximum analog input
(Pr.125, Pr.126, C14 (Pr.918))
To change only the frequency setting (gain) for the maximum
analog input voltage (current), set Pr.125 (Pr.126, C14 (Pr.918)).
(Other calibration parameter settings do not need to be changed.)
• To change the torque/magnetic flux for the maximum analog input
• Pr.128 = "20, 21" (measured value input)
PID control, Dancer control Inverter circuit
Manipulated Motor
Pr.133 or PID operation
terminal 2 ∗2 variable
+- 1 M
Set point Kp 1+ Ti S +Td S
Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name 0 to 5VDC
(0 to 10V, 4 to 20mA) Terminal 4 ∗3
PID control automatic Feedback signal (measured value) 4 to 20mADC (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V)
127 A612 128 A610 PID action selection
switchover frequency Kp: Proportionality constant Ti: Integral time S: Operator Td: Differential time
PID proportional When the second PID function is set, two sets of PID functions
129 A613 130 A614 PID integral time
band can be switched for use. The second PID function is enabled by
131 A601 PID upper limit 132 A602 PID lower limit turning ON the RT signal.
133 A611 PID action set point 134 A615 PID differential time
PID signal operation
553 A603 PID deviation limit 554 A604
selection  Dancer control
Output interruption Output interruption Dancer control is performed by setting "40 to 43" in Pr.128 PID
575 A621 576 A622
detection time detection level action selection. The main speed command is the speed
PID set point/ command for each operation mode (External, PU and
Output interruption
577 A623 609 A624 deviation input
cancel level
selection
communication). PID control is performed by the dancer roll
PID measured value Second PID action position detection signal, and the control result is added to the
610 A625 753 A650
input selection selection main speed command. For the main speed acceleration/
Second PID control
Second PID action
deceleration time, set the acceleration time to Pr.44 Second
754 A652 automatic switchover 755 A651 acceleration/deceleration time and the deceleration time to
set point
frequency
Pr.45 Second deceleration time.
Second PID Second PID integral
756 A653 757 A654
proportional band time
PID adding value
Second PID C42 PID display bias
758 A655 A630
differential time (934) coefficient
Output frequency
C43 PID display bias C44 PID display gain

A631 A632 Output frequency
(934) analog value (935) coefficient Main speed
Integral stop
C45 PID display gain
A633 1015 A607 selection at limited
(935) analog value
frequency
Second PID set point/ Time
Second PID measured
1140 A664 deviation input 1141 A665
value input selection
selection STF ON
Second PID unit Second PID upper
1142 A640 1143 A641
selection limit
1144 A642
Second PID lower
limit
1145 A643
Second PID deviation
limit 9
Second output
Second PID signal
1146 A644 1147 A661 interruption
operation selection
detection time
Second output Second output
1148 A662 interruption 1149 A663 interruption cancel
detection level level
PID upper limit
759 A600 PID unit selection 1134 A605
manipulated value
PID lower limit Second PID display
1135 A606 1136 A670
manipulated value bias coefficient
Second PID display Second PID display
1137 A671 1138 A672
bias analog value gain coefficient
Second PID display Second acceleration/
1139 A673 44 F020
gain analog value deceleration time
Second deceleration
45 F021
time
 PID control
Process control such as control of the flow rate, air volume or
pressure, is possible via the inverter.
When the parameter unit (FR-PU07) is used, the display unit of
parameters and monitored items related to PID control can be
changed to various units.
A feedback system can be configured and PID control can be
performed using the terminal 2 input signal or parameter setting
value as the set point, and the terminal 4 input signal as the
feedback value.
• Pr.128 = "10, 11" (deviation value signal input)
Inverter circuit
PID operation Manipulated Motor

Set point Deviation signal variable
+- 1 M
Terminal 1 ∗1 Kp 1+ Ti S +Td S
0 to 10VDC
To outside (0 to 5V)
Feedback signal (measured value)

Kp: Proportionality constant Ti: Integral time S: Operator Td: Differential time
Commercial power supply-inverter Output current detection (Y12 signal)
switchover function and zero current detection (Y13 signal)
Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name Output current Output current detection
150 M460 151 M461
detection level signal delay time
Electronic bypass MC switchover Zero current Zero current
135 A000 136 A001 152 M462 153 M463
sequence selection interlock time detection level detection time
Bypass selection at a Output current detection Output current detection
137 A002 Start waiting time 138 A003 166 M433 167 M464
fault signal retention time operation selection
Automatic switchover
Automatic switchover The output current during inverter running can be detected and
frequency range from
139 A004 frequency from inverter 159 A005 output to the output terminal.
bypass to inverter
to bypass operation
operation • Output current detection
57 A702 Restart coasting time 58 A703 Restart cushion time (Y12 signal, Pr.150, Pr.151, Pr.166, Pr.167)
• The output current detection function can be used for
The inverter contains complicated sequence circuits for switching purposes such as overtorque detection.
between the commercial power supply operation and inverter • If the output during inverter running is the Pr.150 setting or
operation. Therefore, interlock operation of the magnetic contactor higher for the time set in Pr.151 or longer, the output current
for switching can be easily performed by simply inputting start, stop, detection signal (Y12) is output from the inverter's open
and automatic switching selection signals. collector or relay output terminal.
The commercial power supply operation is not available with Pr.166 "9999", Pr.167 = "0"
Mitsubishi Electric vector control dedicated motors (SF-V5RU).
Pr.135 setting Description Pr.150
0 (initial value) Without electronic bypass sequence Output current

Pr.151
1 With electronic bypass sequence
Time
Sink logic, Pr.185 = "7", Pr.192 = "17", Pr.193 = "18", Pr.194 = "19" Pr.166
MC2 Output current
detection signal OFF ON OFF
(Y12)
External
MCCB MC1
R/L1 U
MC3
thermal relay
• Zero current detection (Y13 signal, Pr.152, Pr.153, Pr.167)
S/L2 V IM If the output during inverter running is the Pr.152 setting or lower
T/L3 W
for the time set in Pr.153 or longer, the zero current detection
9
R1/L11
S1/L21
signal (Y13) is output from the inverter's open collector or relay
Inverter start
∗1
MC1 output terminal.
(forward rotation) STF MC1
Inverter/bypass CS Pr.167 = "0"
operation interlock MRS

∗1 MC3 MC2
∗3 MC2 ∗2 Output
External thermal OH 24VDC current
Reset RES MC3
∗1 MC2 Pr.152
SD Pr.152
MC3 0[A]
Frequency 10 0.1s ∗ Time
setting signal 2 SE
5 OFF ON
Start signal
Zero current OFF ON OFF ON

Electronic bypass sequence connection diagram (standard detection time
(Y13) Pr.153 Pr.153
model) Detection time Detection time
 Be careful of the capacity of the sequence output terminals. ∗ When the output is restored to the Pr.152 level, the Y13
 When connecting a DC power supply, insert a protective diode. signal is turned OFF after 0.1 s.
 The applied terminals differ by the settings of Pr.180 to Pr.189

(input terminal function selection) .
• Output current detection operation selection (Pr.167)
Pr. 140 to 143 Refer to the page on Pr.29. Pr.167 setting Y12 signal-ON Y13 signal-ON
Pr. 144 Refer to the page on Pr.37. 0 (initial value) Continuous operation Continuous operation
1 E.CDO Continuous operation
10 Continuous operation E.CDO
PU display language selection 11 E.CDO E.CDO

Pr. GROUP Name
PU display language
145 E103
selection
The display language of the parameter unit (FR-PU07) can be
selected.
Pr.145 setting Description Pr.145 setting Description
0 Japanese 4 Spanish
1 English 5 Italian
2 German 6 Swedish
3 French 7 Finnish

Selecting operating conditions of the User group function
second function signal (RT) and the
third function signal (X9) Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name
User group
User group read
160 E440 172 E441 registered display/
Pr. GROUP Name selection
batch clear
RT signal function User group
173 E442 174 E443 User group clear
155 T730 validity condition registration
selection
This function restricts the parameters that are read by the operation
The second (third) function can be selected by the RT (X9) signal. panel and parameter unit.
Operating conditions (validity conditions) for the second (third) The initial setting displays all parameters.
function can also be set.
Pr.160
Description
Pr.155 setting Description setting
The second (third) function is immediately 0
0 (initial value)
enabled with ON of the RT (X9) signal. (initial value) Displays all parameters.
The second (third) function will be enabled while the RT 1 Displays parameters registered in the user group.
10 signal is ON and while running at a constant speed. 9999 Displays only the simple mode parameters.
(Disabled while accelerating or decelerating)
• User group function (Pr.160, Pr.172 to Pr.174)
• Items that can be set as the second function and third function The user group function is a function for displaying only the
(When the RT (X9) signal is ON, the following second (third) parameters required for a setting.
functions are selected at the same time. ) A maximum of 16 parameters from any of the parameters can be
registered in a user group. When Pr.160 = "1", reading/writing is
Second
First function
function
Third function enabled only for the parameters registered in user groups.
Function Parameter Parameter (Parameters not registered in user groups can no longer be read.)
Parameter
number number
number To register a parameter in a user group, set the parameter
Torque boost Pr.0 Pr.46 Pr.112 number in Pr.173.
Base frequency Pr.3 Pr.47 Pr.113 To clear a parameter from a user group, set the parameter
number in Pr.174. To batch clear all the registered parameters,
Acceleration time Pr.7 Pr.44 Pr.110
set Pr.172 = "9999".
Deceleration time Pr.8 Pr.44, Pr.45 Pr.110, Pr.111
Electronic thermal
Pr.9 Pr.51 
O/L relay
Free thermal Pr.600 to Pr.604 Pr.692 to Pr.696 
Operation panel operation selection
Stall prevention
Applied motor 
Pr.22
Pr.71
Pr.48, Pr.49
Pr.450
Pr.114, Pr.115
 Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name 9
Pr.80 to Pr.84, Frequency setting/ Frequency change
Pr.89 to Pr.94, 161 E200 key lock operation 295 E201 increment amount
Pr.453 to Pr.457,
Pr.298, Pr.702, selection setting
Pr.560, Pr.569,
Pr.706, Pr.707,
Motor constant  Pr.458 to Pr.462, 
Pr.711, Pr.712,
Pr.738 to Pr.747,  Setting dial potentiometer mode/key lock
Pr.717, Pr.721,
Pr.724, Pr.725,
Pr.860 operation selection (Pr.161)
Pr.859 The setting dial of the operation panel (FR-DU08) can be used for
Offline auto tuning  Pr.96 Pr.463  setting like a potentiometer.
Online auto tuning  Pr.95 Pr.574  The key operation of the operation panel can be disabled.
PID control Pr.127 to Pr.134 Pr.753 to Pr.758 
PID pre-charge
Pr.760 to Pr.764 Pr.765 to Pr.769  0 Setting dial frequency setting
function
(initial value) mode Key lock mode
Pr.278 to Pr.285, Pr.641 to Pr.648, disabled
Brake sequence  
1 Setting dial potentiometer mode
Pr.639, Pr.640 Pr.650, Pr.651
Pr.286 to Pr.288, Setting dial frequency setting
Droop Pr.679 to Pr.683  10 Key lock mode
Pr.994, Pr.995 mode
enabled
Low-speed range 11 Setting dial potentiometer mode
torque
characteristic Pr.788 Pr.747 
 Frequency change increment amount setting
selection 
(Pr.295)
Motor control
method  Pr.800 Pr.451  When setting a frequency using the setting dial on the operation
Speed control gain Pr.820, Pr.821 Pr.830, Pr.831 
panel (FR-DU08), the frequency change increment is determined by
how quickly the setting dial is rotated.
Analog input filter Pr.822, Pr.826 Pr.832, Pr.836 
Speed detection
Pr.823 Pr.833 
filter
Pr. 162 to 165 Refer to the page on Pr.57.
Torque control gain Pr.824, Pr.825 Pr.834, Pr.835 
Torque detection filter Pr.827 Pr.837  Pr. 166, 167 Refer to the page on Pr.150.
 The function can be changed by switching the RT signal ON/OFF Pr. 168, 169 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
while the inverter is stopped. If a signal is switched during
operation, the operation method changes after the inverter stops. Pr. 170, 171 Refer to the page on Pr.52.
 When the RT signal is OFF, the first function is selected and when
it is ON, the second function is selected.

Signal
Setting Function
Input terminal function assignment name
27 TL Torque limit selection
28 X28 Start-time tuning start external input
Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name 37 X37 Traverse function selection
STF terminal function STR terminal 42 X42 Torque bias selection 1
178 T700 179 T701
selection function selection 43 X43 Torque bias selection 2
RL terminal function RM terminal function 44 X44 P/PI control switchover(P control with X44-ON)
180 T702 181 T703
selection selection
45 BRI2 Second brake sequence open completion
RH terminal function RT terminal function
182 T704 183 T705 46 TRG Trace trigger input
selection selection
AU terminal function JOG terminal 47 TRC Trace sampling start/end
184 T706 185 T707
selection function selection 48 X48 Power failure stop external
CS terminal function MRS terminal 50 SQ Sequence start
186 T708 187 T709
selection function selection
51 X51 Fault clear signal
STOP terminal RES terminal
188 T710 189 T711 Cumulative pulse monitor clear (for vector control
function selection function selection 52 X52
compatible option)
699 T740 Input terminal filter
Cumulative pulse monitor clear (control terminal option)
53 X53
Use the following parameters to select or change the input terminal (for FR-A8TP)
functions. 57 JOGF JOG forward rotation command
(When Pr.419 Position command source selection = "2" (simple 58 JOGR JOG reverse rotation command
pulse train position command), terminal JOG is used as a simple 59 CLRN NET position pulse clear
position pulse train input terminal, independently of the Pr.185 Forward rotation command (Assignable to the STF
60 STF
setting.) terminal (Pr.178) only)
Reverse rotation command (Assignable to the STR
Signal 61 STR
Setting Function terminal (Pr.179) only)
name
62 RES Inverter reset
Low-speed operation
Pr.59 = 0 (initial value) 64 X64 During retry
command
0 RL Remote setting (setting 65 X65 PU/NET operation switchover (PU operation with X65-ON)
Pr.59  0 
clear) External/NET operation switchover (NET operation with
66 X66
Pr.270 = 1, 3, 11, 13  Stop-on-contact selection 0 X66-ON)
Middle-speed operation Command source switchover (Command by Pr.338,
Pr.59 = 0 (initial value) 67 X67
command Pr.339 enabled with X67-ON)
1 RM 68 NP Simple position pulse train sign
Remote setting
Pr.59  0 
(deceleration) 69 CLR Simple position droop pulse clear
9 Pr.59 = 0 (initial value)
High-speed operation
command
70 X70 DC feeding operation permission
2 RH 71 X71 DC feeding cancel
Remote setting
Pr.59  0  72 X72 PID P control switchover

(acceleration)
73 X73 Second PID P control switchover
3 RT 74 X74 Magnetic flux decay output shutoff signal
Pr.270 = 1, 3, 11, 13  Stop-on-contact selection 1
76 X76 Proximity dog
4 AU Terminal 4 input selection
77 X77 Pre-charge end command
5 JOG Jog operation selection
78 X78 Second pre-charge end command
Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power
6 CS failure, flying start 79 X79 Second PID forward/reverse action switchover
Electronic bypass function 80 X80 Second PID control valid terminal
7 OH External thermal relay input  85 X85 SSCNET III(/H) communication disabled (for FR-A8NS)
15-speed selection (Combination with multi-speeds of 87 X87 Sudden stop
8 REX
RL, RM, and RH) 88 X88 Upper stroke limit (for FR-A8NS)
9 X9 Third function selection 89 X89 Lower stroke limit (for FR-A8NS)
Inverter run enable signal (FR-HC2/FR-CV/FR-CC2 92 X92 Emergency stop
10 X10
connection)
93 X93 Torque control selection
FR-HC2/FR-CC2 connection, instantaneous power
11 X11 94 X94 Control signal input for main circuit power supply MC
failure detection
12 X12 PU operation external interlock 95 X95 Converter unit fault input
13 X13 External DC injection brake operation start 96 X96 Converter unit fault (E.OHT, E.CPU) input
14 X14 PID control valid terminal 9999 ---- No function
15 BRI Brake opening completion signal  When Pr.59 Remote function selection  "0", functions of the
RL, RM, and RH signals will be changed as in the table.
PU/External operation switchover (External operation  When Pr.270 Stop-on contact/load torque high-speed
16 X16
with X16-ON) frequency control selection = "1, 3, 11, or 13", functions of the
Load pattern selection forward/reverse rotation boost (for RL and RT signals will be changed as in the table.
17 X17  The OH signal will operate with the relay contact "open".
constant-torque load with X17-ON)
 When the stop position is to be input externally for orientation
18 X18 V/F switchover (V/F control with X18-ON) control, the FR-A8AX (16-bit digital input) is required.
19 X19 Load torque high-speed frequency  Servo ON is enabled during the position control.
 Available when the option is connected.
20 X20 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C switchover  The setting is available only for standard models and IP55
Orientation command (for vector control compatible compatible models.
22 X22 • Adjusting the response of input terminal (Pr.699)
option)
23 LX Pre-excitation/servo ON  Pr.699 setting Description
Output stop 5 to 50 ms Set the time to delay the input terminal response.
24 MRS
Electronic bypass function 9999 (initial value) No input terminal filter
25 STOP Start self-holding selection
26 MC Control mode switchover
Setting
Signal
Output terminal function assignment Positive Negative
logic logic
name Function
54 154 Y54 Second pre-charge level over

Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name 55 155 Y55 Motor temperature detection (for FR-A8AZ)
56 156 ZA Home position return failure
RUN terminal SU terminal function 57 157 IPM During PM sensorless vector control
190 M400 191 M401
function selection selection
60 160 FP Position detection level
IPF terminal function OL terminal function 61 161 PBSY During position command operation
192 M402 193 M403
selection selection
63 163 ZPEND Home position return completed
FU terminal function ABC1 terminal 64 164 Y64 During retry
194 M404 195 M405
selection function selection
67 167 Y67 Power failure signal
ABC2 terminal Inverter output 68 168 EV 24 V external power supply operation
196 M406 289 M431
function selection terminal filter
70 170 SLEEP PID output interruption
313 M410 DO0 output selection 314 M411 DO1 output selection 79 179 Y79 Pulse train output of output power
315 M412 DO2 output selection 80 180 SAFE Safety monitor output
Use the following parameters to change the functions of the open 84 184 RDY Position control preparation ready
85 185 Y85 DC current feeding
collector output terminals and relay output terminals.
Control circuit capacitor life
Pr.313 to Pr.315 can be set only when the FR-A800-GF is used or a 86 186 Y86
(For Pr.313 to Pr.322)
compatible plug-in option is installed. Main circuit capacitor life
87 187 Y87
(For Pr.313 to Pr.322)
Setting
Signal Cooling fan life
Positive Negative Function 88 188 Y88
name (For Pr.313 to Pr.322)
logic logic
Inrush current limit circuit life
0 100 RUN Inverter running 89 189 Y89
(For Pr.313 to Pr.322)
1 101 SU Up to frequency
90 190 Y90 Life alarm
2 102 IPF Instantaneous power failure/undervoltage
91 191 Y91 Fault output 3 (power-OFF signal)
3 103 OL Overload warning
92 192 Y92 Energy saving average value updated timing
4 104 FU Output frequency detection
93 193 Y93 Current average monitor signal
5 105 FU2 Second output frequency detection
94 194 ALM2 Fault output 2
6 106 FU3 Third output frequency detection
95 195 Y95 Maintenance timer signal
7 107 RBP Regenerative brake pre-alarm
96 196 REM Remote output
8 108 THP Electronic thermal O/L relay pre-alarm
97 197 ER Alarm output 2
10 110 PU PU operation mode
98 198 LF Alarm
11 111 RY Inverter operation ready
99 199 ALM Fault
12 112 Y12 Output current detection
200 300 FDN2 Second PID lower limit
13 113 Y13 Zero current detection
201 301 FUP2 Second PID upper limit
14
15
114
115
FDN
FUP
PID lower limit
PID upper limit
202
203
302
303
RL2
PID2
Second PID forward/reverse rotation output
Second During PID control activated
9
16 116 RL PID forward/reverse rotation output
204 304 SLEEP2 During second PID output shutoff
17 ---- MC1 Electronic bypass MC1
205 305 Y205 Second PID deviation limit
206 306 Y206 Cooling fan operation command signal
207 307 Y207 Control circuit temperature signal
20 120 BOF Brake opening request
208 308 PS PU stopped signal
22 122 BOF2 Second brake opening request
211 311 LUP Upper limit warning detection
25 125 FAN Fan fault output
212 312 LDN Lower limit warning detection
26 126 FIN Heatsink overheat pre-alarm
213 313 Y213 During load characteristics measurement
Orientation complete
27 127 ORA 227 327 Y227 Parallel operation ready
(for vector control compatible option)
242 342 LNK Inverter-to-inverter linkup
Orientation fault
28 128 ORM 9999 ---- No function
Forward rotation output  Be careful when changing the frequency setting with an analog
30 130 Y30 signal or the setting dial of the operation panel (FR-DU08)
because this change speed and the timing of the change speed
Reverse rotation output determined by the acceleration/deceleration time setting may
31 131 Y31
(for vector control compatible option) cause the output of the SU (up to frequency) signal to switch
Regenerative status output repeatedly between ON and OFF. (This repeating does not occur
32 132 Y32
(for vector control compatible option) when the acceleration/deceleration time setting is "0 s".)
33 133 RY2 Operation ready 2  When the power is reset, the fault output 2 signal (ALM2) turns
OFF at the same time as the power turns OFF.
34 134 LS Low speed detection
 Available when the option is connected.
35 135 TU Torque detection  The setting is available only for standard models.
36 136 Y36 In-position  The setting is available only for standard models and IP55
38 138 MEND Travel completed compatible models.
 The setting can be used for Pr.313 to Pr.322 for the FR-A800-GF
39 139 Y39 Start time tuning completion or when an option (FR-A8AY, FR-A8AR, FR-A8NC, or FR-
40 140 Y40 Trace status A8NCE) is installed. For the corresponding parameters of each
41 141 FB Speed detection option, refer to the Instruction Manual of the option.
42 142 FB2 Second speed detection  The function is not available in the FR-A842-P.
 The setting is available only in the FR-A842-P.
43 143 FB3 Third speed detection  The setting is available only in the FR-A800-E.
44 144 RUN2 Inverter running 2
45 145 RUN3 Inverter running and start command is ON • Adjusting the output terminal response level (Pr.289)
During deceleration at occurrence of power
46 146 Y46 Pr. 289 setting Description
failure
47 147 PID During PID control activated Set the time delay for the output terminal
5 to 50 ms
48 148 Y48 PID deviation limit response.
49 149 Y49 During pre-charge operation 9999 No output terminal filter.
50 150 Y50 During second pre-charge operation (initial value)
51 151 Y51 Pre-charge time over
52 152 Y52 Second pre-charge time over
53 153 Y53 Pre-charge level over
Pr. 232 to 239 Refer to the page on Pr.4. Power supply to the inverter: AC (terminals R, S,
Pr. 240 and T)
Refer to the page on Pr.72. When power is supplied only to the control
100, 101
Pr. 241 Refer to the page on Pr.125. circuit, and then switched to be supplied to both
30 the control and main circuits, inverter reset is not
Pr. 242, 243 Refer to the page on Pr.73. performed.
0 to 2, 10, 11, 20,
21, 102, 110, For other settings, refer to page 114.
Cooling fan operation selection 111, 120, 121
Pr. GROUP Name Earth (ground) fault detection at start

Cooling fan
244 H100
operation selection
A cooling fan is built into the inverter and its operation can be
controlled. Pr. GROUP Name
Earth (ground) fault

Pr.244 setting Description 249 H101
detection at start
A cooling fan operates at power ON. Select whether to enable/disable earth (ground) fault detection at
0 Cooling fan ON/OFF control is invalid. (The cooling
fan is always ON at power ON) start. When enabled, earth (ground) fault detection is performed
Cooling fan ON/OFF control is valid.
immediately after a start signal is input to the inverter.
1 The fan is always ON while the inverter is running.
(initial value) During a stop, the inverter status is monitored and the Pr.249 setting Description
fan switches ON/OFF according to the temperature. 0 (initial value) Without the earth (ground) fault detection at start
Cooling fan ON/OFF control is valid. 1 With the earth (ground) fault detection at start
101 to 105 Set the cooling fan stop waiting time within 1 to 5 s.
The waiting time is the Pr.244 setting minus 100. • If a ground fault is detected at start while Pr.249 = "1", the output
side earth (ground) fault overcurrent (E.GF) is displayed and the
outputs are shut off.
Slip compensation Motor stop method/start signal selection

Slip compensation 250 G106 Stop selection
245 G203 Rated slip 246 G204
9 Constant-power
time constant
Select the stopping method (deceleration stop or casting) at turn-
range slip OFF of the start signal.
247 G205
compensation Use this function to stop a motor with a mechanical brake at turn-
selection OFF of the start signal.

Motor slip is estimated from the inverter output current and the The start signal (STF/STR) operation can also be selected.
rotation of the motor is maintained as a constant.
Pr.250 Description
Self power management Setting Start signal (STF/STR) Stop operation
STF signal: Forward
It will coast to stop after set
rotation start
0 to 100 s time when the start signal is
STR signal: Reverse
turned OFF.
rotation start
Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name STF signal: Start signal It will coast to stop after
Self power 1000 s to 1100 s STR signal: Forward/ (Pr.250 - 1000) s when the
Main circuit power reverse rotation signal start signal is turned OFF.
248 A006 management 254 A007
OFF waiting time
selection STF signal: Forward
Regenerative rotation start
137 A002 Start waiting time 30 E300 9999
function selection STR signal: Reverse It will perform deceleration
rotation start stop when the start signal is
By turning ON the magnetic contactor (MC) on the input side before turned OFF.
STF signal: Start signal
the motor is started and turning OFF the MC after the motor is 8888 STR signal: Forward/
stopped, supplying power to the main circuit is stopped, reducing the reverse rotation signal
standby power. When Pr.250 is "9999 (initial value) or 8888"
Pr. Setting range Description Deceleration starts
Output frequency
0 (initial value) Self power management function disabled when start signal turns OFF
Deceleration time
Self power management function enabled (main
1 (Time set in Pr. 8, etc.)
circuit OFF at protective function activation)
248
(Hz)
DC brake
Self power management function enabled (main Time
2 circuit OFF at protective function activation due Start
OFF
ON
to a circuit failure) signal
RUN
Set a time period that is a little longer than the signal ON OFF
137 0 to 100 s time period from the ON signal input to the
actual pick-up operation of MC1 (0.3 to 0.5 s).
Set the waiting time until the main circuit power
1 to 3600 s
supply is turned OFF after the motor is stopped.
254 The main circuit power supply is turned OFF
9999 only when the protective function selected by
Pr.248 is activated.
When Pr.250 is other than "9999 (initial value) or 8888"
Output frequency
Output is shut off when Power failure time deceleration stop
set time elapses after
start signal turns OFF function
Pr.250
Motor coasts to stop

(Hz)
Time Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name

Start signal ON OFF
Power failure stop Subtracted frequency
261 A730 262 A731
RUN signal ON OFF selection at deceleration start
Subtraction starting Power-failure
263 A732 264 A733
frequency deceleration time 1
I/O phase loss protection selection Power failure
Power-failure
265 A734 266 A735 deceleration time
deceleration time 2
Power failure stop
UV avoidance
Output phase loss Input phase loss 294 A785 606 T722 external signal input
251 H200 872 H201 voltage gain
protection selection protection selection selection
Power failure stop
The output phase loss protective function, which stops the inverter 668 T786
frequency gain
output if one of the three phases (U, V, W) on the inverter's output
side (load side) is lost, can be disabled. At instantaneous power failure or undervoltage, the motor can be
The input phase loss protective function on the inverter's input side decelerated to a stop or decelerated once and re-accelerated to the
(R, S, T) can be enabled. set frequency.
Pr. Setting range Description Power failure time deceleration stop function
0 (initial value)
0 Without output phase loss protection disabled
251 Power failure time deceleration stop function
1 (initial value) With output phase loss protection 261
enabled
0 (initial value) Without input phase loss protection 1, 2, 11, 12, 21, 22
872 Select action at an undervoltage or when a power
1 With input phase loss protection failure occurs.
Normally, the motor runs at the initial value as it
262 0 to 20Hz is. However, adjust to suit the size of the load
Pr. 252, 253 Refer to the page on Pr.73. specification (moment of inertia, torque).
When output frequency  Pr.263
Deceleration from (output frequency - Pr.262)
Displaying the life of the inverter parts 263
0 to 590 Hz
When output frequency  Pr.263
Deceleration from output frequency
9999 Deceleration from (output frequency - Pr.262)
255 E700
Life alarm status
256 E701
Inrush current limit
264 0 to 3600 s
Set the slope applicable from the deceleration
start to the Pr.266 set frequency. 9
display circuit life display Set the slope applicable for the frequency range
0 to 3600 s
Control circuit Main circuit capacitor 265 starting at Pr.266 and downward.
257 E702 258 E703 9999 (initial value) Same as Pr.264.
capacitor life display life display
Main circuit capacitor Set the frequency at which the slope during
259 E704 266 0 to 590 Hz deceleration switches from the Pr.264 setting to
life measuring
the Pr.265 setting.
The degree of deterioration of the main circuit capacitor, control Adjust the response level at UV avoidance
circuit capacitor, inrush current limit circuit, cooling fan, and internal operation. Setting a large value improves the
fan alarm can be diagnosed on the monitor. 294 0 to 200% response to changes in the bus voltage. If the
When a part approaches the end of its life, an alarm can be output inertia is high, the amount of regeneration is too
large. Set a smaller value.
by self diagnosis to prevent a fault.
Normally open input (NO contact input
(Note that the life diagnosis of this function should be used as a 0
specification)
guideline only, because with the exception of the main circuit 606
Normally closed input (NC contact input
capacitor, the life values are theoretical calculations.) 1 (initial value)
specification)
Setting Adjust the response level for the operation where
Pr. Description 668 0 to 200%
range the deceleration time is automatically adjusted.
Displays whether or not the parts of the control Power supply
circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor, cooling
Pr.264
255 (0 to 31) fan, Internal fan alarm, and inrush current limit Output Subtracted Power-failure
circuit have reached the life alarm output level. frequency frequency at deceleration time 1
Read-only. Power-failure deceleration start Pr.265
deceleration Pr.262 Power-failure
Displays the deterioration degree of the inrush time switchover deceleration
256 (0 to 100%) frequency time 2
current limit circuit. Read-only. Pr.266 Time
Displays the deterioration degree of the control
257 (0 to 100%)
circuit capacitor. Read-only. • Set Pr.261 to select the action at an undervoltage and power
failure.
Displays the deterioration degree of the main
258 (0 to 100%) circuit capacitor. Read-only. Power restoration
Action at
during
The value measured by Pr.259 is displayed. Pr.261 undervoltage deceleration at Deceleration Undervoltage
avoidance
Setting "1" and turning the power supply OFF setting and occurrence of stop time
power failure function
starts the measurement of the main circuit power failure
capacitor life. 0 Coasts to stop Coasts to stop - -
0, 1
259 If the setting value of Pr.259 becomes "3" after
(2, 3, 8, 9) 1 Deceleration stop Not used
turning the power supply ON again, it means
2 Re-acceleration According to Not used
that the measurement is completed. The
Pr.262 to
deterioration degree is read to Pr.258. 11 Deceleration stop Pr.266 setting With
12 Deceleration Re-acceleration With
 The internal fan is only available for the IP55 compatible model.
 Not compatible with the separated converter type.
stop
21 Deceleration stop Automatic Not used
adjustment of
Pr. 260 22 Re-acceleration deceleration Not used
time
• Power failure stop function (Pr.261 = "1, 11, 21")
Even if power is restored during deceleration triggered by a
power failure, deceleration stop is continued after which the
Load torque high-speed frequency
inverter stays stopped. To restart operation, turn the start signal control
OFF then ON again.
Pr.261 = "1"
Power Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name
supply
During deceleration at Stop-on contact/load
Output frequency
occurrence of power failure torque high-speed High-speed setting

270 A200 271 A201
During stop at
occurrence of
frequency control maximum current
power failure selection
Middle-speed setting Current averaging
272 A202 273 A203
Time minimum current range
STF Current averaging Multi-speed setting
274 A204 4 D301
filter time constant (high speed)
Turn OFF STF once to make acceleration again
Multi-speed setting
Y46 5 D302
(middle speed)
• Continuous operation function at instantaneous power failure This function is designed to increase speed automatically under light
(Pr.261 = "2, 12, 22") load, for example to minimize the incoming/outgoing time in a multi-
The motor re-accelerates to the set frequency if the power story parking lot.
restores during deceleration at occurrence of power failure. The load size during power driving is estimated by detecting average
Combining with the automatic restart after instantaneous power currents at set timings after a start. When the load is light, the
failure function enables a power failure time deceleration stop and
frequency is increased from the originally-set frequency. (During
re-acceleration at a power restoration.
If the power is restored after stoppage by a power failure, a restart regeneration load operation, the frequency is not increased.)
operation is performed when automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure (Pr.57  "9999") is selected.
0
Normal operation
Pr.261 = 2
When power is restored during (initial value)
deceleration at occurrence of
power failure 1 Stop-on-contact control
IPF
Power 2 Load torque high-speed frequency control
supply
Stop-on-contact + load torque high-speed frequency
Output 3
frequency During deceleration control
at occurrence of
power failure
Reacceleration * 11 Stop-on-contact control E.OLT detection invalid
Time
Stop-on-contact + load torque under stop-on contact
Y46 13 control
high-speed frequency control
* Acceleration time depends on Pr.7 (Pr.44 ).
• Set such items as the current and averaging range for load torque
9 Pr.261 = 2, Pr.57
When used with automatic restart
9999 after instantaneous power failure
high-speed frequency control selected by setting Pr.270 = "2 or
3".
• When the load torque high-speed frequency selection (X19)
Power During power failure signal is ON, the inverter automatically adjusts the maximum
supply frequency in the range between the Pr.4 Multi-speed setting
Output
frequency During deceleration
(high speed) and Pr.5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed)
Automatic restart
at occurrence of after instantaneous setting in accordance with the average current while the motor is
power failure power failure
Time accelerating from a frequency that is half of the Pr.5 setting to the
Reset time + Pr.57
Pr.5 setting as shown in the figure below.
Y46
Output frequency
• Automatic adjustment of deceleration time (Pr.261 = "21, 22" Power running Regenerating
Pr.294, Pr.668) Pr.4
When "21, 22" is set in Pr.261, the deceleration time is
Pr.5
automatically adjusted to keep (DC bus) voltage constant in the 1
Pr.5
converter when the motor decelerates to a stop at a power failure. 2
Setting of Pr.262 to Pr.266 is not required. A B Time

Current averaging range Current averaging range
Use Pr.668 Power failure stop frequency gain to adjust the Less than Pr.272 setting rated current
response level during deceleration time auto adjustment. STF
Pr.271 setting rated current
ON OFF
or more
ON OFF ON OFF
Increasing the setting improves the response level to the bus (STR)
voltage fluctuations, but the output frequency may be unstable. X19 ON ON ON OFF
If setting Pr.294 UV avoidance voltage gain lower also does not

suppress the vibration, set Pr.668 lower. Pr. Setting Description
range
Pr.261 = 21
Power 4 0 to 590 Hz Set the higher-speed frequency.
supply
During deceleration at
5 0 to 590 Hz Set the lower-speed frequency.
occurrence of power failure
271 0 to 400% Set the upper and lower limits of the current at
Deceleration time : Automatic adjustment
Output
frequency 272 0 to 400% high and middle speeds.
During stop at occurrence
of power failure
Set the average current during acceleration from
0 to 590 Hz
(Pr.273  1/2) Hz to (Pr.273) Hz.
Time 273
9999 Set the average current during acceleration from
STF (Initialization) (Pr.5  1/2) Hz to (Pr.5 ) Hz.
Turn OFF STF once to make acceleration again Set the time constant of the primary delay filter
Y46 relative to the output current.
(The time constant [ms] is 0.5  Pr.274, and the
274 1 to 4000
initial value is 8 ms.)
Pr. 267 A larger setting results in a stable operation with
Refer to the page on Pr.73. poorer response.
Pr. 269 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
Setting
Stop-on-contact control 0 to 9 Set a PWM carrier frequency for stop-on-contact
control.
For Real sensorless vector control, the carrier
Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name frequency is always 2 kHz when the setting value is
0 to 4
276 0 to 5 and always 6 kHz when the setting value is 6
Stop-on contact/load Stop-on contact
to 9. (Valid at the output frequency of 3 Hz or less.)
torque high-speed excitation current
270 A200 275 A205 9999
frequency control low-speed As set in Pr.72 PWM frequency selection.
selection multiplying factor (initial value)
PWM carrier  The setting range of FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-
Stall prevention A840-01800(55K) or lower
276 A206 frequency at stop-on 22 H500
operation level  The setting range of FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-
contact
A840-02160(75K) or higher
Second stall  Not available for the FR-A842-P.
Multi-speed setting
6 D303 48 H600 prevention operation
(low speed)
level
To ensure accurate positioning at the upper limit, etc. of a lift, stop-
on-contact control causes the mechanical brake to close while the
motor creates a holding torque to keep the load in contact with a
mechanical stopper, etc. Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name
This function suppresses vibration that is likely to occur when the
Brake opening Brake opening
load is stopped upon contact in lift applications, thereby ensuring 278 A100
frequency
279 A101
current
reliable and highly accurate positioning stop.
Brake opening
Brake operation time
280 A102 current detection 281 A103
Pr.270 setting Description at start
time
0 Brake operation Brake operation time
Normal operation 282 A104 283 A105
(initial value) frequency at stop
1 Stop-on-contact control Deceleration
Overspeed detection
2 Load torque high-speed frequency control 284 A106 detection function 285 A107
frequency
Stop-on-contact + load torque high-speed selection
3
frequency control Automatic
Brake opening
11 Stop-on-contact control 292 F500 acceleration/ 639 A108
current selection
E.OLT invalid deceleration
Stop-on-contact + load under stop-on-
13 torque high-speed frequency Second brake
contact control Brake operation
control 640 A109 641 A130 sequence operation
frequency selection
selection
• Select either Real sensorless Second brake Second brake
642 A120 643 A121
9
Stop-on contact
vector control (speed control) opening frequency opening current
Output frequency
Normal mode control mode

Pr.4
or Advanced magnetic flux Second brake Second brake
vector control. Pr.5 644 A122 opening current 645 A123 operation time at
When both the RT and RL detection time start
Pr.6
signals are switched ON, the 0 Time Second brake
Second brake
inverter enters the stop-on- (a) (b) (c) 646 A124 647 A125 operation time at
operation frequency
contact control, and operation RH ON stop
is performed at the frequency RM OFF ON Second deceleration Second brake
set in Pr.6 Multi-speed setting RL OFF ON 648 A128 detection function 650 A128 opening current
∗
(low speed) independently of RT OFF ON
selection selection
the preceding speed. ∗ Goes into stop-on-contact control mode when Second brake
both RL and RT switch on. 651 A129 operation frequency
RL and RT may be switched on in any order
with any time difference selection
(a): Acceleration time(Pr.7)
(b): Deceleration time(Pr.8)
(c): Second deceleration time(Pr.44/Pr.45)
Setting
Set the output frequency for stop-on-contact control.

Set the frequency as low as possible (about 2 Hz). If
a frequency higher than 30 Hz is set, it operates with
30 Hz.
6 0 to 590 Hz
When performing stop-on-contact control during
encoder feedback control, encoder feedback control
is invalid due to a transition to the stop-on-contact
control mode.
Set the stall prevention operation level for stop-on-
22 0 to 400% contact control used under Advanced magnetic flux
vector control.
The smaller value set in either Pr.22 or Pr.48 has
48 0 to 400% priority. The torque limit level uses the Pr.22 setting
for Real sensorless vector control.
Normally set this parameter within the range of
130% to 180%.
0 to 300%
Set the force (holding torque) for stop-on-contact
275 control.
9999
No compensation.
(initial value)
This function outputs operation timing signals of the mechanical
brake from the inverter, such as for lift applications. Pr. Setting Description
range
This function is useful in preventing load slippage at a start due to
Set the rated slip frequency of the motor + approx.
poor mechanical brake timing and overcurrent alarm in stop status 278 0 to 30Hz 1.0 Hz.
and enable secure operation. This can be set only when Pr.278  Pr.282.
<Operation example> If the setting is too low, dropping of the load is more
• At start likely to occur at a start, and generally, it is set
279 0 to 400%
When the start signal is input to the inverter, the inverter starts running, between 50 and 90%.
and when the output frequency reaches the frequency set in Pr.278 and The inverter rated current is regarded as 100%.
the output current or the motor torque is equal to or greater than the 280 0 to 2 s Generally set between 0.1 and 0.3 s.
Pr.279 setting, the brake opening request signal (BOF) is output after the Pr.292 = 7: Set the mechanical delay time until
time set in Pr.280. The brake opening completion signal (BRI) is input, braking eases.
and the output frequency is increased to the set speed after the set time 281 0 to 5 s
Pr.292 = 8: Set the mechanical delay time until
in Pr.281. braking eases + approx. 0.1 to 0.2 s.
• Deceleration time Frequency that turns OFF the brake opening
When the inverter decelerates to the frequency set in Pr.282, the request signal (BOF) and operates the
inverter turns OFF the BOF signal and decelerates further to the 282 0 to 30Hz electromagnetic brake. Generally, set the setting
frequency set in Pr.278. After electromagnetic brake operation value of Pr.278 + 3 to 4 Hz.
completes and the inverter recognizes the turn OFF of the BRI This can be set only when Pr.282  Pr.278.
signal, the inverter holds the frequency set in Pr.283 for the time Pr.292 = 7: Set the mechanical delay time until the
set in Pr.283. And after the time set in Pr.283 passes, the inverter brake closes + 0.1 s.
283 0 to 5 s
decelerates again.  The inverter outputs is shut off when the Pr.292 = 8: Set the mechanical delay time until the
frequency reaches Pr.13 Starting frequency setting or 0.5 Hz, brake closes + approx. 0.2 to 0.3 s.
whichever is lower. 0
The deceleration detection function disabled.
 When Pr.292 = "8" (without mechanical brake opening (initial value)
completion signal input), the time starts when the brake opening 284 The protective function activates when the
completion signal is output. 1 deceleration speed of the deceleration operation is
not normal.
When Pr.292 = "7" (with brake opening completion signal input)
The brake sequence fault (E.MB1) activates when
Output frequency(Hz) the difference between the detection frequency and
0 to 30Hz
output frequency is equal to or greater than the
Target frequency
Pr.13 setting 285  setting value under encoder feedback control.
Pr.280 or 0.5Hz,
Pr.282 Pr.281 whichever is lower 9999
Pr.278 Overspeed detection disabled.
Pr.13 (initial value)
Pr.283
Time
0, 1, 3, 5 to 8, Setting this parameter to "7, 8" enables the brake
ON 292
STF
11 sequence function.
Output current or motor torque Pr.279
(select by Pr.639) 0
Brake opening by output current
Brake opening request ON 639 (initial value)
9
(BOF signal)
Brake opening completion ON 1 Brake opening by motor torque
(BRI signal)
0
Electromagnetic brake Closed Opened Closed Brake closing operation by frequency command
(initial value)
operation
640
Brake closing operation by the actual motor rotation
When Pr.292 = "8" (without brake opening completion signal input) 1
speed (estimated value)
Output frequency(Hz) 0
Normal operation when the RT signal is ON
Target frequency (initial value)
Pr.13 setting
Pr.280
or 0.5Hz, 641 7 Second brake sequence 1 when the RT signal is ON
Pr.282 Pr.281
Pr.278 whichever is lower 8 Second brake sequence 2 when the RT signal is ON
Pr.13
9999 First brake sequence 1 is valid when the RT signal is ON
Time
ON Pr.283
STF  The speed deviation excess detection frequency is used when
Output current or motor torque vector control is performed.
(select by Pr.639) Pr.279
Brake opening request ON
(BOF signal)
Electromagnetic brake Closed Opened Closed
operation
• Turning ON the RT signal enables the second brake sequence

function.
Setting
Avoiding motor overrunning Without droop control
0 during acceleration/
(initial value) deceleration
Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name (With 0 limit)
The Pr.84 setting is the
Speed deviation Constantly droop control
droop compensation
285 H416 excess detection 853 H417 Speed deviation time 1 during operation
reference.
frequency (With 0 limit)
873 H415 Speed limit Constantly droop control
2 during operation
• Speed deviation excess detection (Pr.285, Pr.853) (Without 0 limit)
When the difference (absolute value) between the speed command
Without droop control
value and actual rotation speed in speed control under vector control during acceleration/
10
is equal to or higher than the setting value in Pr.285 Speed deceleration
(With 0 limit) Motor speed is the droop
deviation excess detection frequency for a continuous time equal 288
compensation reference.
to or longer than the setting value in Pr.853 Speed deviation time, Constantly droop control
Speed deviation excess detection (E.OSD) activates to shut off the 11 during operation
(With 0 limit)
inverter output.
Without droop control
during acceleration/
Set frequency 20
Frequency
Pr.285 deceleration
(Hz)
Actual speed (With 0 limit)

The Pr.1121 setting is
Constantly droop control
Time the droop compensation
Pr.853 21 during operation
reference.
Fault output OFF ON (With 0 limit)
(ALM)
Speed deviation
Constantly droop control
excessive fault activated 22 during operation
(E. OSD) (Without 0 limit)
• Speed limit (Pr.873) 0.1 to 100%
Set the droop amount to be changed as % value of
This function prevents overrunning even when the setting value the rated motor frequency.
994
for the number of encoder pulses and the value of the actual 9999
No function
number of pulses are different. When the setting value for the (initial value)
number of encoder pulses is lower than the actual number of Set the torque when the droop amount is to be
995 0.1 to 100%
pulses, because the motor may increase speed, the output changed.
frequency is limited with the frequency of (set frequency +  Under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, the operation is the
Pr.873). same with setting the parameter to "0".
• Droop control
Droop control Droop control is enabled for Advanced magnetic flux vector
control, Real sensorless vector control, vector control, and PM
9
sensorless vector control when Pr.286 is not "0".
The upper limit of the droop compensation frequency is 120 Hz.
• Turning ON the RT signal enables the second droop control.
Frequency
Droop filter time Droop Droop compensation
286 G400 Droop gain 287 G401 compensation frequency
constant reference
Droop
Droop function
288 G402 679 G420 Second droop gain gain
activation selection
Second droop
Second droop filter
680 G421 681 G422 function activation
time constant
selection Torque
-100% 0 100%
Second droop break Second droop break
682 G423 683 G424
point gain point torque • Break point setting for droop control (Pr.994, Pr.995)
Droop break point Droop break point Set Pr.994 and Pr.995 to have a break point on a droop
994 G403 995 G404
gain torque
compensation frequency line. Setting a break point allows the
This is a function to give droop characteristics to the speed by inverter to raise the droop compensation frequency for light-load
balancing the load in proportion with the load torque. (no load) operation without raising it for heavy-load operation.
This is effective when balancing the load when using multiple Increased amount of the
Frequency
inverters. droop compensation
frequency
Droop Droop break point gain
compensation
Setting (Pr.994)
Pr. Description reference
range Droop gain
Droop compensation (Pr.286)
0
Droop control disabled frequency
(initial value) Droop break point torque
286 (Pr.995)
Set the droop amount at the rated torque as % value
0.1 to 100%
of the rated motor frequency. 0
Torque
-100% 100%
Set the filter time constant to apply to the current for
287 0 to 1 s
torque.
Pulse train input/output Password function
Pulse train I/O Input pulse division
291 D100 384 D101 Password lock/
selection scaling factor 296 E410 Password lock level 297 E411
unlock
Frequency for zero Frequency for
385 D110 386 D111 Registering a 4-digit password can restrict parameter reading/
input pulse maximum input pulse
A pulse train input to terminal JOG can be used to set the inverter's writing.
• Level of reading/writing restriction by PU/NET mode operation
speed command.
command can be selected by Pr.296.
The pulse train can be output from terminal FM by the open collector
output system. NET mode operation command
Speed synchronized operation of an inverter can be performed by PU mode operation
command RS-485 Communication
Pr.296 setting
using the pulse train input/output together with terminal JOG. terminals option
Read Write Read Write Read Write
Pr.291 setting Input (Terminal JOG) Output (Terminal FM)
9999
     
0 (initial value) JOG signal  FM output  (initial value)
1 Pulse train input FM output  0, 100      
10  JOG signal  1, 101      
Pulse train output (50% duty)
11  Pulse train input 2, 102      
20  JOG signal  Pulse train output (ON width 3, 103      
21  fixed) 4, 104      
Pulse train input Pulse train output (ON width 5, 105      
100 
fixed)  6, 106      
 Regardless of the Pr.54 setting, the signal input as a pulse train is Only the parameters registered in the user group can be
output as it is. 99, 199 read/written. (For the parameters not registered in the user
 The function is assigned in Pr.185 JOG terminal function group, the same restriction level as "4, 104" applies.)
selection.
 Only the FM type inverters support the pulse train output. : Enabled, : Disabled
• Changing the frequency at pulse train input (Pr.385, Pr.386)
Pr. 297
Limit value  Description
60Hz(50Hz) setting
Pr. 386 1000 to 9998 Register a 4-digit password.
frequency
Displays password unlock error count. (Reading only)

(0 to 5)
Output
(Valid when Pr.296 = "100 to 106")
9 (Hz)
Input pulse
9999
(initial value)
No password lock
0Hz
0 (pulse/s)  If the password is forgotten, it can be unlocked with all parameter
Maximum input pulse
Pr. 385 clear, but doing so will also clear the other parameters.
 Limit value = (Pr.386 - Pr.385) 1.1 + Pr.385  When Pr.297 = "0, 9999", writing is always enabled, but setting is
• How to calculate the input pulse division scaling factor (Pr.384) disabled. (The display cannot be changed.)
Maximum number of pulses (pulse/s) = Pr.384  400
(Allowable maximum number of pulses = 100k pulses/s)
• If Pr.419 Position command source selection = "2" (simple Pr. 298 Refer to the page on Pr.81.
pulse train position command) is set, terminal JOG is used for the Pr. 299
simple position pulse train input regardless of the Pr.291 Pulse Refer to the page on Pr.57.
train I/O selection setting. Pr. 331 to 337 Refer to the page on Pr.117.

Start command source and frequency Orientation control
command source during
communication operation
Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name Stop position
350 A510 351 A526 Orientation speed
command selection
Communication Communication
338 D010 operation command 339 D011 speed command Creep switchover
352 A527 Creep speed 353 A528
source source position
NET mode operation PU mode operation Position loop DC injection brake
354 A529 355 A530
550 D012 command source 551 D013 command source switchover position start position
selection selection Internal stop position Orientation in-
356 A531 357 A532
command position zone
The operation and speed commands from an external device can be Servo torque Encoder rotation
enabled during Network operation. The operation command source 358 A533 359 C141
selection direction
in the PU operation mode can also be selected. 360 A511 16-bit data selection 361 A512 Position shift
Orientation position Completion signal
362 A520 363 A521
Setting loop gain output delay time
Pr. Description
range Encoder stop check
364 A522 365 A523 Orientation limit
0 time
Start command source is communication.
338 (initial value) Number of encoder
366 A524 Recheck time 369 C140
1 Start command source is external. pulses
0 Number of machine
Frequency command source is communication. 393 A525 Orientation selection 394 A540
(initial value) side gear teeth
Number of motor Orientation speed
1 Frequency command source is external. 395 A541 396 A542
side gear teeth gain (P term)
339 Frequency command source is external. (When Orientation speed Orientation speed
there is no external input, the frequency 397 A543 398 A544
2 integral time gain (D term)
command via communication is valid, and the Orientation Number of machine
frequency command from terminal 2 is invalid.) 399 A545 829 A546
deceleration ratio end encoder pulses
The communication option is the command Control terminal Control terminal
0
source when in the NET operation mode. 851 C240 option-Number of 852 C241 option-Encoder
The RS-485 terminals are the command source encoder pulses rotation direction
1
when in the NET operation mode. Encoder option
862 C242
The Ethernet connector is the command source selection
5
550 when in the NET operation mode.
The inverter can adjust the stop position (Orientation control) using
Communication option is recognized
9999
automatically.
Normally, the RS-485 terminals are the
an encoder attached to a place such as the main shaft of the
machine. 9
(initial value) command source. When the communication An orientation control compatible option is required.
option is mounted, the communication option is • Internal stop position command
the command source. When "0" is set in Pr.350 Stop position command selection,
The RS-485 terminals are the command source the internal position command mode is activated.
1 when in the PU operation mode. In the internal position command mode, the setting value of
The PU connector is the command source when Pr.356 Internal stop position command is used as the stop
2
in the PU operation mode. position.
The USB connector is the command source • Internal stop position command
3 When Pr.350 Stop position command selection is set to "1"
when in the PU operation mode.
551
The Ethernet connector is the command source and the FR-A8AX is used, 16-bit data (binary input) is used to
5 give the stop position.
when in the PU operation mode.
USB automatic recognition.
• Operation timing chart
9999 Normally, the PU connector is the command Orientation speed (set with Pr.351)
(initial value) source. When the USB is connected, the USB Main spindle speed (encoder)
1)
Creep speed (set with Pr.352)
connector is the command source. Pr.351 2) 3) 4)

Pr.352
0 Time
 The setting is not used for the FR-A800-E. Start signal (STF, STR) ON OFF
 The setting is available for the FR-A800-E only. Orientation command (X22) OFF ON
OFF
 Ethernet connector for the FR-A800-E Creep switchover position

(set with Pr.353)
DC injection Position loop switchover
Current position signal brake start
position (set with Pr.354)
Pr. 340 Refer to the page on Pr.79. (set with Pr.355) Stop position command
Origin signal
Pr. 341 to 343 Refer to the page on Pr.117. DC injection brake OFF ON OFF
Orientation complete signal (ORA) OFF 5) ON OFF
• Using the FR-A8TP (motor end) together with the plug-in option
FR-A8AP/FR-A8AL/FR-A8APR (machine end) enables machine
end orientation control.
Setting Pr.862 = "1" enables machine end orientation.
When only the FR-A8AL is used, machine end orientation control
is enabled by setting the number of machine end encoder pulses
in Pr.829.
Encoder feedback control Signal loss detection of encoder signals
Encoder rotation Speed feedback Control terminal
359 C141 367 G240 Encoder signal loss
direction range option-Signal loss
376 C148 detection enable/ 855 C248
Number of encoder detection enable/
368 G241 Feedback gain 369 C140 disable selection
pulses disable selection
Speed setting Overspeed detection If encoder signals are disconnected during encoder feedback
144 M002 285 A107
control, orientation control or vector control, Signal loss detection
Control terminal Control terminal
851 C240 option-Number of 852 C241 option-Encoder
(E.ECT) is turned ON to shut off the inverter output.
encoder pulses rotation direction
By detecting the rotation speed of the motor with the encoder and
feeding it back to the inverter, output frequency of the inverter is Pr. 384 to 386 Refer to the page on Pr.291.
controlled to keep the speed of the motor constant even for the load Pr. 393 to 399 Refer to the page on Pr.350.
change.
A vector control compatible option is required.
• Using Pr.359 Encoder rotation direction and Pr.369 Number of PLC function
encoder pulses, set the rotation direction and the number of
pulses for the encoder.
• When a value other than "9999" is set in Pr.367 Speed feedback Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name
range, encoder feedback control is valid. PLC function Inverter operation
Using the set point (frequency at which stable speed operation is 414 A800 415 A801
operation selection lock mode setting
performed) as reference, set the higher and lower setting range. Pre-scale function Pre-scale setting
Normally, set the frequency converted from the slip amount (r/ 416 A802 417 A803
selection value
min) of the rated motor speed (rated load). If the setting is too 1150 A810 User parameters 1
large, response becomes slow. PLC function flash
498 A804 to to to
memory clear 1199 A859
Driven load
User parameters 50
Speed feedback range Regenerative load
The inverter can be run in accordance with a sequence program.
Set value In accordance with the machine specifications, a user can set
(Set command)
various operation patterns: inverter movements at signal inputs,
signal outputs at particular inverter statuses, and monitor outputs,
etc.
9 • Set Pr.368 Feedback gain when the rotation is unstable or
response is slow.
Pr.
Setting
range Description
Pr.368 setting Description 0
PLC function disabled

Response will become faster but it may cause (initial value)
Pr.368 > 1
overcurrent or become unstable. The SQ signal is enabled by input
414 1 from a command source (external
Response will become slower but it will become more PLC function
1 > Pr.368 input terminal / communication).
stable. enabled
The SQ signal is enabled by input
2
from an external input terminal.
0 The inverter start command is enabled regardless of the
Motor overspeeding detection 415
(initial value) operating status of the sequence program.
The inverter start command is enabled only while the
1
sequence program is running.
Pr. GROUP Name Unit scale factor When the pulse train is input from
0: No function terminal JOG, the number of sampled
Overspeed detection 1: x 1 pulses can be converted.
374 H800
level 416 0 to 5 2: x 0.1 The result of conversion is stored to
3: x 0.01 SD1236.
If the motor rotation speed exceeds the speed set in Pr.374 during
4: x 0.001
encoder feedback control, Real sensorless vector control, vector 5: x 0.0001 "Number of sampled pulses" = "input
control or PM sensorless vector control, Overspeed occurrence pulse value per count cycle" x "pre-
Pre-scale scale setting value (Pr.417)" x "unit
(E.OS) occurs, the inverter output is shut off. 417 0 to 3267
setting value scale factor (Pr.416)"
Motor speed 0: Clears the flash memory fault display (no
Pr.374
operation after writing while the flash memory is
Coast to stop
in normal operation).
9696: Clears the flash memory (no operation Write
Write after writing during flash memory fault).
Time
Other than 0 and 9696: Outside of the setting
ALM ON 498 0 to 9999 range
E.OS 0: Normal display
1: The flash memory has not been cleared
because the PLC function is enabled. Read
9696: During flash memory clearing operation
or flash memory fault
Desired values can be set.
Because devices D206 to D255 used by the PLC
1150 function can be mutually accessed, the values set to
to 0 to 65535 Pr.1150 to Pr.1199 can be used by the sequence
1199 program. The result of performing calculation by a
sequence program can also be monitored by Pr.1150 to
Pr.1199.
• Switch the execution key (RUN/STOP) of the sequence program
by turning the SQ signal ON/OFF. The sequence program can be
executed by turning the SQ signal ON. To input the SQ signal, set 1249 B147
Seventh positioning sub-
1250 B148
Eighth positioning
"50" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function function acceleration time
selection) to assign the function to a terminal. 1251 B149
Eighth positioning
1252 B150
Eighth positioning dwell
• To write to the sequence program, use FR Configurator2 on a deceleration time time
personal computer that is connected to the inverter via RS-485 Eighth positioning sub- Ninth positioning
1253 B151 1254 B152
communication. function acceleration time
• This function copies the PLC function project data to a USB Ninth positioning Ninth positioning dwell
1255 B153 1256 B154
memory device. deceleration time time
The PLC function project data copied in the USB memory device Ninth positioning sub- Tenth positioning
1257 B155 1258 B156
can be copied to other inverters. This function is useful in backing function acceleration time
up the parameter setting and for allowing multiple inverters to Tenth positioning Tenth positioning dwell
1259 B157 1260 B158
deceleration time time
operate by the same sequence programs.
Tenth positioning sub- Eleventh positioning
1261 B159 1262 B160
function acceleration time
Eleventh positioning Eleventh positioning dwell
Simple positioning function by 1263 B161
deceleration time
1264 B162
time
Eleventh positioning sub- Twelfth positioning
parameters 1265 B163
function
1266 B164
acceleration time
Twelfth positioning Twelfth positioning dwell
1267 B165 1268 B166
Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name Twelfth positioning sub- Thirteenth positioning
1269 B167 1270 B168
Position command source Digital position control sudden
419 B000 464 B020 Thirteenth positioning Thirteenth positioning
selection stop deceleration time 1271 B169 1272 B170
deceleration time dwell time
First target position lower First target position upper
465 B021 466 B022 Thirteenth positioning Fourteenth positioning
4 digits 4 digits 1273 B171 1274 B172
sub-function acceleration time
Second target position Second target position
467 B023 468 B024 Fourteenth positioning Fourteenth positioning
lower 4 digits upper 4 digits 1275 B173 1276 B174
deceleration time dwell time
Third target position lower Third target position upper
469 B025 470 B026 Fourteenth positioning Fifteenth positioning
4 digits 4 digits 1277 B175 1278 B176
sub-function acceleration time
Fourth target position Fourth target position
471 B027 472 B028 Fifteenth positioning Fifteenth positioning dwell
Fifth target position lower Fifth target position upper
473 B029 474 B030 Fifteenth positioning sub- Home position return
4 digits 4 digits 1281 B179 1282 B180
function method selection
Sixth target position lower Sixth target position upper
475 B031 476 B032 Home position return Home position return
4 digits 4 digits 1283 B181 1284 B182
speed creep speed
Seventh target position Seventh target position
477 B033 478 B034 Home position shift Home position shift
amount lower 4 digits amount upper 4 digits
Eighth target position Eighth target position
479 B035
lower 4 digits
Ninth target position lower
480 B036
upper 4 digits
Ninth target position upper
1287 B185
Travel distance after proximity
dog ON lower 4 digits
1288 B186
Travel distance after proximity
dog ON upper 4 digits
9
481 B037 482 B038 Home position return stopper Home position return stopper
4 digits 4 digits 1289 B187 1290 B188
torque waiting time
Tenth target position lower Tenth target position
483 B039 484 B040 Position control terminal input
4 digits upper 4 digits 1292 B190 1293 B191 Roll feeding mode selection
selection
Eleventh target position Eleventh target position
485 B041 486 B042 Set positioning parameters such as the number of pulses (position)
lower 4 digits upper 4 digits
Twelfth target position Twelfth target position and acceleration/deceleration time in advance to create a point table
487 B043 488 B044
lower 4 digits upper 4 digits (point table method). Positioning operation is performed by selecting
Thirteenth target position Thirteenth target position the point table.
489 B045 490 B046
• Positioning operation by point tables, example 1 (automatic
Fourteenth target position Fourteenth target position
491 B047 492 B048 continuous positioning operation)
The figure below shows an operation example when the following
Fifteenth target position Fifteenth target position
493 B049
lower 4 digits
494 B050
upper 4 digits
settings are made for point tables.
Start command edge First positioning TargetMaximum Acceleration Deceleration Dwell
1221 B101 1222 B120 Point Auxiliary
detection selection acceleration time positionspeed time time time
table function
1223 B121
First positioning
1224 B122
First positioning dwell Upper Lower (Hz) (s) (s) (ms)
1
First positioning sub- Second positioning (absolute
1225 B123 1226 B124 1 100 0 60 5 5 1000
function acceleration time position,
Second positioning Second positioning dwell continuous)
1227 B125 1228 B126
10
Second positioning sub- Third positioning (increment
1229 B127 1230 B128 2 50 0 30 6 6 0
function acceleration time al position,
Third positioning Third positioning dwell individual)
1231 B129 1232 B130
Third positioning sub- Fourth positioning
1233 B131 1234 B132 Point table 1 Point table 2
function acceleration time Position command
speed
Fourth positioning Fourth positioning dwell 60Hz(Pr.4)
1235 B133 1236 B134
deceleration time time 30Hz(Pr.5)
5s 5s
Fourth positioning sub- Fifth positioning
1237 B135 1238 B136 (Pr.1222) (Pr.1223) 6s 6s
function acceleration time 0 (Pr.1226) (Pr.1227) Time
Fifth positioning Fifth positioning dwell
1239 B137 1240 B138 Dwell time (Pr.1224)
Target position 1000000 500000
Fifth positioning sub- Sixth positioning
1241 B139 1242 B140
function acceleration time Servo ON
(LX) ON
Sixth positioning Sixth positioning dwell
1243 B141 1244 B142 STF ON
RH
Sixth positioning sub- Seventh positioning ON
1245 B143 1246 B144
Seventh positioning Seventh positioning dwell
1247 B145 1248 B146
• Selecting the home position return method (Pr.1282 to Pr.1288)
Pr.1282 Home position Description
Position control by pulse train input
Setting return method
Deceleration starts when the proximity dog
signal is turned ON. For the home position after
Dog type  turn OFF of the proximity dog signal, the
0 position specified by the first Z-phase signal or Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name
the position of the first Z-phase signal shifted by
the home position shift amount (Pr.1285, Position command Command pulse
419 B000 428 B009
Pr.1286) is used. source selection selection
Pulse monitor
Deceleration starts when the proximity dog 429 B010 Clear signal selection 430 B011
selection
signal is turned ON. After the proximity dog, the
motor travels the specified travel distance Cumulative pulse
Count type  Cumulative pulse
1 (Pr.1287, Pr.1288). Then, it uses the position 635 M610 636 M611 division scaling
clear signal selection
specified by the the first Z-phase signal or factor
position of the Z-phase signal shifted by the Control terminal
home position shift amount (Pr.1285, Pr.1286). option-Cumulative Cumulative pulse
637 M612 638 M613
pulse division storage
Data set type scaling factor
The position at which the start signal is input is
2
used as the home position.
Setting
Pr. Description
range
A workpiece is pressed to a mechanical 0 (initial Simple position control by point tables (position
stopper, and the position where it is stopped is value) command by setting parameters).
set as the home position. 1 Position control by the pulse train input to the FR-A8AL
Pressing is confirmed when the estimated
speed value has fallen blow Pr.865 Low speed 2 Simple pulse train command by inverter pulse input.
detection for 0.5 s during activation of the Simple position control by point tables (position
Stopper type torque limit operation. (While the stopper-type 10 command by setting parameters) (The home position
home position is performed, Pr.1289 Home information is retained at servo-OFF.)
3 position return stopper torque is applied.) Simple position control by point tables (position
After Pr.1290 Home position return stopper 419 command by setting parameters).
waiting time has passed after pressing is 100
The monitor value of the current position 2 is cleared
confirmed, the home position is shifted by the when the home position return is completed.
home position shift amount (Pr.1285 and
Pr.1286). After a position command is created Simple position control by point tables (position
and the absolute value of the droop pulse (after command by setting parameters).
electronic gear) falls below the in-position 110 The home position data is retained at servo-OFF. The
width, the home position return is completed. monitor value of the current position 2 is cleared when
the home position return is completed.
Ignoring the
home position 1110 For manufacturer setting.
9 4
(Servo ON
position as the
The serve ON position is used as the home
• Select the command pulse train with Pr.428.
• If the Pre-excitation/servo ON (LX) signal is turned ON, output
(initial home position)
value) position.
shutoff is canceled and the Position control preparation ready
(RDY) signal is turned ON after 0.1 s. Turning ON STF (forward

rotation stroke end signal) or STR (reverse rotation stroke end
signal) rotates the motor according to the command pulse. If the
Deceleration starts at the front end of the forward (reverse) rotation stroke end signal is turned OFF, the
proximity dog. After the back end is passed, the motor does not rotate in the corresponding direction.
Dog type back
position is shifted by the post-dog travel
end reference
distance and home position shift amount. The
5 position after the shifts is set as the home Forward rotation
position. Actual rotation

Reverse rotation
Set pulses required for deceleration from the
creep speed or more as the total of the postdog Base signal
travel distance and home position shift amount. Servo on (LX)
Forward stroke end (STF)
Deceleration starts at the front end of the Reverse stroke end (STR)
proximity dog, and the position is shifted by the
Count type front Operation ready completion (RDY)
postdog travel distance and home position shift 0.1s
end reference Inverter pulse train command
distance. The position after the shifts is set as
Sign signal (NP)
6 the home position.
In-position (Y36)
Set pulses required for changing the speed
from the home position speed to the creep
speed or more as the total of the post-dog
travel distance and home position shift amount.
 If it is set under PM sensorless vector control, Home position
return parameter setting error (HP3) occurs.
Electronic gear setting under position Position adjustment parameter
control
Command pulse Command pulse 426 B007 In-position width 427 B008 Excessive level error
scaling factor multiplication Position detection Position detection
420 B001 421 B002 1294 B192 1295 B193
numerator (electronic denominator (electronic lower 4 digits upper 4 digits
gear numerator) gear denominator) Position detection Position detection
Position command 1296 B194 1297 B195
selection hysteresis width
acceleration/
424 B005 • If the number of droop pulses is equal to or smaller than the
deceleration time
constant Pr.426 setting value, the In-position (Y36) signal turns ON.
• If the number of droop pulses exceeds the Pr.427 setting, a
Set the gear ratio between the machine gear and motor gear. position error is detected, Excessive position fault (E.OD) is
activated and the inverter output is shut off.
Pr. Setting range Description • If the current position (before the electronic gear) exceeds the
420 Set the electronic gear. detected position (Pr.1294 + Pr.1295), the Position detected
0 to 32767 Pr.420 is the numerator and Pr.421 is the signal (FP) turns ON.
421 denominator. • Use Pr.1296 Position detection selection to determine whether
Use it when the rotation is not smooth because to detect a position in the positive position range or in the
424 0 to 50 s the electronic gear ratio is large (10 times or negative position range.
larger) and the rotation speed is slow.
Position control gain adjustment Pr. 450 Refer to the page on Pr.71.
Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name Pr. 455 to 463 Refer to the page on Pr.82.
Position feed forward
422 B003 Position control gain 423 B004
gain
425
Position feed forward
B006 446 B012
Model position Remote output function
command filter control gain
Second position
1298 B013
control gain
• Adjust Pr.422 when any of such phenomena as unusual vibration,
Pr. GROUP
Remote output
Name Pr. GROUP Name
9
495 M500 496 M501 Remote output data 1
noise and overcurrent of the motor/machine occurs. selection
Increasing the setting improves traceability for the position 497 M502 Remote output data 2
command and also improves servo rigidity at a stop, but The inverter output signals can be turned ON/OFF instead of the
oppositely makes an overshoot and vibration more liable to occur.
remote output terminals of a programmable controller.
• The function of Pr.423 is to cancel a delay caused by the droop
pulses in the deviation counter. Setting
• The first delay filter for the feed forward command can be input in
Pr.425. Remote output data is
0
• Use Pr.446 to set the gain for the model position controller. (initial value)
cleared when the power
supply is turned OFF. Remote output data
• Turning ON the RT signal enables the second position loop gain.
is cleared during an
Remote output data is inverter reset.
1 retained when the power
supply is turned OFF.
495
Remote output data is
10 cleared when the power
supply is turned OFF. Remote output data
is retained during
Remote output data is an inverter reset.
11 retained when the power
supply is turned OFF.
Refer to the diagram below.
496 0 to 4095 (Even if Pr.77 Parameter write selection is set to
"0 (initial value)", the setting value can be
497 0 to 4095 changed regardless whether the inverter is
running or not or of the operation mode.)
<Remote output data>

Pr.496
b11 b0
ABC2
ABC1
RUN
IPF
SU
FU
OL
∗1
∗1
∗1
∗1
∗1
Pr.497
b11 b0
RA3 ∗3
RA2 ∗3
RA1 ∗3
Y6 ∗2
Y5 ∗2
Y4 ∗2
Y3 ∗2
Y2 ∗2
Y1 ∗2
Y0 ∗2
∗1
∗1
 Any value.
 Y0 to Y6 are available when the extension output option (FR-
A8AY) is installed.
 RA1 to RA3 are available hen the relay output option (FR-A8AR)
is installed.
Maintenance timer warning USB device communication
Maintenance timer 1 USB communication USB communication
503 E710 Maintenance timer 1 504 E711 547 N040 548 N041
warning output set time station number check time interval
Maintenance timer 2 Setup of the inverter can be easily performed with FR Configurator2
686 E712 Maintenance timer 2 687 E713
warning output set time
through the USB communication.
Maintenance timer 3
688 E714 Maintenance timer 3 689 E715
warning output set time
The maintenance timer output signal (Y95) is output when the 547 0 to 31 Inverter station number specification
inverter's cumulative energization time reaches the time period set
USB communication is possible, however the
with the parameter. MT1, MT2 or MT3 is displayed on the operation 0 inverter will trip (E.USB) when the mode
panel (FR-DU08). changes to the PU operation mode.
This can be used as a guideline for the maintenance time of Set the communication check time interval.
peripheral devices. 548
0.1 to 999.8
If a no-communication state persists for
longer than the permissible time, the inverter
First power ON will trip (E.USB).
9998 9999
No communication check
(999800h) Set "0" in Pr.503 (initial value)
Maintenance
timer1 Pr.504
(Pr. 503)
Time
Y95 signal OFF ON ON
MT1 display Pr. 552 Refer to the page on Pr.31.
Operation example of the maintenance timer 1 (Pr.503, Pr.504) (with both MT2 and MT3 OFF)
• The cumulative energization time of the inverter is stored in the
EEPROM every hour and displayed in Pr.503 (Pr.686, Pr.688) in
100 h increments. Pr.503 (Pr.686, Pr.688) is clamped at 9998
(999800 h).
Current average value monitor signal
Pr. 516 to 519 Refer to the page on Pr.29. Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name
9 555 E720 Current average time 556 E721

Data output mask
time
Output stop function Current average
value monitor signal

557 E722
output reference
current
Pr. GROUP Name
The output current average value during constant-speed operation
Output stop
522 G105 and the maintenance timer value are output to the current average
frequency
value monitor signal (Y93) as a pulse.
The motor coasts to a stop (inverter output shutoff) when inverter The output pulse width can be used in a device such as the I/O
output frequency falls to Pr. 522 setting or lower. module of a programmable controller as a guideline for the
maintenance time for mechanical wear, belt stretching, or
Pr.522
Description deterioration of devices with age.
setting
0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency to start coasting to a stop (output shutoff). The pulse is repeatedly output during constant-speed operation in
9999
cycles of 20 s to the Current average monitor signal (Y93).
No function
(initial value) From acceleration to constant speed operation
• When both of the frequency setting signal and output frequency Output
frequency
falls to the frequency set in Pr.522 or lower, the inverter stops the
output and the motor coasts to a stop. Time
1 cycle (20s) Next cycle
Example of when target frequency>Pr.522+2Hz, and start signal is ON/OFF
Y93 signal
Data output mask time End pulse
Output frequency *1 When the speed has changed to constant output as low pulse
from acceleration/deceleration, Y93 signal is shape for 1 to 16.5s
not output for Pr. 556 time.
Maintenance timer pulse
Start pulse The maintenance timer value (Pr. 503) is output
Target frequency Output as Hi pulse shape for 1s (fixed) as Hi output pulse shape for 2 to 9s (16000h to
(fixed) The output currents are averaged during the time 72000h).
period set in Pr.555. Pr. 503 100h
Signal output time= 5s
40000h
Pr.522+2Hz Output current average value pulse
The averaged current value is output as low pulse shape for
Pr.522 0.5 to 9s (10 to 180%) during start pulse output.
output current average value (A)
Signal output time= 5s
Pr. 557 (A)
Pr.13
Time
Inverter output shutoff
STF
RUN Pr. 560 Refer to the page on Pr.9.

 The output frequency before the slip compensation is compared
with the Pr.522 setting.
• At a stop condition, the motor starts running when the frequency
setting signal exceeds Pr.522 +2Hz. The motor is accelerated at Pr. 569 Refer to the page on Pr.80.
the Pr.13 Starting frequency (0.01Hz under IPM motor control)
at the start.
Multiple rating setting Traverse function

Multiple rating Traverse function Maximum amplitude
570 E301 592 A300 593 A301
setting selection amount
Four rating types of different rated current and permissible load can Amplitude compensation Amplitude compensation
594 A302 595 A303
amount during deceleration amount during acceleration
be selected. The optimal inverter rating can be chosen in
Amplitude Amplitude
accordance with the application, enabling equipment size to be 596 A304 597 A305
acceleration time deceleration time
reduced.
The traverse operation, which oscillates the frequency at a constant
Pr.570 cycle, is available.
Description
setting
SLD rating Setting
Pr. Description
range
0  110% 60 s, 120% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics)
Surrounding air temperature of 40C 0 Traverse function invalid
LD rating Traverse function valid only in External operation
592 1
1 120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) mode
Surrounding air temperature of 50C 2 Traverse function valid regardless of the operation mode
ND rating 593 0 to 25% Level of amplitude during traverse operation
2
(initial value) 150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) Compensation amount during amplitude inversion
Surrounding air temperature of 50C 594 0 to 50%
(from acceleration to deceleration)
HD rating
3  200% 60 s, 250% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) Compensation amount during amplitude inversion
595 0 to 50%
Surrounding air temperature of 50C (from deceleration to acceleration)
596 0.1 to 3600 s Time period of acceleration during traverse operation
 Not compatible with the IP55 compatible model.
597 0.1 to 3600 s Time period of deceleration during traverse operation
Output frequency(Hz) Traverse operation

Pr. 571 Refer to the page on Pr.13. f0: set frequency
f2 f1: amplitude amount from the set frequency
f1 Pr.7 (f0 × Pr.593/100)
f2: compensation amount at transition from
f0
acceleration to deceleration
f1 (f1 × Pr.594/100)
f3 f3: compensation amount at transition from
Checking of current input on analog

Pr.8
deceleration to acceleration
(f1 × Pr.595/100)
Pr.7 t2 t1 t1: time from acceleration during traverse
input terminal
(Pr.597) (Pr.596) operation (Time from (f0 − f1) to (f0 + f1))
Time(s) (Pr.596)
STF(STR) t2: time from deceleration during traverse
ON
signal operation (Time from (f0 + f1) to (f0 − f1))
X37 signal ON (Pr.597)
Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name 9

A680 4 mA input check A681 4 mA input check
573 777
Varying the activation level of the
T052 selection T053 operation frequency
A682 4 mA input check
778
T054 filter undervoltage protective function
When current is input to the analog input terminal 2 and terminal 4,
operation when the current input has gone below the specified level Pr. GROUP Name
(loss of analog current input) can be selected. It is possible to 598 H102 Undervoltage level
continue the operation even when the analog current input is lost.
If the undervoltage protection (E.UVT) is activated due to unstable
Pr. Setting range Description voltage in the power supply, the undervoltage level (DC bus voltage
Continues the operation with output frequency value) can be changed.
1
before the current input loss.
When the current input loss is detected, 4 mA
2
input fault (E.LCI) is activated. 175 to 215 VDC 
Set the DC voltage value at which E.UVT occurs.
Decelerates to stop when the current input 350 to 430 VDC 
547
3 loss is detected. After it is stopped, 4 mA input
9999 E.UVT occurs at 215 VDC (200 V class) / 430
fault (E.LCI) is activated. (initial value) VDC (400 V class).
4 Continues operation with the Pr.777 setting.
 For the 200 V class
9999  For the 400 V class
No current input check
(initial value)
Set the running frequency for current input Pr. 599 Refer to the page on Pr.30.
0 to 590 Hz
loss. (Valid when Pr.573 = "4")
548 Pr. 600 to 604 Refer to the page on Pr.9.
9999
No current input check when Pr.573 = "4"
(initial value) Pr. 609, 610 Refer to the page on Pr.127.
778 0 to 10 s Set the current input loss detection time.
Pr. 639 to 648, 650, 651 Refer to the page on Pr.278.
Parallel operation communication check Analog remote output function
time (FR-A842-P)
Pr. GROUP Name Analog remote Analog remote

655 M530 656 M531
output selection output 1
Parallel operation Analog remote Analog remote
652 N092 communication 657 M532 658 M533
output 2 output 3
check time
Analog remote
659 M534
If the communication between the master and the slave is lost for a output 4
certain period, the inverter assumes it is in disconnection state and An analog value can be output from the analog output terminal.
activates the protective function (E.SER) to shut off the output.
Pr. 655
Pr. 652 setting Description Description
setting
0 Parallel operation communication disabled Remote output data is cleared
0
Set the interval of the communication check (signal (initial value)
when the power supply is turned
loss detection) time. OFF. Remote output data is
0.1 to 120 s cleared during an
If a no-communication state persists for the Remote output data is retained
permissible time or longer, the inverter will trip. inverter reset.
1 when the power supply is turned
9999 No communication check (signal loss detection) OFF.
Remote output data is cleared
OFF. Remote output data is
retained during an
Speed smoothing control Remote output data is retained inverter reset.
OFF.
Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name Terminals FM/CA, AM and the analog output terminal of the option
Speed smoothing Speed smoothing FR-A8AY can output the values set in Pr.656 to Pr.659 (Analog
653 G410 654 G411
control cutoff frequency remote output).
The vibration (resonance) of the machine during motor operation When Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selection = "87, 88, 89, or
can be suppressed. 90" (remote output), the FM type inverter can output a pulse train
• Set Pr.653 to 100%, and check if the vibration is suppressed. If from terminal FM.
the vibration is not suppressed, raise the setting value of Pr.653 Pulse speed Pulse speed
gradually to minimize the vibration. [pulse/s]
2400
[pulse/s]
• When the vibrational frequency due to the mechanical resonance

(fluctuation of torque, speed, and converter output voltage) is 1440
55K
50K
9 known using a tester and such, set 1/2 to 1 times of the

vibrational frequency to Pr.654. (Setting vibrational frequency
0 0
range can suppress the vibration better.) 800 1000 1100 1200 800 1000 1100 1200
Analog remote output value [%] Analog remote output value [%]
Terminal FM (FM output) Terminal FM (High-speed pulse train output)
Cutoff frequency
Current for
torque
When Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selection = "87, 88, 89, or
90" (remote output), the CA type inverter can output any analog
Torque fluctuation
detection range current from terminal CA.
0 Output current [mA]
Pr.654 159Hz (fixed) Vibrational frequency
20
0
800 1000 1100 1200
Analog remote output value [%]
Terminal CA
When Pr.158 AM terminal function selection = "87, 88, 89, or 90",

an analog voltage can be output from terminal AM.
Output voltage [V]
10
800 900 0
1000 1100 1200
Analog remote output value [%]
-10
Terminal AM
Increased magnetic excitation deceleration SF-PR slip amount adjustment mode
Increased magnetic SF-PR slip amount
Magnetic excitation SF-PR slip amount
660 G130 excitation deceleration 661 G131 673 G060 adjustment operation 674 G061
increase rate adjustment gain
operation selection selection
Increased magnetic
662 G132
excitation current level As compared to our conventional SF-JR motor, the slip amount is
small for the high-performance energy-saving SF-PR motor. When
Increase the loss in the motor by increasing the magnetic flux at the
replacing the SF-JR to the SF-PR, the slip amount is reduced and
time of deceleration. Deceleration time can be reduced by
the rotations per minute increases. Therefore, when the SF-PR is
suppressing the stall prevention (overvoltage) (oL).
used with the same frequency setting as that of the SF-JR, power
It will make possible to reduce the deceleration time without a brake
consumption may increase as compared to the SF-JR.
resistor. (Usage can be reduced if a brake resistor is used.)
By setting the slip amount adjustment mode, the frequency
Setting
command can be adjusted to keep the rotations per minute of the
Pr. range Description SF-PR equivalent to those of the SF-JR for power consumption
0 Without increased magnetic excitation reduction. (This function is not available on the FR-A842-P.)
660 (initial value) deceleration
1 With increased magnetic excitation deceleration Pr. Setting range Description
0 to 40% Set the increase of magnetic excitation. 2, 4, 6 Set the number of SF-PR motor poles.
673 9999
Magnetic excitation increase rate 10% under V/F Slip amount adjustment mode invalid
661 control and Advanced magnetic flux vector control (initial value)
9999
(initial value) Magnetic excitation increase rate 0% under Real Setting is available for fine adjustment of the slip
sensorless vector control and vector control amount.
674 0 to 500% To reduce the rotations per minute, set a larger
The increased magnetic excitation rate is value. To increase the rotations per minute, set a
automatically lowered when the output current smaller value.
662 0 to 300%
exceeds the setting value at the time of increased
magnetic excitation deceleration.
• Setting of increased magnetic excitation rate (Pr.660, Pr.661)
When the DC bus voltage exceeds the increased magnetic excitation Pr. 684 Refer to the page on Pr.82.
deceleration operation level during the deceleration, excitation is
increased in accordance with the setting value in Pr.661. Pr. 686 to 689 Refer to the page on Pr.503.
Inverter
deceleration operation level 9
200 V class 340 V Deceleration check
400 V class 680 V
With 500 V input 740 V
Pr. GROUP Name
690 H881 Deceleration check time
Surrounding air temperature change When performing a deceleration stop on the motor, accidental
monitoring acceleration can cause the inverter to trip.
This can prevent a malfunction due to an incorrect encoder pulse
setting, when the motor has stopped.
Pr. GROUP Name
Control circuit Pr. 690
Description
663 M060 temperature signal setting
output level Set the time required to shut off output due to
0 to 3600 s
Turn ON/OFF the control circuit temperature signal (Y207) deceleration check after the start signal is OFF.
according to the result of comparison between the Pr.663 setting 9999 No deceleration check
and the monitored value of the control circuit temperature.
Motor speed
Motor coasting
Pr.690
Time
Start signal
(STF, STR) ON
Fault output
(ALM) ON
E.OSD

Pr. 702, 706, 707, 711, 712, 717, 721, 724, 725, 738 to 746
PID pre-charge function Low-speed range torque characteristics
selection
Pre-charge fault Pre-charge ending
760 A616 761 A617 Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name
selection level
Pre-charge ending Pre-charge upper Second motor low-
762 A618 763 A619 Low speed range
time detection level speed range torque
788 G250 torque characteristic 747 G350
Second pre-charge characteristic
764 A620 Pre-charge time limit 765 A656 selection
fault selection selection
Second pre-charge Second pre-charge The torque characteristics in a low-speed range under PM
766 A657 767 A658
ending level ending time
sensorless vector control can be changed. (This function is not
Second pre-charge Second pre-charge
768 A659
upper detection level
769 A660
time limit
available on the FR-A842-P.)
This function is to drive the motor at a certain speed before starting Pr. Setting range Description
PID control. This function is useful for a pump with a long hose. Disables the low-speed range torque characteristic
0
Without this function, PID control would start before the pump is (current synchronization operation).
788
filled with water, and proper control would not be performed. 9999 Enables the low-speed range torque characteristic
(initial value)  (high frequency superposition control)
Pr. Setting range Description Disables the low-speed range torque characteristic
Fault indication with output shutoff immediately 0 (current synchronization operation) while the RT
0 (initial value) signal is ON.
after a pre-charge fault occurs.
760 747
Enables the low-speed range torque characteristic
Fault indication with deceleration stop after a 9999
1 (high frequency superposition control) while the RT
pre-charge fault occurs. (initial value) 
signal is ON.
Set the measurement level to end the pre-  The low-speed range high-torque characteristic (current
0 to 100%
charge operation. synchronization operation) is disabled for PM motors other than
761 MM-CF, even if "9999" is set.
9999 (initial value) Without pre-charge ending level
• Use Pr.747 to switch the torque characteristic according to the
0 to 3600 s Set the time to end the pre-charge operation. application or to switch among motors connected to one inverter.
762
9999 (initial value) Without pre-charge ending time
Set the upper limit for the pre-charged amount.
0 to 100% A pre-charge fault occurs when the measured
763 value exceeds the setting during pre-charging.
9999 (initial value) Without pre-charge upper limit level
Pulse train output of output power (Y79
9
Set the time limit for the pre-charge operation.
764
0 to 3600 s A pre-charge fault occurs when the pre-charge
time exceeds the setting.
signal)
9999 (initial value) Without pre-charge time limit
Pr. GROUP Name

• Example of pre-charge operation
When the measured amount reaches the pre-charge ending level Pulse increment
799 M520 setting for output
(Pr.761 Pre-charge ending level  "9999")The pre-charge
power
operation ends when the measured value reaches the Pr.761
setting or higher, then the PID control is performed. After power ON or inverter reset, output signal (Y79 signal) is output
in pulses every time accumulated output power, which is counted
Measured value[PSI]
Pr.761
after the Pr.799 Pulse increment setting for output power is set,
Ending level reaches the specified value (or its integral multiples).
Time Pr. 799 setting Description

Output frequency[Hz]
PID control 0.1 kWh,
1 kWh (initial value), Pulse train output of output power (Y79) is output in
Pr.127
10 kWh, 100 kWh, pulses at every output power (kWh) that is specified.
1000 kWh
Time
• The inverter continues to count the output power at retry function or
0Hz
STF
when automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function
Y49
works without power OFF of output power (power failure that is too
short to cause an inverter reset), and it does not reset the count.
• Turning ON the RT signal enables the second pre-charge • If power failure occurs, output power is counted from 0 kWh again.
function. • Assign pulse output of output power (Y79: setting value 79
(positive logic), 179 (negative logic)) to any of Pr.190 to Pr.196
Pr. 774 to 776 Refer to the page on Pr.52. (Output terminal function selection).
Pr. 779 Output power
20kWh
10kWh
ON
Pulse output of output power OFF Time
(Y79)
ON for 0.15s
When Pr.799 = 10

Torque command source selection Speed limit under torque control
Constant output range torque Forward rotation
801 H704 Output limit level 803 G210
characteristic selection 807 H410 Speed limit selection 808 H411 speed limit/speed
Torque command Torque command limit
804 D400 805 D401
source selection value (RAM) Reverse rotation
Speed limit method
Torque command value Torque command 809 H412 speed limit/reverse- 1113 H414
806 D402 1114 D403 selection
(RAM, EEPROM) reverse selection side speed limit
Pulse train torque Pulse train torque When the inverter is operating under torque control, motor
432 D120 433 D121
command bias command gain
overspeeding may occur if the load torque drops to a value less than
For torque control, the torque command source can be selected. the torque command value. Set the speed limit value to prevent such
Pr. Setting range Description overspeeding.
0 to 400% Set the torque current limit level.
• The speed limit control method can be selected using Pr.1113.
801 9999 The torque limit setting value is used for limiting the Pr.807 Speed limit
(initial value) torque current level. Speed limit
setting control system
0 (initial value), Constant motor output Forward rotation speed limit
10 command In the torque Pr.807 = "0": Speed command under
command setting, speed control
1, 11 Constant torque command select torque
803 Pr.807 = "1": Pr.808 setting value
The torque is constant unless command for the
constant output Pr.807 = "2": Analog input at 0 to 10 V
the output limit of the torque
2 area. input (to terminal 1).
current is reached. (The
torque current is limited.) Pr.1 setting value at -10 to 0 V input (to
terminal 1).
0 (initial value) Torque command based on the analog input to terminal 1 Mode 1 (speed
Torque command by the parameters 9999 control by analog Reverse rotation speed limit
1
Setting value of Pr.805 or Pr.806 (-400% to 400%) input) Pr.807 = "0": Speed command under
2 Torque command by the pulse train input (FR-A8AL) speed control
Pr.807 = "1": Pr.809 setting value. If
Torque command via CC-Link communication (FR- Pr.809 = "9999", the Pr.808 setting
A8NC/FR-A8NCE/FR-A800-GF)
804 3 value applies.
Torque command via PROFIBUS-DP
communication (FR-A8NP) Pr.807 = "2": Analog input at 0 to 10 V
input (to terminal 1).
4 Digital input from the option (FR-A8AX) Analog input at -10 to 0 V input (to
5 Torque command via CC-Link communication (FR- terminal 1).
6
A8NC/FR-A8NCE/FR-A800-GF)
Torque command via PROFIBUS-DP
communication (FR-A8NP)
0 Mode 2 (normal
(initial value) setting)
9
Speed limit
Mode 3 (winding/
Torque command values can be set by setting Pr.807 = "0, 2": Speed command
805 600 to 1400% unwinding by a
Pr.805 (RAM) and Pr.806 (RAM, EEPROM). 1 under speed control
positive torque
(Communication options can also be used for the Pr.807 = "1": Pr.808 setting value
setting.) command)
806 600 to 1400% In this case, set an appropriate value for the speed Mode 4 (winding/ Inverted side speed limit
limit value to prevent overspeed. unwinding by a Pr.809 setting value
2
negative torque
• Torque command based on the analog input to terminal 1 command)
The following figure shows the torque command based on the X93 signal OFF: Speed limit by the
analog input to terminal 1 according to C16, C17 (Pr.919), C18, Switchover by speed limit mode 3
and C19 (Pr.920). 10
external terminals X93 signal ON: Speed limit by the
speed limit mode 4
Torque command value
C16
(Pr.920)
C18
(Pr.919) Pr. 811 Refer to the page on Pr.37.
Terminal 1
analog input
C19 C17
(Pr.919) (Pr.920)
• Torque command by the parameters

The following diagram shows relation between the Pr.805 or
Pr.806 setting and the actual torque command value. The torque
command is shown by offset from 1000% that is regarded as 0%.
400%
Pr.805, Pr.806
600% settings
1000% 1400%

-400% =Pr.805(or Pr.806)-1000%
• The Pr.1114 setting determines whether or not the torque

command polarity is reversed when the reverse rotation
command (STR) is turned ON.
Pr.1114 setting Torque command polarity (sign) when the STR signal is ON
0 Not reversed
1 (initial value) Reversed
Easy gain tuning selection Speed detection filter function
Easy gain tuning Easy gain tuning 823 G215 Speed detection filter 1 833 G315 Speed detection filter 2
818 C112 819 C113
response level setting selection
Set the time constant of primary delay filter for speed feedback
The load inertia ratio (load moment of inertia) for the motor is signal.
calculated in real time from the torque command and rotation speed Speed loop response is reduced. Under ordinary circumstances,
during motor driving by the vector control. Gains for each control therefore, use the initial value as it is.
(Pr.422, Pr.820, Pr.821, and Pr.828) are set automatically from this If there is speed ripple due to high frequency disturbance, set a time
load inertia ratio and the setting value for the response level (Pr.818). constant.
Under Real sensorless vector control or PM sensorless vector Speed is oppositely destabilized if the setting value is too large.
control, enter the load inertia ratio manually.
The work required for gain adjustment is reduced.
• Set the response level in Pr.818 to calculate each gain from the
load inertia ratio.
Proportional gain setting for current
• The Pr.819 setting enables/disables the easy gain tuning. loop
1: Slow response
818 1 to 15 
15: Fast response Torque control P gain 1
0 (initial value) No easy gain tuning 824 G213 (current loop 834 G313 Torque control P gain 2
proportional gain)
Gain is calculated with load calculation.
819 1
(This function is valid under vector control.) Set the proportional gain under torque control.
2 Gain is calculated with load (Pr.880) manual input. If the setting value is large, changes in the current command can be
followed well and current fluctuation relative to external disturbance
is smaller. If the setting value is however too large, it becomes
unstable and high frequency torque pulse is produced.
Proportional gain setting for speed loop The setting range of Pr.824 Torque control P gain 1 (current loop
proportional gain) and Pr.834 Torque control P gain 2 is 0 to
500%. The initial value of Pr.824 is 100%.
For ordinary adjustment, try to set within the range of 50 to 200%.
9 Pr. GROUP
820
Name Pr. GROUP
G211 Speed control P gain 1 830 G311 Speed control P gain 2
Name
Constant output range Current control integral time setting

Speed control P gain 1

1116 G206 speed control P gain 1117 G261
(per-unit system)
compensation
Speed control P gain 2 Per-unit speed control
1118 G361 1121 G260
(per-unit system) reference frequency
Set the proportional gain for speed loop. (Setting this parameter Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name
higher improves the speed response and reduces the speed Torque control
Torque control
fluctuation caused by external disturbance. However, too large 825 G214 integral time 1 (current 835 G314
integral time 2
loop integral time)
setting causes vibration or noise.)
• The setting range of Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1 and Pr.830 Speed Set the current loop integral compensation time under torque
control P gain 2 is 0 to 1000%. The initial value of Pr.820 is 60%. control.
• A speed loop proportional gain can be set in the per-unit system Setting this parameter smaller increases torque response. However,
using Pr.1117, Pr.1118, and Pr.1121. too small setting may destabilize current.
• As the speed control response level is decreased in the constant If the setting value is small, it produces current fluctuation toward
output range (at the rated speed or more) due to the weak field
disturbance, decreasing time until it returns to the original current
magnet, the speed control P gain is compensated in Pr.1116.
value.
Integral time setting for speed control


Torque detection filter function
Speed control integral Speed control integral
821 G212 831 G312
time 1 time 2
Speed control integral
1115 G218
term clear time
Set the integral compensation time for speed loop. Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name
Setting this parameter lower shortens the return time to the original Torque detection Torque detection
827 G216 837 G316
speed when the speed fluctuates due to external disturbance. filter 1 filter 2
However, too small setting causes overshoot. Set the time constant of primary delay filter for torque feedback
Setting this parameter higher improves the level of safety. However, large signal.
setting prolongs the return time (response time) and may cause undershoot. Current loop response is reduced. Under ordinary circumstances,
Turning the X44 signal ON stops the seed loop integral calculation therefore, use the initial value as it is.
and clears the integral term in accordance with the Pr.1115 setting.
Speed feed forward control and model Torque bias
adaptive speed control
840 G230 Torque bias selection 841 G231 Torque bias 1
842 G232 Torque bias 2 843 G233 Torque bias 3
Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name Torque bias
844 G234 Torque bias filter 845 G235
Speed feed forward operation time
Model speed control Torque bias balance Fall-time torque bias
828 G224 877 G220 control/model adaptive 846 G236 847 G237
gain compensation terminal 1 bias
speed control selection
Speed feed forward Speed feed forward Fall-time torque bias
878 G221 879 G222 848 G238
filter torque limit terminal 1 gain
Speed feed forward The torque bias function can be used to make the starting torque
880 C114 Load inertia ratio 881 G223
gain
start-up faster. At this time, the motor starting torque can be adjusted
Model speed control Per-unit speed
1119 G262 gain (per-unit 1121 G260 control reference
with a contact signal or analog signal.
system) frequency
Speed feed forward control or model adaptive speed control can be
Set the torque bias amount using contact signals (X42,
selected using parameter settings. 0
X43) in Pr.841 to Pr.843.
Under speed feed forward control, the motor trackability for speed Set the torque bias amount using terminal 1 in any of C16
command changes can be improved. 1 to C19. (When the squirrel cage rises during forward
Under model adaptive speed control, the speed trackability and the motor rotation.)
response level to motor external disturbance torque can be adjusted Set the torque bias amount using terminal 1 in any of C16
individually. 2 to C19. (When the squirrel cage rises during reverse
motor rotation.)
Pr. 877 setting Description The torque bias amount using terminal 1 can be set
3 automatically in C16 to C19 and Pr.846 according to the
0 (initial value) Perform normal speed control.
load.
1 Perform speed feed forward control. 24 For details of the torque bias command via PROFIBUS
2 Model adaptive speed control becomes valid. communication (FR-A8NP), refer to the Instruction
25 Manual of the FR-A8NP (option).
• Speed feed forward control
When the load inertia ratio is set in Pr.880, the required torque for 9999
No torque bias, rated torque 100%
(initial value)
the set inertia is calculated according to the acceleration and
deceleration commands, and the torque is generated quickly. • Pr.841 Torque bias 1, Pr.842 Torque bias 2, and Pr.843 Torque
When the inertia ratio is to be estimated by easy gain tuning, the bias 3
estimated inertia ratio is stored as the setting value of Pr.880. The The rated torque of 100% equals to the torque bias setting value
speed feed forward is calculated based on this setting value.
When the speed feed forward gain is 100%, the calculation result
of 1000%, which is the central value of the torque. When the
setting value is 1000%, the bias value is "0".
9
for speed feed forward is applied as is. • Pr.844 Torque bias filter
If the speed command changes suddenly, the torque is increased The torque start-up can be made slower. The torque start-up
by the speed feed forward calculation. The maximum limit for the operation at this time is the time constant of the primary delay filter.
speed feed forward torque is set in Pr.879. • Pr.845 Torque bias operation time
The speed feed forward result can also be lessened with a Set the time for continuing the output torque simply by using the
primary delay filter in Pr.878. command value for the torque bias.
• Model adaptive speed control • Pr.846 Torque bias balance compensation
The model speed of the motor is calculated, and the feedback is Set the voltage of the torque bias analog input value that is input to
applied to the speed controller on the model side. Also, this model terminal 1 to compensate the balance of the torque bias amount.
speed is set as the command of the actual speed controller. • Pr.847 Fall-time torque bias terminal 1 bias, Pr.848 Fall-time
The inertia ratio of Pr.880 is used when the speed controller on torque bias terminal 1 gain
the model side calculates the torque current command value. Set the torque bias amount of when the cage is descended.
When the inertia ratio is to be estimated by easy gain tuning, the setting
value of Pr.880 is overwritten by the estimated inertia ratio. The torque Pr. 849 Refer to the page on Pr.74.
current command value is calculated based on this setting value.
The torque current command of the speed controller on the model Pr. 850 Refer to the page on Pr.10.
side is added to the output of the actual speed controller, and set Pr. 851, 852 Refer to the page on Pr.359.
as the input of the iq current control.
Pr.828 is used for the speed control on the model side (P control), Pr. 853 Refer to the page on Pr.285.
and first gain Pr.820 is used for the actual speed controller. The
model adaptive speed control is enabled for the first motor.
Even if the driven motor is switched to the second motor while
Pr.877 = "2", the second motor is operated as Pr.877 = "0".
• The model adaptive speed control gain can be set in the per-unit
system using Pr.1119 and Pr.1121.

Pr. 859, 860
Excitation ratio Refer to the page on Pr.82.
Pr. GROUP Name

854 G217 Excitation ratio Encoder pulse dividing output
The excitation ratio can be lowered to enhance efficiency for light
loads. (Motor magnetic noise can be reduced.) Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name
When excitation ratio is reduced, output torque startup is less
Control terminal
responsive. 413 M601
Encoder pulse
863 M600 option-Encoder
division ratio
Excitation ratio pulse division ratio
[%]
When the FR-A8AL or FR-A8TP is used, the encoder pulse at the
100 motor end can be divided in division ratio set in Pr.413 (for the FR-
(Initial value) A8AL) or Pr.863 (for the FR-A8TP) for the signal output.
Pr.854 Use this parameter to make the response of the machine to be input
setting
slower, etc.
0 100 Load[%]
Output torque detection
Pr. GROUP Name

Analog input terminal (terminal 1, 4) 864 M470 Torque detection
function assignment A signal is output when the motor torque is higher than the setting of
Pr.864.
This function can be used for electromagnetic brake operation, open
signal, etc.
Terminal 4 function Terminal 1 function
858 T040 868 T010
assignment assignment The Torque detection (TU) Output torque (%)
The analog input terminal 1 and terminal 4 functions are set and signal turns ON when the
changeable with parameters. output torque reaches the
Pr.864
V/F control, Real sensorless vector control, PM
detection torque value set
Advanced sensorless vector control, vector control in Pr.864 or higher.
9
Setting
Pr. magnetic The Torque detection (TU)
range flux vector Speed Torque Position Time
control control control control signal turns OFF when the TU ON OFF
0 Frequency Speed output torque drops lower

Speed limit
(initial setting setting
assistance
- than the detection torque
value) auxiliary auxiliary value.
Magnetic flux Magnetic flux Magnetic flux
1 -
command  command  command 
Regenerative Regenerative Pr. 865 Refer to the page on Pr.41.
driving driving
2 - - Pr. 866
torque limit torque limit Refer to the page on Pr.55.
(Pr.810 = 1) (Pr.810 = 1)
Pr. 867 Refer to the page on Pr.C0(900).
Torque
3 - - command - Pr. 868
(Pr.804 = 0) Refer to the page on Pr.858.
Stall Pr. 869 Refer to the page on Pr.C0(900).
868 Torque
prevention Torque limit Torque limit
4 command Pr. 870 Refer to the page on Pr.41.
operation (Pr.810 = 1) (Pr.810 = 1)
(Pr.804 = 0)
level input Pr. 872 Refer to the page on Pr.251.
Forward/
reverse Pr. 873 Refer to the page on Pr.285.
5 - - rotation -
speed limit Pr. 874 Refer to the page on Pr.22.
(Pr.807 = 2)
Torque bias
input Fault definition
6 - - -
(Pr.840 =1,
2, 3)
9999 - - - - Pr. GROUP Name
0 Frequency Speed 875 H030 Fault definition
Speed limit
(initial command command -
(AU signal-ON) Fault output can be
value) (AU signal-ON) (AU signal-ON) When Pr.875 = "1"
Magnetic flux Magnetic flux Magnetic flux done after deceleration
1 - stop when motor thermal Output
command  command  command  frequency
858
Stall protection is activated.
prevention Torque limit Torque limit
4 - Time
operation (Pr.810 = 1) (Pr.810 = 1)
Fault output ON
level input
(ALM, ALM2)
9999 - - - -
ON
Alarm output 2
 This function is valid under vector control. (ER)
-: No function E.OHT E.OHT
occurrence display
Pr.875
setting
Operation Description Free parameter
0 The output of the inverter is shut off immediately
Normal
(initial if any fault occurs. At this time, the alarm output
value) operation Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name
2 signal (ER) and a fault signal are output.
At activation of the external thermal relay 888 E420 Free parameter 1 889 E421 Free parameter 2
(E.OHT), motor load (electronic thermal O/L These parameters can be used for any purpose.
relay) (E.THM) and PTC thermistor (PTC)
protective functions, the alarm output 2 (ER) Any number within the setting range of 0 to 9999 can be input.
signalis is displayed, and the motor decelerates For example, these numbers can be used:
Fault
1 to stop. After it stops, a fault signal is output. • As a unit number when multiple units are used.
definition
During fault occurrence aside from the E.OHT, • As a pattern number for each operation application when multiple
E.THM and E.PTC, the output is immediately units are used.
shut off, and the fault is outputted.
Under position control, the operation of the
• As the year and month of introduction or inspection.
setting value "0" is applied.
Energy saving monitor
Pr. 877 to 881 Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name
Cumulative power
891 M023 892 M200 Load factor
monitor digit shifted times
Regeneration avoidance function Energy saving Control selection
893 M201 monitor reference 894 M202 during commercial
(motor capacity) power-supply operation
Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name Power saving rate
895 M203 896 M204 Power unit cost
reference value
Regeneration avoidance Regeneration avoidance
882 G120 883 G121 Power saving Power saving cumulative
operation selection operation level 897 M205 898 M206
monitor average time monitor clear
Regeneration avoidance Regeneration avoidance
884 G122 at deceleration detection 885 G123 compensation frequency Operation time rate Operation panel main
899 M207 52 M100
sensitivity limit value (estimated value) monitor selection
Regeneration avoidance Regeneration avoidance FM/CA terminal AM terminal function
886 G124 665 G125 54 M300 158 M301
voltage gain frequency gain function selection selection
Operation panel Operation panel
The regenerative status can be avoided by detecting the 774 M101 775 M102
monitor selection 1 monitor selection 2
regenerative status and raising the frequency. Operation panel
Operation panel
• Continuous operation is possible by increasing the frequency 776 M103 992 M104 setting dial push
monitor selection 3
automatically so it will not go into regenerative operation even monitor selection
when the fan is turned forcefully by other fans in the same duct. From the power consumption estimated value during commercial
power supply operation, the energy saving effect by use of the
inverter can be monitored and output.
9
0 (initial value) Disables regeneration avoidance function
• The items that can be monitored on the power saving monitor
Constantly enables regeneration avoidance (Pr.52, Pr.54, Pr.158, Pr.774 to Pr.776, Pr.992 = "50") are
1
882 function
indicated below.
Enables regeneration avoidance function only (Only Power saving and Average power saving can be set to
2
during constant-speed operation Pr.54 (terminal FM, terminal CA) and Pr.158 (terminal AM).)
Set the bus voltage level to operate the
regeneration avoidance operation. When the bus Energy saving
voltage level is set low, it will be harder to monitored Description and formula Increment
883 300 to 1200 V generate overvoltage error, but actual item
deceleration time will be longer. The difference between the estimated value of
Set the setting value higher than power supply the required power during commercial power
supply operation and the input power 0.01 kW
voltage  . Power saving /0.1 kW
calculated with the inverter.

Disables regeneration avoidance due to bus Power supply during commercial power supply
0 (initial value)
voltage change rate operation - input power monitor
Set the sensitivity to detect the bus voltage The power saving ratio with the commercial
884
change rate. power supply operation as 100%.
1 to 5
Setting value 1 5 Power saving
Detection sensitivity Low High Power saving Power during commercial  100
power supply operation 0.1%
Set the limit value for frequency to rise when the rate
0 to 590 Hz
885 regeneration avoidance function operates. The power saving ratio with Pr.893 as 100%.
9999 Disables frequency limit Power saving
Pr.893  100
Adjust the response at the time of regeneration
avoidance operation. When the setting value is The average power saving per hour during a
886 0 to 200% set larger, response against the bus voltage 0.01 kWh
Average predetermined time (Pr.897).
change will improve, but the output frequency power saving  (Power saving  t) /0.1 kWh
may become unstable. If the load inertia of the 
Pr.897
motor is large, set the setting value of Pr.886
smaller. When the vibration cannot be stabilized The average power saving ratio with the
665 0 to 200%
even if the setting value of Pr.886 is made commercial power supply operation as 100%.
smaller, set the setting value of Pr.665 smaller.  (Power saving rate  t)
Average Pr.897  100
Regeneration avoidance operation power saving 0.1%
example for deceleration rate The average power saving ratio with Pr.893 as
Bus voltage
Pr. 883 100%.

(VDC)
Average power saving

 100
Time Pr.893
frequency(Hz)
Average The average power saving in terms of cost. 0.01/0.1

Output
power cost
savings Average power saving  Pr.896 
During regeneration
avoidance function operation Time
• The items that can be monitored on the cumulative energy saving • Set a value at the minimum current output in the calibration
monitor (Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, Pr.992 = "51") are indicated below. parameters C8 (Pr.930) and C9 (Pr.930). Calibration parameter
(The monitor value of the cumulative monitor can be shifted to the right C10 (Pr.931) and C11 (Pr.931) are used to set a value at the
with Pr.891 Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times.) maximum current output.
• Using Pr.869, the output current response of terminal CA can be
Energy saving
monitored Description and formula Increment adjusted in the range of 0 to 5 s.
item
Power saving The cumulative power saving is added up per hour. 0.01 kWh  Pr. C2 (902) to C7 (905), C12 (917) to C19 (920), C38 (932) to C41 (933)
amount  (Power saving rate  t) 0.1 kWh 
Power cost The power saving amount in terms of cost. 0.01 
saving Power saving  Pr.896 0.1  Pr. C8 (930) to C11 (931) Refer to the page on Pr.C0 (900).
Estimated value of annual power saving amount. 0.01 kWh 

Pr. C42 (934) to C45 (935) Refer to the page on Pr.127.
Annual power Pr.899
Power saving amount
saving
amount Operation time during power  24  365  100
saving accumulation 0.1 kWh 
Using the power supply exceeding 480 V
Annual power Annual power saving amount in terms of cost. 0.01 
cost savings Annual power saving amount  Pr.896 0.1 
 Increment for the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and the FR- Pr. GROUP Name
A840-01800(55K) or lower Input voltage mode
 Increment for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR- 977 E302
selection
A840-02160(75K) or higher
To input a voltage between 480 V and 500 V to the 400 V class
Adjusting terminal FM/CA and terminal inverter, change the voltage protection level.
AM (calibration) Pr. 977 setting Description

0
400 V class voltage protection level
(initial value)
1 500 V class voltage protection level
C0 FM terminal C1 AM terminal
M310 M320
(900) calibration (901) calibration
C8 Current output bias C9 Current output bias
(930)
M330
signal (930)
M331
current Parameter clear, parameter copy, and
C10
(931)
M332
Current output gain
signal
C11
(931)
M333
Current output gain
current
initial value change list
867 M321 AM output filter 869 M334 Current output filter
By using the operation panel or parameter unit, terminals FM, CA Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name
and AM can be calibrated to the full scale. Parameter copy
989 E490 Pr.CLR Parameter clear
9 • Terminal FM calibration (C0 (Pr.900))
Terminal FM is preset to output pulses. By setting the calibration ALL.CL
alarm release
All parameter clear Err.CL Fault history clear
parameter C0 (Pr.900), the meter connected to the inverter can Initial value change
Pr.CPY Parameter copy Pr.CHG
be calibrated by parameter setting without use of a calibration list

resistor.
Using the pulse train output of terminal FM, a digital display can • Set Pr.CLR Parameter clear = "1" to initialize all parameters.
be provided to connect a digital counter. The monitor value is (Calibration parameters are not cleared.)
1440 pulses/s output at the full-scale value of Pr.54 FM/CA • Set ALL.CL All parameter clear = "1" to initialize all parameters.
terminal function selection. • Set Err.CL Fault history clear = "1" to clear the faults history.
Indicator • Use Pr.CPY to copy the parameter setting to multiple inverters.
1mA full-scale (Digital indicator)
analog meter
FM
1mA
FM
1440 pulses/s(+) (-)
Pr. CPY setting Description
(+) (-) T1
Calibration 0.--- Cancel

resistor ∗1 8VDC
SD SD
1.RD Copy the source parameters to the operation panel.
T2
Write the parameters copied to the operation panel to
Pulse width T1: Adjust using the calibration parameter C0 (Pr.900)
2.WR
Pulse cycle T2: Set with Pr.55 (frequency monitor)
Set with Pr.56 (current monitor) the destination inverter.
 Not needed when the operation panel (FR-DU08) or parameter 3.VFY Verify parameters in the inverter and operation panel.
unit (FR-PU07) is used for calibration. If the parameter setting is copied from the FR-A820-03160(55K)
Use a calibration resistor when the indicator (frequency meter)
or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower to the FR-A820-
needs to be calibrated by a neighboring device because the
indicator is located far from the inverter.
03800(75K) or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, or
However, the frequency meter needle may not deflect to full-scale
from the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-A840-
if the calibration resistor is connected. In this case, calibrate 02160(75K) or higher to the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and
additionally with the operation panel or parameter unit. FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, the warning appears on the
Calibration with Pr.900 cannot be done when terminal FM is set to open operation panel.
collector output with Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selection. After setting the parameters that have the different setting range,
• Calibration of terminal AM (C1 (Pr.901)) set Pr.989 as follows.
Terminal AM is initially set to provide a 10 VDC output in the full-
scale state of the corresponding monitor item. Calibration Pr. 989 setting Operation
parameter C1 (Pr.901) allows the output voltage ratio (gains) to 10
Cancels the warning of FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and
be adjusted according to the meter scale. Note that the maximum FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.
output voltage is 10 VDC. Cancels the warning of FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher
100
• Using Pr.867, the output voltage response of terminal AM can be and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
adjusted in the range of 0 to 5 s. To display only the numbers of the parameters that have been
• Terminal CA calibration (C0 (Pr.900), C8 (Pr.930) to C11 (Pr.931))
changed from their initial values, use Pr.CHG Initial value change
Terminal CA is initially set to provide a 20 mADC output in the full-
scale state of the corresponding monitor item. Calibration list.
 If Pr.77 Parameter write selection = "1", the parameter setting is
parameter C0 (Pr.900) allows the output current ratio (gains) to
not cleared.
be adjusted according to the meter scale. Note that the maximum
output current is 20 mA DC.
Buzzer control of the operation panel Pr.998 and IPM Refer to the page 222.
Name
Pr. GROUP
Automatic parameter setting
990 E104 PU buzzer control
The buzzer can be set to "beep" when the keys of the operation
panel (FR-DU08) and parameter unit (FR-PU07) are operated.
Automatic parameter Automatic parameter
999 E431 AUTO
Pr.990 setting Description setting setting
0 Without buzzer Parameter settings are changed as a batch. Those include
1 communication parameter settings for the Mitsubishi Electric's
With buzzer
(initial value) human machine interface (GOT) connection and the parameter
setting for the rated frequency settings of 50 Hz/60 Hz.
PU contrast adjustment Multiple parameters are changed automatically. Users do not have
to consider each parameter number. (Automatic parameter setting
mode)
Pr. GROUP Name
Operation in the automatic
PU contrast Pr.999 parameter setting mode
991 E105 Description
adjustment setting
( )
Contrast adjustment of the LCD of the LCD operation panel (FR-
9999
LU08) and the parameter unit (FR-PU07) can be performed. (initial No action -
Decreasing the setting value makes the contrast lighter. value)
Sets the standard monitor
1 "AUTO"  "PID"  Write "1"
Pr. 991 setting Description indicator setting of PID control.
0: Light Automatically sets the monitor
2 "AUTO"  "PID"  Write "2"
0 to 63  indicator for PID control.
63: Dark Automatically sets the
communication parameters for
Pr. 992 Refer to the page on Pr.52. 10 the GOT connection with a PU "AUTO"  "GOT"  Write "1"
connector (FREQROL 500/700/
Pr. 994, 995 Refer to the page on Pr.286. 800, SENSORLESS SERVO)
Automatically sets the
Fault initiation function communication parameters for
the GOT connection with RS-
11 -
485 terminals (FREQROL 500/
Pr. GROUP Name
700/800, SENSORLESS
SERVO) 9
997 H103 Fault initiation Automatically sets the
A fault (protective function) is initiated by setting the parameter. communication parameters for
12 the GOT connection with a PU "AUTO"  "GOT"  Write "2"
This function can be used to check how the system operates at connector (FREQROL 800
activation of a protective function. The read value is always "9999". (Automatic Negotiation))
Even if "9999" is set, the protective function is not activated. Automatically sets the
• Faults that can be written with Pr.997 Fault initiation communication parameters for
13 the GOT connection with RS- -
Pr.997 Pr.997 Pr.997 485 terminals (FREQROL 800
setting Fault setting Fault setting Fault
(Automatic Negotiation))
16 E.OC1 161 E.OP1 211 E.OD
50 Hz rated Sets the related
17 E.OC2 164 E.16 213 E.MB1 20 parameters of the "AUTO"  "F50"  Write "1"
frequency
18 E.OC3 165 E.17 214 E.MB2 rated frequency
according to the
19 E.OCT 166 E.18 215 E.MB3 60 Hz rated power supply
21 -
frequency frequency
32 E.OV1 167 E.19 216 E.MB4
33 E.OV2 168 E.20 217 E.MB5
34 E.OV3 169 E.PA1 218 E.MB6
35 E.OVT 170 E.PA2 219 E.MB7
Direct setting
48 E.THT 176 E.PE 220 E.EP
49 E.THM 177 E.PUE 222 E.MP
64 E.FIN 178 E.RET 225 E.IAH
Pr. GROUP Name
80 E.IPF 179 E.PE2 228 E.LCI Direct setting
1000 E108
selection
81 E.UVT 192 E.CPU 229 E.PCH
82 E.ILF 193 E.CTE 230 E.PID The PID set point setting screen (direct setting screen) can be
96 E.OLT 194 E.P24 231 E.EHR
displayed first on the LCD operation panel according to the
parameter setting.
97 E.SOT 196 E.CDO 241 E.1
98 E.LUP 197 E.IOH 242 E.2 Pr.1000
Description
99 E.LDN 198 E.SER 243 E.3 setting
112 E.BE 199 E.AIE 245 E.5 0 (initial
Displays the frequency setting screen.
value)
128 E.GF 200 E.USB 246 E.6
1 Displays the direct setting screen (for set point setting).
129 E.LF 201 E.SAF 247 E.7
Displays the direct setting screen (for set point setting) and
144 E.OHT 208 E.OS 251 E.11 2
the frequency setting screen.
145 E.PTC 209 E.OSD 253 E.13
160 E.OPT 210 E.ECT
Parallel operation selection (FR-A842-P) Simple clock function

Parallel operation 1006 E020 Clock (year) 1007 E021 Clock (month, day)
1001 E390
selection 1008 E022 Clock (hour, minute)
The master/slave inverters to be operated in parallel can be set. The time can be set. The time can only be updated while the inverter
power is ON.
Description
Pr.1001
Master/slave Number of First monitor Pr. Description
setting
station slave stations
Set the year (A.D.).
1006
Initial value: 2000
1 Slave station 1 -
Set the month and day.
1000 and 100 digits: January to December
2 Slave station 2 - 1007 10 and 1 digits: 1 to end of month (28, 29, 30 or 31)
For December 31, set "1231".
100 Initial value: 101 (January 1)
(initial 0 - Set the hour and minute using the 24-hour clock.
value)
Master station 1000 and 100 digits: 0 to 23 hours
200 1 - 1008 10 and 1 digits: 0 to 59 minutes
300 2 - For 23:59, set "2359".
Initial value: 0 (00:00)
Pr. 1002 • When the year, month, day, time and minute are set in the
Refer to the page on Pr.82. parameters, the inverter counts the date and time. The date and
time can be checked by reading the parameters.
• Because the date and time are cleared after turning OFF the
control circuit power supply, the clock function must be reset after
Notch filter turning ON the power supply. Use a separate power supply, such
as an external 24 V power supply, for the control circuit of the
simple clock function, and supply power continuously to this
Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name control circuit.
Notch filter By using the real-time clock function with the FR-LU08, it is not
1003 G601 1004 G602 Notch filter depth
frequency necessary to set the time again even when the power supply is
1005 G603 Notch filter width turned OFF.
The response level of speed control in the resonance frequency • The set clock is also used for functions such as faults history.
band of mechanical systems can be lowered to avoid mechanical
9 resonance.

0 (initial value) No notch filter

1003 Set the frequency for the center of gain
8 to 1250 Hz
attenuation.
1004 0 to 3 0 (Deep)  3 (Shallow)
1005 0 to 3 0 (Narrow)  3 (Wide)
Pr.1003
Gain
Notch filter frequency
0dB Frequency
Pr.1005
Notch filter width
Pr.1004
Notch filter depth
Trace function Resetting USB host errors
Trace operation 1049 E110 USB host reset
1020 A900 1021 A901 Trace mode selection
selection
When a USB device is connected to the USB connector (connector
Number of analog
1022 A902 Sampling cycle 1023 A903 A), the USB host error can be canceled without performing an
channels
Trigger mode inverter reset.
1024 A904 Sampling auto start 1025 A905
selection
Number of sampling Analog source
1026 A906 1027 A910 0 (initial value) Read only
before trigger selection (1ch)
Analog source Analog source 1 Resets the USB host.
1028 A911 1029 A912
selection (2ch) selection (3ch)
Analog source Analog source
1030 A913
selection (4ch)
1031 A914
selection (5ch) Anti-sway control
Analog source Analog source
1032 A915 1033 A916
Analog source Analog trigger Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name
1034 A917 1035 A918
selection (8ch) channel DC brake judgment
Analog trigger Anti-sway control
1036 A919 1037 A920 Analog trigger level 1072 A310 time for anti-sway 1073 A311
operation selection operation selection
control operation
Digital source Digital source Anti-sway control Anti-sway control
1038 A930 1039 A931 1074 A312 1075 A313
selection (1ch) selection (2ch) frequency depth
Digital source Digital source Anti-sway control
1040 A932 1041 A933 1076 A314 1077 A315 Rope length
selection (3ch) selection (4ch) width
Digital source Digital source 1078 A316 Trolley weight 1079 A317 Load weight
1042 A934 1043 A935
Digital source Digital source Swinging of crane-lifted load is suppressed on the crane running
1044 A936 1045 A937 axis.
Digital trigger Digital trigger
1046 A938 1047 A939 Pr. Setting range Description
channel operation selection
The operating status of the inverter can be traced and saved on a Set the waiting time to start the DC injection
brake (zero speed control, servo lock) after the
USB memory device. 1072 0 to 10 s output frequency reaches the Pr.10 DC
Saved data can be monitored by FR Configurator2, and the status of injection brake operation frequency or
the inverter can be analyzed. lower.
• This function samples the status (analog monitor and digital monitor) 0 (initial value) Anti-sway control disabled
of the inverter, traces the sampling data when a trigger (trace start 1073
condition) is generated, and saves the resulting trace data.
• Start of sampling and copying of data (Pr.1020, Pr.1024)
10 to 1250 Hz
0.05 to 2 Hz
Anti-sway control enabled
Sets the vibration frequency of the load.
9
Set the trace operation. The trace operation is set by one of two 1074 A vibration frequency is estimated based on
ways, by setting Pr.1020 Trace operation selection and by 9999 the Pr.1077 to Pr.1079 settings, and anti-
sway control is performed.
setting in the trace mode on the operation panel.
To automatically start sampling when the power supply is turned 1075 0 to 3 0 (Deep)  3 (Shallow)
ON or at a recovery after an inverter reset, set "1" to Pr.1024 1076 0 to 3 0 (Narrow)  3 (Wide)
Sampling auto start. 1077 0.1 to 50 m Set the rope length of the crane.
Setting by trace 1078 1 to 50000 kg Set the weight of the trolley.
Pr. 1020 setting mode Operation
1079 1 to 50000 kg Set the weight of the load.
0 (initial value) Sampling standby
1 Sampling start
Emergency stop function
2 Forced trigger (sampling stop)
Pr. GROUP Name
3 Sampling stop
Deceleration time at
1103 F040
emergency stop
4 Data transmission
At a failure in the host controller, the motor can be decelerated to a
stop using an input via an external terminal.
At turn-ON of the emergency stop signal (X92), the motor is
Turning OFF the operation panel display decelerated in the deceleration time of Pr.1103 in accordance with
the torque limit set in Pr.815.
Pr. GROUP Name
Display-off waiting
1048 E106
time
Monitor indicators can be turned OFF while the operation panel (FR-
DU08) is not used.

0 (initial value) The display is always ON.
Set the waiting time to turn off
1 to 60 min the monitor display after the
operation panel becomes idle.
Inverter-to-inverter link function Start count monitor
(FR-A800-E)
Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name Starting times lower Starting times upper
1410 A170 1411 A171
4 digits 4 digits
Station number in Number of inverters
1124 N681 inverter-to-inverter 1125 N682 in inverter-to-inverter • The inverter starting times can be counted.
link link system • Confirming the starting times can be used to determine the timing
of the maintenance, or can be used as a reference for system
The inverter-to-inverter link function enables communication inspection or parts replacement.
between multiple inverters connected by Ethernet in a small-scale
system by using the I/O devices and special registers of the PLC Pr. Setting range Description
function. The inverter-to-inverter link function is enabled by simply Displays the lower four digits of the number
1410 0 to 9999
of the inverter starting times.
setting Pr.1124 and Pr.1125.
Displays the upper four digits of the number
1411 0 to 9999
Pr. Setting range Description of the inverter starting times.
Set the station number for the inverter-to- • Every start signal input (the RUN signal ON) while the inverter
0 to 5
1124 inverter link function. output is stopped is counted as the inverter starting time. (Starting
9999 (initial value) Inverter-to-inverter link function disabled during pre-excitation is also counted.)
ON ON ON ON ON
Set the total number of inverters used for STF
1125 2 to 6
the inverter-to-inverter link function. LX ON
RUN ON ON ON ON
Output
• Setting procedure frequency
Time
Set a value other than "0" in Pr.414 PLC function operation 4
1. 3
selection to enable the PLC function. 2
Start count 1
To set the inverter as the master, set "0" in Pr.1124, and to set indication
2. the inverter as a slave, select a station number from 1 to 5 and

set the number in Pr.1124. Pr. 1412, 1413 Refer to the page on Pr.82.
Set the total number of inverters used for the inverter-to-
inverter link function in Pr.1125.
3.
For example, set "3" in Pr.1125 when two slave inverters and
the master inverter are used.
Use FR Configurator2 to write sequence programs to the
4.
9
master inverter.


Load characteristics fault detection 1486 0 to 590 Hz
Set the maximum frequency of the load
characteristics fault detection range.
Set the minimum frequency of the load
1487 0 to 590 Hz
Pr. GROUP Name Pr. GROUP Name characteristics fault detection range.
Load characteristics Load characteristics Set the detection width when the upper limit load
1480 H520 1481 H521 0 to 400%
measurement mode load reference 1 1488 fault warning is output.
Load characteristics Load characteristics 9999 Function disabled
1482 H522 1483 H523
load reference 2 load reference 3 Set the detection width when the lower limit load
0 to 400%
Load characteristics Load characteristics 1489 fault warning is output.
1484 H524 1485 H525
load reference 4 load reference 5 9999 Function disabled
Load characteristics Load characteristics Set the detection width when output is shut off
1486 H526 1487 H527 0 to 400%
maximum frequency minimum frequency when the upper limit load fault occurs.
Upper limit warning Lower limit warning 1490
1488 H531 1489 H532 9999 (initial
detection width detection width Function disabled
value)
Upper limit fault Lower limit fault
1490 H533 1491 H534 Set the detection width when output is shut off
detection width detection width 0 to 400%
when the lower limit load fault occurs.
Load status 1491
detection signal 9999 (initial
Function disabled
delay time / load value)
1492 H535
reference Set the waiting time after the load fault is detected
measurement waiting until warning output or output shutoff.
time 1492 0 to 60 s In the load characteristics measurement mode, set
the waiting time after the load measurement
This function is used to monitor whether the load is operating in frequency is reached until the load reference is set.
normal condition by storing the speed/torque relationship in the
inverter to detect mechanical faults or for maintenance. When the Load status
Upper limit warning detection
width (Pr.1488)
load operating condition deviates from the normal range, the Upper limit fault detection
width (Pr.1490)
protective function is activated or the warning is output to protect the Load reference 5
(Pr.1485) Lower limit fault detection
inverter or the motor. width (Pr.1491)
(This function is not available in the FR-A842-P.) Load reference 4 Lower limit warning detection
(Pr.1484) width (Pr.1489)
Pr. Setting range Description Load reference 3
(Pr.1483) Normal load range
Load characteristics measurement is normally
0 (initial value) Load reference 2
completed. (Pr.1482)
Load reference 1
1480 1 Load characteristics measurement mode is started. (Pr.1481)
2, 3, 4, 5, 81, The load characteristics measurement status is

f1 f2 f3 f4 f5 Output frequency
82, 83, 84, 85 displayed. (Read-only) (Pr.1487) (Pr.1486)
1481
Set the reference value of normal load
1482
1483 0 to 400%
characteristics.
8888: The present load status is written as
reference status.
9
1484
9999: The load reference is invalid.
1485
 To perform energy-saving operation for an application such as a fan or pump

To perform energy-saving operation for an application such as a fan or pump, set the parameters as follows.
• Load pattern selection (Pr.14) • Energy saving control (Pr.60)
Optimal output characteristics (V/F characteristics) can be Inverter will perform energy saving control automatically even
selected for application or load characteristics. when the detailed parameter settings are made.
• Set "1" (for variable-torque load) It is appropriate for an application such as a fan or pump.
in Pr.14 Load pattern selection. • Set Pr.60 Energy saving
100%
• The output voltage will change in control selection = "9" 100 Optimum excitation control
Output voltage
square curve against the output (Optimum excitation control

Motor efficiency (%)
frequency at the base frequency mode). 80
or lower. • The Optimum excitation More energy saving

60
• Set this parameter when driving control is a control method
a load with load torque change Pr. 3 Base frequency to decide the output voltage 40
proportionally against the square Output frequency (Hz) by controlling the excitation
V/F control
of the rotation speed, such as a current so the efficiency of

20
fan or pump. the motor is maximized. 0 20 40 60 80 100

• The energy saving effect Motor load torque (%)
cannot be expected when [Comparison of Mitsubishi Electric products]
the motor capacity is
extremely smaller than the
inverter capacity, or when
multiple motors are
connected to one inverter.
Protective Functions
 The list of inverter protective functions

When the inverter detects a fault, depending on the nature of the fault, the operation panel displays an error message or warning, or a
protective function is activated to trip the inverter.
Name Description Operation panel
indication
The operation panel stores the fault indications which appears when a protective function is activated
Faults history
to display the fault record for the past eight faults.
Operation panel lock Appears when operation was tried during operation panel lock.
Error message 
Password locked Appears when a password restricted parameter is read/written.
to
Parameter write error Appears when an error occurred during parameter writing.
to
Copy operation error Appears when an error occurred during parameter copying.
to
Error Appears when the RES signal is on or the PU and inverter can not make normal communication.
Stall prevention
Appears during overcurrent stall prevention.
(overcurrent)
Stall prevention Appears during overvoltage stall prevention. Appears while the regeneration avoidance function is
(overvoltage) activated.
Appears if the regenerative brake duty reaches or exceeds 85% of the Pr.70 Special regenerative
Regenerative brake pre-
alarm  brake duty value. If the regenerative brake duty reaches 100%, a regenerative overvoltage (E. OV[])
occurs. (Standard models only)
Electronic thermal relay
Appears when the electronic thermal O/L relay has reached 85% of the specified value.
function pre-alarm
PU stop Appears if is pressed in an operation mode other than the PU operation mode.
Speed limit indication

(output during speed limit) Appears if the speed limit level is exceeded during torque control.
Continuous operation Appears when the operation continues while an error is occurring in the communication line or
Warning 
during communication
fault communication option (when Pr.502 = "4").
Appears when parameter copy is performed between inverters FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, FR-
Parameter copy
A840-01800(55K) or lower, FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher
Safety stop Appears when safety stop function is activated (during output shutoff).
Maintenance signal output Appears when the inverter's cumulative energization time reaches or exceeds the parameter set
1 to 3  value. to
USB host error Appears when an excessive current flows into the USB A connector.
Appears when an error occurs during the home position return operation under position control. (HP3
Home position return error to
is not available on the FR-A842-P.)
10 24 V external power supply Flickers when the main circuit power supply is off and the 24 V external power supply is being input.
operation
Appears when the load is deviated from the upper or lower limit of the warning detection range. (This
Load fault warning 
function is not available in the FR-A842-P.)

Ethernet communication Appears when Ethernet communication is interrupted by physical factors. (This function is intended for
fault the FR-A800-E only.)
Appears when the cooling fan remains stopped when operation is required or when the speed has
Alarm 
Fan alarm
decreased.
Internal fan alarm Appears when the internal fan fails, or at a reference replacement time. (IP55 compatible models only)
Overcurrent trip during
Appears when an overcurrent occurred during acceleration.
acceleration
Appears when an overcurrent occurred during constant speed operation.
constant speed
deceleration or stop Appears when an overcurrent occurred during deceleration and at a stop.
The output from a slave inverter in parallel operation is shut off if the input current exceeds the
Overcurrent trip
specified level. (This function is intended for the FR-A842-P only.)
Regenerative overvoltage Appears when an overvoltage occurred during acceleration.
trip during acceleration
Regenerative overvoltage Appears when an overvoltage occurred during constant speed operation.
trip during constant speed
Regenerative overvoltage trip Appears when an overvoltage occurred during deceleration and at a stop.
Fault 
during deceleration or stop

If the DC voltage at the main circuit in a slave inverter in parallel operation reaches or exceeds the
specified value, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be
Overvoltage trip
activated by a surge voltage produced in the power supply system. (This function is intended for the
FR-A842-P only.)
Inverter overload trip
(electronic thermal relay Appears when the electronic thermal relay function for inverter element protection was activated.
function) 
Motor overload trip
(electronic thermal relay Appears when the electronic thermal relay function for motor protection was activated.
function) 
Heatsink overheat Appears when the heatsink overheated.
Instantaneous power Appears when an instantaneous power failure occurred at an input power supply. (Standard models
failure and IP55 compatible models only)
166
Operation panel
Name Description indication
Appears when the main circuit DC voltage became low. (Standard models and IP55 compatible
Undervoltage
models only)
Appears if one of the three phases on the inverter input side opened. (Standard models and IP55
Input phase loss 
compatible models only)
Appears 3 s after the output frequency is reduced to the reference value by the stall prevention (torque
Stall prevention stop
limit) operation.
Loss of synchronism The inverter trips when the motor operation is not synchronized. This function is only available under
detection PM sensorless vector control. (This function is not available in the FR-A842-P.)
Upper limit fault detection Appears when the load exceeds the upper limit of the fault detection range. (This function is not
 available in the FR-A842-P.)
Lower limit fault detection Appears when the load falls below the lower limit of the fault detection range. (This function is not
 available in the FR-A842-P.)
The inverter trips if an alarm occurs in the brake circuit, e.g. damaged brake transistors. In this case,
Brake transistor alarm the inverter must be powered off immediately. (Appears when an internal circuit fault occurred for
detection separated converter types and IP55 compatible models. This function is not available in the FR-A842-
P.)
Output side earth (ground) Appears when an earth (ground) fault occurred on the Inverter’s output side.
fault overcurrent
Output phase loss Appears if one of the three phases on the inverter output side opened.
External thermal relay
Appears when the external thermal relay connected to terminal OH is activated.
operation 
The inverter trips if resistance of the PTC thermistor connected between terminal 2 and terminal 10
PTC thermistor operation
has reached the Pr.561 PTC thermistor protection level setting or higher.
Appears when torque command by the plug-in option is selected using Pr. 804 when no plug-in option is
Option fault mounted or an AC power supply is connected to the R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 when the high power factor
converter and power regeneration common converter connection setting (Pr.30 =2) is selected.
Communication option to
Appears when a communication line error occurs in the communication option.
fault
Parallel operation slave 1

Appears on the master inverter when a fault occurs in the slave inverter during the parallel operation.
fault
Appears on the master inverter even when the RS-485 terminals are incorrectly connected. (This
function is intended for the FR-A842-P only.)
fault
Parameter storage device
Appears when operation of the element where parameters stored became abnormal. (control board)
fault
Appears when a communication error between the PU and inverter occurred, the communication
PU disconnection interval exceeded the permissible time during the RS-485 communication with the PU connecter, or
communication errors exceeded the number of retries during the RS-485 communication.
Fault 
Appears when the operation was not restarted within the set number of retries. (This function is not
Retry count excess 
available in the FR-A842-P.)
Parameter storage device Appears when operation of the element where parameters stored became abnormal. (main circuit
fault board)
CPU fault Appears during the CPU and peripheral circuit errors occurred. to
10
Operation panel power
supply short circuit/RS-
Appears when the RS-485 terminal power supply or operation panel power supply was shorted.
485 terminals power
supply short circuit
When the 24 VDC power output via terminal PC is shorted, or when the external 24 VDC power
24 VDC power fault
supplied to terminal +24 is not enough, this function shuts off the power output.
Abnormal output current
detection  Appears when the output current is out of the output current detection range set by parameters.
Inrush current limit circuit Appears when the resistor of the inrush current limit circuit overheated. (Standard models and IP55
fault compatible models only)
Communication fault Appears when a communication error occurred during the RS-485 communication with the RS-485
(inverter) terminals. (This function is not intended for the FR-A800-E.)
Appears when 30 mA or more is input or a voltage (7.5 V or more) is input with terminal 2/4 set to
Analog input fault
current input.
USB communication fault Appears when USB communication error occurred.
Safety circuit fault The inverter trips when a safety circuit fault occurs.
Overspeed occurrence  Indicates that the motor speed has exceeded the overspeed setting level (Pr.374).
Speed deviation excess Stops the inverter output if the motor speed is increased or decreased under the influence of the load
detection   etc. during vector control and cannot be controlled in accordance with the speed command value.
Signal loss detection   Stops the inverter output if the encoder signal is shut off.
Indicates that the difference between the position command and position feedback exceeded the
Excessive position fault 
reference.
The inverter output is stopped when a sequence error occurs during use of the brake sequence to
Brake sequence fault 
function (Pr.278 to Pr.285).
When the rotation command of the inverter differs from the actual motor rotation direction detected
Encoder phase fault   from the encoder, the inverter output is stopped. (detected only during tuning is performed in the
"rotation mode" of offline auto tuning) (This function is not available in the FR-A842-P.)
167
Operation panel
Name Description indication
When the offset value between the motor home magnetic pole position and the resolver home position
Magnetic pole position
unknown  is unknown, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. (This function is not available
in the FR-A842-P.)
Abnormal internal The inverter output is stopped when the internal temperature of the inverter rises abnormally. (IP55
temperature compatible models only)
The inverter trips when the analog input current is 2 mA or less for the time set in Pr.778 4 mA input
4 mA input fault 
check filter.
The inverter trips when the pre-charge time exceeds Pr.764 Pre-charge time limit.
Pre-charge fault  The inverter trips when the measured value exceeds Pr.763 Pre-charge upper detection level
during pre-charging.
The inverter trips if the measured value exceeds the PID upper limit or PID lower limit parameter
PID signal fault  setting, or the absolute deviation value exceeds the PID deviation parameter setting during PID
control.
Fault 
The inverter trips when a contact fault is found between the inverter and the plug-in option, or when to
Option fault
the communication option is not connected to the connector 1.
Ethernet communication If Ethernet communication is interrupted by physical factors or a no-communication state persists for
fault the permissible time or longer, the inverter trips. (This function is intended for the FR-A800-E only.)
The speed may not decelerate during low speed operation if the rotation direction of the speed
Opposite rotation command and the estimated speed differ when the rotation is changing from forward to reverse or
deceleration fault  from reverse to forward under real sensorless vector control. At this time, the inverter output is
stopped if the rotation direction will not change, causing overload.
Internal circuit fault Appears when an internal circuit error occurred.
User definition error by the Appears when the values 16 to 20 are set in the device SD1214 with the program operation of the to
PLC function PLC function.
 Resetting the inverter initializes the internal cumulative heat value of the electronic thermal O/L relay function.
 The error message shows an operational error. The inverter output is not shut off.
 Warnings are messages given before faults occur. The inverter output is not shut off.
 Alarm warn the operator of failures with output signals. The inverter output is not shut off.
 When faults occur, the protective functions are activated to shut off the inverter output and output the alarms.
 The external thermal operates only when the OH signal is set in Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).
 Appears when a vector control compatible option is installed. (The protective function may or may not be available depending on the type of the connected
communication option.)
 This protective function is not available in the initial status.
10
168
 The list of converter unit protective functions
When the converter unit detects a fault, depending on the nature of the fault, the operation panel displays an error message or warning, or a
protective function is activated to trip the inverter.
Name Description Operation panel
indication
The operation panel stores the fault indications which appears when a protective function is
Faults history
activated to display the fault record for the past eight faults.
Error message 
Operation panel lock Appears when operation was tried during operation panel lock.
Password locked Appears when a password restricted parameter is read/written.
Parameter write error Appears when an error occurred during parameter writing.
Copy operation error Appears when an error occurred during parameter copying. to
Appears when the RES signal is on or the PU and converter unit can not make normal
Error
communication.
Electronic thermal relay
Appears when the electronic thermal O/L relay has reached 85% of the specified value.
function pre-alarm
Warning 
Maintenance signal Appears when the converter unit's cumulative energization time reaches or exceeds the parameter
output 1 to 3  set value. to
24 V external power
Flickers when the main circuit power supply is off and the 24 V external power supply is being input.
supply operation
Alarm
Appears when the cooling fan remains stopped when operation is required or when the speed has
Fan alarm

decreased.
Overvoltage trip Appears when the converter unit's internal main circuit DC voltage exceeds the specified value.
Converter overload trip
(electronic thermal relay Appears when the electronic thermal O/L relay of the converter unit diode module is activated.
function) 
Heatsink overheat Appears when the heatsink overheated.
Instantaneous power
Appears when an instantaneous power failure occurred at an input power supply.
failure
Undervoltage Appears when power supply voltage of the converter unit is set at a low level.
Input phase loss  Appears if one of the three phases on the converter unit input side opened.
External thermal relay
operation  Appears when the external thermal relay connected to terminal OH is activated.
Appears on the operation panel of the master at an occurrence of a slave converter fault during the
fault
parallel operation. Appears on the master converter unit even when the RS-485 terminals are
Parallel operation slave 2 incorrectly connected. (This function is intended for the FR-CC2-P only.)
fault
Parameter storage device Appears when operation of the element where parameters stored became abnormal. (control
fault board)
Appears when a communication error between the PU and inverter occurred, the communication 10
PU disconnection interval exceeded the permissible time during the RS-485 communication with the PU connecter, or
communication errors exceeded the number of retries during the RS-485 communication.
Fault 
Appears when the operation was not restarted within the set number of retries. (This function is not
Retry count excess 
available for the FR-CC2-P.)
Parameter storage device Appears when operation of the element where parameters stored became abnormal. (main circuit
fault board)
CPU fault Appears during the CPU and peripheral circuit errors occurred. to
Operation panel power

supply short circuit/RS-
Appears when the RS-485 terminal power supply or operation panel power supply was shorted.
485 terminals power
supply short circuit
When the 24 VDC power output via terminal PC is shorted, or when the external 24 VDC power
24 VDC power fault
supplied to terminal +24 is not enough, this function shuts off the power output.
Inrush current limit circuit Appears when the resistor of the inrush current limit circuit overheated.
fault
Communication fault Appears when a communication error occurred during the RS-485 communication with the RS-485
(inverter) terminals.
Internal circuit fault Appears when an internal circuit error occurred.
Option fault The inverter trips if a plug-in option is disconnected while the converter unit power is ON.
 Resetting the converter unit initializes the internal cumulative heat value of the electronic thermal O/L relay function.
 The error message shows an operational error. The inverter output is not shut off.
 Warnings are messages given before faults occur. The inverter output is not shut off.
 Alarm warn the operator of failures with output signals. The inverter output is not shut off.
 When faults occur, the protective functions are activated to shut off the inverter output and output the alarms.
 The external thermal operates only when the OH signal is set in Pr.178, Pr.180, Pr.187 or Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).
 This protective function is not available in the initial status.
169
Option and Peripheral Devices
 Option List
By fitting the following options to the inverter, the inverter is provided with more functions.
Three plug-in options can be fitted at a time. Two or more of the same options cannot be fitted, and only one communication option can be
fitted at a time. (Two options (except for communication options) can be fitted to the FR-A800-GF at a time.)
Name Type Applications, Specifications, etc. Applicable Inverter

FR-A8AP Vector control can be performed for encoder-equipped motors
FR-A8AL (induction motors).
Vector control
Vector control can be performed for resolver-equipped motors
FR-A8APR
(induction/PM motors).
FR-A8AP The main spindle can be stopped at a specified position
Orientation control FR-A8APR (orientation) in combination with an encoder. The motor speed is
Encoder feedback control FR-A8AL sent back and the speed is maintained constant.
The external pulse train input enables position control.
Position control Connection with the positioning module of a programmable
FR-A8AL controller is also available.
Encoder pulse dividing output The encoder pulse can be divided for the signal output.
This input interface sets the high frequency accuracy of the
inverter using an external BCD or binary digital signal.
16-bit digital input FR-A8AX
• BCD code 3 digits / 4 digits
• Binary 12 bits / 16 bits
Output signals provided with the inverter as standard are
selected to output from the open collector.
Plug-in Type
Digital output FR-A8AY

Extension analog output This option adds 2 different signals that can be monitored such
as the output frequency and output voltage. Shared among all models
20mADC or 10VDC meter can be connected.
Output any three output signals available with the inverter as
Relay output FR-A8AR
standard from the relay contact terminals.
This option adds different signals that can be monitored such as
the motor torque and torque command by the 10 V output.
Bipolar analog output Highly accurate operation is achieved by using high-resolution
High resolution analog input FR-A8AZ analog input (16 bits).
Motor thermistor interface  Thermistor-equipped motors can detect the motor temperature,
and the temperature feedback is used to reduce the fluctuation
of output torque.
CC-Link IE Field Network
FR-A8NCE
communication
Communication
CC-Link communication FR-A8NC

SSCNET III(/H) This option allows the inverter to be operated or monitored or
FR-A8NS
communication the parameter setting to be changed from a computer or
DeviceNet communication FR-A8ND programmable controller.
PROFIBUS-DP
communication FR-A8NP
11 FL remote communication
Screw terminal block

FR-A8NF
FR-A8TR
The screw type control circuit terminal block enables wiring
Shared among all models 
Control terminal
using round crimping terminals.

The control circuit terminal block equipped with the encoder

power supply (24 VDC output) enables orientation control,
encoder feedback control, vector control, encoder pulse division
Vector control terminal block FR-A8TP Shared among all models
output with encoder-equipped motors (induction motors). (The
24 VDC power supply can be used for the encoder of the SF-
V5RU.)
Liquid crystal display
operation panel FR-LU08(-01) Graphical operation panel with liquid crystal display 
Parameter unit FR-PU07 Interactive parameter unit with LCD display

Parameter unit with battery Enables parameter setting without supplying power to the
FR-PU07BB(-L) 
pack inverter.
Parameter unit connection Cable for connection of operation panel or parameter unit
FR-CB20[]
cable [] indicates a cable length. (1m, 3m, 5m)
Personal computer
Stand-alone Shared
MR-J3USBCBL3M Amplifier connector connector

USB cable Shared among all models
Cable length: 3 m Mini B connector (5-pin) A connector
Operation panel connection Connector to connect the operation panel (FR-DU08) and
FR-ADP
connector connection cable
Encoder cable Connection cable for the inverter and encoder for Mitsubishi
Mitsubishi Electric vector
control dedicated motor (SF- FR-V7CBL[] Electric vector control dedicated motor (SF-V5RU).
V5RU) [] indicates a cable length. (5m, 15m, 30m)
Control circuit terminal block An attachment for installing the control circuit terminal block of
FR-A8TAT
intercompatibility attachment the FR-A700/A500 series to that of the FR-A800 series
FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to
FR-A820-04750(90K)
The heatsink of the inverter can be protruded outside the
Panel through attachment FR-A8CN FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to
enclosure. For the enclosure cut dimensions, refer to page 43.
FR-A840-03610(132K)
According to capacities
170
Name Type Applications, Specifications, etc. Applicable Inverter
FR-AAT Attachment for replacing with the A800 series using the
Intercompatibility attachment
FR-A5AT installation holes of the FR-A700/A500/A200E series.
AC reactor FR-HAL For harmonic current reduction and inverter input power factor
DC reactor FR-HEL improvement
This option is used when the cable length from an inverter to the FR-A842-P.
Balance reactor FR-POL
node point is less than 10 m. According to capacities.
FR-BSF01
Line noise filter For line noise reduction Shared among all models
FR- BLF
The regenerative braking capability can be improved FR-A820-01250(22K) or lower,
High-duty brake resistor FR-ABR
(permissible duty 10%/6%ED). FR-A840-00620(22K) or lower 
Brake unit FR-BU2 According to capacities
For increasing the braking capability of the inverter (for high- FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower,
FR-BR
inertia load or negative load) FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower 
Stand-alone Shared
Resistor unit Brake unit and resistor unit are used in combination FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher,
MT-BR5 FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher

Power regeneration common
converter FR-CV/ Unit which can return motor-generated braking energy back to FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower,
Stand-alone reactor dedicated FR-CVL the power supply in common converter system FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower 
for the FR-CV
Energy saving type high performance brake unit which can
FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher
Power regeneration converter MT- RC regenerate the braking energy generated by the motor to the

power supply.
The high power factor converter switches the converter section
on/off to reshape an input current waveform into a sine wave,
High power factor converter FR-HC2 According to capacities
greatly suppressing harmonics. (Used in combination with the
standard accessory.)
FR-ASF FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower 
Surge voltage suppression Filter for suppressing surge voltage on motor FR-A840-00170(5.5K) to
filter FR-BMF FR-A840-00930(37K) 
Reactor MT- BSL (-HC) FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher,
Reduce the motor noise during inverter driving FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher
Sine wave filter
Use in combination with a reactor and a capacitor 
Capacitor MT- BSC According to capacities
For independent operation. With frequency meter, frequency
Manual controller FR-AX
FR Series Manual Controller/Speed Controller
potentiometer and start switch.

For synchronous operation (1VA) by external signal (0 to 5V, 0
DC tach. follower FR-AL
to 10V DC) 
For three speed switching, among high, middle and low speed
Three speed selector FR-AT
operation (1.5VA) 
For remote operation. Allows operation to be controlled from
Motorized speed setter FR-FK
several places (5VA) 
For ratio operation. Allows ratios to be set to five inverters.
11
Ratio setter FR-FH
(3VA) 

Speed detector FR-FP For tracking operation by a pilot generator (PG) signal (2VA) 
Master controller (5VA) for parallel operation of multiple
Master controller FR-FG
(maximum 35) inverters. 
For soft start and stop. Enables acceleration/deceleration in
Soft starter FR-FC
parallel operation (3VA)  Shared among all models
For continuous speed control operation. Used in combination
Deviation detector FR-FD
with a deviation sensor or synchro (5VA) 
Preamplifier FR-FA Used as an A/V converter or arithmetic amplifier (3VA) 
Pilot generator QVAH-10 For tracking operation. 70V/35VAC 500Hz (at 2500r/min)
For continuous speed control operation (mechanical deviation
Deviation sensor YVGC-500W-NS
detection) Output 90VAC/90°
Frequency setting
WA2W 1k For frequency setting. Wire-wound 2W 1k type B characteristic
potentiometer
Others
Analog frequency meter Dedicated frequency meter (graduated to 130Hz). Moving-coil

YM206NRI 1mA
(64mm  60mm) type DC ammeter
For frequency meter calibration.
Calibration resistor RV24YN 10k
Carbon film type B characteristic
FR Configurator2
SW1DND-FRC2-E Supports an inverter startup to maintenance.
(Inverter setup software)
 The motor thermistor interface is not available when the FR-A842-P is used.
 Not available for the FR-A800-E.
 Applicable inverters for the ND rating. For the SLD, LD, and HD ratings, different inverters are used depending on the applicable motor capacity.
 Rated power consumption. The power supply specifications of the FR series manual controllers and speed controllers are 200VAC 50Hz, 200V/220VAC
60Hz, and 115VAC 60Hz.
 The battery (CR1216: a diameter of 12 mm, a hight of 16 mm) is not bundled.
 To use a parameter unit with battery pack (FR-PU07BB) outside Japan, order a "FR-PU07BB-L" (parameter unit type indicated on the package has L at the
end). Since batteries may conflict with laws in countries to be used (new EU Directive on batteries and accumulators, etc.), batteries are not enclosed with
an FR-PU07BB.
171
 Control terminal option
Name (model) Specification and structure

Replace the standard control circuit terminal block with this option (Not available for the FR-A800-E).
• Terminal layout
Terminal screw size : M3.5

Tightening torque : 1.2 N m
2
Recommended cable gauge : 0.75 mm
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2 AU STOP +24 10E 4 1
RL RM RH RT MRS RES STF STR F/C AM 10 2
SE RUN SU IPF OL FU SD SD SD JOG CS PC 5
• Restrictions for the FR-A8TR

Screw terminal block As compared with the standard control circuit terminal block, the FR-A8TR has the following restrictions.
FR-A8TR (a) When the plug-in option FR-A8NC, FR-A8NCE, or FR-A8NS is used, terminals +24, 10E, 4, STOP, and AU of the FR-
A8TR cannot be used.
(b) Because the height is restricted, two wires cannot be wired to upper-row terminals (except for terminals A1, B1, C1,
A2, B2, and C2) and middle-row terminals on the terminal block.
(c) The safety stop function is not available.
(d) For the connection to terminal 1, use a screwdriver with a diameter of 4 mm or less. To avoid contact with the front
cover fixing area, put the screwdriver upright relative to the terminal screw surface.
φ 4 mm or less
Avoid contact with

the front cover
Keep the screwdriver fixing area.
upright relative to the
terminal screw surface
while rotating the
11
screwdriver.
172
Replace the standard control circuit terminal block with this option. The 24 VDC power supply can be used for the encoder of the
SF-V5RU.
• Terminal connection diagrams
Control circuit
Encoder signal
PA3 Control terminal option / A-phase signal input terminal
PAR3 Control terminal option / A-phase inverse signal input terminal
Control input signals PB3 Control terminal option / B-phase signal input terminal
(No voltage input allowed) STF PBR3 Control terminal option / B-phase inverse signal input terminal
STR PZ3 Control terminal option / Z-phase signal input terminal
Reverse rotation start
DI1 PZR3 Control terminal option / Z-phase inverse signal input terminal
Digital input terminal 1
DI2 PG Encoder power supply input terminal (positive side)
Digital input terminal 2
PG Encoder power supply input terminal (positive side)
DI3
Digital input terminal 3 PG24 Encoder power supply output terminal (positive side)
DI4
Digital input terminal 4 Encoder pulse dividing output signal
OH
Thermal protector input FPA5 Control terminal option / Encoder A-phase output terminal
RES FPB5 Control terminal option / Encoder B-phase output terminal
Reset
SOURCE
FPZ5 Control terminal option / Encoder Z-phase output terminal
SINK FPA4 Control terminal option / Encoder differential
A-phase output terminal
SD Control terminal option / Encoder differential
Contact input common FPAR4 A-phase inverse signal output terminal
24VDC power supply PC Control terminal option / Encoder differential
FPB4
(Common for external power B-phase output terminal
supply transistor output) FPBR4 Control terminal option / Encoder differential
B-phase inverse signal output terminal
FPZ4 Control terminal option / Encoder differential
24V external power +24 Z-phase output terminal
supply input FPZR4 Control terminal option / Encoder differential
Z-phase inverse signal output terminal
SD Common terminal
AM (+)
Analog signal output • Control terminal layout
5 (0 to ±10VDC)
Voltage/current (-)
PBR4
PZR4
PAR4
FPB4
FPB5
FPZ4
FPZ5
FPA4
FPA5
RES
STR
STF
input switch
+24
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
AM
OH
PC
SD
5
2
Frequency setting signal (Analog) ON C1 Relay output
OFF
10E(+10V) 2 4 B1
Frequency 3
setting 2 0 to 5VDC Initial value Relay output (fault output)
potentiometer 2 0 to 10VDC selectable A1
0 to 20mADC
1/2W1kΩ 1 5
(Analog common)
DO1 Open collector output
0 to ±10VDC Initial value Open collector output 1
Auxiliary input (+) 1 DO2
PBR3
PG24
PZR3
PAR3
0 to ±5VDC selectable
SOC
DO1
DO2
DO3
PB3
PZ3
PA3
(-)
10E
SIC
SO
PG
PG
SD
PC
SD
SE
S1
S2
Open collector output 2
A
B
5
1
DO3
Safety stop signal Open collector output 3
Tightening torque: 0.5 N•m to 0.6 N•m (terminals A, B, and C)
Shorting wire
PC SE Open collector output common

S1 Sink/Source common
0.22 N•m to 0.25 N•m (terminals other than described above)
Vector control terminal Safety stop input (Channel 2)
S2 So (SO)
Safety monitor output Small flat-blade screwdriver (Tip thickness: 0.4 mm / tip
block Safety stop input common
SIC
SD
SOC
width: 2.5 mm)
FR-A8TP
• Control terminal specification
[Input signal]
Function
Terminal
symbol Terminal name Terminal function description
DI1 to Digital input terminal Functions can be assigned to terminals by the input terminal function
DI4 1 to 4 selection (Pr.180 to Pr.182, Pr.185).
Contact input
Temperature detector input terminal for overheat protection of a motor.

When the OH signal turns OFF, the external thermal relay (E.OHT)
protective function is activated
OH Thermal protector input
Use Pr.876 to switch valid/invalid status of terminal function.
Switches the control logic (sink logic or source logic) independently by
the external thermal relay switch (SW5A).
11
Control terminal option / A-phase
PA3

signal input terminal
Control terminal option / A-phase
PAR3
inverse signal input terminal
Control terminal option / B-phase
PB3
A-, B- and Z-phase signals are input from the encoder.
Control terminal option / B-phase
Encoder signal
PBR3
Control terminal option / Z-phase
PZ3
Control terminal option / Z-phase
PZR3
Input power for the encoder power supply.
Connect the external power supply (5 V, 12 V, 15 V) and the encoder
power cable. When the encoder output is the differential line driver
Encoder power supply terminal
PG type, only 5 V can be input. Make sure the voltage of the external
(positive side)
power supply the same as the encoder output voltage. (Check the
encoder specification.) Short terminals PG24 and PG for using the 24
VDC power supply of the FR-A8TP.
173
[Output signal]
Open collector Function Terminal

Terminal name Terminal function description
symbol
DO1 to Digital output terminal The function can be assigned to an output terminal by the output
DO3 1 to 3 terminal function selection (Pr.190 to Pr.192).
Common terminal for terminals DO1, DO2, DO3. Isolated from

terminals SD and 5.
Control terminal option / Encoder A- Outputs A-, B- and Z-phase (home position and mark pulse) signals
FPA5
phase output terminal from the encoder. The A- and B-phase signals can be divided by the
Control terminal option / Encoder B- ratio (1/n) and output.
FPB5
phase output terminal n=1 to 32767 (an integer)
Control terminal option / Encoder Z- Use Pr.863 Control terminal option-Encoder pulse division ratio
FPZ5 for division. Common terminal is terminal SD.
Encoder pulse dividing output
phase output terminal

Vector control terminal Control terminal option / Encoder
block FPA4
differential A-phase output terminal
FR-A8TP
Control terminal option / Encoder
FPAR4 differential A-phase inverse signal
output terminal
Control terminal option / Encoder Outputs A-, B- and Z-phase (home position and mark pulse) signals
FPB4 from the encoder. The A- and B-phase signals can be divided by the
differential B-phase output terminal
ratio (1/n) and output.
Control terminal option / Encoder n=1 to 32767 (an integer)
FPBR4 differential B-phase inverse signal Use Pr.863 Control terminal option-Encoder pulse division ratio
output terminal for division.
FPZ4
differential Z-phase output terminal
FPZR4 differential Z-phase inverse signal
output terminal
Power supply output
for encoder
Used for the 24 VDC power supply for an encoder.

Encoder power supply terminal
PG24 If used, connect this terminal to terminal PG, and this will supply power
(positive side)
from terminal PG to the encoder.
Specifications are the same as those of the standard control circuit terminals for the input signals (STF, STR, RES, SD, PC, 10E, 2,
1, 5, and +24) and the output signals (A, B, C, AM, S1, S2, SIC, So (SO), and SOC).
11
174
 Stand-alone option
With this attachment the heatsink which is the exothermic section of the inverter can be placed on the rear of the enclosure. Since
the heat generated in the inverter can be radiated to the rear of the enclosure, the enclosure can be downsized.
The use of this attachment requires more installation area. For installation, refer to the drawing after attachment installation (page
43).
For a panel cutting drawing, refer to page 43.
• Applicable models Enclosure
Inside the enclosure
Applicable inverter
Model FR-A8CN
FR-A820 FR-A840 (Option)
00023(0.4K), 00038(0.75K),
00105(1.5K), 00167(2.2K),
FR-A8CN01 00052(1.5K), 00083(2.2K),
00250(3.7K)
Panel through 00126(3.7K) FAN
attachment FR-A8CN02 00340(5.5K), 00490(7.5K) 00170(5.5K), 00250(7.5K) Inverter Cooling fan

FR-A8CN[]
FR-A8CN03 00630(11K) 00310(11K), 00380(15K)
00770(15K), 00930(18.5K),
FR-A8CN04 00470(18.5K), 00620(22K)
01250(22K) Heatsink
FR-A8CN05 01540(30K) 00770(30K)
00930(37K), 01160(45K),
FR-A8CN06 01870(37K), 02330(45K)
01800(55K)
FR-A8CN07 03160(55K) —
FR-A8CN08 03800(75K), 04750(90K) 03250(110K), 03610(132K) Cooling wind
FR-A8CN09 — 02160(75K), 02600(90K)
Enables the FR-A800 inverter to be installed using the mounting holes made for the
conventional FR-A700/A500/A200E series inverter.
This attachment is useful for replacing a conventional inverter with the FR-A800 series Inverter
FR-AAT
inverter.
FR-A5AT
The inverter with this attachment requires greater installation depth.
12
• Models replaceable with FR-A820
FR-A820
0.4K/0.75K 1.5K to 3.7K 5.5K/7.5K 11K 15K to 22K 30K 37K/45K 55K
0.4K/0.75K FR-A5AT01 — — — — — — —
1.5K to 3.7K FR-A5AT02 FR-A5AT02 — — — — — —
5.5K to 11K — FR-A5AT03 FR-A5AT03  — — — —
Conventional model and capacity
FR-A220E
15K — — FR-AAT02 FR-AAT24  — — —

18.5K/22K — — — FR-A5AT04 FR-A5AT04 — — —
30K — — — — FR-AAT27  — —
37K/45K — — — — — FR-AAT23  —
55K
0.4K/0.75K
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
FR-A5AT05
—

—
11
1.5K to 3.7K FR-AAT21  — — — — — —

FR-A520/A720
5.5K/7.5K — FR-AAT22  — — — — —
11K — — FR-A5AT03  — — — —
15K to 22K — — — FR-AAT24  — — —
30K — — — — FR-AAT27  — —
Intercompatibility 37K/45K — — — — — FR-AAT23  —
attachment
FR-AAT[] 55K — — — — — — FR-A5AT05 
FR-A5AT[] • Models replaceable with FR-A840
FR-A840
0.4K to 3.7K 5.5K/7.5K 11K/15K 18.5K/22K 30K 37K to 55K
0.4K to 3.7K FR-A5AT02 — — — — —
5.5K/7.5K FR-A5AT03 FR-A5AT03 — — — —
FR-A240E
11K/15K — FR-AAT02 FR-AAT24 — — —

18.5K/22K — — FR-A5AT04 FR-A5AT04 — —
Conventional model and capacity
30K — — — FR-AAT27  —
37K/45K — — — — FR-AAT23 
55K — — — — — FR-A5AT05
0.4K to 3.7K  — — — — —
FR-A540
5.5K/7.5K FR-AAT22  — — — —
11K to 22K — FR-AAT02 FR-AAT24  — —
30K — — — FR-AAT27  —
37K to 55K — — — — FR-AAT23 
0.4K to 3.7K  — — — — —
5.5K/7.5K FR-AAT22  — — — —
FR-A740
11K/15K — FR-A5AT03  — — —
18.5K/22K — — FR-AAT24  — —
30K — — — FR-AAT27  —
37K to 55K — — — — FR-AAT23 
: Replaceable without the intercompatibility attachment
FR-A5AT[], FR-AAT[]: Replaceable with the intercompatibility attachment.
175
This attachment allows the conventional FR-A700/A500 series control circuit terminal blocks to be installed without removing any
cables. This attachment is useful for replacing a conventional inverter with the FR-A800 series inverter.
FR-A8TAT
FR-A700/A500 series
block intercompatibility control circuit terminal block
attachment (a) For using the control circuit terminal block of the FR-A500 series, open or remove the cover of the control circuit
FR-A8TAT
terminal block. Otherwise, the front cover of the inverter may not close properly.
(b) Since the specifications of the control circuit terminals of the FR-A700/A500 series are different from those of the FR-
A800 series, certain functions of the inverter are restricted (refer to the table below).
Relay output 2 24 V external power Safety stop signal

terminals supply input terminal terminals
FR-A500 series   
FR-A700 series   
 ... Available, ... Not available
(c) The FR-A8NC, FR-A8NCE, or FR-A8NS plug-in option cannot be installed.
(d) When using a plug-in option, connect the plug-in option using a cable that can be routed through the space between
the the front cover and the control circuit terminal block (FR-A700 series: 7 mm, FR-A500 series: 0.8 mm).
Improves the power factor and reduces the harmonic current at the input side. Connect an AC reactor at the input side of the inverter.
• Selection method
Select an AC reactor according to the applied motor capacity. (Select the AC reactor according to the motor capacity even if the
capacity is smaller than the inverter capacity.)
• Connection diagram
FR-HAL Inverter
R X
R/L1 U Motor
Three-phase AC S Y
S/L2 V M
power supply
T Z
T/L3 W
• Outline dimension (Unit: mm)

Mass
Mass Model W W1 H D D1 d (kg)
Model W W1 H D D1 d
(kg)
H0.4K 135 120 115 64 45 M4 1.5
0.4K 104 84 99 72 40 M5 0.6
H0.75K 135 120 115 64 45 M4 1.5
0.75K 104 84 99 74 44 M5 0.8
H1.5K 135 120 115 64 45 M4 1.5
11 1.5K
2.2K
104
115
84
40
99
115
77
77
50
57
M5
M6
1.1
1.5
H2.2K 135 120 115 64 45 M4 1.5
H3.7K 135 120 115 74 57 M4 2.5
3.7K 115 40 115 83 67 M6 2.2
AC reactor H5.5K 160 145 142 76 55 M4 3.5

5.5K 115 40 115 83 67 M6 2.3
(for power supply H7.5K 160 145 142 96 75 M4 5.0
coordination) 7.5K 130 50 135 100 86 M6 4.2
FR-HAL-(H)[]K H11K 160 145 146 96 75 M4 6.0
11K 160 75 164 111 92 M6 5.2
H15K 220 200 195 105 70 M5 9.0
200 V
15K 160 75 167 126 107 M6 7.0

H18.5K 220 200 215 170 70 M5 9.0
18.5K 160 75 128 175 107 M6 7.1
400 V
H22K 220 200 215 170 70 M5 9.5

22K 185 75 150 158 87 M6 9.0
H30K 220 200 215 170 75 M5 11
30K 185 75 150 168 87 M6 9.7
H37K 220 200 214 170 100 M5 12.5
37K 210 75 175 174 82 M6 12.9
H45K 280 255 245 165 80 M6 15
45K 210 75 175 191 97 M6 16.4
H55K 280 255 245 170 90 M6 18
55K 210 75 175 201 97 M6 17.4
H75K 210 75 170 210.5 105 M6 20
75K 240 150 210 215.5 109 M8 23
H110K 240 150 225 220 99 M8 28
110K 330 170 325 259 127 M10 40
H185K 330 170 325 271 142 M10 55
H280K 330 170 325 321 192 M10 80
H355K 330 170 325 346 192 M10 90
H560K 450 300 540 635 345 M12 190
(a) Approximately 88% of the power factor improving effect can be obtained (92.3% when Less than D
calculated with 1 power factor for the fundamental wave according to the Architectural
Standard Specifications (Electrical Installation) (2013 revision) supervised by the Ministry of
H
Land, Infrastructure, Transport and Tourism of Japan).
(b) This is a sample outline dimension drawing. The shape differs by the model.
W1 and D1 indicate distances between installation holes. The installation hole size is
indicated by d.
(c) When installing an AC reactor (FR-HAL), install in the orientation shown below.
•(H)55K or lower: Horizontal installation or vertical installation
•(H)75K or higher: Horizontal installation D1 W1
(d) Keep enough clearance around the reactor because it heats up. W
(Keep a clearance of minimum 10cm each on top and bottom and minimum 5cm each on
right and left regardless of the installation orientation.)
176
Improves the power factor and reduces the harmonic current at the input side.
Make sure to install this option for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher. Also install this option
when using a motor of 75 kW or higher capacity. (The IP55 compatible model has a built-in DC reactor.)
Select a DC reactor according to the applied motor capacity. (Select it according to the motor capacity even if the capacity is smaller
than the inverter capacity.) (Refer to page 204.)
• Connection diagram FR-HEL
Connect a DC reactor to the inverter terminals P1
and P. Remove the jumper across terminals P1 and P1 P
Remove a jumper
P. If the jumper is left attached, no power factor across terminals P1-P.
improvement can be obtained. (The jumper is not The connection cable should be
5m maximum.
installed for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and
the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.) P1 P/+ N/-
The connection cable between the reactor and the Motor
R/L1 U
inverter should be as short as possible (5m or less). Three-phase V M
AC power supply S/L2
T/L3 W
Inverter

Less than D Less than D
Within H
H
H W D1
W1 D
W1 D1 W
W W1
FR-HEL-0.4K to 2.2K FR-HEL-3.7K to 55K FR-HEL-75K to 110K
FR-HEL-H0.4K FR-HEL-H0.75K to H55K FR-HEL-H75K to H355K
Mass
Mass Model W W1 W1 D D1 d (kg)
Model W W1 W1 D D1 d
(kg)
H0.4K 90 75 78 60 - M5 0.6
0.4K 70 60 71 61 - M4 0.4
H0.75K 66 50 100 70 48 M4 0.8
DC reactor 0.75K 85 74 81 61 - M4 0.5
H1.5K 66 50 100 80 54 M4 1
(for power supply 1.5K 85 74 81 70 - M4 0.8
coordination) H2.2K 76 50 110 80 54 M4 1.3
FR-HEL-(H)[]K 2.2K 85 74 81 70 - M4 0.9
H3.7K 86 55 120 95 69 M4 2.3
3.7K 77 55 92 82 57 M4 1.5
H5.5K 96 60 128 100 75 M5 3
5.5K 77 55 92 92 67 M4 1.9
H7.5K 96 60 128 105 80 M5 3.5
7.5K 86 60 113 98 72 M4 2.5
H11K 105 75 137 110 85 M5 4.5
11K 105 64 133 112 79 M6 3.3
H15K 105 75 152 125 95 M5 5
15K 105 64 133 115 84 M6 4.1
200 V
H18.5K 114 75 162 120 80 M5 5

18.5K 105 64 93 165 94 M6 4.7
H22K 133 90 178 120 75 M5 6
22K 105 64 93 175 104 M6 5.6
H30K 133 90 178 120 80 M5 6.5
11
30K 114 72 100 200 101 M6 7.8
H37K 133 90 187 155 100 M5 8.5
400 V
37K 133 86 117 195 98 M6 10

H45K 133 90 187 170 110 M5 10
45K 133 86 117 205 108 M6 11
H55K 152 105 206 170 106 M6 11.5

55K 153 126 132 209 122 M6 12.6
H75K 140 120 185 320 295 M6 16
75K 150 130 190 340 310 M6 17
H90K 150 130 190 340 310 M6 20
90K 150 130 200 340 310 M6 19
H110K 150 130 195 340 310 M6 22
110K 175 150 200 400 365 M8 20
H132K 175 150 200 405 370 M8 26
H160K 175 150 205 405 370 M8 28
H185K 175 150 240 405 370 M8 29
H220K 175 150 240 405 370 M8 30
H250K 190 165 250 440 400 M8 35
H280K 190 165 255 440 400 M8 38
H315K 210 185 250 495 450 M10 42
H355K 210 185 250 495 450 M10 46
(a) The size of the cables used should be equal to or larger than that of the power supply cables (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3). (Refer
to page 196)
(b) Approximately 93% of the power factor improving effect can be obtained (94.4% when calculated with 1 power factor
for the fundamental wave according to the Architectural Standard Specifications (Electrical Installation) (2010 revision)
supervised by the Ministry of Land, Infrastructure, Transport and Tourism of Japan).
(c) This is a sample outline dimension drawing. The shape differs by the model.
W1 and D1 indicate distances between installation holes. The installation hole size is indicated by d.
(d) When installing a DC reactor (FR-HEL), install in the orientation shown below.
•(H)55K or lower: Horizontal installation or vertical installation
•(H)75K or higher: Horizontal installation
(e) Keep enough clearance around the reactor because it heats up.
(Keep a clearance of minimum 10cm each on top and bottom and minimum 5cm each on right and left regardless of
the installation orientation.)
177
Use this option when the cable length from an inverter to the node point is less than 10 m.
Select a reactor according to the applied motor capacity.
Capacity of the
Inverter Number of system
inverters
Converter unit Balance reactor connected in Motor Output
Model Multi-rating parallel capacity current
(kW) (A)
2 630 1232
ND FR-CC2-H400K-P FR-POL-H400K
3 945 1848
FR-A842-400K-P
2 710 1386
LD FR-CC2-H450K-P FR-POL-H500K
3 1065 2078
2 710 1386
3 1065 2078
FR-A842-450K-P
2 800 1539
3 1200 2309
2 800 1539
3 1200 2309
FR-A842-500K-P
2 900 1750
3 1350 2626
Connect the balance reactor between each inverter and the motor as follows.
Example of parallel connection of two inverters Example of parallel connection of three inverters
Inverter FR-POL Inverter FR-POL

U U X U U X
V V Y V V Y
Balance reactor W W Z Motor
W W Z
FR-POL-H[]K U
V M
Inverter FR-POL Inverter FR-POL Motor
W
U U X U U X U
V V Y V V Y V M
W W Z Earth W W Z W
Node point
Inverter FR-POL Earth

U U X Node point
V V Y
W W Z
(a) Always connect one balance reactor to each inverter.

(b) FR-POL is usually earthed (grounded) by being mounted securely to the enclosure. If FR-POL is not earthed
(grounded) enough through the enclosure, use an earthing (grounding) cable. When using an earthing (grounding)
cable, wire the cable to the mounting hole for earthing (grounding) where varnish is removed.
11 • Outline dimension (Unit: mm)

FR-POL-H400K FR-POL-H500K
Hanging hole MAX 220 T6 Copper strip terminal

(φ20) (φ15-2)
25 ±1
60 ±1.5 (3.2)
Hanging hole MAX 240
T6 Copper
strip terminal (φ20) 75 ±1.5
40 ±1
(φ15-2) (3.2)
40 ±1
25 ±1
U V W
MAX 370
190 ±1.5
MAX 310
190 ±1.5
X Y Z U V W
X Y Z
40 ±1
25 ±1
25 ±1
170 ±1.5 Earthing

(grounding)
455 ±1.5 Earthing (grounding) point ∗1
point ∗1
480 ±2.5 170 ±1.5
Hole for M8 screw - 8
Hole for 455 ±1.5 (φ10 ±0.5 )
M8 screw - 8
(φ10 ±0.5 ) 480 ±2.5
Mass Mass
(kg) (kg)
58 61
 Use this portion to wire an earthing cable.
178
Install an EMC filter (ferrite core) to reduce the electromagnetic noise generated from the inverter. Effective in the range from about
0.5 MHz to 5 MHz. range from about 0.5 MHz to 5 MHz. The FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower are
equipped with built-in common mode chokes.
• Outline dimension
FR-BSF01 FR-BLF
31.5
110
95
7
2-φ5 φ7 130
22.5
85
Line noise filter
FR-BSF01
65
35
80
(for small capacities) /
FR-BLF 33
160
2.3
180
65
4.5
(Unit: mm)
(a) Wind each phase for three times (4T) in the same direction. (The greater
MCCB Inverter
the number of turns, the more effective result is obtained.)
When using several line noise filters to make 4T or more, wind the phases Power R/L1
(cables) together. Do not use a different line noise filter for different phases. supply S/L2
(b) When the cables are too thick to be winded, run each cable (phase) through Line noise T/L3
four or more filters installed in series in one direction. filter
(c) The filter can be used in the same way as the output side. When using
filters at the output side, do not wind the cable more than 3 times (4T) for each filter because the filter may overheat.
(d) A thick cable of 38 mm2 or more is not applicable to the FR-BSF01. Use FR-BLF for a larger diameter cable.
(e) Do not wind the earthing (grounding) cable.
Connecting the option improves the regenerative braking capability of the inverter.
Select the model according to the applied inverter capacity.
Outline dimension (mm) Resistance Approx

Model : Permissible
Model : Permissible Outline dimension (mm) Resistance Approx FR-ABR-[] brake duty
value mass
FR-ABR-[] brake duty W W1 D value mass W W1 D H (Ω) (kg)
H (Ω) (kg)
H0.4K 10% 115 500 40 21 1200 0.2
0.4K 10% 140 500 40 21 200 0.2
H0.75K 10% 140 500 40 21 700 0.2
0.75K 10% 215 500 40 21 100 0.4
H1.5K 10% 215 500 40 21 350 0.4
2.2K 10% 240 500 50 26 60 0.5
H2.2K 10% 240 500 50 26 250 0.5
3.7K 10% 215 500 61 33 40 0.8
H3.7K 10% 215 500 61 33 150 0.8
5.5K 10% 335 500 61 33 25 1.3
200 V
400 V
H5.5K 10% 335 500 61 33 110 1.3

7.5K 10% 400 500 80 40 20 2.2
H7.5K 10% 400 500 80 40 75 2.2
11K 6% 400 700 100 50 13 3.5
High-duty brake resistor 15K 6% 300 700 100 50

18
(×1/2)
2.4
(×2)
H11K 6%
H15K 6%
400 700 100 50 52
300 700 100 50

18
3.2
2.4 11
FR-ABR-(H)[]K (×2) (×2)
13 3.3

22K 6% 400 700 100 50 52 3.3
(×1/2) (×2) H22K 6% 450 700 100 50
(×1/2) (×2)
 For the 1.5K and 2.2K inverter.

 For the 15K brake resistor, configure so that two 18 Ω resistors are D
H
connected in parallel.
 For the 18.5K and 22K inverter.
For the 22K brake resistor, configure so that two 13 Ω resistors are
connected in parallel. W1+20
0 W
 For the H15K brake resistor, configure so that two 18 Ω resistors are
connected in series. FR-ABR-15K is indicated on the resistor. (same resistor
as the 200 V class 15K)
 For the H18.5K and H22K inverter.
For the H22K brake resistor, configure so that two 52 Ω resistors are connected in parallel.
(a) When using the FR-ABR type brake resistor, remove the jumper across terminal PR-PX. Failure to remove will cause
the brake resistor to overheat.
(b) The regenerative brake duty setting should be less than permissible brake duty in the table above.
(c) The temperature of the brake resistor becomes 300°C or more depending on the operation frequency, care must be
taken for installation and heat dissipation.
(d) MYS type resistor can be also used. Note the permissible brake duty.
(e) Do not remove a jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor.
(f) Install a thermal relay to prevent an overheat and burnout of the brake resistor.
179
Provides a braking capability greater than that is provided by an external brake resistor. This option can also be connected to the
inverters without built-in brake transistors. Three types of discharging resistors are available. Make a selection according to the
required braking torque.
• Specification
[Brake unit]
200 V 400 V
Model: FR-BU2-[]
1.5K 3.7K 7.5K 15K 30K 55K H7.5K H15K H30K H55K H75K H220K H280K
Applicable motor capacity The applicable capacity differs by the braking torque and the operation rate (%ED).
Connected brake resistor GRZG type, FR-BR, MT-BR5 (For the combination, refer to the table below.) MT-BR5
Multiple (parallel) driving Max. 10 units (However, the torque is limited by the permissible current of the connected inverter.)
Approximate mass (kg) 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 1.4 2.0 0.9 0.9 1.4 2.0 2.0 13 13
 Please contact your sales representative to use a brake resistor other than MT-BR5.
[Resistor unit]
200 V 400 V
Model: GRZG type  GZG300W- GRZG200- GRZG300- GRZG400- GRZG200- GRZG300- GRZG400-
50Ω (1 unit) 10Ω (3 units) 5Ω (4 units) 2Ω (6 units) 10Ω (3 units) 5Ω (4 units) 2Ω (6 units)
Number of connectable 3 in series 4 in series 6 in series 6 in series 8 in series 12 in series
1 unit
units (1 set) (1 set) (1 set) (2 sets) (2 sets) (2 sets)
Discharging resistor
combined resistance (Ω) 50
30 20 12 60 40 24
Continuous operation
100 300 600 1200 600 1200 2400
permissible power (W)
 The 1 set contains the number of units in the parentheses. For the 400 V class, 2 sets are required.
200 V 400 V 200 V 400 V

Model: FR-BR-[] Model: MT-BR5-[]
15K 30K 55K H15K H30K H55K 55K H75K
Discharging resistor Discharging resistor
8 4 2 32 16 8 2 6.5
combined resistance (Ω) combined resistance (Ω)
Continuous operation Continuous operation
Brake unit 990 1990 3910 990 1990 3910 5500 7500
FR-BU2-(H)[]K permissible power (W) permissible power (W)
Approximate mass (kg) 15 30 70 15 30 70 Approximate mass (kg) 70 65
Discharging resistor
GZG type • Combination between the brake unit and the resistor unit
GRZG type
Discharging resistor model or resistor unit model
Resistor unit GRZG type
FR-BR-(H)[]K Brake unit model
Number of FR-BR MT-BR5
MT-BR5-(H)[]K Model  connectable units
FR-BU2-1.5K GZG 300W-50Ω (1 unit) 1 unit - -
FR-BU2-3.7K GRZG 200-10Ω (3 units) 3 in series (1 set) - -
FR-BU2-7.5K GRZG 300-5Ω (4 units) 4 in series (1 set) - -
200 V
FR-BU2-15K GRZG 400-2Ω (6 units) 6 in series (1 set) FR-BR-15K -
FR-BU2-30K - - FR-BR-30K -
11 FR-BU2-55K
FR-BU2-H7.5K
-
GRZG 200-10Ω (3 units)
-
6 in series (2 sets)
FR-BR-55K
-
MT-BR5-55K
-
FR-BU2-H15K GRZG 300-5Ω (4 units) 8 in series (2 sets) FR-BR-H15K -
FR-BU2-H30K GRZG 400-2Ω (6 units) 12 in series (2 sets) FR-BR-H30K -

400 V FR-BU2-H55K - - FR-BR-H55K -
FR-BU2-H75K - - - MT-BR5-H75K
FR-BU2-H220K - - - 3MT-BR5-H75K 
FR-BU2-H280K - - - 4MT-BR5-H75K 
 The 1 set contains the number of units in the parentheses. For the 400 V class, 2 sets are required.
 The number next to the model name indicates the number of connectable units in parallel.
[GRZG type]
• The maximum temperature rise of the discharging resistors is about 100°C. Use heat-resistant wires to perform wiring, and make
sure that they will not come in contact with resistors.
• Do not touch the discharging resistor while the power is ON or for about 10 minutes after the power supply turns OFF. Otherwise
you may get an electric shock.
Power supply Braking Motor capacity

voltage torque 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15
50% 30s FR-BU2-1.5K FR-BU2-3.7K FR-BU2-7.5K FR-BU2-15K
200 V
100% 30s FR-BU2-1.5K FR-BU2-3.7K FR-BU2-7.5K FR-BU2-15K 2FR-BU2-15K 
50% 30s - FR-BU2-H7.5K FR-BU2-H15K
400 V
100% 30s - FR-BU2-H7.5K FR-BU2-H15K FR-BU2-H30K
Power supply Braking Motor capacity

voltage torque 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
50% 30s 2FR-BU2-15K 3FR-BU2-15K 4FR-BU2-15K
200 V 4FR-BU2-
100% 30s 3FR-BU2-15K 5FR-BU2-15K 6FR-BU2-15K 7FR-BU2-15K
15K
50% 30s FR-BU2-H30K 2FR-BU2-H30K 
400 V
100% 30s 2FR-BU2-H30K 3FR-BU2-H30K  4FR-BU2-H30K
 The number next to the model name indicates the number of connectable units in parallel.
 FR-A840-00052(1.5K) or lower capacity inverters cannot be used with brake units. When using brake units with inverters,
use the FR-A840-00083(2.2K) or higher capacity inverters.
180
[FR-BR]
The maximum temperature rise of the resistor unit is about 100°C. Therefore, use heat-resistant wires (such as glass wires).
%ED at short-time rating when braking torque is 100%

Motor capacity
Model
5.5kW 7.5kW 11kW 15kW 18.5kW 22kW 30kW 37kW 45kW 55kW
FR-BU2-15K 80 40 15 10 - - - - - -
200 V FR-BU2-30K %ED - - 65 30 25 15 10 - - -
FR-BU2-55K - - - - 90 60 30 20 15 10
FR-BU2-H15K 80 40 15 10 - - - - - -
400 V FR-BU2-H30K %ED - - 65 30 25 15 10 - - -
FR-BU2-H55K - - - - 90 60 30 20 15 10
Braking torque (%) at 10%ED in short-time rating of 15 s
Motor capacity
Model
5.5kW 7.5kW 11kW 15kW 18.5kW 22kW 30kW 37kW 45kW 55kW
FR-BU2-15K 280 200 120 100 80 70 - - - -
Braking
200 V FR-BU2-30K torque - - 260 180 160 130 100 80 70 -
(%)
FR-BU2-55K - - - - 300 250 180 150 120 100
FR-BU2-H15K 280 200 120 100 80 70 - - - -
Braking
400 V FR-BU2-H30K torque - - 260 180 160 130 100 80 70 -
(%)
FR-BU2-H55K - - - - 300 250 180 150 120 100
tb
Regeneration duty factor (operation frequency)%ED 100 tb<15s (continuous operation time)
tc
Example 1 Travel operation Example 2 Lift operation
Ascending
Speed
Speed
Brake unit
Descending
FR-BU2-(H)[]K
Time t Time t
tb
Discharging resistor tc
GZG type t1
GRZG type
tc t2 t3 t4 tb=t1+t2+t3+t4
Resistor unit
FR-BR-(H)[]K [MT-BR5]
MT-BR5-(H)[]K • Be sure to select a well-ventilated place for the installation of the resistor unit. Ventilation is necessary when installing the resistor in
a place such as an enclosure, where heat is not well diffused.
• The maximum temperature rise of the resistor unit is about 300deg. When wiring, be careful not to touch the resistor. Also, keep
any heat-sensitive component away from the resistor (minimum 40 to 50 cm).
• The temperature of the resistor unit abnormally increases if the brake unit is operated exceeding the specified duty. Since the
resistor unit may result in overheat if the temperature of the brake unit is left unchanged, switch off the inverter.
• A resistor unit is equipped with thermostat (NO contact) for overheat protection. If this protective thermostat activates in normal
operation, the deceleration time may be too short. Set the inverter's deceleration time longer. 11
%ED at short-time rating when braking torque is 100%

Number of Motor capacity
connectable 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 250 280 315 355 375 400 450 500 560
units kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW
200 V 1 5 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
FR-BU2-55K 2 20 15 10 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
400 V 1 10 5 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
FR-BU2-H75K 2 40 25 20 10 5 5 - - - - - - - - - -
400 V 1 80 60 40 25 15 10 10 5 - - - - - - - -
FR-BU2-H220K 2 - - - - - - 20 20 15 15 15 10 10 10 5 -
400 V 1 - 80 65 40 30 20 15 10 10 10 5 - - - - -
FR-BU2-H280K 2 - - - - - - - - - 20 20 15 15 15 10 10
Braking torque (%) in short-time rating of 15 s
Number of Motor capacity

connectable 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 250 280 315 355 375 400 450 500 560
units kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW
200 V 1 70 60 50 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
FR-BU2-55K 2 150 120 100 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
400 V 1 100 80 70 55 45 40 35 30 25 20 20 20 - - - -
FR-BU2-H75K 2 150 150 135 110 90 80 70 60 50 45 40 40 - - - -
400 V 1 200 200 150 150 135 115 100 80 55 - - - - - - -
FR-BU2-H220K 2 - - - - - - 190 170 150 150 140 120 110 100 90 80
400 V 1 - - 200 200 150 150 150 125 100 70 60 - - - - -
FR-BU2-H280K 2 - - - - - - - - - 180 160 150 150 130 115 100
 The number next to the model name indicates the number of connectable units in parallel.
 To obtain a large braking torque, the motor has to have a torque characteristic that meets the braking torque.
Check the torque characteristic of the motor.
181
ON OFF
T *12
MC
MC
Resistor unit or
Inverter discharging resistor
MCCB MC
Three-phase Resistor unit or
R/L1 U Motor discharging resistor P
P
AC power supply
S/L2 V M PR PR
T/L3 W
PR A PR
PR A
*9
PX P/+ P/+ B P/+ B
N/- N/- C N/- C
*11 *11 *11
RES RES
Reset
BUE *10 BUE *10
Brake permission signal SD SD
MSG MSG
Signal for SD SD
master/slave MSG MSG
SD SD
Brake unit Brake unit
FR-BU2 FR-BU2
When connecting
several brake units
 When using the FR-BU2 with the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and the FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower inverters, be sure
to remove the jumper across terminals PR and PX.
 A jumper is connected across BUE and SD in the initial status.
 When wiring, make sure to match the terminal symbol (P/+, N/-) at the inverter side and at the brake unit (FR-BU2) side.
Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. (For the FR-A820-00770(15K) to 02150(22K), and the FR-A840-
00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K), use terminals P3 and N/-.)
Do not remove the jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except for connecting the DC reactor.
 When the power supply is 400 V class, install a step-down transformer.
• Outline dimensions
<FR-BU2>
Brake unit
FR-BU2-(H)[]K
Model W H D
Discharging resistor FR-BU2-1.5K to 15K 68 128 132.5
H
GZG type
GRZG type FR-BU2-30K 108 128 129.5
FR-BU2-55K 170 128 142.5
Resistor unit
FR-BR-(H)[]K FR-BU2-H7.5K, H15K 68 128 132.5
MT-BR5-(H)[]K W FR-BU2-H30K 108 128 129.5
W D
D
FR-BU2-H55K, H75K 170 128 142.5
FR-BU2-1.5K to 55K FR-BU2-H220K, H280K FR-BU2-H220K, H280K 250 300 200
FR-BU2-H7.5K to H75K
(Unit: mm)
<GZG, GRZG>
11 Model W H D
H
GZG300W 335 78 40
GRZG200 306 55 26
GRZG300 334 79 40
W D GRZG400 411 79 40
(Unit: mm)
<FR-BR>
D Model W H D
FR-BR-15K 170 450 220
FR-BR-30K 340 600 220
FR-BR-55K 480 700 450
H FR-BR-H15K 170 450 220
FR-BR-H30K 340 600 220
FR-BR-H55K 480 700 450
(Unit: mm)
W
<MT-BR5>
85
NP
800
TH2 M4
M6 P PR TH1 E
30
40
85
193 189
37 60 10 21
480
510
75 300 75
4φ 15 installation hole 7.5 450 7.5
182
Enables continuous regenerative operation at 100% torque. This option can support continuous regenerative operations including
line operation.
This converter eliminates the need of preparing brake units per inverter. This converter can cut down the total space and the cost.
The regenerated energy is used by another inverter, and if there is still an excess, it is returned to the power supply, saving on the
energy consumption.
Select the model according to capacity of the inverter or the applicable motor, whichever larger.
R/L1 U
S/L2 ∗1
T/L3 V M
R1/L11 W
S1/L21
Dedicated stand-alone FR-CV type
reactor (FR-CVL)  Power regeneration Inverter
common converter
MCCB MC1
R/L11 R2/L12
Three-phase R2/L1
AC power S/L21 S2/L22
S2/L2 P/L+ P/+
supply T/L31 T2/L32 ∗2
T2/L3 N/L- N/-
P24 PC
R/L11
SD SD
S/L21 ∗4
RDYA
T/MC1 ∗5
RDYB X10 ∗3
RSO RES
SE
 Remove the jumpers across R/L1 and R/L11 and across S/L2 and S1/L21, and connect the power supply for the control
circuit to terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21. Do not connect anything to the power supply input terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3.
Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. Connecting the opposite polarity of terminals N/- and P/+ will damage the
inverter.
 Do not install an MCCB for terminals P/+ and N/- (between terminals P/L+ and P/+ or between N/L- and N/-).
Power regeneration Always match the terminal symbols (P/+, N/-) at the inverter side and at the power regeneration common converter side.
common converter Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.
FR-CV-(H)[]K  Assign the X10 signal to a terminal using any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection).
 Be sure to connect the power supply and terminals R/L11, S/L21, and T/MC1. Operating the inverter without connecting
them will damage the power regeneration common converter.
 Install the dedicated stand-alone reactor (FR-CVL) on a horizontal surface.
 Always connect terminal RDYB of the FR-CV to the inverter terminal where the X10 signal or the MRS signal is assigned to.
Always connect terminal SE of the FR-CV to the inverter terminal SD. Not connecting these terminals may damage the FR-
CV.
• Outline dimensions
FR-CV-(H) FR-CV-(H)
Voltage/ Voltage/
FR-CV-(H)-AT
capacity W D D1 H capacity W D D1 H
7.5K/11K 90 303 103 300 7.5K/

11K/15K 120 305 105 300
15K 120 305 105 300
200 V
400 V
H
H
22K/30K 150 322 122 380 22K/30K 150 305 105 380
11
37K/55K 400 250 135 620 37K/55K 400 250 135 620
W D1 (Unit: mm)
D D1 FR-CV-(H)-AT
W

D Voltage/ Voltage/
capacity W D D1 H capacity W D D1 H
7.5K/11K 110 315 115 330 7.5K/

130 320 120 330
200 V
400 V
15K 130 320 120 330 11K/15K

22K/30K 160 350 150 410 22K/30K 160 350 150 410
(Unit: mm)
FR-CVL
FR-CVL
D Voltage/ Voltage/
W H D W H D
capacity capacity
7.5K/ 7.5K/11K 220 200 135
165 155 130
11K/15K 15K 220 205 135
H
22K 165 155 140 22K 220 215 150
200 V
400 V
30K 215 175 160 30K 245 220 185

37K 220 200 320 37K 245 265 230
55K 250 225 335 55K 290 280 230
W
(Unit: mm)
183
A power regeneration converter allows energy generated at braking operation of the inverter to be regenerated to the power supply.
Since a converter does not require a discharging resistor necessary like a brake unit, it is effective in space and energy saving and it
provides a large peak braking torque.
Select the model according to the applied motor capacity.
MCCB MC1 MC2 Inverter
R/L1 U
Three-phase
AC power S/L2 V M
supply T/L3 W
R1/L11
DCL S1/L21
P1
P1
P/+ N/-
P
MT-RCL
Reset signal
R R2 P N RES
R2
S S2 STF
S2 SD
T T2
T2
C
B
R Alarm signal
A
S
RDY
T
R1 Ready signal
S1 SE
MT-RC
MT-RC-H75K MT-RC-H160K to H280K
2-φC hole Mounting foot (detachable) 3-φC hole Mounting foot (detachable)
H2
Mounting foot Mounting foot
H2
movable movable
Power regeneration
converter
MT-RC-H[]K
H1
H1
H
H
Accessory cover Accessory cover

(parameter unit (parameter unit
can not be used) can not be used)
H3
H3
C D1 C D1
W1 W2 W2
W D W1 D
W
11 Model W W1 W2 H H1 H2 H3 D D1 C
MT-RC-H75K 480 400 - 740 714 13 13 360 196 10
MT-RC-H160K 498 400 200 1010 984 13 13 380 196 10

400 V
MT-RC-H220K 680 600 300 1010 984 13 13 380 196 10

MT-RC-H280K 790 630 315 1330 1300 15 15 440 196 12
MT-RCL
Model W H D
MT-RCL-H75K 390 385 358
H
MT-RCL-H160K 515 465 380

400 V
MT-RCL-H220K 630 655 565

MT-RCL-H280K 690 690 620
W D
184
Substantially suppresses power harmonics to obtain the equivalent capacity conversion coefficient K5 = 0 specified in "the Harmonic
Suppression Guidelines for Consumers Who Receive High Voltage or Special High Voltage" in Japan.
The power regeneration function comes standard.
The common converter driving with several inverters is possible.
Select the model according to capacity of the inverter or the applicable motor, whichever larger.
• Specifications
Model: 200 V 400 V

FR-HC2-[]
 7.5K 15K 30K 55K 75K H7.5K H15K H30K H55K H75K H110K H160K H220K H280K H400K H560K
Applicable 3.7K 7.5K 15K 30K 37K 3.7K 7.5K 15K 30K 37K 55K 90K 110K 160K 200K 280K
inverter
capacity to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to
(ND rating) 7.5K 15K 30K 55K 75K 7.5K 15K 30K 55K 75K 110K 160K 220K 280K 400K 560K
Rated input Three-phase 200 V to 220 V

voltage/ 50 Hz Three-phase 380 V to 460 V 50/60 Hz
frequency 200 V to 230 V 60 Hz
Rated input
33 61 115 215 278 17 31 57 110 139 203 290 397 506 716 993
current (A)
 The total capacity of the connected inverters.
 If a high power factor converter (FR-HC2) is purchased, it comes with reactor 1 (FR-HCL21), reactor 2 (FR-HCL22), and an
outside box (FR-HCB2). Do not connect the DC reactor to the inverter when using a high power factor converter.
(If an H280K or higher is purchased, it comes with FR-HCL21, FR-HCL22, FR-HCC2, FR-HCR2, and FR-HCM2.)
High power factor
converter High power factor
Reactor 1 Reactor 2 Outside box
Voltage
FR-HC2- (H)[]K converter

Capacity FR-HC2 FR-HCL21 FR-HCL22 FR-HCB2
W H D W H D W H D W H D
7.5K 220 260 170 132 150 100 237.5 230 140
190 320 165
15K 250 400 190 162 172 126 257.5 260 165
200 V
30K 325 550 195 195 210 150 342.5 305 180
270 450 203
55K 370 620 250 210 180 200.5 432.5 380 280
75K 465 620 300 240 215 215.5 474 460 280 400 450 250
H7.5K 220 300 190 132 140 100 237.5 220 140
H15K 220 300 190 162 170 126 257.5 260 165 190 320 165
H30K 325 550 195 182 195 101 342.5 300 180
H55K 370 670 250 282.5 245 165 392.5 365 200 270 450 203
H75K 325 620 250 210 175 210.5 430 395 280 300 350 250
400 V
H110K 465 620 300 240 230 220 500 440 370 350 450 380
H160K 498 1010 380 280 295 274.5 560 520 430
400 450 440
H220K 498 1010 380 330 335 289.5 620 620 480
H280K 680 1010 380 330 335 321 690 700 560 - - -
H400K
H560K
790
790
1330
1330
440
440
402
452
460
545
550
645
632
632
675
720
705
745
-
-
-
-
-
-
11

High power factor converter Reactor 1, Reactor 2 Outside box
P.CPY PWR
FAN
REGEN....... DRIVE
PSCLR
H
W D W D
W D
 Install reactors (FR-HCL21 and 22) on a horizontal surface.
 The H280K or higher are not equipped with FR-HCB2. A filter capacitor and inrush current limit resistors are provided
instead.
185
A surge voltage suppression filter limits surge voltage applied to motor terminals when driving the 400 V class motor by the inverter.
• Specifications
400 V
Model: FR-ASF-[]
H1.5K H3.7K H7.5K H15K H22K H37K H55K
Applicable motor capacity (kW) 0.4 to 1.5 2.2 to 3.7 5.5 to 7.5 11 to 15 18.5 to 22 30 to 37 45 to 55
Rated input current (A) 4.0 9.0 17.0 31.0 43.0 71.0 110.0
Overload current rating  150% 60 s, 200% 0.5 s
Rated input AC voltage  Three-phase 380 V to 460 V 50 Hz/60 Hz
Maximum AC voltage fluctuation  Three-phase 506 V 50 Hz/60 Hz
Maximum frequency  400 Hz
PWM frequency permissible range 0.5 kHz to 14.5 kHz
Maximum wiring length between
300 m
the filter-motor
Approx. mass (kg) 8.0 11.0 20.0 28.0 38.0 59.0 78.0
Surrounding air temperature -10°C to +50°C (non-freezing)
Environment
Surrounding air humidity 90% RH or less (non-condensing)

Altitude/vibration Maximum 1000 m above sea level, 5.9 m/s2 or less at 10 to 55 Hz (directions of X,
Y, Z axes)
Surge voltage  Determined by the specification of the connected inverter (400 V class).
suppression filter
FR-ASF-H[]K • Connection diagram
Within 5 m
Within 300 m
Inverter FR-ASF
MCCB MC
Motor
Three- R U U X
phase AC S V V Y IM
power supply T W W Z

Model W H D
FR-ASF-H1.5K 220 193 160
FR-ASF-H3.7K 220 200 180
FR-ASF-H7.5K 280 250 215
H
FR-ASF-H15K  335 260 285

11 FR-ASF-H22K  335 340 349
FR-ASF-H37K  375 445 388
W D
FR-ASF-H55K  395 445 568

 This indicates the maximum dimension.
 The H15K or higher has a different shape.
186
Limits surge voltage applied to motor terminals when driving a 400 V class motor with an inverter.
This filter is compatible with the 5.5 to 37 kW motors.
• Specifications
Model: FR-BMF-H[]K 7.5 15 22 37
Applicable motor
capacity (kW)  5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37
Rated current (A) 17 31 43 71

Overload current rating 150% 60 s, 200% 0.5 s (inverse-time characteristics)
Rated AC input voltage Three-phase 380 to 480 V
Permissible AC voltage 323 to 528 V
fluctuation
Maximum frequency 120 Hz
PWM carrier frequency 2 kHz or lower
Protective structure (JEM Open type (IP00)
1030)
Cooling system Self-cooling
Maximum wiring length 100m or lower
Approx. mass (kg) 5.5 9.5 11.5 19
Surrounding air
-10°C to +50°C (non-freezing)
temperature
Environment
Surrounding air
90% RH or less (non-condensing)
humidity
Altitude/vibration Maximum 1000 m above sea level, 5.9 m/s2 or less at 10 to 55 Hz (directions
of X, Y, Z axes)
 Indicates the maximum capacity applicable with the Mitsubishi Electric 4-pole standard motor. (PM motors are not
applicable.)
 Determined by the specification of the connected inverter (400 V class).
 Set the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection to 2 kHz or less.
 When an inverter has a filter mounted on its back, do not use such an inverter on a moving object or in a place that vibrates
Surge voltage
(exceeding 1.96 m/s2).
suppression filter
FR-BMF-H[]K • Connection diagram
within 100m
MCCB MC Inverter FR-BMF
Three- R U X
phase S V Y M
AC power T W Z
supply
T* TH0
TH1
ON OFF
MC
11

MC
* Install a step-down transformer.
FR-BMF-H7.5K FR-BMF-H15K, H22K FR-BMF-H37K
230 2- φ 6 hole 260 2- φ 10 hole 245
208 230
195 75 195 100
4-M5 180 50 31
150 45 13.5 4-M8
2- φ 10 hole
4-M4
6-M5
138
245
550
525
285
245
380
325
340
325
480
500
457
Terminal layout
X Y Z TH0 TH1
149.5
Rating
Rating
plate
Earth terminal (M5)

plate
Earth terminal Terminal layout

Earth terminal Terminal layout (M8)
Rating
plate
X Y Z
205
165
X Y Z TH0 TH1
60
(M6)
7.5
TH0 TH1
370
6 6
450
7.5
80
33
12.5
2.3 10
420
Red White Blue Crimping terminal 5.5-4

10
(U) (V) (W) 10 80

Isolation cap color
10
Red White Blue Crimping terminal
(U) (V) (W) 22-6 130
Main terminal block (M4) Red White Blue Crimping terminal: 8-6 Isolation cap color
(U) (V) (W)
2.3 Control terminal block (M3) Isolation cap color Main terminal block (M6)
Main terminal block (M5)
2.3 Control terminal block (M3)
2.3
(Unit: mm)
Control terminal block (M3) (Unit: mm)
2.3
(Unit: mm)
187
• Sine wave filter application
A sine wave filter can be installed to adjust the motor voltage and current waveforms to be sine waves. Install a sine wave filter to
the output side of the inverter . This filter is compatible with the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or
higher.
(This product is available only with general-purpose motors.) A sine wave filter will bring operation characteristic equivalent to the
operation with a sine wave power supply and also will provide the following benefits. A sine wave filter will bring operation
characteristic equivalent to the operation with a sine wave power supply and also will provide the following benefits.
(a) Low noise
(b) No surge current
(c) Small motor losses (for a standard motor)
• Operating condition
The following settings and conditions are required to use a sine wave filter.
(a) Set "25" in Pr.72. (The initial value is "2".)
This setting changes the carrier frequency to 2.5 kHz. (A sine wave filter is designed on the assumption of 2.5 kHz
carrier frequency. Always change this setting.) The operation with Pr.72 = "25" setting may damage inverter and the
sine wave filter.
(b) A sine wave filter can be used for the operation with an inverter output frequency of 60 Hz or lower.
It cannot be used for the operation with higher frequency. (Using it with the higher frequency will increases the filter loss.)
(c) It is applicable only under V/F control. (When Pr.72 = "25", V/F control is automatically set.)
(d) When using the sine wave filter and the FR-HC2 together, use the MT-BSL-HC.
• Circuit configuration and connection
Sine wave filter
U X
Inverter V Y
(Carrier 2.5 kHz) IM
W Z
Motor
Reactor
+ voltage
0 Capacitor (Capacitor)
-
Inverter output * Install the filter near the inverter. current
voltage For a capacitor cable, use a cable
wave form with size larger than indicated in the Wave form at a
table below "recommended cable motor terminal
size ".
Motor Model
capacity Applicable inverter
(kW) Reactor for filter Capacitor for filter
75 MT-BSL-75K 1×MT-BSC-75K
200 V
90 MT-BSL-90K 1×MT-BSC-90K
75 MT-BSL-H75K(-HC) 1×MT-BSC-H75K
90 MT-BSL-H110K(-HC) 1×MT-BSC-H110K Select an inverter where
110 MT-BSL-H110K(-HC) 1×MT-BSC-H110K the rated motor current
132 MT-BSL-H150K(-HC) 2×MT-BSC-H75K × 1.1 will be 90% or less
Sine wave filter 400 V 160 MT-BSL-H220K(-HC) 2×MT-BSC-H110K of the inverter rated
MT-BSL-(H)[]K current.
MT-BSC-(H)[]K 185 MT-BSL-H220K(-HC) 2×MT-BSC-H110K
 When using two or three capacitors,
install them in parallel as shown in the
280 MT-BSL-H280K(-HC) 3×MT-BSC-H110K wiring diagram.
11 • Reactor for sine wave filter

Rating plate
Mass
Terminal H Model A B C D E
(kg) F G H
*
MT-BSL-75K 330 150 285 185 216 328 M10 M12 80
200 V
U V W MT-BSL-90K 390 150 320 180 220 330 M12 M12 120
C
X Y Z
MT-BSL-H75K 330 150 285 185 216 318 M10 M10 80
MT-BSL-H75K-HC 385 150 345 185 216 315 M10 M10 110
B
D MT-BSL-H110K 390 150 340 195 235 368 M12 M12 140
A
4-G
E MT-BSL-H110K-HC 420 170 400 195 235 370 M12 M12 180
F MT-BSL-H150K 455 200 397 200 240 380 M12 M12 190
400 V
installation
hole MT-BSL-H150K-HC 450 300 455 390 430 500 M12 M12 250
* Remove the eye nut after installation of the product. MT-BSL-H220K 495 200 405 250 300 420 M12 M12 240
This is a sample of the outer appearance, MT-BSL-H220K-HC 510 350 540 430 485 555 M12 M12 310
which differs depending on the model. MT-BSL-H280K 575 200 470 310 370 485 M12 M12 340
MT-BSL-H280K-HC 570 400 590 475 535 620 M12 M12 480
Install the reactor on a horizontal surface.
• Capacitor for sine wave filter
Terminals I Model A B C D E F G H I Mass(kg)
G G
MT-BSC-75K 207 191 285 233 72 41 45 φ7 M8 3.9
400 V 200 V
MT-BSC-90K 282 266 240 183 92 56 85 φ7 M12 5.5

MT-BSC-H75K 207 191 220 173 72 41 55 φ7 M6 3.0
C
D
MT-BSC-H110K 207 191 280 233 72 41 55 φ7 M6 4.0
When installing, allow 25 mm or more gap between capacitors.

B F • Recommended cable gauge
A E The gauge of the cables used between the inverter and the MT-BSL as well as the MT-BSL and
4-H the induction motor varies according to U, V, and W as indicated on page 196.
Installation hole The following table shows the cable gauge of the MT-BSC connecting cable.
MT-BSC-75K MT-BSC-90K MT-BSC-H75K MT-BSC-H110K
38 mm2 38 mm2 22 mm2 22 mm2
188
 Dedicated cable option
• For dedicated motors
Inverter side Encoder side connector

D/MS3057-12A
D/MS3106B20-29S
F-DPEVSB 12P 0.2 mm
Earth (Ground) wire
60 mm
11 mm
L
• A shield earthing (grounding) P-clip is
included.
Positioning guide (key groove)
Inverter (When the FR-A8AP is used) Encoder
PA1 A A B
M
PA2 B N C
L P
PB1 C T D
K R
S E
PB2 D
J
PZ1 F F
H G
PZ2 G
D/MS3106B20-29S
(As viewed from wiring side)
Encoder cable PG S Model Length L (m)
FR-V7CBL[]
SD R FR-V7CBL5 5
FR-V7CBL15 15
2 mm2 FR-V7CBL30 30
• For cables of 30 m or longer, contact your sales representative.
• Cable fabrication specifications
When option connection cables are not available, fabricate cables according to the following table.
Use parallel connection or a large-gauge cable for wiring between terminals PG and SD and the motor end encoder. (For cables
for other terminals, use cables 0.2 mm2. )
Options Cable gauge for terminals PG and SD

Wiring dedicated encoder
distance For wiring using cables For wiring using a cable
cable 0.2 mm2 with larger gauge
5 m or lower FR-V7CBL5 2 or more cables in parallel
0.4 mm2 or more
10 m or lower 2 or more cables in parallel
FR-V7CBL15
0.75 mm2 or more
FR-V7CBL30
50 m or lower * Cables on order
100 m or lower Consult us separately.
6 or more cables in parallel
1.25 mm2 or more
11

Encoder connector (DDK Ltd.) (reference) (unit: mm)
Straight plug D/MS3106B20-29S Angle plug D/MS3108B20-29S
18.26 76.98 or less

1-3/16-18UNEF-2A hole 1-1/4-18UNEF-2B hole
18.26 1-1/4-18UNEF-2B hole
2 0 - 2 3 PF
47 or less
W Z
22.92
A
φ37.28
2 0 - 2 3 PF
X B Y
W Z
A
φ37.28
9.53 or more
X B Y
33.3
9.53 or more
55.57 or less 18.79 or less
1-3/16-18UNEF-2A hole
• This angle type connector is not an option item. Prepare the connector at the
customer's side.
Cable clamp D/MS3057-12A
23.8
1-3/16-18UNEF hole 9
φ15.9
（Bushing ID）
35.0
37.3
±0.7
φ19.0
（Cable clamp ID）
4.0
(Movable range on one side)
189
 Cable glands and nuts (IP55 compatible model)
For wiring of the IP55 compatible model, fix the cables using a cable gland and a nut, according to the diameter of the holes of the wiring
cover.
For the details such as wiring cover hole diameters and recommended cable glands, refer to the following table.
FR-A846-00023(0.4K) to FR-A846-00250(7.5K) to FR-A846-00620(22K) to FR-A846-01800(55K) to 03610(132K)
00170(5.5K) 00470(18.5K) 01160(45K)
(a) (a) (a) (a) (a) (a) (a) (a) (a) (a) (a)
(a) (a) (c)

(b) (c) (d) (a)
(b) (c) (d)
(a)
(b) (d)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Hole
Inverter capacity Symbol Recommended diameter Recommended cable gland Recommended nut
layout example (mm) (Manufactured by LAPP KABEL) (Manufactured by LAPP KABEL)
SKINTOP MS-SC-M20 53112630 

(a) Control circuit wiring 20.3 SKINDICHT SM-M20 52103020
SKINTOP MS-M20 53112020 
FR-A846-00023(0.4K) (b) AC power input wiring
to 00170(5.5K) SKINTOP MS-SC-M32 53112650 
(c) Brake unit connection wiring 32.3 SKINTOP MS-M32 BRUSH 53112677  SKINDICHT SM-M32 52103040
SKINTOP MS-M32 53112040 
(d) Inverter output wiring
SKINTOP MS-M20 53112020 
FR-A846-00250(7.5K) (b) AC power input wiring
to 00470(18.5K) SKINTOP MS-SC-M40 53112660 
(c) Brake unit connection wiring 40.4 SKINTOP MS-M40 BRUSH 53112678  SKINDICHT SM-M40 52103050
SKINTOP MS-M40 53112050 
SKINTOP MS-M20 53112020
FR-A846-00620(22K) (b) AC power input wiring
to 02600(90K) SKINTOP MS-M63 BRUSH 53112680 
(c) Brake unit connection wiring 63 SKINDICHT SM-M63 52103070
SKINTOP MS-M63 53112070 
SKINTOP MS-M20 53112020 
11 FR-A846-03250(110K) (b)
to 03610(132K)
(c)
AC power input wiring
Brake unit connection wiring 63
SKINTOP MS-M63 BRUSH PLUS 53112681 
SKINDICHT SM-M63 52103070
SKINTOP MS-M63 PLUS 53112080 
 EMC-compliant cable gland

 General-purpose cable gland
190
 Recommended EMI filter by Soshin Electric Co., Ltd.
The following table indicates the specifications of the EMI filters used with inverters.
Inverter model EMI filter model Inverter model EMI filter model
FR-A840-[ ] SLD LD ND HD FR-A840-[ ] SLD LD ND HD
00023(0.4K) 03250(110K) HF3600C-SJB HF3300C-SJB
00038(0.75K) HF3010C-SZA 03610(132K) HF3600C-SJB HF3300C-SJB
00052(1.5K) 04320(160K)
00083(2.2K) 04810(185K)
HF3020C-SZA HF3600C-SJB
00126(3.7K) 05470(220K)
00170(5.5K) HF3030C-SZA HF3020C-SZA 06100(250K)
00250(7.5K) HF3030C-SZA 06830(280K) HF31000C-SJB
00310(11K) HF3040C-SZA
00380(15K) HF3050C-SZA HF3040C-SZA Inverter model EMI filter model
FR-A842-[ ] SLD LD ND HD
00470(18.5K) HF3060C-SZA
00620(22K) HF3080C-SZA 07700(315K)
00770(30K) HF3100C-SZA 08660(355K) HF31000C-SJB
00930(37K) HF3150C-SZA HF3100C-SZA 09620(400K)
01160(45K) HF3150C-SZA 10940(450K) HF31200C-SJB
01800(55K) HF3200C-SZA 12120(500K) HF31600C-SJB
02160(75K)
HF3250C-SZA
02600(90K)
• Noise filter wiring example

Install the recommended EMI filter by Soshin Electric Co., Ltd. to the input EMI filter Inverter
side of the inverter, as shown below.
Three 1 4 R U
phase 2 5 S V Motor
AC 3 6 W
T
 Recommended ferrite core by NEC TOKIN Corporation

The following ferrite core is recommended to be used in combination with the inverter (IP55 compatible model) to support compliance with the
shipping classifications.
Model: ESD-SR-250
11
191
Low-Voltage Switchgear/Cables
 Mitsubishi Electric Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers
WS-V Series
"WS-V Series" is the new circuit breakers that have a lot of superior aspects such as higher breaking
capacity, design for easy use, standardization of accessory parts, and compliance to the global
standards.
 Features
 Technologies based on long years of experience are brought
together to achieve improved performance
The new circuit breaking technology "Expanded ISTAC" has improved the New circuit breaking technology (Expanded ISTAC)
currentlimiting performance and upgraded the overall breaking capacity.
Expansion of the conductor under the stator shortens the contact parting time of the Grid
Arc
mover as compared to the conventional ISTAC structure. Movable conductor
The current-limiting performance has been improved remarkably. (The maximum
Current C
peak current value has been reduced by approx. 10%.) Current
 Compact design for ease of use Increased reaction force of Reaction circuit
The thermal adjustable circuit breakers and electronic circuit breakers are smaller. movable conductor
NF250-SGW NF250-SGV
Current B Fixed conductor
Volume ratio 79% Breaking capacity comparison with a conventional model

(Compared with our conventional models)
250-RG 20 %
UP
(Conventional model: (New model: 250-H 50 %

UP
Model Name
105 × 165 × 86 mm) 105 × 165 × 68 mm)

250-S 20 % WS-V Series
UP
WS Series
 Types of internal accessories are reduced from 3 types to 1 type 250-C 38.8%
UP
Standardization of internal accessories contributes to a reduction of stock and 125-RG 20 %
UP
delivery time.
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
kA at 400 V AC lcu
Conventional models Three types For 32/63AF
For 125AF
For 250AF
12 New models One type For 32 to 250AF

Applicable accessories
AL AX AL+AX SHT UVT
 Lineup of UL 489 listed circuit breakers with 54 mm width "Small Fit"

The compact breakers contribute to a size reduction of machines, and IEC 35 mm rail mounting is standard.
For security and standard compliance of machines, F-type and V-

type operating handles are available for breakers with 54 mm width.
NF50-SVFU NF100-CVFU NV50-SVFU NV100-CVFU
 Lineup of UL 489 listed circuit breakers for 480 V AC "High Performance"

The breaking capacity has been improved to satisfy the request for SCCR upgrading.
Breaking capacity of UL 489 listed circuit breakers for 480 V

AC (UL 489)
NF125-SVU/NV125-SVU ................................30 kA
NF125-HVU/NV125-HVU ................................50 kA
NF250-SVU/NV250-SVU ................................35 kA
NF250-HVU/NV250-HVU ................................50 kA
NF125-SVU NF125-HVU NF250-SVU NF250-HVU
192
 Mitsubishi Electric Magnetic Motor Starters and Magnetic Contactors MS-T Series
MS-T series is newly released.
The MS-T series is smaller than ever, enabling more compact control panel. The MS-T series is suitable for other Mitsubishi
Electric FA equipment. In addition, the MS-T conforms to a variety of global standards, supporting the global use.
DC operated SD-T magnetic contactors (13 A frame to 32 A frame) are now available.
 Features
 Compact
The width of the 10 A-frame model is as small as 36 mm.
General-purpose magnetic contactor with smallest width in the industry.
S-T10
The width of MS-T series is reduced by 32% as compared to the prior MS-N series, enabling a more compact panel.
For selection, refer to page 196.
 Based on Mitsubishi Electric research as of February 2015 in the general-purpose magnetic contactor industry for 10 A-frame class.
[Unit: mm]
Frame size 11 A 13 A 20 A 25 A
43 43 53 63 75
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
MS-N series
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 13 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 21 13 21
13 43
21 31
22 32
14 44
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 14 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 22 14 22

2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
S-N10 S-N11 (Auxiliary 1-pole) S-N12 (Auxiliary 2-pole) S-N20 S-N25

36 43 43 63
New MS-T series

m! m! m! m!
-7 m -10 m -20 m -12 m
S-T10 S-T12 (Auxiliary 2-pole) S-T20 S-T25
Frame size 13 A 18 A 20 A 32 A
43 53 63
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 13 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 21 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
SD-N None 13
21
22
43
31
32
None
14 44
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 14 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 22

2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
SD-N11 SD-N12 SD-N21

43 43 63 43
-10 mm! New New

SD-T (New model)
SD-T12 SD-T20 SD-T21 SD-T32

 Standardization
• Covers provided as standard equipment
Safety improvement is achieved by the standard terminal cover.
• Widened range of operation coil ratings (AC operated model)
The widened range reduces the number of operation coil rating 12
It is not necessary for the new MS-T series to order a dedicated types from 14 (MS-N series) to 7.
terminal cover (S-N[]CX) or a retrofit cover (UN-CW, etc.), which is The reduced number of the operation coil types enables more Low-Voltage Switchgear/Cables
required for the former MS-N series. (Prevention of failure to order)
The number of items in stock can be reduced. simplified customers' ordering process and the faster delivery.
• The standard integrated terminal cover eliminates the need for • Customers can select the operation coil more easily.
additional ordering. (Conventional product) (MS-T series)
Coil Rated voltage [V] Rated voltage [V]
designation 50 Hz 60 Hz Coil
12 VAC 12 12 designation 50 Hz/60 Hz
24 VAC 24 24
ted
Integra ngs
48 VAC 48 to 50 48 to 50 24 VAC 24
100 VAC 100 100 to 110 ti
rs are 120 VAC 110 to 120 115 to 120
48 VAC 48 to 50
coil ra te
C o v e d as a
e
attach ard.
127 VAC 125 to 127 127 100 VAC 100 to 127 facilit n!
tio
selec
200 VAC 200 200 to 220
stand 220 VAC 208 to 220 220
200 VAC 200 to 240
230 VAC 220 to 240 230 to 240 300 VAC 260 to 300
260 VAC 240 to 260 260 to 280
Covers + Contactor 380 VAC 346 to 380 380 400 VAC 380 to 440
400 VAC 380 to 415 400 to 440 500 VAC 460 to 550
440 VAC 415−440 460 to 480
(Conventional product) （MS-T series） 500 VAC 500 500 to 550 ∗12 VAC type is made on order.
 Global Standard
• Conforms to various global standards
Not only major global standards such as IEC, JIS, UL, CE, and CCC but also ship standards and other country standards are planned to be certified.
• Conforms to various global standards
Applicable Standard Safety Standard
International Japan Europe China U.S.A./ Canada
EN Certification
GB
Standard EC Directive body
IEC  JIS

 The MS-T series also provide safe isolation (mirror contact) specified in the IEC standard.
 The motor starters are certified under each type name of the magnetic contactors and the thermal overload relays on the condition that the magnetic
contactors and the thermal overload relays are used in combination.
193
 Mitsubishi Electric Magnetic Motor Starters and Magnetic Contactors
MS-N Series (32 A-Frame Class or Higher)
Environment-friendly Mitsubishi Electric MS-N series ensures safety and conforms to various global standards. Its
compact size contributes to space-saving in a machine. The MS-N series is suitable for other Mitsubishi Electric FA
equipment and can be used globally.
 Features S-N35CX
 Bifurcated contact adopted to achieve high contact reliability
Contact reliability is greatly improved by combining bifurcated moving contact and stationary contact.
This series responds to the various needs such as the application to safety circuit.
(The MS-T series also has bifurcated contacts.)
 Mirror contact (auxiliary contact off at main contact welding)

The MS-N series meets requirements of "Control functions in the event of failure" described in EN 60204- Main contact welding
1 "Electrical equipment of machines", being suitable as interlock circuit contact. The MS-N series is
applicable for category 4 safety circuit. We ensure safety for our customers.
(The MS-T series also has mirror contacts.) Auxiliary
normally
closed
 Various option units Gap contact
Various options including surge absorbers and additional auxiliary contact blocks are available.
 Motor Circuit Breaker MMP-T Series

Motor circuit protection (against overload / phase loss / short-circuit) is achievable the MMP-T series alone.
The wire-saving, space-saving design enables downsizing of the enclosure.
The MMP-T series can be used in combination with the MS-T series (DC operated model).
 The connection conductor unit for the DC operated compact model (SD-T) is to be released soon.
 Features MMP-T32
 What is the motor circuit breaker?  Space-saving design for downsizing of the enclosure
The motor circuit breaker, applicable to the motor circuit, has the
functions of a circuit breaker and a thermal overload relay in one Example of space saving
unit. The motor circuit breaker provides protection against
overload, phase loss, and short circuit. Conventional system Motor circuit breakers system
Motor circuit configuration Motor circuit configuration using a

using a circuit breaker and a motor circuit breaker and a Inside the enclosure Inside the enclosure
magnetic contactor magnetic contactor
With motor circuit breakers
Disconnection
ations
Circuit opening/ All oper or control
an mot
closing other th rformed alone
ar e pe
Short-circuit
Circuit breaker protection
Motor circuit breaker
Device
12
protection
Magnetic contactor
Motor control ing
wnsiz
er do losure
Magnetic contactor Furth enc

(New MS-T series) of the
Thermal overload relay Overload protection
 Wire saving Example of wire saving

Using a connection conductor unit (option) for connecting a
motor circuit breaker and a contactor reduces work hours Wire connection example Conductor unit connection example
required for wiring.
A connection conductor unit for the high sensitivity contactor
(SD-Q) is also available. (Model: UT-MQ12)
Wire
Connection
conductor unit Magnetic
contactor
coil terminal
section
UT-MQ12 application example
 Compliance to major standards support customers' overseas business

• Compliance with major global standards
Not only major international standards such as IEC, JIS, UL, CE, and CCC but also other national standards are certified. This will help our
customers expand their business in foreign countries.
Applicable Standard Safety Standard
International Japan Europe China U.S.A./ Canada
EN Certification
Standard GB
EC Directive body
IEC JIS
• UL60947-4-1A Type E/F is also covered.

Compliance of the device to UL's Type E/F combination can surely support export to the United States.
194
 Selecting the rated sensitivity current for the earth leakage circuit breaker
When using an earth leakage circuit breaker with the inverter circuit, select its rated sensitivity current as follows, independently of the PWM
carrier frequency.
• Breaker designed for harmonic and surge suppression <Example>
Rated sensitivity current
In10×(Ig1+Ign+Igi+Ig2+Igm) 5.5 mm2 5 m 5.5 mm2 50 m
• Standard breaker ELB Noise

Rated sensitivity current filter
φ3
In10×{Ig1+Ign+Igi+3×(Ig2+Igm)}
Inverter M 200 V
2.2 kW
Ig1, Ig2: Leakage currents in wire path during commercial power
Ig1 Ign Ig2 Igm
supply operation
Ign: Leakage current of inverter input side noise filter Igi
Igm: Leakage current of motor during commercial power supply (a) Install the earth leakage circuit breaker (ELB) on the input side of the
operation inverter.
Igi: Leakage current of inverter unit (b) In the connection earthed-neutral system, the sensitivity current
is blunt against a ground fault in the inverter output side. Earthing
(Grounding) must conform to the requirements of national and local
Example of leakage current of
Leakage current example of safety regulations and electrical codes. (NEC section 250, IEC 61140
cable path per 1 km during the
three-phase induction motor class 1 and other applicable standards)
commercial power supply operation
when the CV cable is routed in
during the commercial  Selection example (in the case of the above figure)
power supply operation
metal conduit
(200 V 60 Hz) Breaker designed
(200 V 60 Hz) for harmonic and Standard breaker
2.0 surge suppression
Leakage currents (mA)
Leakage currents (mA)
120
100
1.0 Leakage current Ig1 5m
33× =0.17
80 0.7 (mA) 1000 m
0.5
60
0.3 Leakage current Ign
40 0 (without noise filter)
0.2 (mA)
20
0 0.1 1 (without EMC filter)
Leakage current Igi
2 3.5 8 14 2238 80150 1.5 3.7 7.5 15223755 Refer to the following table for the leakage
5.5 30 60 100 2.2 5.5 11 18.5 3045 (mA)
Cable size(mm )
2
Motor capacity (kW) current of the inverter.
Leakage current Ig2 50 m
33× =1.65
Example of leakage current per 1 km during Leakage current example of three- (mA) 1000 m
the commercial power supply operation phase induction motor during the
Motor leakage current
when the CV cable is routed in metal conduit commercial power supply operation 0.18
Igm (mA)
(Three-phase three-wire delta (Totally-enclosed fan-cooled
connection 400 V 60 Hz) type motor 400 V 60 Hz) Total leakage current
3.00 6.66
2. 0
(mA)
leakage currents (mA)
leakage currents (mA)
120
100 Rated sensitivity
1. 0
0. 7
current (mA) 30 100
80
0. 5 (Ig × 10)
60
0. 3
40
0. 2  For whether to use the EMC filter or not, refer to the Instruction Manual
20 (Detailed).
0 0. 1
2 3.5 8 142238 80150 1. 5 3. 7 7. 5 15223755
5.5 30 60 100 2. 2 5.5 1118. 53045
Cable size (mm2) Motor capacity (kW)
12
For " " connection, the amount of leakage current is appox.1/3 of the above value.
 Inverter/converter unit leakage current

200 V class (Input power supply conditions: 220 V/60 Hz, power supply unbalance: within 3%)
FR-A800
Inverter
(Standard model)
EMC filter ON OFF
Phase
earthing 22 1
(grounding)
(mA)
400 V class (Input power supply conditions: 440 V/60 Hz, power supply unbalance: within 3%)
Inverter/ FR-A800 FR-A846-C3 FR-A846-C2 FR-A842
Converter unit FR-CC2
converter unit (Standard model) (IP55 compatible model) (IP55 compatible model) (Separated converter type)
EMC filter ON OFF ON OFF ON  — ON OFF
Phase
earthing 35 2 35 2 —  2 70 2
(grounding)
Earthed-neutral
system
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
(mA)
 Do not change the initially set ON (enabled) position of the EMC filter ON/OFF connector in the case of the inverter with a built-in C2 filter. The Class C2
compatibility condition is not satisfied with the EMC filter OFF. (The FR-A846-00250(7.5K)-C2 to FR-A846-00470(18.5K)-C2 are not provided with the EMC
filter ON/OFF connector. The EMC filter is always ON.)
 The inverter with a built-in C2 filter must be used in the earthed-neutral system.
195
 Molded case circuit breaker, magnetic contactor, cable gauge
 280K or lower
Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)  Input side magnetic Recommended cable gauge (mm2) 
or earth leakage circuit breaker contactor 
(ELB) (NF, NV type) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
Voltage
Motor Applicable inverter

output model Power factor improving Power factor improving
(kW)  (ND rating) Power factor improving (AC or DC) (AC or DC) reactor (AC or DC) reactor U, V, W
reactor connection
connection connection
Without With Without With Without With
0.4 FR-A820-00046(0.4K) 5A 5A S-T10 S-T10 2 2 2
0.75 FR-A820-00077(0.75K) 10 A 10 A S-T10 S-T10 2 2 2
1.5 FR-A820-00105(1.5K) 15 A 15 A S-T10 S-T10 2 2 2
2.2 FR-A820-00167(2.2K) 20 A 15 A S-T10 S-T10 2 2 2
3.7 FR-A820-00250(3.7K) 30 A 30 A S-T21 S-T10 3.5 3.5 3.5
5.5 FR-A820-00340(5.5K) 50 A 40 A S-T35 S-T21 5.5 5.5 5.5
7.5 FR-A820-00490(7.5K) 60 A 50 A S-T35 S-T35 14 14 8
11 FR-A820-00630(11K) 75 A 75 A S-T35 S-T35 14 14 14
200 V
15 FR-A820-00770(15K) 125 A 100 A S-T50 S-T50 22 22 22

18.5 FR-A820-00930(18.5K) 150 A 125 A S-T65 S-T50 38 22 22
22 FR-A820-01250(22K) 175 A 125 A S-T100 S-T65 38 38 38
30 FR-A820-01540(30K) 225 A 150 A S-T100 S-T100 60 60 60
37 FR-A820-01870(37K) 250 A 200 A S-N150 S-N125 80 60 60
45 FR-A820-02330(45K) 300 A 225 A S-N180 S-N150 100 100 100
55 FR-A820-03160(55K) 400 A 300 A S-N220 S-N180 100 100 100
75 FR-A820-03800(75K) - 400 A - S-N300 - 125 125
90 FR-A820-04750(90K) - 400 A - S-N300 - 150 150
0.4 FR-A840-00023(0.4K) 5A 5A S-T10 S-T10 2 2 2
0.75 FR-A840-00038(0.75K) 5A 5A S-T10 S-T10 2 2 2
1.5 FR-A840-00052(1.5K) 10 A 10 A S-T10 S-T10 2 2 2
2.2 FR-A840-00083(2.2K) 10 A 10 A S-T10 S-T10 2 2 2
3.7 FR-A840-00126(3.7K) 20 A 15 A S-T10 S-T10 2 2 2
5.5 FR-A840-00170(5.5K) 30 A 20 A S-T21 S-T12 2 2 2
7.5 FR-A840-00250(7.5K) 30 A 30 A S-T21 S-T21 3.5 3.5 3.5
11 FR-A840-00310(11K) 50 A 40 A S-T21 S-T21 5.5 5.5 5.5
15 FR-A840-00380(15K) 60 A 50 A S-T35 S-T21 8 5.5 5.5
18.5 FR-A840-00470(18.5K) 75 A 60 A S-T35 S-T35 14 8 8
22 FR-A840-00620(22K) 100 A 75 A S-T35 S-T35 14 14 14
30 FR-A840-00770(30K) 125 A 100 A S-T50 S-T50 22 22 22
400 V
37 FR-A840-00930(37K) 150 A 100 A S-T65 S-T50 22 22 22

45 FR-A840-01160(45K) 175 A 125 A S-T100 S-T65 38 38 38
55 FR-A840-01800(55K) 200 A 150 A S-T100 S-T100 60 60 60
75 FR-A840-02160(75K) - 200 A - S-T100 - 60 60
12 90 FR-A840-02600(90K) - 225 A - S-N150 - 60 60
110 FR-A840-03250(110K) - 225 A - S-N180 - 80 80
132 FR-A840-03610(132K) - 350 A - S-N220 - 100 100

150 FR-A840-04320(160K) - 400 A - S-N300 - 125 125
160 FR-A840-04320(160K) - 400 A - S-N300 - 125 125
185 FR-A840-04810(185K) - 400 A - S-N300 - 150 150
220 FR-A840-05470(220K) - 500 A - S-N400 - 2×100 2×100
250 FR-A840-06100(250K) - 600 A - S-N600 - 2×100 2×100
280 FR-A840-06830(280K) - 600 A - S-N600 - 2×125 2×125
 Assumes the use of a Mitsubishi Electric 4-pole standard motor with the motor capacity of 200 VAC 50 Hz.
 Select an MCCB according to the power supply capacity.
Install one MCCB per inverter. MCCB INV M
(For the use in the United States or Canada, refer to "Instructions for UL and cUL" in the Instruction Manual
(Startup), and select an appropriate fuse or molded case circuit breaker (MCCB).) MCCB INV M
 The magnetic contactor is selected based on the AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is
500,000 times. When the magnetic contactor is used for emergency stops during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times.
If using an MC for emergency stop during motor driving or using it on the motor side during commercial power supply operation, select an MC with the class
AC-3 rated current for the rated motor current.
 Cables
For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, it is the gauge of a cable with the continuous maximum permissible
temperature of 75°C. (HIV cable (600 V grade heat-resistant PVC insulated wire), etc.) It assumes a surrounding air temperature of 50°C or lower and the
wiring distance of 20 m or shorter.
For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, it is the gauge of the cable with the continuous maximum permissible
temperature of 90°C or higher. (LMFC (heat resistant flexible cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable), etc.) It assumes a surrounding air temperature of
50°C or lower and in-enclosure wiring.
NOTE
• When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, select an MCCB and a magnetic contactor according to the inverter model, and
select cables and reactors according to the motor output.
• When the breaker on the inverter's input side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts of the inverter etc. The
cause of the trip must be identified and removed before turning ON the power of the breaker.
196
 315K or higher
Molded case circuit breaker HIV cables, etc. (mm2) 
(MCCB) 
Motor Applicable Applicable or Input-side
Voltage output inverter model magnetic R/L1,
converter model earth leakage circuit breaker S/L2, P/+, N/- U, V, W
(kW)  (ND rating) contactor 
(ELB) T/L3
(NF, NV type)
315 FR-A842-07700(315K) FR-CC2-H315K 700 A S-N600 2150 2150 2150
355 FR-A842-08660(355K) FR-CC2-H355K 800 A S-N600 2200 2200 2200
400 FR-A842-09620(400K) FR-CC2-H400K 900 A S-N800 2200 2200 2200
400 V 1000 A rated
450 FR-A842-10940(450K) FR-CC2-H450K 1000 A 2250 2250 2250
product
1000 A rated
500 FR-A842-12120(500K) FR-CC2-H500K 1200 A 3200 3200 2250
product
 Assumes the use of a Mitsubishi Electric 4-pole standard motor with the motor capacity of 400 VAC
50 Hz.
 Select an MCCB according to the power supply capacity.
Install one MCCB per converter. MCCB Converter unit INV M
(For the use in the United States or Canada, refer to "Instructions for UL and cUL" in the Instruction
Manual (Hardware), and select an appropriate fuse or molded case circuit breaker (MCCB).) MCCB Converter unit INV M
 The magnetic contactor is selected based on the AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 500,000 times. When the magnetic contactor
is used for emergency stops during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times.
If using an MC for emergency stop during driving the motor, select an MC regarding the converter unit input side current as JEM1038-AC-3 class rated
current. When using an MC on the inverter output side for commercial-power supply operation switching using a general-purpose motor, select an MC
regarding the rated motor current as JEM1038-AC-3 class rated current.
 The gauge of the cable with the continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C or higher. (LMFC (heat resistant flexible cross-linked polyethylene
insulated cable), etc.). It assumes a surrounding air temperature of 40°C or lower and in-enclosure wiring.
NOTE
• When the converter unit capacity is larger than the motor capacity, select an MCCB and a magnetic contactor according to the converter unit
model, and select cables and reactors according to the motor output.
• When the breaker on the converter unit's input side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts of the inverter and the
converter unit, etc. The cause of the trip must be identified and removed before turning ON the power of the breaker.
12
197
Precaution on Selection and Operation
 Precautions for use  Installation

• Install the inverter in a clean place with no floating oil mist, cotton
 Safety instructions fly, dust and dirt, etc. Alternatively, install the inverter inside the
• To use the product safely and correctly, make sure to read the "sealed type" enclosure that prevents entry of suspended
"Instruction Manual" before the use. substances. For installation in the enclosure, decide the cooling
• This product has not been designed or manufactured for use with method and the enclosure size to keep the surrounding air
any equipment or system operated under life-threatening temperature of the inverter/the converter unit within the
conditions. permissible range (for specifications, refer to page 27).
• Please contact our sales representative when considering using • Some parts of the inverter/the converter unit become extremely
this product in special applications such as passenger mobile, hot. Do not install the inverter/the converter unit to inflammable
medical, aerospace, nuclear, power or undersea relay equipment materials (wood etc.).
or system. • Attach the inverter vertically.
• Although this product was manufactured under conditions of strict
quality control, install safety devices to prevent serious accidents
 Setting
when it is used in facilities where breakdowns of the product or • Depending on the parameter setting, high-speed operation (up to
other failures are likely to cause a serious accident. 590 Hz) is available. Incorrect setting will lead to a dangerous
• Do not use the inverter for a load other than the three-phase situation. Set the upper limit by using the upper frequency limit
induction motor and the PM motor. setting.
• Do not connect a PM motor in the induction motor control settings • Setting the DC injection brake operation voltage and operating
(initial settings). Do not use an induction motor in the PM time larger than their initial values causes motor overheating
sensorless vector control settings. It will cause a failure. (electronic thermal O/L relay trip).
• When using an IPM motor (MM-CF), also refer to the precautions  Real sensorless vector control
for use of the IPM motors (MM-CF).
• Under Real sensorless vector control, always execute offline auto
 Operation tuning before starting operations.
• When a magnetic contactor (MC) is installed on the input side, do • The selectable carrier frequencies under Real sensorless vector
not use the MC for frequent starting/stopping. Otherwise the control are 2, 6, 10, and 14 kHz.
inverter may be damaged. • Torque control is not available in the low-speed (about 10 Hz or
• When a fault occurs in the inverter, the protective function is less) regenerative range, or in the low speed with the light load
acticvated to stop the inverter output. However, the motor cannot (about 5 Hz or less with about 20% or less of the rated torque).
be immediately stopped. For machinery and equipment that Select the vector control.
require an immediate stop, provide a mechanical stop/holding • Performing pre-excitation (LX signal and X13 signal) under torque
mechanism. control may start the motor running at a low speed even when the
• Even after turning OFF the inverter/the converter unit, it takes start command (STF or STR) is not input. The motor may run also
time to discharge the capacitor. Before performing an inspection, at a low speed when the speed limit value = 0 with a start
wait 10 minutes or longer after the power supply turns OFF, then command input. Confirm that the motor running will not cause any
check the voltage using a tester, etc. safety problem before performing pre-excitation.
• Under torque control, do not switch between the forward rotation
 Wiring command (STF) and reverse rotation command (STR). The
• Applying the power to the inverter output terminals (U, V, W) overcurrent trip (E. OC[]) or opposite rotation deceleration fault
causes a damage to the inverter. Before power-on, thoroughly (E.11) occurs.
check the wiring and sequence to prevent incorrect wiring, etc. • For FR-A820-00250(3.7K) or lower and FR-A840-00126(3.7K) or
• Terminals P/+, P1, N/-, and P3 are the terminals to connect lower, if continuous operation is performed under Real sensorless
dedicated options or DC power supply (in the DC feeding mode). vector control, speed fluctuation may increase at 20 Hz or lower,
Do not connect any device other than the dedicated options or or insufficient torque may occur in a low-speed range under 1 Hz.
DC power supply (in the DC feeding mode). Do not short-circuit In such a case, stop the inverter once and re-accelerate it.
between the frequency setting power supply terminal 10 and the • If the inverter may restart during coasting under Real sensorless
common terminal 5, and between terminals PC and SD. vector control, set the automatic restart after instantaneous power
• To prevent a malfunction due to noise, keep the signal cables failure function to enable frequency search (Pr.57  "9999",
10cm or more away from the power cables. Also, separate the Pr.162 = "10").
main circuit cables at the input side from the main circuit cables at • Under Real sensorless vector control, sufficient torque may not
the output side. be obtained in the extremely low-speed range of about 2 Hz or
13 • After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter/the
converter unit. Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or
less.
• The approximate speed control range is as described below.
malfunction. Always keep the inverter/the converter unit clean. Power drive: 1:200 (2, 4, 6 poles), 0.3 Hz or more for 60 Hz
When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take caution rating.

not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter/ 1:30 (8, 10 poles), 2 Hz or more for 60 Hz rating
the converter unit. Regenerative driving: 1:12 (2 to 10 poles), 5 Hz or more for 60 Hz
• Set the voltage/current input switch correctly. Incorrect setting rating
may cause a fault, failure or malfunction.
 Power supply
• When the inverter is (kVA)
connected near a large- 5300
Power supply system
5000 Capacities requiring

capacity power
4000 installation of
transformer (1000 kVA or
capacity
AC reactor
3000
more) or when a power
2000
factor correction capacitor
1000
is to be switched over, an
excessive peak current 110165 247 330 420 550 kVA
may flow in the power Inverter capacity
input circuit, damaging the

inverter. To prevent this, always install an optional AC reactor
(FR-HAL).
• If surge voltage occurs in the power supply system, this surge
energy may flow into an inverter, and the inverter may display the
overvoltage protection (E. OV[]) and trip. To prevent this, install an
optional AC reactor (FR-HAL).
198
 Waterproof and dustproof performances (IP55  Precautions for use of IPM motor (MM-
compatible model)
• The inverter is rated with an IPX5 waterproof rating and an
CF)
IP5X dustproof rating when the operation panel (FR-DU08-01), For using an IPM motor (MM-CF), also check the following
the front cover, the wiring cover, and the cable glands are precautions.
securely fixed with screws.
• The items enclosed with the inverter such as the Instruction  Safety instructions
Manual or CD are not rated with the IPX5 waterproof or IP5X
• Do not use an IPM motor for an application where the motor is
dustproof ratings.
driven by the load and runs at a speed higher than the maximum
• Although the inverter is rated with the IPX5 waterproof and IP5X
motor speed.
dustproof ratings, it is not intended for use in water. Also, the
ratings do not guarantee protection of the inverter from needless  Combination of motor and inverter
submersion in water or being washed under strong running water • The motor capacity is equal to or one rank lower than the inverter
such as a shower. capacity. (It must be 0.4 kW or higher.)
• Do not pour or apply the following liquids over the inverter: water Using a motor with the rated current substantially lower than the
containing soap, detergent, or bath additives; sea water; inverter rated current will cause torque ripples, etc. and degrade
swimming pool water; warm water; boiling water; etc. the speed and torque accuracies.
• The inverter is intended for indoor installation and not for As a reference, select the motor with the rated motor current that
outdoor installation. Avoid places where the inverter is subjected is about 40% or higher of the inverter rated current.
to direct sunlight, rain, sleet, snow, or freezing temperatures. • Only one IPM motor can be connected to an inverter.
• If the operation panel (FR-DU08-01) is not installed, if the screws • An IPM motor cannot be driven by the commercial power supply.
of the operation panel are not tightened, or if the operation panel
is damaged or deformed, the IPX5 waterproof performance and  Installation
the IP5X dustproof performance are impaired. If any • While power is ON or for some time after power-OFF, do not
abnormalities are found on the operation panel, ask for an touch the motor since the motor may be extremely hot. Touching
inspection and repair. these devices may cause a burn.
• If the screws of the front cover or the wiring cover are not • An outline dimension differs between MM-CF and a standard
tightened, if any foreign matter (hair, sand grain, fiber, etc.) is motor.
stuck between the inverter and the gasket, if the gasket is • Do not apply the load larger than the permissible load to the
damaged, or if the front cover or the wiring cover is damaged or motor shaft. Doing so may lead to breakage of the shaft.
deformed, the IPX5 waterproof performance and the IP5X • Avoid places where the equipment is subjected to oil mist, dust,
dustproof performance are impaired. If any abnormalities are dirt, etc. for installation.
found on the front cover, wiring cover, or the gasket of the When it is inevitable to install the equipment in such a place, take
inverter, ask for an inspection and repair. such measures as to provide a cover to the motor.
• Cable glands are important components to maintain the • Always use the motor at the specified surrounding air
waterproof and dustproof performances. Be sure to use cable temperature. Increase in the motor temperature may cause the
glands of the recommended size and shape or equivalent. The torque to decrease.
standard protective bushes cannot sufficiently maintain the IPX5 • When installing the motor with its shaft facing upward, take
waterproof performance and the IP5X dustproof performance. countermeasures on the machine side to avoid infiltration of oils
• If a cable gland is damaged or deformed, the IPX5 waterproof from the gear box, etc.
performance and the IP5X dustproof performance are impaired. If • Select the appropriate cable clamping method to avoid bending
any abnormalities are found on the cable glands, ask the stresses or stresses from its own weight at the cable joint section.
manufacturer of the cable glands for an inspection and repair. • For certain applications in which the motor moves, determine the
• To maintain the waterproof and dustproof performances of the cable bending radius based on the necessary bending life and the
inverter, daily and periodic inspections are recommended cable type.
regardless of the presence or absence of abnormalities. • To prevent moving of the power supply cable coming out of the
motor, take such measures as to fix the cable to the motor.
 IPX5 refers to protection of the inverter functions against water Otherwise the cable may break.
jets from any direction when about 12.5-liter water is injected Do not modify the connector, terminal, etc. at the end of the cable.
from a nozzle with an inside diameter of 6.3 mm from the distance
of about 3 m for at least 3 minutes.  Earth (ground)
 IP5X refers to protection of the inverter functions and
maintenance of safety when the inverter is put into a stirring
device containing dust of 75 μm or smaller in diameter, stirred for
• To prevent an electric shock and to stabilize the potential of
control circuit, always earth (ground) the motor and inverter. 13
8 hours, and then removed from the device. • Earth (ground) the motor and inverter at one point. Connect the
 Water here refers to fresh water at room temperature (5 to 35°C). both earth (ground) terminals for the ground connection from the
 Indoor here refers to the environments that are not affected by

inverter side.
climate conditions.
 Wiring
• Applying the commercial power supply to input terminals (U,V, W)
of a motor will burn the motor. The motor must be connected with
the output terminals (U,V, W) of the inverter.
• Do not install a magnetic contactor at the inverter's output side.
• An IPM motor is a motor with permanent magnets embedded
inside. High voltage is generated at the motor terminals while the
motor is running. Before wiring or inspection, confirm that the
motor is stopped.
In an application, such a as fan or blower, where the motor is
driven by the load, a low-voltage manual contactor must be
connected at the inverter's output side, and wiring and inspection
must be performed while the contactor is open. Otherwise an
electric shock may be caused. The inverter power must be turned
ON before closing the contacts of the contactor at the output side.
• Match the input terminals (U, V, W) of the motor and the output
terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter when connecting.
• Keep the wiring length to 100 m or shorter when connecting an
IPM motor .
199
 Operation  Selection precautions
• About 0.1 s (magnetic pole detection time) takes to start a motor
after inputting a start signal.  Inverter capacity selection
• An IPM motor is a motor with embedded permanent magnets. • When operating a special motor or multiple motors in parallel by
Regression voltage is generated when the motor coasts at an one inverter, select the inverter capacity so that 1.05 times of the
instantaneous power failure or other incidents. total of the rated motor current becomes less than the rated
The inverter's DC bus voltage increases if the motor coasts fast in output current of the inverter.
this condition. When using the automatic restart after (Multiple PM motors cannot be connected to an inverter.)
instantaneous power failure function, it is recommended to also
use the regeneration avoidance operation to make startups  Starting torque of the motor
stable. • The starting and acceleration characteristics of the motor driven
• The relationship between speed and frequency setting is: by an inverter are restricted by the overload current rating of the
Speed = 120 × frequency setting value / number of motor poles inverter. In general, the torque characteristic has small value
compared to when the motor is started by a commercial power
Speed (r/min) 300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2000 2400 2700 3000
supply. When a large starting torque is required, and torque boost
MM-CF (8 poles) adjustment, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real
frequency 20 40 60 80 100 120 133.33 160 180 200
setting (Hz) sensorless vector control, and vector control cannot generate the
sufficient torque, select the HD rating, or increase both the motor
 Permissible 200
and inverter capacities.
vibration of the  Acceleration/deceleration time
(double amplitude) (μm)
motor • The motor acceleration/deceleration time is decided by the torque

Vibration amplitude
100
• Bearing is subjected to generated by the motor, load torque, and moment of inertia (J) of
fretting while the motor is 80 load.
stopped. Suppress the 60 • The required time may increase when the torque limit function or
50
vibration to about the half of 40 stall prevention function operates during acceleration/
the permissible value. 30
20 deceleration. In such a case, set the acceleration/decelerations
Amplitude at each vibration time longer.
condition is as shown right. 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 • To shorten the acceleration/deceleration time, increase the torque
Rotation speed (r/min) boost value (too large setting value may activate the stall
prevention function, resulting in longer acceleration time at
starting on the contrary). Alternatively, use Advanced magnetic
flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, or vector
 Permissible load of the shaft control, or select the larger inverter and motor capacities. To
• Use the flexible coupling to decrease the shaft center gap to keep shorten the deceleration time, use an addition brake unit (FR-
its radial load value within the permissible radial load of the shaft. BU2) to absorb braking energy, power regeneration common
• When selecting a pulley, sprocket or timing belt, keep its radial converter (FR-CV), or power supply regeneration unit (MT-RC),
load value within the permissible radial load value. etc.
• Do not use a rigid coupling because it gives excessive bending
force to the shaft and may break the shaft.  Power transfer mechanisms (reduction gear, belt,
chain, etc.)
L (mm) Permissible Permissible
Motor radial load (N) thrust load (N) • Caution is required for the low-speed continuous operation of the

motor with an oil lubricated gear box, transmission, reduction
MM-CF52(C)(B) to152(C)(B) 55 980 490
gear, etc. in the power transfer mechanism. Such an operation
MM-CF202(C)(B) to352(C)(B) may degrade the oil lubrication and cause seizing. On the other
79 2058 980
MM-CF502(C) to702(C)
hand, the high-speed operation at more than 60 Hz may cause
 For "L" in the table, refer to the figure below. problems with the noise of the power transfer mechanism, life, or
L
Radial load
insufficient strength due to centrifugal force, etc. Fully take
L: Distance from the flange mounting necessary precautions.
surface to the center of the load
Thrust load
 Instructions for overload operation
• When performing frequent starts/stops by the inverter, rise/fall in
13 the temperature of the transistor element of the inverter will
repeat due to a repeated flow of large current, shortening the life
from thermal fatigue. Since thermal fatigue is related to the
amount of current, the life can be increased by reducing current at

locked condition, starting current, etc. Reducing current may
extend the service life but may also cause torque shortage, which
leads to a start failure. Adding a margin to the current can
eliminate such a condition. For an induction motor, use an
inverter of a higher capacity (up to two ranks for the ND rating).
For an IPM motor, use an inverter and IPM motor of higher
capacities.
200
 Precautions on peripheral device  Disuse of power factor improving capacitor
(power factor correction capacitor)
selection The power factor improving capacitor and surge suppressor on
 Selection and installation of molded case the inverter output side may be overheated or damaged by the
harmonic components of the inverter output. Also, since an
circuit breaker excessive current flows in the inverter to activate overcurrent
Install a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) on the power protection, do not provide a capacitor and surge suppressor. To
receiving side to protect the wiring at the inverter/the converter improve the power factor, use an AC reactor (on page 176), a
unit input side. Select an MCCB according to the inverter power DC reactor (on page 177), or a high power factor converter (on
supply side power factor, which depends on the power supply page 185).
voltage, output frequency and load. Refer to page 196. Especially
for a completely electromagnetic MCCB, a slightly large capacity  Connection between the converter unit and the
must be selected since its operation characteristic varies with inverter
harmonic currents. (Check the reference material of the • Perform wiring so that the commands sent from the converter unit
applicable breaker.) As an earth leakage circuit breaker, use the are transmitted to the inverter without fail. Incorrect connection
Mitsubishi Electric earth leakage circuit breaker designed for may damage the converter unit and the inverter.
harmonics and surge suppression. (Refer to page 195.) • For the wiring length, refer to the table below.
When installing a molded case circuit breaker on the inverter
output side, contact the manufacturer of each product for Across terminals P and P and
Total wiring 50 m or lower
selection. terminals N and N
length
Other signal cables 30 m or lower
 Handling of the input side magnetic contactor
• For the cable gauge of the cable across the main circuit terminals
(MC) P/+ and N/- (P and P, N and N), refer to page 197.
For the operation using external terminals (using terminal STF or
STR), install the input-side magnetic contactor to prevent  Electrical corrosion of the bearing
accidents due to automatic restart when the power is restored When a motor is driven by the inverter, axial voltage is
after power failures such as an instantaneous power failure, or for generated on the motor shaft, which may cause electrical
safety during maintenance works. Do not use this magnetic corrosion of the bearing in rare cases depending on the wiring,
contactor for frequent starting/stopping of the inverter. (The load, operating conditions of the motor or specific inverter
switching life of the converter part is about 1 million times.) In the settings (high carrier frequency and EMC filter ON).
operation by parameter unit, the automatic restart after power Contact your sales representative to take appropriate
restoration is not performed and the magnetic contactor cannot countermeasures for the motor.
be used to start the motor. The input-side magnetic contactor can The following shows examples of countermeasures for the
stop the motor. However, the regenerative brake of the inverter inverter.
does not operate, and the motor coasts to a stop. • Decrease the carrier frequency.
• Turn OFF the EMC filter.
 Handling of the output side magnetic contactor • Provide a common mode choke on the output side of the
(MC) inverter.
• Switch the MC between the inverter and motor only when both (This is effective regardless of the EMC filter ON/OFF
the inverter and motor are at a stop. When the magnetic contactor connector setting.)
is turned ON while the inverter is operating, overcurrent  Recommended common mode choke: FT-3KM F series
protection of the inverter and such will activate. When an MC is FINEMET® common mode choke cores manufactured by Hitachi
Metals, Ltd.
provided to switch to a commercial power supply, for example, it
FINEMET is a registered trademark of Hitachi Metals, Ltd.
is recommended to use the commercial power supply-inverter
switchover function Pr.135 to Pr.139.
• Do not install a magnetic contactor at the inverter's output side
when using a PM motor.
 Installation of thermal relay
In order to protect the motor from overheating, the inverter has an
electronic thermal O/L relay. However, install an external thermal
overcurrent relay (OCR) between the inverter and motors to
operate several motors or a multi-pole motor with one inverter. In 13
this case, set 0 A to the electronic thermal O/L relay setting of the
inverter. For the external thermal overcurrent relay, determine the
setting value in consideration of the current indicated on the

motor's rating plate and the line-to-line leakage current. (Refer to
page 202.)
Self cooling ability of a motor reduces in the low-speed operation.
Installation of a thermal protector or a use of a motor with built-in
thermistor is recommended.
 Output side measuring instrument
When the inverter-to-motor wiring length is long, especially for
the 400 V class, small-capacity models, the meters and CTs may
generate heat due to line-to-line leakage current. Therefore,
choose the equipment which has enough allowance for the
current rating.
When measuring and displaying the output voltage and output
current of the inverter, use of terminals AM and 5 output function
of the inverter is recommended.
201
EMI measure example
 Cable gauge and wiring distance
Enclosure Decrease carrier frequency Install filter (FR-BLF,
If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, FR-BSF01) on
during the output of a low frequency in particular, use a large Inverter inverter output side.
cable gauge for the main circuit cable to suppress the voltage power EMC
Inverter
FR-
M Motor
BLF
drop to 2% or less. (The table on page 196 indicates a selection supply filter
example for the wiring length of 20 m.) Use 4-core cable for motor
Especially for long-distance wiring or wiring with shielded Separate inverter and power cable and use one cable
power line by more than as earth (ground) cable.
cables, the inverter may be affected by a charging current 30 cm (at least 10 cm)
caused by stray capacitances of the wiring, leading to an from sensor circuit. Use a twisted pair shielded cable
incorrect activation of the overcurrent protective function. Refer Control Power Sensor
to the maximum wiring length shown in the following table. power supply for
sensor
When multiple motors are connected, use the total wiring length supply
Do not earth (ground) shield but
Do not earth (ground)
shown in the table or shorter (100 m or shorter under vector enclosure directly. connect it to signal common cable.
control and PM sensorless vector control. ) Do not earth (ground) control cable.
FR-A820- FR-A820-
Pr.72 setting 00046(0.4K), 00077(0.75K), FR-A820-00105(1.5K)  leakage current
or higher, FR-A840-
(carrier frequency) FR-A840- FR-A840-
00052(1.5K) or higher Capacitances exist between the inverter/the converter unit I/O
00023(0.4K) 00038(0.75K)
cables and other cables or the earth, and within the motor,
2 (2 kHz) or lower 300 m 500 m 500 m
through which a leakage current flows. Since its value depends
3 (3 kHz) or higher 200 m 300 m 500 m
on the static capacitances, carrier frequency, etc., low acoustic
When the operation panel is installed away from the inverter and
noise operation at the increased carrier frequency of the inverter
when the parameter unit is connected, use a recommended
connection cable. will increase the leakage current. Therefore, take the following
For the remote operation using analog signals, keep the countermeasures. Select the earth leakage circuit breaker
distance between the remote speed setter and the inverter to 30 according to its rated sensitivity current, independently of the
m or less. Also, to prevent induction from other devices, keep carrier frequency setting.
the wiring away from the power circuits (main circuit and relay
sequential circuit).  To-earth (ground) leakage currents
When the frequency setting is performed using the external Type Influence and countermeasure
potentiometer, not using the parameter unit, use a shielded or
twisted cable as shown in the figure below. Connect the shield • Leakage currents may flow not only into the inverter/the
converter unit's own line but also into the other lines
cable to terminal 5, not to the earth (ground). through the earthing (grounding) cable, etc. These
(3) Shielded cable leakage currents may operate earth leakage circuit
(3) 10 (10E) breakers and earth leakage relays unnecessarily.
10 (10E) (2) Countermeasure
2
(2)
(1) • If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the
2 Influence and
(1) 5
countermeasure Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting.
Frequency setting However, the motor noise increases. Selecting Pr.240
5
Frequency setting Twisted cable potentiometer Soft-PWM operation selection makes the sound
potentiometer inoffensive.
• By using earth leakage circuit breakers designed for
 Earth (ground) harmonic and surge suppression in the inverter's own
When the inverter is set for the low acoustic noise operation, the line and other line, operation can be performed with the
leakage current increases compared to in the normal operation carrier frequency kept high (with low noise).
due to the high speed switching operation. Always earth Inverter

Power NV1 Motor
(ground) the inverter, the converter unit, and the motor. Also, supply C
Leakage
always use the earth (ground) terminal of the inverter/the Transmission breaker C
converter unit for earthing (grounding). (Do not use a case or path NV2 Motor
chassis.) Leakage C
breaker
 Electromagnetic interference (EMI)
13 For the low acoustic noise operation with high carrier frequency,  Line-to-line leakage current
electromagnetic noise tends to increase. Take countermeasures
Type Influence and countermeasure
by referring to the following examples. Depending on an

• Line-to-line leakage current flows through the capacitance
installation condition, noise may affect the inverter also in the between the inverter/the converter unit output lines.
normal operation (initial status). • Harmonic component of the leaked current may cause
unnecessary operation of an external thermal relay. Long
• Decrease the carrier frequency (Pr.72) setting to lower the wiring length (50 m or longer) for the 400V class small
EMI level. capacity models (7.5 kW or lower) will increase the rate of
• For countermeasures against the noise in AM radio leakage current against the rated motor current. In such a
case, an unnecessary operation of the external thermal
broadcasting or malfunction of sensors, turn ON the EMC relay may be more liable to occur.
filter. (For the switching method, refer to the Instruction Influence and Countermeasure
countermeasure • Use Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay.
Manual.)
• If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the Pr.72
• For effective reduction of induction noise from the power PWM frequency selection setting.
cable of the inverter/the converter unit, secure the distance of However, the motor noise increases. Selecting Pr.240
Soft-PWM operation selection makes the sound
30 cm (at least 10 cm) from the power line and use a shielded inoffensive.
twisted pair cable for the signal cable. Do not earth (ground) To protect motor securely without being subject to the
the shield, and connect the shield to a common terminal by influence of the line-to-line leakage current, direct
detection of the motor temperature using a temperature
itself. sensor is recommended.
MCCB MC Thermal relay

Motor
Power Inverter/
Transmission supply converter
M
path
Line-to-line static
capacitances
Line-to-line leakage currents path
202
 Harmonic Suppression Guidelines  Calculation of outgoing harmonic current
Inverters have a converter section (rectifier circuit) and generate a
Outgoing harmonic current = fundamental wave current (value converted
harmonic current. from received power voltage) × operation ratio × harmonic content
Harmonic currents flow from the inverter to a power receiving point
• Operation ratio: Operation ratio = actual load factor × operation time
via a power transformer. The Harmonic Suppression Guidelines was ratio during 30 minutes
established to protect other consumers from these outgoing • Harmonic content: Found in the table below.
harmonic currents.
The three-phase 200 V input specifications 3.7 kW or lower were • Harmonic contents (values when the fundamental wave current is
previously covered by the "Harmonic Suppression Guidelines for 100%)
Household Appliances and General-purpose Products" and other
Reactor 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th
models were covered by the "Harmonic Suppression Guidelines for
Not used 65 41 8.5 7.7 4.3 3.1 2.6 1.8
Consumers Who Receive High Voltage or Special High Voltage".
However, the general-purpose inverter has been excluded from the Used (AC side) 38 14.5 7.4 3.4 3.2 1.9 1.7 1.3
target products covered by the "Harmonic Suppression Guidelines Used (DC side) 30 13 8.4 5.0 4.7 3.2 3.0 2.2
for Household Appliances and General-purpose Products" in Used (AC, DC sides) 28 9.1 7.2 4.1 3.2 2.4 1.6 1.4
January 2004 and the "Harmonic Suppression Guideline for • Rated capacities and outgoing harmonic currents when driven by
Household Appliances and General-purpose Products" was inverter
repealed on September 6, 2004.
Fundamental Fundamental Outgoing harmonic current converted
All capacity and all models of general-purpose inverter used by Applied wave current wave current Rated from 6.6 kV (mA)
specific consumers are now covered by the "Harmonic Suppression motor (A) converted capacity
from 6.6 kV
(No reactor, 100% operation ratio)
(kW) (kVA)
Guidelines for Consumers Who Receive High Voltage or Special 200 V 400 V (mA)
5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th
High Voltage". 0.4 1.61 0.81 49 0.57 31.85 20.09 4.165 3.773 2.107 1.519 1.274 0.882
• "Harmonic Suppression Guidelines for Consumers Who Receive 0.75 2.74 1.37 83 0.97 53.95 34.03 7.055 6.391 3.569 2.573 2.158 1.494
High Voltage or Special High Voltage”
1.5 5.50 2.75 167 1.95 108.6 68.47 14.20 12.86 7.181 5.177 4.342 3.006
This guideline sets the maximum values of outgoing harmonic currents
generated from a high-voltage or specially high-voltage receiving 2.2 7.93 3.96 240 2.81 156.0 98.40 20.40 18.48 10.32 7.440 6.240 4.320
consumer who will install, add or renew harmonic generating equipment. 3.7 13.0 6.50 394 4.61 257.1 161.5 33.49 30.34 16.94 12.21 10.24 7.092
If any of the maximum values is exceeded, this guideline requires that 5.5 19.1 9.55 579 6.77 376.1 237.4 49.22 44.58 24.90 17.95 15.05 10.42
consumer to take certain suppression measures. 7.5 25.6 12.8 776 9.07 504.4 318.2 65.96 59.75 33.37 24.06 20.18 13.97
The users who are not subjected to the above guidelines do not 11 36.9 18.5 1121 13.1 728.7 459.6 95.29 86.32 48.20 34.75 29.15 20.18
need follow the guidelines, but the users are recommended to
15 49.8 24.9 1509 17.6 980.9 618.7 128.3 116.2 64.89 46.78 39.24 27.16
connect a DC reactor and an AC reactor as usual.
18.5 61.4 30.7 1860 21.8 1209 762.6 158.1 143.2 79.98 57.66 48.36 33.48
Compliance with the "Harmonic Suppression Guidelines for
Consumers Who Receive High Voltage or Special High Voltage" 22 73.1 36.6 2220 25.9 1443 910.2 188.7 170.9 95.46 68.82 57.72 39.96
30 98.0 49.0 2970 34.7 1931 1218 252.5 228.7 127.7 92.07 77.22 53.46
Input Target
Countermeasure 37 121 60.4 3660 42.8 2379 1501 311.1 281.8 157.4 113.5 95.16 65.88
power capacity
Confirm the compliance with the "Harmonic 45 147 73.5 4450 52.1 2893 1825 378.3 342.7 191.4 138.0 115.7 80.10
Suppression Guidelines for Consumers Who 55 180 89.9 5450 63.7 3543 2235 463.3 419.7 234.4 169.0 141.7 98.10
Three-
phase Receive High Voltage or Special High Voltage"
200 V published in September 1994 by the Ministry of
International Trade and Industry (the present Fundamental Fundamental Outgoing harmonic current converted
Applied wave current wave current Rated from 6.6 kV (mA)
Japanese Ministry of Economy, Trade and motor (A) converted capacity (With a DC reactor, 100% operation ratio)
Industry). Take countermeasures if required. Use (kW) from 6.6 kV (kVA)
(mA)
the following materials as reference to calculate 200 V 400 V 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th
the power supply harmonics. 75 245 123 7455 87.2 2237 969 626 373 350 239 224 164
All capacities Reference materials 90 293 147 8909 104 2673 1158 748 445 419 285 267 196
• "Harmonic Suppression Measures of the
General-purpose Inverter" 110 357 179 10848 127 3254 1410 911 542 510 347 325 239
Three-
phase January 2004, Japan Electrical Manufacturers' 132 - 216 13091 153 3927 1702 1100 655 615 419 393 288
400 V Association 160 - 258 15636 183 4691 2033 1313 782 735 500 469 344
• "Calculation Method of Harmonic Current of the
220 - 355 21515 252 6455 2797 1807 1076 1011 688 645 473
13
General-purpose Inverter Used by Specific
Consumers" 250 - 403 24424 286 7327 3175 2052 1221 1148 782 733 537
JEM-TR201 (Revised in December 2003), Japan 280 - 450 27273 319 8182 3545 2291 1364 1282 873 818 600
Electrical Manufacturers' Association
315 - 506 30667 359 9200 3987 2576 1533 1441 981 920 675
For compliance to the "Harmonic Suppression Guideline of the 355 - 571 34606 405 10382 4499 2907 1730 1627 1107 1038 761
General-purpose Inverter (Input Current of 20A or Less) for 400 - 643 38970 456 11691 5066 3274 1949 1832 1247 1169 857
Consumers Other Than Specific Consumers" published by JEMA 450 - 723 43818 512 13146 5696 3681 2191 2060 1402 1315 964
Input Target 500 - 804 48727 570 14618 6335 4093 2436 2290 1559 1462 1072
power capacity Measures
560 - 900 54545 638 16364 7091 4582 2727 2564 1746 1636 1200
Connect the AC reactor or DC reactor 630 - 1013 61394 718 18418 7981 5157 3070 2886 1965 1842 1351
recommended in the Catalogs and Instruction
Manuals. • Conversion factors
Three- Reference materials
3.7 kW or Conversion
phase • "Harmonic Suppression Guideline of the Classification Circuit type
200 V lower coefficient Ki
General-purpose Inverter (Input Current of
20A or Less)" Without reactor K31 = 3.4
JEM-TR226 (Published in December 2003), Three-phase bridge With reactor (AC side) K32 = 1.8
Japan Electrical Manufacturers' Association 3 (Capacitor With reactor (DC side) K33 = 1.8
smoothing)
With reactors (AC, DC
K34 = 1.4
sides)
When a high power
Self-excitation
5 factor converter is K5 = 0
three-phase bridge
used
203
Compatible Motors
 List of applicable inverter models by rating (motor capacity  inverter model)

For the combinations within the thick boarders, always connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL), which is available as an option.
 200 V class (model: FR-A820-[])
Motor DC reactor SLD (superlight load) LD (light load) ND (normal load, initial value) HD (heavy load)
capacity Rated Rated Rated Rated
(kW) FR-HEL-[] Model Model Model Model
current (A) current (A) current (A) current (A)
0.2 0.4K 0.4K 00046 1.5
0.4K 00046 3
0.4 0.4K 0.4K 00046 4.6 0.4K 00046 4.2 0.75K 00077 3
0.75 0.75K 0.75K 00077 5 1.5K 00105 5
1.5 1.5K 0.75K 00077 7.7 0.75K 00077 7 1.5K 00105 8 2.2K 00167 8
2.2 2.2K 1.5K 00105 10.5 1.5K 00105 9.6 2.2K 00167 11 3.7K 00250 11
3.7 3.7K 2.2K 00167 16.7 2.2K 00167 15.2 3.7K 00250 17.5 5.5K 00340 17.5
5.5 5.5K 3.7K 00250 25 3.7K 00250 23 5.5K 00340 24 7.5K 00490 24
7.5 7.5K 5.5K 00340 34 5.5K 00340 31 7.5K 00490 33 11K 00630 33
11 11K 7.5K 00490 49 7.5K 00490 45 11K 00630 46 15K 00770 46
15 15K 11K 00630 63 11K 00630 58 15K 00770 61 18.5K 00930 61
18.5 18.5K 15K 00770 77 15K 00770 70.5 18.5K 00930 76 22K 01250 76
22 22K 18.5K 00930 93 18.5K 00930 85 22K 01250 90 30K 01540 90
30 30K 22K 01250 125 22K 01250 114 30K 01540 115 37K 01870 115
37 37K 30K 01540 154 30K 01540 140 37K 01870 145 45K 02330 145
45 45K 37K 01870 187 37K 01870 170 45K 02330 175 55K 03160 175
55 55K 45K 02330 233 45K 02330 212 55K 03160 215 75K 03800 215
75 75K 55K 03160 316 55K 03160 288 75K 03800 288 90K 04750 288
90 90K 75K 03800 346 90K 04750 346 - - -
75K 03800 380
110 110K 90K 04750 432 - - - - - -
132 110K 90K 04750 475 - - - - - - - - -

Motor DC reactor SLD (superlight load) LD (light load) ND (normal load, initial value) HD (heavy load)
capacity Rated Rated Rated Rated
(kW) FR-HEL-[] Model current (A) Model current (A) Model current (A) Model current (A)
0.2 H0.4K 0.4K 00023 0.8
0.4K 00023 1.5
0.4 H0.4K 0.4K 00023 2.3 0.4K 00023 2.1 0.75K 00038 1.5
0.75 H0.75K 0.75K 00038 2.5 1.5K 00052 2.5
1.5 H1.5K 0.75K 00038 3.8 0.75K 00038 3.5 1.5K 00052 4 2.2K 00083 4
2.2 H2.2K 1.5K 00052 5.2 1.5K 00052 4.8 2.2K 00083 6 3.7K 00126 6
3.7 H3.7K 2.2K 00083 8.3 2.2K 00083 7.6 3.7K 00126 9 5.5K 00170 9
5.5 H5.5K 3.7K 00126 12.6 3.7K 00126 11.5 5.5K 00170 12 7.5K 00250 12
7.5 H7.5K 5.5K 00170 17 5.5K 00170 16 7.5K 00250 17 11K 00310 17
11 H11K 7.5K 00250 25 7.5K 00250 23 11K 00310 23 15K 00380 23
15 H15K 11K 00310 31 11K 00310 29 15K 00380 31 18.5K 00470 31
18.5 H18.5K 15K 00380 38 15K 00380 35 18.5K 00470 38 22K 00620 38
22 H22K 18.5K 00470 47 18.5K 00470 43 22K 00620 44 30K 00770 44
30 H30K 22K 00620 62 22K 00620 57 30K 00770 57 37K 00930 57
37 H37K 30K 00770 77 30K 00770 70 37K 00930 71 45K 01160 71
45 H45K 37K 00930 93 37K 00930 85 45K 01160 86 55K 01800 86
55 H55K 45K 01160 116 45K 01160 106 55K 01800 110 75K 02160 110
75 H75K 55K 01800 144 75K 02160 144 90K 02600 144
55K 01800 180
90 H90K 75K 02160 180 90K 02600 180 110K 03250 180
110 H110K 75K 02160 216 90K 02600 216 110K 03250 216 132K 03610 216
132 H132K 90K 02600 260 110K 03250 260 132K 03610 260 160K 04320 260
160 H160K 110K 03250 325 132K 03610 325 160K 04320 325 185K 04810 325
185 H185K 132K 03610 361 160K 04320 361 185K 04810 361 220K 05470 361
220 H220K 160K 04320 432 185K 04810 432 220K 05470 432 250K 06100 432
14 250
280
H250K
H280K
185K
220K
04810
05470
481
547
220K
250K
05470
06100
481
547
250K
280K
06100
06830
481
547
280K
-
06830 481
- -
315 H315K 250K 06100 610 280K 06830 610 - - - - - -
Compatible Motors
355 H355K 280K 06830 683 - - - - - - - - -

Converter
Motor unit SLD (superlight load) LD (light load) ND (normal load, initial value) HD (heavy load)
capacity
(kW) Rated Rated Rated Rated
FR-CC2-[] Model Model Model Model
current (A) current (A) current (A) current (A)
280 H315K - - - - - - - - - 315K 07700 547
315 H315K - - - - - - 315K 07700 610 355K 08660 610
355 H355K - - - 315K 07700 683 355K 08660 683 400K 09620 683
400 H400K 315K 07700 770 355K 08660 770 400K 09620 770 450K 10940 770
450 H450K 355K 08660 866 400K 09620 866 450K 10940 866 500K 12120 866
500 H500K 400K 09620 962 450K 10940 962 500K 12120 962 - - -
560 H560K 450K 10940 1094 500K 12120 1094 - - - - - -
630 H630K 500K 12120 1212 - - - - - - - - -
 Indicates the maximum capacity applicable with the Mitsubishi Electric 4-pole standard motor.
 The power factor may be slightly lower.
 The FR-HEL-110K supports the 200 V class 132 kW motor.
 Overload current rating
SLD 110% 60 s, 120% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 40C
LD 120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50C
ND 150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50C
HD 200% 60 s, 250% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50C
204
 High-performance energy-saving motor superline premium series SF-PR
We have released the superline premium series SF-PR models
compatible with the Top Runner Standard in Japan, which is
equivalent with IE3 premium efficiency for three-phase motors, and
with the Energy Independence and Security Act (EISA) in the United
States.
The SF-PR has achieved the efficiency class IE3 with the same
dimensions as those of conventional models using our unique
technology of the steel plate frame and new core materials.
It maintains interchangeability with our standard efficiency motor SF-
JR and easy replacement becomes possible.
By adopting a high-efficiency motor, energy savings in plant facilities
and reduction of electricity consumption are expected, as well as the
effects of recovering the investment cost.
 One motor conforms to the power supply in  Introduction effects of the superline premium
Japan and the United States. series SF-PR
• The SF-PR series conform to the Top Runner Standard of the "Act The SF-PR motor conforms to the Top Runner Standard (IE3
on the Rational Use of Energy (energy saving law)" started on equivalent), which remarkably reduces its operation cost (electricity
April 1, 2015. charges) and greatly contributes minimization of TCO (Total Cost
• The 230 V 60 Hz motor also conforms to the Energy Ownership).
Independence and Security Act (EISA).
• Trial calculation example of an annual saved sum of money ( at
upgrading the motor from energy-efficiency class IE1 to IE3)
Motor with 4-poles 200 V50 Hz
Annual saved sum of money (yen)
80000
200/200/220 V
50/ 60/ 60 Hz The annual saved sum
of money is calculated in
230 V 60000
60 Hz the following conditions.
Annual operation time
40000 4,380 h (12 h/day, 365 days)
Electricity rate
16 yen/kWh
20000 Load ratio
200 200 220 230 V 75%
0
(When adjusted to be the same load.)
50 60 60 60 Hz
∗ For the 200 V
0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15
Output (kW)
18.5 22 30 37 45 55
class
• Economic efficiency on an energy saving effect
In Japan In the United States Reduction in the electricity charges
Cost (Product + Electricity rate)
The point of the energy saving effect

through the energy saving enables
 Interchangeable installation size Cost
benefits the investment cost to be
• Replacement can be smoothly recovered, and after that, the
energy saving effect will bring
performed because the installation Replaceable in the some profit through power saving.
size (frame number) is compatible same space The annual saved sum of money
with our standard efficiency motor can be calculated according to the
Existing motor
SF-JR series. SF-PR SFｰPR
following formula. The longer
• It is possible to use a power (Premium Efficiency)
operation time in an application,
the more money can be saved.
distribution control equipment Excellent interchangeability
with the same shaft diameter
Number of years of use
(thermal relay and breaker), which and the same shaft height!
Breakeven point
Recovery period for
is the same as a conventional the amount of a price
model. increase
 For the frame number 180 LD or higher and some models of the 6-pole product,
the total length or diametrical dimension is greatly different. <Calculation formula>
14
 The frame number is different from 1.5 kW6P (112M), 2.2 kW6P(132S) of the Number Number
Output Number of of Electricity
SF-HR models. (kW) Efficiency of Efficiency of of hours days of rate
 When replacing the SF-JR to the SF-PR, it is required to consider upgrading the current motor SF-PR model motors of use operation
(day/year) (yen/kWh)
(%) (%) (h/day)
contactor to secure the same electric durability as using the SF-JR because the
Compatible Motors
electric durability of the contactor may reduce by about 30%. Besides, when When replacing our standard motor SF-JR with the SF-PR on the ventilation
replacing the SF-JR to the SF-PR, the existing thermal relay may trip depending fan in plant
on the operating conditions (long starting time ). As a countermeasure, consider
"Adjusting the heater set value of the thermal" or "Adopting the thermal with a ＜Condition＞
saturated reactor ", etc. Type : 11 kW 4P 200 V 50 Hz 75% load Reduced cost of
 If the breaker NF400-SW manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric is used with the 55 Units : 10 units about 350,000 yen
kW motor, change the breaker. (Change the rated current of the breaker NF400- Operation time : 12 h/day 365 day/year
SW from 300 A to 350 A.)
per year
Electricity rate: 16 yen/kWh
Trial calculation results in replacing the SF-JR with the SF-PR with improved efficiency by 5%
under the same conditions of the load factor, operation time, and electricity charges, etc.
205
 Lineup
●Model
S F - PR V O B - KR
Symbol Structure Symbol Enclosure type Symbol Series Symbol Installation Symbol Classification Symbol With or without Symbol Country code
S Superline series Totally enclosed brake
PR Steel plate frame None Foot mounting
Premium series None Indoor type (IP44) Japan and
F None
fan-cooled type O Outdoor type (IP44) None Without brake the U.S.A.
V Vertical type Dust-proof and B With brake UL US UL standard
P waterproof type(IP55)
●Available models F Flange type KR Korea
EU Europe
Totally-enclosed fan-cooled type China
Type CN
Foot mounting type Vertical type Flange type Outdoor type Dustproof/waterproof type
Model SF-PR SF-PRV SF-PRF SF-PRO SF-PRP
Number of poles 2P 4P 6P 2P 4P 6P 2P 4P 6P 2P 4P 6P 2P 4P 6P
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
Output 15
(kW) 18.5
22 • The vertical type and the flange
30
type are also available for the
37
45 outdoor type and the dustproof/
55 waterproof type.
●: Available model
14
Compatible Motors
206
 The SF-PR best matches Mitsubishi Electric inverters
 This enables a constant-torque operation in the low-speed range. (expanding the constant-torque
range)
• Combining with the standard motor SF-PR enables a constant-torque operation in the low-speed range.
• The SF-PR has superior performance to the SF-HRCA.
• The 400 V class motors are insulation-enhanced motors as standard.
 Combination with Advanced magnetic flux  Combination with V/F control

vector control • Enables a constant-torque operation down to 6 Hz in a low-speed
• Enables a constant-torque operation down to 0.5 Hz in a super range.
low-speed range. Expanding the constant-torque continuous operation range
Expanding the constant-torque continuous operation range enables 6 to 60 Hz (1: 10) operation.
enables 0.5 to 60 Hz (1: 120) operation.
SF-PR model
SF-PR model
Continuous SF-HRCA model(High-efficiency constant-torque motor) Continuous
operation operation
torque (%) SF-HR model(High-efficiency motor) torque (%)
100 100
60 Hz reference
60 Hz reference
220, 230/440, 460 V 220, 230/440, 460 V
200 V/400 V SF-HRCA 200 V/400 V
Significantly Improved
50 expanded 50
45
45
Frequency Frequency
(Hz) (Hz)
0.5 3 6 60 120 6 20 60 120
60 Hz torque reference indicates that the rated motor torque is 100% during 60 Hz operation.
 Motor torque
The following shows torque characteristics of the high-performance, energy-saving motor (SF-PR, 4-pole) in combination with an inverter with
the ND or HD rating. The overload capacity decreases for the LD or SLD rating. Observe the specified range of the inverter.
 Maximum short-time torque
Real sensorless vector control V/F control
3.7 kW or lower
200
Output torque (%)
150
5.5 kW or higher 220, 230/440, 460 V
150
220 V
Output torque (%)
100 200/400 V
200 V
100 70
(56)
63
(50)
70
(56)
63
(50)
0
6 60 120
0
0.3 60
120
The values in parentheses are applicable to 2.2 kW.

14
The values in parentheses are applicable to 1.5 kW and 2.2 kW.
Compatible Motors
 Continuous torque
Real sensorless vector control V/F control
220, 230/440, 460 V 220, 230/440, 460 V

Output torque (%)
Output torque (%)
100 200/400 V 100 200/400 V
50 50
45 45
0 0
0.3 60 120 6 60 120
207
 Mitsubishi Electric high-performance energy-saving motor with encoder superline
premium series SF-PR-SC
 Improved environmental resistance

• Environmental resistance was improved due to the change from
the fan cooled type to the blower cooled type. The IP55
compatible motor with an encoder is now also available.
• With the wire-saving design, improved reliability can be obtained.
• Anti-corrosive coating (type 3) is also available.
 Fast-response / high-accuracy vector control  Motor torque

Fast-response and high-accuracy vector control can be performed • Excellent speed accuracy
by the use in combination with the general-purpose FR-A800 Speed fluctuation ratio: ±0.01% (for power driving)
inverter, plug-in option (FR-A8AP/A8AL), and control terminal option • Wide range of speed control
(FR-A8TP). Speed control range: 1:1800 (for power driving)
 Continuous operation torque

 Wide range of constant-torque characteristics Vector control
By selecting vector control, constant-torque continuous operation
can be performed in the range from 0 Hz to 60 Hz (zero speed
control and servo lock are available). 100%
(60 Hz reference)
 Energy saving / CO2 emission reduction

The premium efficiency motor with encoder (compatible with IE3)
meets the Top Runner Standard in Japan and the Energy
57%
Independence and Security Act (EISA) in the United States. (60 Hz reference)
 Compatibility with the inverter

The motor is used in combination with an inverter of the same
capacity.
0 60 100
Frequency [Hz]
The reference torque differs from that of the SF-V5RU series motor.
 Lineup
●Model
14 S F - P R F O B - S C 7 K 4 P H A
Compatible Motors
Symbol Installation method Symbol Classification Symbol Classification Symbol Output Symbol Output Symbol Classification Symbol Protective equipment
None Foot mounting type None Indoor type (IP44) None Without brake 1K 1.5 kW 18K 18.5 kW None 200 V class None Without
F Flange type O Outdoor type (IP44) B With brake 2K 2.2 kW 22K 22 kW H 400 V class T Thermostat
Dustproof/waterproof 3K 3.7 kW 30K 30 kW A Thermistor
P
type (IP55) 5K 5.5 kW 37K 37 kW
7K 7.5 kW 45K 45 kW
11K 11 kW 55K 55 kW
15K 15 kW
208
 Application to standard motors
 Motor loss and temperature rise  Vibration
The motor operated by the inverter has a limit on the continuous The machine-installed motor operated by the inverter may be slightly
operating torque since it is slightly higher in temperature rise than greater in vibration than the one driven by the commercial power
the one operated by a commercial power supply. At a low speed, supply. The possible causes of vibration are as follows.
reduce the output torque of the motor since the cooling effect • Vibration due to imbalance of the rotator itself including the machine
decreases. When 100% torque is needed continuously at low speed, • Resonance due to the natural oscillation of the mechanical
consider using a constant-torque motor. system. Caution is required especially when the machine used at
constant speed is operated at variable speed. The frequency
 Torque characteristic jump function allows resonance points to be avoided during
The motor operated by the inverter may be less in motor torque operation. (During acceleration/deceleration, the frequency within
the setting range is passed through.) An effect is also produced if
(especially starting torque) than the one driven by the commercial Pr.72 PWM frequency selection is changed. When a two-pole
power supply. It is necessary to fully check the load torque motor is operated at higher than 60 Hz, caution should be taken
characteristic of the machine. since such an operation may cause abnormal vibration.
 Motor torque
When the Mitsubishi Electric standard squirrel cage motor (SF-JR, 4-pole) and inverter of the same capacity are used, the torque
characteristics are as shown below. It is assumed that the motor is used in combination with an inverter with the ND or HD rating. The
overload capacity decreases when the LD or SLD rating is selected. Observe the specified range of the inverter.
 Maximum short-time torque
60 Hz torque reference 50 Hz torque reference
Maximum torque for short time (0.4 to 3.7K) Maximum torque for short time(0.4 to 3.7K)
200 170
Real sensorless
220 V
vector control
(5.5K to 55K) (5.5K to 55K)

Output torque
200 V
Output torque
150 130
100 100
70
(%) 63
(%) 53
0 0
0.3 20 60 120 0.3 20 50 120
∗4 ∗3 ∗4 ∗3
∗2 ∗1 ∗2 ∗1
220 V
150 130
140
V/F control
200 V
Output torque
120
Output torque
110 95
100 80
80 67
70
63 53
(%) 30 (%) 25
10 9
0
1 3 6 20 60 120 1 3 6 20 50 120
 Torque boost minimum (0%)

 Torque boost standard (initial value)
 Torque boost large
7%: FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to FR-A820-00250(3.7K), FR-A840-00052(1.5K) to FR-A840-00126(3.7K)
 Torque boost adjustment (3.7 kW or lower)
• The maximum short-time torque indicates the maximum torque characteristics within 60 s.
• Under Real sensorless vector control, 200% (150%) torque (60 Hz torque reference) is output at 0.3 Hz operation.
• A 60 Hz torque reference indicates that the rated torque of the motor running at 60 Hz is 100%, and a 50 Hz torque reference indicates that
the rated torque of the motor running at 50 Hz is 100% 14
• Under V/F control, all of SF-JR 2-pole, 4-pole, and 6-pole motors have the same torque characteristics.
Compatible Motors
 Continuous torque (Real sensorless vector control)

0.4K to 3.7K 5.5K 7.5K to 30K
100 0.4 to 3.7K
95
90 5.5K 7.5K to 30K
85 85
80 220 V 80
75
70
Output torque
70 200 V
Output torque
65 65
37K to 55K 60
55
50 37K to 55K
45 45
V/F control V/F control
38 (0.2K to 55K)
(%) (0.2K to 55K) (%)
30
25
0 0
36 20 30 40 60 120 36 20 30 40 50 120
• A general-purpose squirrel cage motor must be used at lower continuous operating torque in rated operation as shown in the chart since
the cooling capability of the fan installed on the rotor reduces at a lower speed. (Instantaneous torque occurs.)
• The toque with 200 or 220 V at 60 Hz or 200 V at 50 Hz in the chart indicates a motor torque reference (base frequency set in Pr.3 of the
inverter) and is not the frequency of the power supply. In a 50 Hz power supply area, the 60 Hz setting can be set.
• When continuously operating a motor with the 50 Hz torque reference setting, set the load torque to 85% or lower.
209
 Application to constant-torque motors
 SF-HRCA type  Standard specifications (indoor type)
• Continuous operation even at low speed of 0.3 Hz is possible
Output Number of Frequency
(when using Real sensorless vector control). (kW) poles range
Common specification
For the 37 kW or lower (except for 22 kW), load torque is not
0.4
needed to be reduced even at a low speed and constant torque
(100% torque) continuous operation is possible within the range 0.75
of speed ratio 1/20 (3 to 60 Hz). 1.5
(The characteristic of motor running at 60 Hz or higher is that 2.2 3 to 120 Hz
output torque is constant.) 3.7 Base frequency 60 Hz
• Installation size is the same as that of the standard motor. • Rotation direction (CCW)
• Note that operation characteristic in the chart below cannot be 5.5 Counterclockwise when viewed
obtained if V/F control is used. 7.5 from the motor end
• Lead wire
11 4
3.7 kW or lower: 3 wires
15 5.5 kW or higher: 6 or 12 wires
18.5 3 to 100 Hz • Surrounding air temperature: 40C
or lower
22 The protective structure is IP44.
30
37
45 3 to 65 Hz
55
 Motor torque
It is assumed that the motor is used in combination with an inverter with the ND or HD rating. The overload capacity decreases when the LD
or SLD rating is selected. Observe the specified range of the inverter.
 Continuous rated range of use (Real sensorless vector control)

(when the inverter is 0.4 kW to 7.5 kW) (when the inverter is 11 kW to 22 kW)
Maximum torque for short time (0.4 kW to 3.7 kW)

200
Maximum torque for short time

(5.5 kW to 7.5 kW)
Maximum torque for short time
150
150
220 V 220 V
Output torque
Continuous operation torque

(0.4 kW to 2.2 kW, 5.5 kW, 7.5 kW) Continuous operation torque
Output torque
(15 kW, 18.5 kW) 200 V

100 200 V 100
95
95
85
70 80
(60)
(%) 63 Continuous operation torque (3.7 kW)
(50) 60
50 (%) 57
(45)
45
(51) Continuous operation torque
(40) (22 kW)
(11 kW)
0 0
0.3 3 60 120 0.3 3 10 60 100
Values in parenthesis apply to the 0.4 kW to 0.75 kW Values in parenthesis apply to the 22 kW

(when the inverter is 30 kW) (when the inverter is 37 kW to 55 kW)
14
Maximum torque for short time Maximum torque for short time
150
150
220 V
130
Output torque
Output torque

Compatible Motors
200 V
100 torque (37 kW)
100
92
85 80
80
(%) torque (45 kW, 55 kW)
57
54 (%)
0 0
0.3 60 100 0.3 3 10 60 65
The maximum short-time torque indicates the maximum torque characteristics within 60 s.
For the motor constant under Real sensorless vector control, please contact your sales representative.
210
 Application to vector control dedicated motors (SF-V5RU) (55 kW or lower)
For performing vector control, the FR-A8AP/FR-A8TP (vector control compatible option) is required.
When the FR-A8TP is not used, a 12 V or 24 V power supply is required as the power supply for the encoder of the SF-V5RU. (When the FR-
A8TP is used, the 24 V power supply of the FR-A8TP can be used for the encoder of the SF-V5RU.)
 Motor torque
When the vector control dedicated motor (SF-V5RU) and inverter are used, the torque characteristics are as shown below.
It is assumed that the motor is used in combination with an inverter with the ND or HD rating. The overload capacity decreases when the LD
or SLD rating is selected. Observe the specified range of the inverter.
• SF-V5RU
Rated speed of 1500 r/min series
<1.5 to 22 (kW)> <30 to 55 (kW)>
Maximum torque for short time Maximum torque for short time
150 150
Output torque
Output torque
Continuous Continuous
operation torque operation torque Constant power
100 Constant power 100
94 Reduced output
75
63
(%) 50 (%) 60
40
0 1500 3000 0 1500 2400 3000

Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min)
• SF-V5RU1, 3, and 4
1000 r/min torque reference (speed ratio 1:2) 1000 r/min torque reference (speed ratio 1:3) 500 r/min torque reference (speed ratio 1:4)
<1.5 to 37 (kW)> <1.5 to 30 (kW)> <1.5 to 15 (kW)>
Maximum torque for short time Maximum torque for short time Maximum torque for short time
(SF-V5RU[]K1Y) (SF-V5RU[]K3Y) (SF-V5RU[]K4Y)
150 Maximum torque for short time 150 150
(SF-V5RU[]K1) Maximum torque for short time Maximum torque for short time
Constant power (SF-V5RU[]K3) (SF-V5RU[]K4)
120 120 120
Continuous operation Continuous operation
Output torque
Output torque
Output torque
torque torque
100 100 100
Reduced output Continuous
30 kW operation
Constant power torque
(SF-V5RU30K1)
75 Constant power
(%) 60 (%) 63 (%)
54
50 50
45 42
40 37.5
33 30
25
0 0 0
0 1000 2000 0 1000 2400 3000 0 500 2000
Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min)
• The maximum rotation speed of the SF-V5RU-55kW and SF-V5RU3-30kW is 2400 r/min.
• The SF-V5RU-3.7kW or lower can be operated with the maximum rotation speed of 3600 r/min. For the use of those motors, please
contact your sales representative.
• The maximum rotation speed of motors with a brake is 1800 r/min.
• The maximum short-time torque of the SF-V5RU[]K1, SF-V5RU[]K3, and SF-V5RU[]K4 is 120%.
As the motor compatible with the maximum short-time torque of 150%, specify the SF-V5RU[]K1Y, SF-V5RU[]K3Y, or SF-V5RU[]K4Y.
14
Compatible Motors
211
 Motor model
S F - V 5 RU F H 5K 1 B T Y
Symbol Structure Symbol Structure Symbol Output (kW) Symbol Output (kW) Symbol Electromagnetic brake Symbol Protective device Symbol Permissible load
None Horizontal type None 200 V class 1K 1.5 18K 18.5 None Without None With thermal protector None 120% 60 s
F Flange type H 400 V class 2K 2.2 22K 22 B With ∗1 T With thermistor ∗2 Y 150% 60 s
3K 3.7 30K 30
5K 5.5 37K 37 Symbol Rated speed (r/min) Maximum speed (r/min)
7K 7.5 45K 45 None 1500 3000
11K 11 55K 55 1 1000 2000
15K 15 3 1000 3000
4 500 2000
 Since a brake power device is a stand-alone, install it inside the enclosure. (This device should be arranged at the customer side.)
 To use the thermistor function of the thermistor-equipped motor SF-V5RU [][][][][] T, the plug-in option (FR-A8AZ) is required additionally.
 Model lineup (: Available model, -: Not available)

• Rated speed: 1500 r/min (4 poles)
Standard Rated output (kW) 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
Model type Frame number 90L 100L 112M 132S 132M 160M 160L 180M 180M 200L 200L 200L 225S
Standard horizontal type SF-V5RU(H)[]             
Flange type SF-V5RUF(H)[]             -
Standard horizontal type with brake SF-V5RU(H)[]B             
Flange type with brake SF-V5RUF(H)[]B        - - - - - -
• Rated speed: 1000 r/min (4 poles), maximum speed: 2000 r/min, speed ratio 1:2
Rated output (kW) 1.5
Standard 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37
Model
typeFrame number 100L 112M 132S 132M 160M 160L 180M 180L 200L 200L 225S
Standard horizontal type SF-V5RU(H)[]1(Y)           
Flange type SF-V5RUF(H)[]1(Y)           -
Standard horizontal type with brake SF-V5RU(H)[]1B(Y)           
Flange type with brake SF-V5RUF(H)[]1B(Y)       - - - - -
Rated output (kW) 1.5
Standard 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30
Model
typeFrame number 112M 132S 132M 160M 160L 180M 180L 200L 200L 225S
Standard horizontal type SF-V5RU(H)[]3(Y)          
Flange type SF-V5RUF(H)[]3(Y)          -
Standard horizontal type with brake SF-V5RU(H)[]3B(Y)          
Flange type with brake SF-V5RUF(H)[]3B(Y)      - - - - -
Standard Rated output (kW) 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15
Model
type Frame number 132M 160M 160L 180L 200L 225S 225S
Standard horizontal type SF-V5RU(H)[]4(Y)       
Flange type SF-V5RUF(H)[]4(Y)      - -
Standard horizontal type with brake SF-V5RU(H)[]4B(Y)       
Flange type with brake SF-V5RUF(H)[]4B(Y)    - - - -
Since motors with frame No. 250 or higher, 400 V class, speed ratio 1:4 specifications are available as special products, please contact your sales representative.
 Combination with the SF-V5RU1, 3, 4, SF-THY and inverter

When using the SF-V5RU1, 3, or 4(Y), always set Pr.83 Rated motor voltage and perform the offline auto tuning according to the Instruction
Manual and additional materials, which are enclosed with the motor, and the Instruction Manual of the inverter.
14 Voltage
SF-V5RU[]1 (1:2) SF-V5RU[]3 (1:3)
200 V class
SF-V5RU[]4 (1:4)
Rated speed 1000 r/min 1000 r/min 500 r/min

Compatible Motors
Base frequency 33.33 Hz 33.33 Hz 16.6 Hz

Maximum speed 2000 r/min 3000 r/min 2000 r/min
Motor Inverter model Motor Inverter model Motor Inverter model
Motor
frame Motor model FR-A820-[] frame Motor model FR-A820-[] frame Motor model FR-A820-[]
capacity
number (ND rating) number (ND rating) number (ND rating)
1.5 kW 100L SF-V5RU1K1(Y) 00167(2.2K) 112M SF-V5RU1K3(Y) 00167(2.2K) 132M SF-V5RU1K4(Y) 00167(2.2K)
2.2 kW 112M SF-V5RU2K1(Y) 00240(3.7K) 132S SF-V5RU2K3(Y) 00240(3.7K) 160M SF-V5RU2K4(Y) 00240(3.7K)
3.7 kW 132S SF-V5RU3K1(Y) 00340(5.5K) 132M SF-V5RU3K3(Y) 00340(5.5K) 160L SF-V5RU3K4*3 00490(7.5K)
5.5 kW 132M SF-V5RU5K1(Y) 00490(7.5K) 160M SF-V5RU5K3(Y) 00490(7.5K) 180L SF-V5RU5K4(Y) 00490(7.5K)
7.5 kW 160M SF-V5RU7K1(Y) 00630(11K) 160L SF-V5RU7K3(Y) 00630(11K) 200L SF-V5RU7K4(Y) 00630(11K)
11 kW 160L SF-V5RU11K1(Y) 00770(15K) 180M SF-V5RU11K3(Y) 00770(15K) 225S SF-V5RU11K4(Y) 00770(15K)
15 kW 180M SF-V5RU15K1(Y) 00930(18.5K) 180L SF-V5RU15K3(Y) 00930(18.5K) 225S SF-V5RU15K4*3 01250(22K)
18.5 kW 180L SF-V5RU18K1(Y) 01250(22K) 200L SF-V5RU18K3(Y) 01250(22K) 250MD SF-THY 01250(22K)
22 kW 200L SF-V5RU22K1(Y) 01540(30K) 200L SF-V5RU22K3(Y) 01540(30K) 280MD SF-THY 01540(30K)
30 kW 200L*2 SF-V5RU30K1(Y) 01870(37K) 225S*1 SF-V5RU30K3(Y) 01870(37K) 280MD SF-THY 01870(37K)
37 kW 225S SF-V5RU37K1(Y) 02330(45K) 250MD*1 SF-THY 02330(45K) 280MD SF-THY 02330(45K)
45 kW 250MD SF-THY 03160(55K) 250MD*1 SF-THY 03160(55K) 280MD SF-THY 03160(55K)
55 kW 250MD SF-THY 03800(75K) 280MD*1 SF-THY 03800(75K) 280L SF-THY 03800(75K)
Models surrounded by black borders and 400 V class are developed upon receipt of order. (For the SF-THY model, refer to page 218.)
 The maximum speed is 2400 r/min.
 90% output in the high-speed range. (The output is reduced when the speed is 1000 r/min or faster. For details, please contact your sales representative.)
 For motors with overload capacity 150% 60 s ("Y" at the end of their model names), contact your sales representative.
212
 Motor specifications
200 V class (Mitsubishi Electric dedicated motor [SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series)])
Motor type
1 2 3 5 7 11 15 18 22 30 37 45 55
SF-V5RU[ ]K
Applicable inverter model
2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
FR-A820-[ ]K (ND rating)
Rated output (kW) 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 *1 37 *1 45 *1 55
Rated current (A) 8.5 11.5 17.6 28.5 37.5 54 72.8 88 102 126 168 198 264
Rated torque (N·m) 9.55 14.1 23.6 35.0 47.7 70.0 95.5 118 140 191 235 286 350
Maximum torque 150% 60 s (N·m) 14.3 21.1 35.4 52.4 71.6 105 143 176 211 287 353 429 525
Rated speed (r/min) 1500
Maximum speed (r/min) 3000 *2 2400
Frame No. 90L 100L 112M 132S 132M 160M 160L 180M 180M 200L 200L 200L 225S
Inertia moment J (10-4 kg·m2) 67.5 105 175 275 400 750 875 1725 1875 3250 3625 3625 6850
85 dB
Noise *5 75 dB or less 80 dB or less
or less
Single-phase 200 V/50 Hz Three-phase 200 V/50 Hz
Voltage
Cooling fan Single-phase 200 V to 230 V/60 Hz Three-phase 200 to 230 V/60 Hz
(with thermal Input *3 36/55 W 22/28 W 55/71 W 100/156 W 85/130 W
protector) (0.26/0.32 A) (0.11/0.13 A) (0.39/0.39 A) (0.47/0.53 A) (0.46/0.52 A)
*7*8 Recommended
0.36 A 0.18 A 0.51 A 0.69 A 0.68 A
thermal setting
Surrounding air temperature,
-10 to +40°C (non-freezing), 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
humidity
Structure (Protective structure) Totally enclosed forced draft system (Motor: IP44, cooling fan: IP23S) *4
Detector Encoder 2048P/R, A phase, B phase, Z phase +12 V/24 VDC power supply *6
Equipment Encoder, thermal protector, fan
Heat resistance class F
Vibration rank V10
Approx. mass (kg) 24 33 41 52 62 99 113 138 160 238 255 255 320
400 V class (Mitsubishi Electric dedicated motor [SF-V5RUH (1500 r/min series)])
Motor type
1 2 3 5 7 11 15 18 22 30 37 45 55
SF-V5RUH[ ]K
Applicable inverter model
2.2 2.2 3.7 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
FR-A840-[ ]K (ND rating)
Rated output (kW) 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 *1 37 *1 45 *1 55
Rated current (A) 4.2 5.8 8.8 14.5 18.5 27.5 35.5 44 51 67 84 99 132
Rated torque (N·m) 9.55 14.1 23.6 35.0 47.7 70.0 95.5 118 140 191 235 286 350
Maximum torque 150% 60 s (N·m) 14.3 21.1 35.4 52.4 71.6 105 143 176 211 287 353 429 525
Rated speed (r/min) 1500
Maximum speed (r/min) 3000 *2 2400
Frame No. 90L 100L 112M 132S 132M 160M 160L 180M 180M 200L 200L 200L 225S
Inertia moment J (10-4 kg·m2) 67.5 105 175 275 400 750 875 1725 1875 3250 3625 3625 6850
Noise *5 75 dB or less 80 dB or less 85 dB or less
Single-phase 200 V/50 Hz Three-phase 380 to 400 V/50 Hz
Voltage
Single-phase 200 V to 230 V/60 Hz Three-phase 400 to 460 V/60 Hz
Cooling fan
36/55 W 22/28 W 55/71 W 100/156 W 85/130 W
(with thermal Input *3 (0.26/0.32 A) (0.11/0.13 A) (0.19/0.19 A) (0.27/0.30 A) (0.23/0.26 A)
protector) *7*8
Recommended
thermal setting
0.36 A 0.18 A 0.25 A 0.39 A 0.34 A 14
Surrounding air temperature,
Compatible Motors

humidity
Structure (Protective structure) Totally enclosed forced draft system (Motor: IP44, cooling fan: IP23S) *4
Detector Encoder 2048P/R, A phase, B phase, Z phase +12 V/24 VDC power supply *6
Equipment Encoder, thermal protector, fan
Heat resistance class F
Vibration rank V10
Approx. mass (kg) 24 33 41 52 62 99 113 138 160 238 255 255 320
*1 80% output in the high-speed range. (The output is reduced when the speed is 2400 r/min or more. Contact us separately for details.)
*2 A dedicated motor of 3.7 kW or less can be run at the maximum speed of 3600 r/min. Consult our sales office when using the motor at the maximum speed.
*3 Power (current) at 50 Hz/60 Hz.
*4 Since a motor with brake has a window for gap check, the protective structure of both the cooling fan section and brake section is IP20. S of IP23S is an
additional code indicating the condition that protection from water intrusion is established only when a cooling fan is not operating.
*5 The value when high carrier frequency is set (Pr.72 = 6, Pr.240 = 0).
*6 The 12 V/24 V power supply is required as the power supply for the encoder. (When the FR-A8TP is used, the 24 V power supply of the FR-A8TP can be
used for the encoder of the SF-V5RU.)
*7 The cooling fan is equipped with a thermal protector. The cooling fan stops when the coil temperature exceeds the specified value in order to protect the fan
motor. A restrained cooling fan or degraded fan motor insulation could be causes for the rise in coil temperature.The cooling fan re-starts when the coil
temperature drops to normal.
*8 The cooling fan voltage and input values are the basic specifications of the cooling fan alone and free air values. The input value becomes slightly larger
when it is rotated by this motor due to an increased workload, but the cooling fan can be used as it is.When preparing a thermal relay at the user side, use
the recommended thermal setting.
213
 Dedicated motor outline dimension drawings (standard horizontal type)
Frame Number 90L Frame Number 100L, 112M, 132S, 132M
Connector (for encoder) Connector (for encoder)

MS3102A20-29P MS3102A20-29P
L L
R R
A B 50 KL
A B Q
KA 40 D KL
KA QK
Exhaust
Exhaust D
Suction
Suction
A A
KP
I
H
C
A
KG
KG
A
6.5
C
4
φ27
Direction of φ27
Direction of
cooling fan wind F F XB E E cooling fan wind 40
F F XB
Mark for earthing N M Mark for earthing E E
(grounding) N
Earth (ground) terminal (M5) (grounding) M
Earth (ground) terminal (M5) W ML Sliding distance
W Sliding distance
15 4
U
For cooling fan (A, B)
U
T
For motor (U, V, W)
T
9
12
Thermal protector (G1, G2)
S
Frame leg viewed from above S
Section AA Frame leg viewed
Section AA from above
A B U V W G1 G2
Earthing (grounding) terminal (M4)
Frame Number 160M, 160L, 180M, 180L Frame Number 200L, 225S

MS3102A20-29P MS3102A20-29P
L L
R R
KL
A B 110 A B 140 D
D
KA 90 KA 110
Exhaust
Suction
φ90
Exhaust
Suction
With guard A
wires With guard A
I
KP
H
wires
KG
H
C
A
KG
φ56
8
Direction of A
C
cooling fan wind 50 11
Mark for earthing XB E E
F F Direction of 70
(grounding) M
N cooling fan wind Mark for earthing F F XB E E
(grounding)
Earth (ground)
N M
terminal (M8)
Sliding distance For motor (U, V, W)
W 4 Earth (ground)
W Sliding distance
terminal (M12)
U
4
T
14.5
U
T
18.5
S Earthing (grounding)
Frame leg viewed
terminal (M8) S
Section AA from above Frame leg viewed
Section AA from above
Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the frame
14 For cooling fan (A, B, C) For thermal protector (G1, G2) installation foot as well as the earth terminal in the
terminal box.
Compatible Motors
Dimensions table (Unit: mm)

Terminal screw
SF-V5RU SF-V5RU SF-V5RU SF-V5RU Frame Mass Motor
size
[ ]K [ ]K1 [ ]K3 [ ]K4 No. (kg)
A B C D E F H I KA KG KL(KP) L M ML N XB Q QK R S T U W U,V,W A,B,(C) G1,G2
1 — — — 90L 24 256.5 114 90 183.6 70 62.5 198 — 53 65 220(210) 425 175 — 150 56 — — 168.5 24j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4
2 1 — — 100L 33 284 128 100 207 80 70 203.5 230 65 78 231 477 200 212 180 63 60 45 193 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4
3 2 1 — 112M 41 278 135 112 228 95 70 226 253 69 93 242 478 230 242 180 70 60 45 200 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4
5 3 2 — 132S 52 303 152 132 266 108 70 265 288 75 117 256 542 256 268 180 89 80 63 239 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4
7 5 3 1 132M 62 322 171 132 266 108 89 265 288 94 117 256 580 256 268 218 89 80 63 258 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4
11 7 5 2 160M 99 412 198 160 318 127 105 316 367 105 115 330 735 310 — 254 108 — — 323 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4
15 11 7 3 160L 113 434 220 160 318 127 127 316 367 127 115 330 779 310 — 298 108 — — 345 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4
18 — — — 138
180M 438.5 225.5 180 363 139.5 120.5 359 410 127 139 352 790 335 — 285 121 — — 351.5 48k6 9 5.5 14 M8 M4 M4
22 15 11 — 160
— 18 15 5 180L 200 457.5 242.5 180 363 139.5 139.5 359 410 146 139 352 828 335 — 323 121 — — 370.5 55m6 10 6 16 M8 M4 M4
30 — — 7 238
200L 483.5 267.5 200 406 159 152.5 401 — 145 487 (546) 909 390 — 361 133 — — 425.5 60m6 11 7 18 M10 M4 M4
37, 45 22, 30 18, 22 — 255
55 37 30 11, 15 225S 320 500 277 225 446 178 143 446 — 145 533 (592) 932 428 — 342 149 — — 432 65m6 11 7 18 M10 M4 M4
Note) 1. Install the motor on the floor and use it with the shaft horizontal.
2. Leave an enough clearance between the fan suction port and wall to ensure adequate
cooling.
Also, check that the ventilation direction of a fan is from the opposite load side to the
load side.
0
3 The size difference of top and bottom of the shaft center height is -0.5
4 The 400 V class motor has "-H" at the end of its type name.
214
 Dedicated motor outline dimension drawings (1500r/min series) (standard horizontal type with brake)
Connector (for encoder)

MS3102A20-29P Terminal box for cooling fan
MS3102A20-29P Terminal box for cooling fan
L
L A R KL
A R D
KL KA B Q
φ22
KA B 1
50 D Exhaust Main QK
φ22
Exhaust Main 40 Suction terminal box
Suction terminal box
1
A 2
KP
1 1
A
H
KP
A
KG
C
2 φ27
G
A Direction of
C
KG
G
2 φ27 cooling fan wind
F F XB E E
Direction of Mark for earthing
Mark for earthing XB N M
cooling fan wind (grounding) F F 2 E E (grounding)
ML
N M Earth (ground)
Earth (ground) terminal (M5) W
Sliding distance
terminal (M5) Main terminal box Terminal box for cooling fan X
Sliding distance
U
W For brake (B1, B2)
X
T
For motor (U, V, W)
U
Z
T
For thermal protector (G1, G2)

Z
S
S Frame leg viewed Section AA Frame leg viewed
Section AA from above from above
B1 B2 U V W G1 G2 A B C
Earthing (grounding) Earthing (grounding)

terminal (M4) terminal (M4)
Frame Number 160M, 160L, 180M, 180L Frame Number 200L, 225S
Terminal box for cooling fan Connector (for encoder)

Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P Terminal box for cooling fan
MS3102A20-29P
L L
A R A R
KL B 140 D
KA B 110
Main D
90 φ22 KA Main 110
Suction Exhaust terminal box 1
terminal box
φ22
φ90
Exhaust
Suction
1, 2 A 2 1
KP
2
1, 2 A
KP
H
KG
H
φ56
C
KG
A
G
C
Direction of
G
Mark for earthing J
cooling fan wind (grounding) F F XB E E Mark for earthing J
Earth (ground) N Direction of
M (grounding) F F XB E E
terminal (M8) cooling fan wind
N M
W Sliding distance
X Earth (ground) W
U
Sliding distance
U
terminal (M12)
T
X
T
Terminal box for cooling fan

Z
Main terminal box

S For motor (U, V, W)
Z
Frame leg viewed S
Section AA For cooling fan (A, B, C)
from above Section AA Frame leg viewed
Earthing from above
(grounding) A B C
 indicates an inserting position of a bolt with hex
U V W
terminal (M8)
Earthing (grounding) head holes for manual opening.
terminal (M4)
B1 B2 G1 G2 Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the frame
installation foot as well as the earth terminal in the
For brake (B1, B2) For thermal protector (G1, G2) terminal box.

Terminal screw
14
Motor Shaft end
SF-V5RU SF-V5RU SF-V5RU SF-V5RU Frame Mass size
Compatible Motors
[ ]KB [ ]K1B [ ]K3B [ ]K4B No. (kg) U,V, A,B G1, B1,
A B C D E F G H I J KA KD KG KL KP L M ML N X XB Z Q QK R S T U W
W ,(C) G2 B2
1 — — — 90L 29 296.5 114 90 183.6 70 62.5 4 — — — 53 27 65 220 245 465 175 — 150 15 56 9 50 40 168.5 24j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
2 1 — — 100L 46 333.5 128 100 207 80 70 6.5 — — 40 65 27 78 231 265 526.5 200 212 180 4 63 12 60 45 193 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
3 2 1 — 112M 53 355 135 112 228 95 70 6.5 — — 40 69 27 93 242 290 555 230 242 180 4 70 12 60 45 200 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
5 3 2 — 132S 70 416 152 132 266 108 70 6.5 — — 40 75 27 117 256 329 655 256 268 180 4 89 12 80 63 239 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 M4
7 5 3 1 132M 80 435 171 132 266 108 89 6.5 — — 40 94 27 117 256 329 693 256 268 218 4 89 12 80 63 258 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 M4
11 7 5 2 160M 140 522.5 198 160 318 127 105 8 — — 50 105 56 115 330 391 845.5 310 — 254 4 108 14.5 110 90 323 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 M4
15 11 7 3 160L 155 544.5 220 160 318 127 127 8 — — 50 127 56 115 330 391 889.5 310 — 298 4 108 14.5 110 90 345 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 M4
18 — — — 185
180M 568.5 225.5 180 363 139.5 120.5 8 — — 50 127 56 139 352 428 920 335 — 285 4 121 14.5 110 90 351.5 48k6 9 5.5 14 M8 M4 M4 M4
22 15 11 — 215
— 18 15 5 180L 255 587.5 242.5 180 363 139.5 139.5 8 — — 50 146 56 139 352 428 958 335 — 323 4 121 14.5 110 90 370.5 55m6 10 6 16 M8 M4 M4 M4
30 — — 7 305
200L 644.5 267.5 200 406 159 152.5 11 — — 70 145 90 487 — 546 1070 390 — 361 4 133 18.5 140 110 425.5 60m6 11 7 18 M10 M4 M4 M4
37, 45 22, 30 18, 22 — 330
55 37 30 11, 15 225S 395 659 277 225 446 178 143 11 — — 70 145 90 533 — 592 1091 428 — 342 4 149 18.5 140 110 432 65m6 11 7 18 M10 M4 M4 M4
cooling.
load side.
0
3 The size difference of top and bottom of the shaft center height is -0.5
4 The 400 V class motor has "-H" at the end of its type name.
5. Since a brake power device is a stand-alone, install it inside the enclosure.
(This device should be arranged at the customer side.)
215
 Dedicated motor outline dimension drawings (1500r/min series) (flange type)

MS3102A20-29P MS3102A20-29P
LL
LL
KB LR
Q KL KB LR
LG LE LN LZ Q
Exhaust QK LG LE KL
QK LN LZ
Section Exhaust
AA Section
Suction AA
A LA
B Suction
LA
IE
LC
LB
D
B B A
LC
LB
D
A
KD B
Direction of
cooling fan wind
W KD A
Earth (ground) terminal (M5)
U
Direction of
Mark for earthing (grounding)
T
cooling fan wind W
U
S
T
Section BB For motor (U, V, W)
For thermal protector (G1, G2) S
Section BB
A B U V W G1 G2
terminal (M4)
Frame Number 160M, 160L, 180M, 180L Frame Number 200L

MS3102A20-29P MS3102A20-29P
LL LL
KB LR KB LR
Q
Q QK KL
LG LE LN LZ
LG LE LN LZ Exhaust
QK KL Section
Exhaust Section
AA
AA Suction
Suction
IE
B LA
IE
A
LA
A
LC
LB
D
B
B
LC
LB
D
B
KD A KD
Direction of A
cooling fan wind Earth (ground) terminal (M12)
Direction of Mark for earthing (grounding) W
Earth (ground) terminal (M8) W
cooling fan wind
U
Mark for earthing (grounding) With guard wires

U
With guard wires

T
For motor (U, V, W)

S
S Section BB
Section BB
terminal (M8)
Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the flange

section as well as the earth terminal in the terminal
For cooling fan (A, B, C) For thermal protector (G1, G2) box.
14 Dimensions table
SF-V5RU SF-V5RU SF-V5RU SF-V5RU Flange Frame Mass Motor Shaft end
(Unit: mm)
Terminal screw
size
F[ ]K F[ ]K1 F[ ]K3 F[ ]K4 Number No. (kg)
D IE KB KD KL LA LB LC LE LG LL LN LZ LR Q QK S T U W U,V,W A,B,(C) G1,G2
Compatible Motors
1 — — — FF165 90L 26.5 183.6 — 198.5 27 220 165 130j6 200 3.5 12 402 4 12 50 50 40 24j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4
2 1 — — FF215 100L 37 207 130 213 27 231 215 180j6 250 4 16 432 4 14.5 60 60 45 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4
3 2 1 — FF215 112M 46 228 141 239 27 242 215 180j6 250 4 16 448 4 14.5 60 60 45 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4
5 3 2 — FF265 132S 65 266 156 256 27 256 265 230j6 300 4 20 484 4 14.5 80 80 63 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4
7 5 3 1 FF265 132M 70 266 156 294 27 256 265 230j6 300 4 20 522 4 14.5 80 80 63 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4
11 7 5 2 FF300 160M 110 318 207 318 56 330 300 250j6 350 5 20 625 4 18.5 110 110 90 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4
15 11 7 3 FF300 160L 125 318 207 362 56 330 300 250j6 350 5 20 669 4 18.5 110 110 90 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4
18 — — — 160
FF350 180M 363 230 378.5 56 352 350 300j6 400 5 20 690 4 18.5 110 110 90 48k6 9 5.5 14 M8 M4 M4
22 15 11 — 185
— 18 15 5 FF350 180L 225 363 230 416.5 56 352 350 300j6 400 5 20 728 4 18.5 110 110 90 55m6 10 6 16 M8 M4 M4
30 — — 7 270
FF400 200L 406 255 485 90 346 400 350j6 450 5 22 823.5 8 18.5 140 140 110 60m6 11 7 18 M10 M4 M4
37, 45 22, 30 18, 22 — 290
For use under the shaft, the protection structure of the cooling fan is IP20.
cooling.
load side.
3. The 400 V class motor has "-H" at the end of its type name.
216
 Dedicated motor outline dimension drawings (1500r/min series) (flange type with brake)
Connector (for encoder) Connector (for encoder) Terminal box for cooling fan
MS3102A20-29P Terminal box for cooling fan MS3102A20-29P
LL
LL
KB LR
KB LR
LG LE KL Q KL
Exhaust Main Q Exhaust LG LE
terminal box Main 1
QK terminal box QK
Suction
φ22
φ22
Suction Section Section A LN LZ
LN LZ
AA AA
KP
1
KP
1 1
2
B A B LA
D
LC
LB
D
LC
LB
B LA
B A
2 A 2
KD
KD
Direction of 2 Direction of
cooling fan wind
W cooling fan wind W
U
U
T
T
S
Main terminal box Terminal box for cooling fan S
For brake (B1, B2)
Section BB
For motor (U, V, W) Section BB
For thermal protector (G1, G2)
B1 B2 U V W G1 G2 A B C
Earthing Earthing
(grounding) (grounding)
terminal (M4) terminal (M4)
Frame Number 160M, 160L

MS3102A20-29P
Terminal box for cooling fan
LL
KB LR
KL
Main LG LE
Q
φ22
terminal box LN LZ
Exhaust QK 1
Section
AA
Suction
KP
LA
1, 2 A 2
B
LC
LB
D
B
KD A
W
Direction of
U
cooling fan wind

T

S
Main terminal box Terminal box for cooling fan
For motor (U, V, W) Section BB
For cooling fan (A, B, C)
 indicates an inserting position of a bolt with hex
Earthing A B C head holes for manual opening.
U V W
(grounding) Earthing
terminal (M8) (grounding)
terminal (M4) Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the flange
B1 B2 G1 G2
section as well as the earth terminal in the terminal
box.
For brake (B1, B2) For thermal protector (G1, G2)

14
SF-V5RU SF-V5RU SF-V5RU SF-V5RU Flange Frame Mass Motor Shaft end Terminal screw size
Compatible Motors
F[ ]KB F[ ]K1B F[ ]K3B F[ ]K4B Number No. (kg) D KB KD KL KP LA LB LC LE LG LL LN LZ LR Q QK S T U W U,V,W A,B,(C) B1,B2 G1,G2
1 — — — FF165 90L 31.5 183.6 198.5 27 220 155 165 130j6 200 3.5 12 442 4 12 50 50 40 24j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
2 1 — — FF215 100L 50 207 213 27 231 165 215 180j6 250 4 16 481.5 4 14.5 60 60 45 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
3 2 1 — FF215 112M 58 228 239 27 242 178 215 180j6 250 4 16 525 4 14.5 60 60 45 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
5 3 2 — FF265 132S 83 266 256 27 256 197 265 230j6 300 4 20 597 4 14.5 80 80 63 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 M4
7 5 3 1 FF265 132M 88 266 294 27 256 197 265 230j6 300 4 20 635 4 14.5 80 80 63 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 M4
11 7 5 2 FF300 160M 151 318 318 56 330 231 300 250j6 350 5 20 735.5 4 18.5 110 110 90 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 M4
15 11 7 3 FF300 160L 167 318 362 56 330 231 300 250j6 350 5 20 779.5 4 18.5 110 110 90 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 M4
cooling.
load side.
3. The 400 V class motor has "-H" at the end of its type name.
4. Since a brake power device is a stand-alone, install it inside the enclosure.
(This device should be arranged at the customer side.)
217
 Application to vector control dedicated motors (SF-THY) (75 kW or higher)
For performing vector control, the FR-A8AP/FR-A8TP (vector control compatible option) is required.
When the FR-A8TP is not used, a 12 V or 24 V power supply is required as the power supply for the encoder of the SF-THY. (When the FR-
A8TP is used, the 24 V power supply of the FR-A8TP can be used for the encoder of the SF-THY.)
 Motor torque
When the vector control dedicated motor (SF-THY) and inverter of the same capacity are used and rated voltage is input, the torque
characteristics are as shown below.
<75 (kW)> <90 to 250 (kW)>
Maximum torque Maximum torque

150 150
Output torque
125
Output torque
Rated torque Rated torque

100 100
94
83
63
(%) (%)
0 1.5 1500 2400 0 1.5 1500 1800

Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min)
 Model lineup
• Rated speed: 1500 r/min (4 poles)
Rated output (kW)
Model Standard type
75 90 110 132 160 200 250
Standard horizontal
SF-THY[] 75 90 110 132 160 200 250
type
• Both 200 V and 400 V classes have the same model name.
Since motors speed ratio, 1:2, 1:3, or 1:4 specifications are available as special products, contact your sales representative.
Motor type SF-THY

Applicable inverter FR-A820-[ ]K FR-A840-[ ]K
(ND rating) 90 90 110 132 160 185 220 280
Rated output (kW) 75 75 90 110 132 160 200 250
Rated torque (N·m) 477 477 572 700 840 1018 1273 1591
Maximum torque 150%60 s (N·m) 715 715 858 1050 1260 1527 1909 2386
Rated speed (r/min) 1500 1500
Maximum speed (r/min) 2400 2400 1800
Frame No. 250MD 250MD 250MD 280MD 280MD 280MD 280L 315H
Inertia moment J (kg· m2) 1.1 1.1 1.7 2.3 2.3 4.0 3.8 5.0
Noise 90 dB 90 dB 95 dB
Voltage Three-phase, 200 V/50 Hz, 200 V/60 Hz, 220 V/60 Hz (400 V class cooling fan is available upon order)
14 Cooling fan
Input (W)
50 Hz
750
400 400 400 400 400 750 750
60 Hz 750 750 750 750 750 1500 1500
Compatible Motors
Approx. mass (kg) 610 610 660 870 890 920 1170 1630
Surrounding air
temperature, humidity
Structure Totally enclosed forced draft system
Equipment Encoder, thermal protector, fan
Common specifications
Insulation Class F
Vibration rank V10
Resolution 2048 pulse/rev
Dedicated encoder
Power supply voltage 12 V/24 VDC±10% 

Current consumption 90 mA
Output signal form A, B phases (90° phase shift) Z phase: 1 pulse/rev
Output circuit Complementary (constant voltage output matched by emitter follow)
"H" level: Power supply voltage 9 V or more (IOH: -20 mA)
Output voltage
"L" level: Power supply voltage 3 V or less (IOL: 20 mA)
 The 12 V/24 V power supply is required as the power supply for the encoder.
 A motor with a thermal protector is also available. Contact your sales representative.
218
 Dedicated motor outline dimension drawings (1500 r/min series)
Frame Number 250MD, 280MD

75 kW to 160 kW
A R
PF4 Class B screw
B Q
KA
Terminal box for cooling fan MS3102A20-29P
QK
Suction Exhaust
KG
C
G
Direction of W
cooling fan wind K2 K2 J
U
T
K1 K E E
4-φZ hole
F F XB M
Hole (not used) N
S
Frame Number 280L, 315H

200 kW, 250 kW
A R
PF4 Class B screw
B Q
KA
Terminal box for cooling fan MS3102A20-29P
QK
Suction Exhaust
H
KG
C-1.0
0
Direction of
W
cooling fan wind
K2 K2 J
U
T
4-φZ hole K1 K E E
F F XB M
Hole (not used)
N S
14
Compatible Motors
Frame Mass Motor Shaft end size

Output
No. (kg) A B C D E F G H J K K1 K2 L M N R Z XB KA KG Q QK S W T U
75 250MD 610 988.5 340.5 250 557 203 174.5 30 775 100 130 168 50 1471 486 449 482.5 24 168 157.5 635 140 110 75m6 20 12 7.5
90 250MD 660 988.5 340.5 250 557 203 174.5 30 775 100 130 168 50 1471 486 449 482.5 24 168 157.5 635 140 110 75m6 20 12 7.5
110 280MD 870 1049.5 397.5 280 607 228.5 209.5 30 845 110 130 181 40 1619 560 449 569.5 24 190 210.5 705 170 140 85m6 22 14 9
132 280MD 890 1049.5 397.5 280 607 228.5 209.5 30 845 110 130 181 40 1619 560 449 569.5 24 190 210.5 705 170 140 85m6 22 14 9
160 280MD 920 1049.5 397.5 280 607 228.5 209.5 30 845 110 130 181 40 1619 560 499 569.5 24 190 210.5 705 170 140 85m6 22 14 9
200 280L 1170 1210.5 416.5 280 652 228.5 228.5 30 885 110 160 160 75 1799 560 607 588.5 24 190 214.5 745 170 140 85m6 22 14 9
250 315H 1630 1343 565 315 717 254 355 35 965 130 175 428 80 2084 636 870 741 28 216 306 825 170 140 95m6 25 14 9
Note) The tolerance of the top and bottom of the center shaft height *C is 0
-0.5 for the 250 frame and 0
-1.0 for the 280 frame or more.
219
 Application to IPM motors (MM-CF series)
 Motor model
M M - C F 5 2
Electromagnetic Input power
Symbol Output Symbol Output Symbol Rated speed Symbol brake*1 Symbol supply form Symbol Axis form
5 0.5 kW 35 3.5 kW 2 2000 r/min. None N/A Terminal box lead Standard
None None
10 1.0 kW 50 5.0 kW B Yes (standard part) (straight axis)
15 1.5 kW 70 7.0 kW C Cannon connector K With key groove
20 2.0 kW
Motor model Motor capacity

Rated speed Remarks
(The rated output is indicated in square brackets.) 0.5 kW 1.0 kW 1.5 kW 2.0 kW 3.5 kW 5.0 kW 7.0 kW
MM-CF[]2 Standard
MM-CF[]2B - -
2000 r/min
MM-CF[]2C Made on order
MM-CF[]2K
: Released model - : Not available
 IPM motor MM-CF (2000 r/min series)
Motor type: MM-CF[ ] 52(C)(B) 102(C)(B) 152(C)(B) 202(C)(B) 352(C)(B) 502(C) 702(C)
SLD 0.4K 0.4K 0.75K 1.5K 2.2K 3.7K 5.5K
LD 0.4K 0.4K 0.75K 1.5K 2.2K 3.7K 5.5K
Applicable inverter FR-A820-[ ]
ND 0.4K 0.75K 1.5K 2.2K 3.7K 5.5K 7.5K
HD 0.75K 1.5K 2.2K 3.7K 5.5K 7.5K 11K
Continuous Rated output (kW) 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.5 5.0 7.0
characteristics Rated torque (N·m) 2.39 4.78 7.16 9.55 16.70 23.86 33.41
Rated speed (r/min) 2000
Max. speed (r/min) 3000
Instantaneous permissible speed (r/min) 3450 
Maximum torque (N·m) 4.78 9.56 14.32 19.09 33.41 47.73 66.82
6.6 13.7 20.0 45.5 85.6
Inertia moment J (10-4kg·m2) (7.0) (14.9) (21.2) (48.9) (89.0)
120.0 160.0
Recommended ratio of load inertia moment to motor

shaft inertia moment 100 times max. 50 times max.
Rated current (A) 1.81 3.70 5.22 7.70 12.5 20.5 27.0
Insulation rank Class F
Structure Totally-enclosed, self-cooling (protective system: IP44 , IP65 )
Surrounding air temperature, humidity -10C to +40C (non-freezing), 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
Storage temperature and humidity -20C to +70C (non-freezing), 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
Ambience Indoors (no direct sunlight), free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt
Altitude Max. 1000 m above sea level
Vibration X: 9.8 m/s2, Y: 24.5 m/s2
14 Mass (kg) 5.1 (7.8) 7.2 (11) 9.3 (13) 13 (20) 19 (28) 27 36
 When the power supply voltage drops, we cannot guarantee the above output and rated speed.
 When the load torque is 20% of the motor rating. The permissible load inertia moment ratio is smaller when the load torque is larger.
Compatible Motors
Consult us if the load inertia moment ratio exceseds the above value.
 This does not apply to the shaft through portion.
 Value for the MM-CF[ ]2C.
 The value for the MM-CF[ ]2B is indicated in parentheses.
 Set 3150 r/min (210 Hz) or less in Pr.374 Overspeed detection level. The inverter may be damaged by the motor induction voltage if the motor speed
exceeds 3150 r/min (210 Hz).
220
 Motor torque characteristic
Under high frequency superposition control
ND rating selected HD rating selected
Torque % Torque %
Instantaneous (3 s) Instantaneous (3 s)
200 200
Short duration (60 s) Short duration (60 s)
MM-CF 150 150
1.5 kW or lower 120 Continuous Continuous
100 100
100 2000 3000 Speed r/min 2000 3000 Speed r/min
ND rating selected HD rating selected

Torque %
Torque %
Instantaneous (3 s)
Instantaneous (3 s) 200
200
Short duration (60 s)
Short duration (60 s) 150
MM-CF 150
2.0 kW or higher 120 Continuous
Continuous
100
100
100 2000 3000 Speed r/min

100 2000 3000 Speed r/min
∗ Zero speed up to a 150% instantaneous output torque
Under current synchronization operation

ND rating selected
Torque %
Instantaneous (3 s)
200
Short duration (60 s)
MM-CF 150
All capacities Continuous
100
50
200 2000 3000 Speed r/min
 Motor outline dimension

MM-CF[] (Standard) [Unit: mm] MM-CF[]B (With an electromagnetic brake) [Unit: mm]
LL LR □ LD
LL LR □ LD
KB 3
LG 3 KL
45° 4-φZ LG Q KL 45° 4-φZ
KB
Q
C C
φL φL
φLB
φLB
φS
φS
A
φL
A
φKD φL
φKD
KT KT
Output LL φLA φLB φLC □LD LG KB φKD KL KT φZ LR Q φS Output LL φLA φLB φLC □LD LG KB φKD KL KT φZ LR Q φS
Model Model
(kW) (kW)
MM-CF52 0.5 97 62 MM-CF52B 0.5 159 58
MM-CF102 1.0 122 145 110h7 165 130 12 87 22 110 56 9 55 50 24h6 MM-CF102B 1.0 184 145 110h7 165 130 12 83 22 108 80 9 55 50 24h6
MM-CF152 1.5 147 112 MM-CF152B 1.5 209 108
MM-CF202 2.0 128 81.5 MM-CF202B 2.0 231 97.5
0
200 114.3 -0.025 230 176 18 27 141 93 13.5 79 75 35 +0.010
0
MM-CF352 3.5 170 123.5 MM-CF352B 3.5 279 139.5
0
200 114.3 -0.025 230 176 18 27 141 93 13.5 79 75 35 +0.010
0
MM-CF502 5.0 224 172.5 The outline dimensions may be changed. When precise outline dimensions are required,
14
MM-CF702 7.0 299 247.5 contact your sales representative.
The outline dimensions may be changed. When precise outline dimensions are required,
MM-CF[]C (Waterproof type) [Unit: mm]

Compatible Motors
LL LR □ LD 4-φZ To the motor flange To the motor flange To the motor flange
LG 3 45°
Q U
U
U
A V V D
G FG A
F A
V
E H B E D B
Earth (Ground) C B
D
C W
A
Earth (Ground) Earth (Ground) C W

φL
φL C W
Power supply connector arrangement Power supply connector arrangement Power supply connector arrangement
CE05-2A22-23PD-P CE05-2A24-10PD-B CE05-2A32-17SD-D
φLB
φS
<1.5 kW or lower> <2 to 5 kW> (7 kW)
With key groove [Unit: mm]

R
KL
Q
KB
QK QL
U
A
KT
W
φS
Output A
Model LL φLA φLB φLC □LD LG KB KL KT φZ LR Q φS r
(kW) Cross section A-A
MM-CF52C 0.5 97 57.5

MM-CF102C 1.0 122 145 110h7 165 130 12 82.5 111 41 9 55 50 24h6
Motor φS R Q W QK QL U r
MM-CF152C 1.5 147 107.5
MM-CF202C 2.0 128 83.3 MM-CF52 to 152 24h6 55 50 8 -0.036
0
36 5 4 +0.2
0 4
MM-CF352C 3.5 170 125.3 141 46 MM-CF202 to 702 35 +0.010
0 79 75 0
10 -0.036 55 5 5 +0.2
0 5
200 114.3 0
-0.025 230 176 18 13.5 79 75 35+0.010
0
MM-CF502C 5.0 224 179.3
MM-CF702C 7.0 299 249.3 150 58
The outline dimensions may be changed. When precise outline dimensions are required,
221
PM sensorless vector control, PM parameter initial setting
PM parameter
998 E430 IPM IPM initialization
initialization
Performing the IPM parameter initialization makes the IPM motor MM-CF ready for PM sensorless vector control. (This function is not
available in the FR-A842-P.)
PM sensorless vector control requires the following conditions.
• The motor capacity is equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity.
• Single-motor operation (one motor to one inverter) is preformed.
• The overall wiring length with the motor is 100 m or shorter. (Even with the IPM motor MM-CF, when the wiring length exceeds 30 m,
perform offline auto tuning.)
 Setting procedure of PM sensorless vector control
 Selecting the PM sensorless vector control by the IPM initialization mode
This inverter is set for an induction motor in the initial setting. Follow the following procedure to change the setting for the PM sensorless
vector control.
POINT
• The parameters required to drive an MM-CF IPM motor are automatically changed as a batch.
• To change to the PM sensorless vector control, perform the following steps before setting other parameters. If the PM sensorless vector control
is selected after setting other parameters, some of those parameters will be initialized too. (Refer to "IPM parameter initialization list" for the
parameters that are initialized.)
Operation
Screen at power-ON
1.
Changing the operation mode
2.
Press to choose the PU operation mode. [PU] indicator is lit.
3.
Press to choose the parameter setting mode. [PRM] indicator is lit.
IPM parameter initialization

4.
Turn until (IPM parameter initialization) appears.
Setting value display

5.
Press to read the present set value. " " (initial value) appears.
Changing the setting value
6. Turn to change the set value to " ", then press .
" " and " " flicker alternately. The setting is completed.
Setting value Description
14 0
3003
Parameter settings for an induction motor
Parameter settings for an IPM motor MM-CF (rotations per minute)
Compatible Motors
NOTE
• Performing IPM parameter initialization in the parameter setting mode automatically changes the Pr.998PM parameter initialization setting.
• In the initial parameter setting, the capacity same as the inverter capacity is set in Pr.80 Motor capacity. To use a motor capacity that is one
rank lower than the inverter capacity, set Motor capacity by selecting the mode on the operation panel.
• To set a speed or to display monitored items in frequency, set Pr.998. (Refer to Instruction Manual (Detailed).)
 Selecting the PM sensorless vector control by Pr.998
• Setting Pr.998 PM parameter initialization as shown in the following table activates PM sensorless vector control.
Pr.998 setting Description Operation on IPM parameter initialization
0 (initial value) Parameter settings for an induction motor (frequency) (IPM)  write "0"
3003 Parameter settings for an IPM motor MM-CF (rotations per minute) (IPM)  write "3003"
3103 Parameter settings for an IPM motor MM-CF (frequency) -
8009 Parameter (rotations per minute) settings for an IPM motor other than MM-CF (after tuning) -
8109 Parameter (frequency) settings for an IPM motor other than MM-CF (frequency) -
9009 Parameter (rotations per minute) settings for an SPM motor (after tuning) -
9109 Parameter (frequency) settings for an SPM motor (after tuning) -
NOTE
• The S-PM geared motor cannot be driven.
222
 PM parameter initialization list
• The parameter settings in the following table are changed to the settings required to perform PM sensorless vector control by selecting PM
sensorless vector control with the IPM parameter initialization mode on the operation panel or with Pr.998 PM parameter initialization.
• Performing parameter clear or all parameter clear sets back the parameter settings to the settings required to drive an induction motor.
Setting
Induction Setting increments
PM motor (rotations per minute) PM motor (frequency)
motor
Pr. Name 0 8009 8109
Pr.998 (initial value) 3003 9009 3103 9109 3003, 8009, 0, 3103,
(MM-CF) (other than MM- (MM-CF) (other than MM- 9009 8109, 9109
FM CA CF) CF)
120 Hz Maximum motor
1 Maximum frequency Maximum motor
3000 r/min rotations per 200 Hz 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
60 Hz frequency
minute
4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min Pr.84 133.33 Hz Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
Inverter rated Rated motor Rated motor 0.01 A
9 Electronic thermal O/L relay current - current -
current (Refer to page 220.) (Refer to page 220.) 0.1 A
13 Starting frequency 0.5 Hz 8 r/min Pr.84  10% 0.5 Hz Pr.84  10% 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
15 Jog frequency 5 Hz 200 r/min Pr.84  10% 13.33 Hz Pr.84  10% 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
High speed maximum 120 Hz
18 3000 r/min - 200 Hz - 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
frequency 60 Hz
Acceleration/deceleration
20 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min Pr.84 133.33 Hz Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
reference frequency
22 Stall prevention operation level 150% 150% 0.1%
37 Speed display 0 0 1
55 Frequency monitoring reference 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min Pr.84 133.33 Hz Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
Inverter rated Rated motor Rated motor 0.01 A
56 Current monitoring reference current Pr.859 current Pr.859
current (Refer to page 220.) (Refer to page 220.) 0.1 A
71 Applied motor 0 330 - 330 - 1
Motor capacity Motor capacity 0.01 kW
80 Motor capacity 9999 - -
(MM-CF) (MM-CF) 0.1 kW
81 Number of motor poles 9999 8 - 8 - 1
84 Rated motor frequency 9999 2000 r/min - 133.33 Hz - 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
116 Third output frequency detection 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min Pr.84 133.33 Hz Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
125 Terminal 2 frequency setting
60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min Pr.84 133.33 Hz Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
(903) gain frequency
126 Terminal 4 frequency setting
(905) gain frequency
144 Speed setting switchover 4 108 Pr.81 + 100 8 Pr.81 1
240 Soft-PWM operation selection 1 0 1
263 Subtraction starting frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min Pr.84 133.33 Hz Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
Power failure deceleration
266 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min Pr.84 133.33 Hz Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
time switchover frequency
Maximum motor Maximum motor
374 Overspeed detection level 9999 3150 r/min rotations per 210 Hz frequency + 10 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
minute + 10 Hz Hz
386 Frequency for maximum input pulse 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min Pr.84 133.33 Hz Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
505 Speed setting reference 60 Hz 50 Hz 133.33 Hz Pr.84 133.33 Hz Pr.84 0.01 Hz
Current average value Inverter rated Rated motor Rated motor 0.01 A
557 monitor signal output current Pr.859 current Pr.859
reference current current (Refer to page 220.) (Refer to page 220.) 0.1 A
820 Speed control P gain 1 60% 30% 1%
821 Speed control integral time 1 0.333 s 0.333 s 0.001 s
824
Torque control P gain 1 (current
loop proportional gain)
100% 100% 1%
14
Torque control integral time 1
825 5 ms 20 ms 0.1 ms
(current loop integral time)
Compatible Motors
870 Speed detection hysteresis 0 Hz 8 r/min 0.5 Hz 0.5 Hz 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
Regeneration avoidance Pr.84  10% Pr.84  10%
885 compensation frequency limit value
6 Hz 200 r/min 13.33 Hz 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
Energy saving monitor Inverter rated 0.01 kW

893 Motor capacity (Pr.80)
reference (motor capacity) current 0.1 kW
C14 Terminal 1 gain frequency
(918) (speed)
Per-unit speed control 120 Hz Maximum motor
Maximum motor
1121 3000 r/min rotations per 200 Hz
frequency
1 r/min 0.01 Hz
reference frequency 60 Hz minute
-: Not changed
 Initial value for the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower
 Initial value for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher
 Setting Pr.71 Applied motor = "333, 334, 8093, 8094, 9093, or 9094" does not change the Pr.71 Applied motor setting.
 When a value other than "9999" is set, the set value is not changed.
 200 r/min when Pr.788 Low speed range torque characteristic selection = "0"
 13.33 Hz when Pr.788 Low speed range torque characteristic selection = "0"
 110% for SLD, 120% for LD, 150% for ND, and 200% for HD (Refer to Pr.570 Multiple rating setting on page 151.)
 Pr.702 Maximum motor frequency is used as the maximum motor frequency (rotations per minute). When Pr.702 = "9999 (initial value)", Pr.84 Rated
motor frequency is used as the maximum motor frequency (rotations per minute).
 The setting value is converted from frequency to rotations per minute. (The value after the conversion differs according to the number of motor poles.)
NOTE
• If IPM parameter initialization is performed in rotations per minute (Pr.998 = "3003, 8009, or 9009"), the parameters not listed in the table and
the monitored items are also set and displayed in rotations per minute.
223
 Specification comparison between PM sensorless vector control and induction motor control
Item PM sensorless vector control (MM-CF) Induction motor control

IPM motor MM-CF series (0.5 to 7.0 kW) (Refer to page 220.)
Applicable motor Induction motor 
IPM motors other than MM-CF (tuning required) 
High frequency 200% (FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to FR-A820-
200% (200% for the 1.5 kW or lower with MM-CF,
superposition 00250(3.7K), FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to FR-A840-
150% for the 2.0 kW or higher)
control 00126(3.7K))
Starting torque 150% (FR-A820-00340(5.5K), FR-A840-
Current 00170(5.5K) or higher)
synchronization 50% under Real sensorless vector control and
operation vector control
High frequency
superposition Available (Select the HD rating for zero speed 200%)
control Available under Real sensorless vector control
Zero speed
Current and vector control
synchronization Not available
operation
6 kHz (Pr.72 = "0 to 9"),
High frequency 10 kHz (Pr.72 = "10 to 13"),
superposition 14 kHz (Pr.72 = "14 or 15") FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower,
control (6 kHz in a low-speed range of 10 kHz or higher. FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower
The frequency of 2 kHz is not selectable.) : Any value in the range of 0.75 kHz to 14.5 kHz
Carrier frequency
2 kHz (Pr.72 = "0 to 5"), FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher,
Current 6 kHz (Pr.72 = "6 to 9"), FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher
synchronization 10 kHz (Pr.72 = "10 to 13"), : 0.75 kHz to 6 kHz
operation 14 kHz (Pr.72 = "14 or 15")
(6 kHz in a low-speed range of 10 kHz or higher.)
Automatic restart No startup waiting time.
after
Using the regeneration avoidance function or retry function together is Startup waiting time exists.
instantaneous
power failure recommended.
No startup delay (when online auto tuning is not
Startup delay Startup delay of about 0.1 s for magnetic pole position detection.
performed at startup).
Driving by the Can be driven by the commercial power supply.
commercial power Cannot be driven by the commercial power supply.
supply (Other than vector control dedicated motor.)
Operation during While the motor is coasting, potential is not

While the motor is coasting, potential is generated across motor terminals.
coasting generated across motor terminals.
Available under Real sensorless vector control
Torque control Not available
and vector control
High frequency
superposition Available (sensorless)
control
Position control Available under vector control.
Current
synchronization Not available
operation
 The motor capacity is equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity. (It must be 0.4 kW or higher.) Using a motor with the rated current substantially
lower than the inverter rated current will cause torque ripples, etc. and degrade the speed and torque accuracies. As a reference, select the motor with the
rated motor current that is about 40% or higher of the inverter rated current.
NOTE
• Before wiring, make sure that the motor is stopped. Otherwise an electric shock may occur.
• Never connect an IPM motor to the commercial power supply.
• No slippage occurs with an IPM motor because of its characteristic. If an IPM motor, which took over an induction motor, is driven at the same
speed as for the induction motor, the running speed of the IPM motor becomes faster by the amount of the induction motor's slippage. Adjust
14 the speed command to run the IPM motor at the same speed as the induction motor, as required.
Compatible Motors
224
 Countermeasures against deterioration of the 400 V class motor insulation
When driving a 400 V class motor by the inverter, surge voltages attributable to the wiring constants may occur at the motor terminals,
deteriorating the insulation of the motor. When the 400 V class motor is driven by the inverter, consider the following countermeasures:
 With induction motor
It is recommended to take one of the following countermeasures:
 Rectifying the motor insulation and limiting the PWM carrier frequency according to the wiring length
For the 400 V class motor, use an insulation-enhanced motor.
The Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency motor SF-HR, the Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor SF-HRCA, and the Mitsubishi Electric high-
performance energy-saving motor SF-PR are insulation-enhanced motors as standard.
Specifically,
• Order a "400 V class inverter-driven insulation-enhanced motor".
• For the dedicated motor such as the constant-torque motor and low-vibration motor, use an "inverter-driven dedicated motor".
• Set Pr.72 PWM frequency selection as indicated below according to the wiring length.
Wiring length Wiring length Wiring length
Inverter
50 m or shorter 50 m to 100 m Longer than 100 m
Standard model
15 (14.5 kHz) or lower 9 (9 kHz) or lower 4 (4 kHz) lower
IP55 compatible model
Separated converter type 6 (6 kHz) or lower 6 (6 kHz) or lower 4 (4 kHz) lower
 Suppressing the surge voltage on the inverter side
• For FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, connect a surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) at the output side of the inverter.
• For FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, connect a sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) at the output side of the inverter.
 With PM motor
Set Pr.72 PWM frequency selection as indicated below according to the wiring length.
Wiring length
Applicable Inverter
50 m or shorter 50 m to 100 m
FR-A840-00023(0.4K), 00038(0.75K) 0 (2 kHz) to 15 (14 kHz) 5 (2 kHz) or lower
Others 0 (2 kHz) to 15 (14 kHz) 9 (6 kHz) or lower
NOTE
• A surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) can be used under V/F control and Advanced magnetic flux vector control.
A sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) can be used under V/F control. Do not use the filters under unspecified controls.
 Application to special motors

 Motors with brake  Explosion-proof motor
Use the motor with brake having independent power supply for the
To drive an explosion-proof type motor, an explosion-proof test of the
brake, connect the brake power supply to the inverter primary side
motor and inverter together is necessary. The test is also necessary
power and make the inverter output off using the output stop
when driving an existing explosion-proof motor.
terminal (MRS) when the brake is applied (motor stop). Rattle may The inverter is a non-explosion proof structure, install it in a safety
be heard according to the type of the brake in the low speed region location.
but it is not a fault.
 Geared motor
 Pole changing motor The continuous operating rotation range of this motor changes
As this motor differs in rated current from the standard motor,
depending on the lubrication system and maker. Especially in the
confirm the maximum current of the motor and select the inverter. Be
case of oil lubrication, continuous operation in the low-speed range
sure to change the number of poles after the motor has stopped. If
the number of poles is changed during rotation, the regenerative
only can cause gear seizure. For fast operation at higher than 60 Hz, 14
please consult the motor maker.
overvoltage protection circuit may be activated to cause an inverter
Compatible Motors
alarm, coasting the motor to a stop.  Synchronous motor other than PM motor
This motor is not suitable for applications of large load variation or
 Submersible motor impact, where out-of-sync is likely to occur. Please contact your
Since the motor rated current is larger than that of the standard
sales representative when using this motor because its starting
motor, make selection of the inverter capacity carefully. In addition,
current and rated current are greater than those of the standard
the wiring distance between the motor and inverter may become
motor and will not rotate stably at low speed.
longer, refer to page 196 to perform wiring with a cable thick
enough. Leakage current may flow more than the land motor, take  Single phase motor
care when selecting the earth leakage current breaker. The single phase motor is not suitable for variable operation by the
inverter.
For the capacitor starting system, the capacitor may be damaged
due to harmonic current flowing to the capacitor. For the split-phase
starting system and repulsion starting system, not only output torque
is not generated at low speed but it will result in starting coil burnout
due to failure of centrifugal force switch inside. Replace with a three-
phase motor for use.
225
Compatibility
 Major differences from the FR-A700 series

Item FR-A700 FR-A800
V/F control V/F control
Advanced magnetic flux vector control Advanced magnetic flux vector control
Control method Real sensorless vector control Real sensorless vector control
Vector control (with plug-in option) Vector control (with plug-in option/control terminal option)
PM sensorless vector control (IPM motor) PM sensorless vector control (IPM motor/SPM motor)
USB host function
Safety stop function
Added functions ―
PLC function
etc.
Brake transistor Built in for the FR-A720-0.4K to 22K Built in for the FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 01250(22K)
(brake resistor usable) Built in for the FR-A740-0.4K to 22K Built in for the FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to 01800(55K)
V/F control 400 Hz 590 Hz
output frequency
Advanced magnetic
120 Hz 400 Hz
flux vector control
Maximum
Real sensorless
120 Hz 400 Hz
vector control
vector control 120 Hz 400 Hz
PM sensorless
300 Hz 400 Hz
vector control
When the X14 signal is not assigned, just set a value other than "0" in
Pr.128 to enable PID control.
PID control Turn the X14 signal ON to enable PID control. When the X14 signal is assigned, turn the X14 signal ON while Pr.128 
"0" to enable PID control.
The PID pre-charge function and dancer control are added.
Automatic restart after CS signal assignment not required. (Restart is enabled with the Pr.57
Turn the CS signal ON to enable restart.
instantaneous power failure setting only.)
Pr.81 = "12 (12 poles)"
Number of motor poles The V/F switching signal (X18) is valid when
X18 is valid regardless of the Pr.81 setting. (The Pr.81 settings "14 to
V/F control switching Pr.81 = "12 to 20 (2 to 10 poles)".
20" are not available.)
Input from terminal AU (The function of terminal Input from terminal 2. (The function of terminal 2 is switched by the
PTC thermistor input
AU is switched by a switch.) Pr.561 setting.)
USB connector B connector Mini B connector
Control circuit terminal block Removable terminal block (screw type) Removable terminal block (spring clamp type)
The FR-A800's I/O terminals have better response level than the FR-A700's terminals. By setting Pr.289 Inverter output
Terminal response level terminal filter and Pr.699 Input terminal filter, the terminal response level can be compatible with that of FR-A700. Set to
approximately 5 to 8 ms and adjust the setting according to the system.
FR-DU08 (5-digit LED)
FR-DU07 (4-digit LED) FR-LU08 (LCD operation panel)
PU
FR-PU07 FR-PU07 (Some functions are limited or not available.)
FR-DU07 is not supported.
Plug-in option Dedicated plug-in options (not interchangeable)
Communication option Connected to the connector 3 Connected to the connector 1
For standard models, installation size is compatible for all capacities. (Replacement between the same capacities does not
Installation size require new mounting holes.)
For separated converter types, installation size is not compatible. (New mounting holes are required.)
An optional converter unit (FR-CC2) is required for separated converter
Converter Built-in for all capacities
types.
For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, the FR-A840-02160(75K) or
higher, and when a 75 kW or higher motor is used, select a DC reactor
The 75K or higher comes with a DC reactor (FR- suitable for the applicable motor capacity. (A DC reactor is not
DC reactor
HEL). included.)
Separated converter types (converter unit FR-CC2) and IP55
compatible models have a built-in DC reactor.
Brake unit (75 kW or higher) FR-BU2, MT-BU5 FR-BU2
15  Installation precautions
• Removal procedure of the front cover is different. (Refer to the Instruction Manual.)
Compatibility
• Plug-in options of the FR-A700 series are not compatible.

• Operation panel (FR-DU07) cannot be used.
 Wiring precautions
• The spring clamp type terminal block has changed to the screw type. Use of blade terminals is recommended.
 Instructions for continuous use of the FR-PU07 (parameter unit) manufactured in September 2015 or
earlier
• For the FR-A800 series, many functions (parameters) have been added. When setting these parameters, the parameter names and
setting ranges are not displayed.
• Only the parameter with the numbers up to "999" can be read and set. The parameters with the numbers after "999" cannot be read or set.
• Many protective functions have been added for the FR-A800 series. These functions are available, but all faults are displayed as "Fault".
When the faults history is checked, "ERR" appears. Added faults will not appear on the parameter unit. (However, MT1 to MT3 are
displayed as MT.)
• Parameter copy/verification function are not available.
For information on the restrictions on the purchase of the FR-PU07, refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-PU07.
 Copying parameter settings
• The FR-A700 series' parameter settings can be easily copied to the FR-A800 series by using the setup software (FR Configurator2). (Not
supported by the setup software FR-SW3-SETUP or older.)
226
 Comparison with the FR-A700 series in functions
Parameter/function Addition Modification Related parameter Remarks
Max. 590 Hz
Maximum frequency  Pr.1 etc.
(Max. 400 Hz under other than V/F control)
Free thermal Pr.600 to Pr.604,
 Thermal characteristics can be freely set.
(electronic thermal O/L relay) Pr.692 to Pr.696
PTC thermistor  Pr.561 The protection level can be set by parameters.
Strengthened excitation Loss of the motor is increased to reduce regenerative
 Pr.660 to Pr.662
deceleration power.
4 mA input check  Pr.573, Pr.777, Pr.778 Loss of 4 mA input is detected.
Input terminal filter  Pr.699 The terminal response can be adjusted.
Output terminal filter  Pr.289 The terminal response can be adjusted.
Remote output terminal
 Pr.655 to Pr.659 Optional analog output
(analog)
The parameters are displayed in the conventional
Parameter display by group  Pr.Md
numerical order in the initial state.
Speed smoothing  Pr.653, Pr.654 Machine resonance is reduced.
Traverse function  Pr.592 to Pr.597 Only speed control is available under vector control.
USB host Parameter read/copy, data logging, execution of the ladder
 Pr.1049
(USB memory connection) in the USB (PLC function), etc.
Pr.753 to Pr.758, Pr.1134,
Second PID control  Pr.1135, Pr.1140, Pr.1141,
Pr.1143 to Pr.1149
PID pre-charge function  Pr.760 to Pr.769
PID output suspension function  Pr.575 to Pr.577
Pr.414 to Pr.417, Pr.498,
PLC function 
Pr.1150, Pr.1199
Pr.503, Pr.504,
Maintenance timer  Up to three timers can be set.
Pr.686 to Pr.689
Fault initiation  Pr.997 Faults can be initiated.
Multiple rating selection  Pr.570 The rating can be selected from SLD, LD, ND, or HD.
High response of the vector control, real sensorless vector
Fast-response operation selection  Pr.800
control, and PM sensorless vector control
Operation is unavailable.
24 V external power supply input  ―
(Communication and parameter setting are available.)
Cooling fan operation selection  Pr.244 Waiting time at stop can be changed.
GOT automatic recognition  ― The GOT2000 series is supported.
Optimum excitation
control mode  Pr.60
 Major differences between the standard model (FR-A840) and the separated
converter type (FR-A842)
Item FR-A842 Remarks (FR-A840)
Setting ranges "0 to 2, 10, 11, 20, 21, 100, 101, 110, 111,
Setting ranges "2, 10, 11, 102, 110, 111"
Pr.30 Regenerative function selection 120, 121"
Initial value "10"
Initial value "0"
Pr.70 Special regenerative brake duty Without the parameter
Monitor function Regenerative brake duty
(Pr.52, Pr.54, Pr.158, Pr.774 to Pr.776,
Pr.992, Pr.1027 to Pr.1034) Without (Unacceptable)
DC feeding operation permission (X70), DC feeding

Input terminal function selection
(Pr.178 to Pr.189) cancel (X71)
Without (Unacceptable)
15
Pr.187 MRS terminal function
Compatibility
selection Initial value "10" (X10) Initial value "24" (MRS)
Instantaneous power failure/undervoltage (IPF),

Output terminal function assignment Regenerative brake pre-alarm (RBP), DC current feeding
selection (Y85), Main circuit capacitor life (Y87), Inrush current
(Pr.190 to Pr.196, Pr.313 to Pr.322) limit circuit life (Y89)
Without (Unacceptable)
Pr.192 IPF terminal function selection Initial value "9999" (No function) Initial value "2" (IPF)
Inrush current limit circuit life display,
Main circuit capacitor life display Without the parameter
(Pr.256, Pr.258, Pr.259)
Pr.599 X10 terminal input selection Initial value "1"(NC contact specification) Initial value "0" (NO contact specification)
Pr.872 Input phase loss protection
Without the parameter
selection
Regenerative brake pre-alarm (RB), Instantaneous
power failure (E.IPF), Undervoltage (E.UVT), Input
Warning, protective functions phase loss (E.ILF), Brake transistor alarm detection
(E.BE), Inrush current limit circuit fault (E.IOH)
Not available
227
 Major differences between the standard model (FR-A840) and the IP55 compatible
model (FR-A846)
Item FR-A840 FR-A846
Enclose type (IP20): FR-A840-00620(22K) or lower
Protective structure Dust-proof and waterproof type (IP55): All capacities
Open type (IP00): FR-A840-00770(30K) or higher
DC reactor Optional Built-in
Internal air circulation fan Without With
Internal fan alarm (FN2), Abnormal internal temperature
Protective function ―
(E.IAH)
Circuit board coating (conforming
With / Without (Selectable) With
to IEC60721-3-3 3C2/3S2)
LD, ND, HD rating:
Surrounding air -10°C to +50°C (non-freezing) LD, ND rating:
temperature SLD rating: -10°C to +40°C (non-freezing)
-10°C to +40°C (non-freezing)
Environment
With circuit board coating:
Surrounding air 95% RH or less (non-condensing)
humidity 95% RH or less (non-condensing)
Without circuit board coating:
90% RH or less (non-condensing)
Brake transistor Built-in for the FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 01250(22K)
Without (Brake resistor is not applicable.)
(usable brake resistor) Built-in for the FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to 01800(55K)
Multiple rating SLD, LD, ND (initial setting), HD rating LD, ND (initial setting) rating
(Pr.570 Multiple rating setting) (Setting range: "0 to 3") (Setting range: "1 or 2")
Pr.30 Regenerative function Setting range: Setting range:
selection "0 to 2, 10, 11, 20, 21, 100, 101, 110, 111, 120, or 121" "0, 2, 10, 20, 100, 110, or 120"
Pr.70 Special regenerative brake
Available Not available
duty
Regenerative brake duty
(Pr.52, Pr.54, Pr.158,
Available (can be set) Not available (cannot be set)
Pr.774 to Pr.776, Pr.992,
Pr.1027 to Pr.1034 setting "9")
Operation panel FR-DU08: IP40 (except for the PU connector section) FR-DU08-01: IP55 (except for the PU connector section)
 Major differences between the FR-A800 (RS-485 communication model) and the FR-
A800-E (Ethernet communication model)
Item FR-A800 (RS-485 communication model) FR-A800-E (Ethernet communication model)
Standard equipment RS-485 terminals Ethernet connector
MODBUS/TCP
MELSOFT / FA product connection
Mitsubishi inverter protocol
Communication SLMP
MODBUS RTU protocol
iQSS
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Number of connectable plug-in
options 3 2 (initial status)
Optional screw-type terminal block

(FR-A8TR) Can be used. Cannot be used.
 CC-Link family compatible with the FR-A800 series inverters

Item
FR-A800-GF,
Compatible inverter FR-A800-E FR-A800+FR-A8NC
15 Communication speed 100 Mbps
FR-A800+FR-A8NCE
1 Gbps 10 Mbps
Cable Ethernet category 5 or higher Ethernet category 5e or higher Dedicated cable
Compatibility
Number of connectable inverters 64 (open specification) 64 42 (maximum)

Cyclic communication Compatible Compatible Compatible
RX 64 64 64
RY 64 64 64
Number of links
RWr 32 (64 bytes) 128 (256 bytes) 32 (64 bytes)
RWw 32 (64 bytes) 128 (256 bytes) 32 (64 bytes)
Combination with TCP/IP Supported Not supported Not supported
Topology Star Line, star, ring, line-star Bus
 The actual number of connectable inverters differs according to the setting of the master.
 The numbers of inverter's remote I/O devices and the addresses of inverter's remote registers are common between CC-Link and CC-Link IE Field Network
Basic.
228
 Major differences between the standard inverter and the inverter with parallel
operation function
The following functions of the FR-A800 standard inverter are changed in the FR-A842-P.
Function name Description
FWD and REV keys on the operation panel The FWD and REV keys on the operation panel of the slave are disabled.
Since RS-485 terminals are used for RS-485 communication between the master and slave inverters,
Mitsubishi inverter protocol communication
communication using the Mitsubishi inverter protocol through the RS-485 terminals is not available.
MODBUS RTU protocol communication The MODBUS RTU protocol communication is not available.
Safety stop function The safety stop function is not supported.
The upper limit of the output frequency is 120 Hz. Even if a value higher than 120 Hz is set as a high speed
High speed maximum frequency (Pr.18)
maximum frequency, the setting is fixed to 120 Hz.
The initial value of Pr.56 varies according to the setting in Pr.1001 Parallel operation selection as follows.
Current monitoring reference (Pr.56) • Inverter rated current × Number of the inverters × 0.8 when Pr.1001 = "200 or 300"
• Inverter rated current × 0.8 when Pr.1001 = "1 or 2"
Optimum excitation control (Pr.60) The Optimum excitation control mode (Pr.60 = "9") is not available.
It is determined by the following formula: Inverter rated current × Number of the inverters × 0.8, when Pr.61
Reference current (Pr.61)
= "9999 (initial value)"
The electronic thermal relay characteristic when Pr.71 (Pr.450) = "8090, 8093, 8094, 9090, 9093, or 9094"
Applied motor (Pr.71 (Pr.450))
is the same as that the standard motor.
Carrier frequency (Pr.72) The carrier frequency is fixed at 2 kHz. It cannot be changed using parameters.
The setting for PU stop selection (Pr.75) in the slave inverter is invalid. (The setting of Pr.75 in the master
inverter is applied to the slave inverter.)
• When the STOP/RESET key on PU of the slave inverter is pressed while Pr.75 of the master inverter =
"14 to 17 or 114 to 117", the motor decelerates to stop regardless of the inverter's operation mode and the
PU stop selection (Pr.75)
warning "PS" (PU stop) indication appears on the slave inverter. The "PS" can be reset on the master
inverter.
• When Pr.75 of the master inverter = "0 to 3, 100 to 103", the motor does not stop by pressing the STOP/
RESET key on the PU of the slave inverter even if the inverters are in the PU operation mode.
Auto tuning setting/status (Pr.96) Tuning is not available although "101" (offline tuning with motor rotation) is set in Pr.96.
When Pr.128 (Pr.753) of the slave inverter ≠ "2000, 2001, 2010, or 2011" , the PID action selection function
PID action selection (Pr.128 (Pr.753))
of the slave inverter is invalid.
Setting "1" in Pr.138 of the master inverter enables automatic switchover to commercial power supply
Bypass selection at a fault (Pr.138) operation when a protective function (E.OHT or E.CPU) is activated in the slave inverter. Install a thermal
relay to the master inverter to protect the motor from overheating.
The result of the following formula corresponds to "100" (100%) of Pr.150 (Output current detection level)
Output current detection level (Pr.150),
Zero current detection level (Pr.152) and Pr.152 (Zero current detection level) in the master inverter: Inverter rated current × Number of the
inverters × 0.8.
Fast-response current limit (Pr.156) This function is not available.
Regardless of the Pr.161 setting of the slave inverter, the setting dial frequency setting mode and setting
Frequency setting / key lock operation
dial potentiometer mode are disabled on the slave inverter. (The function to lock the operation panel keys is
selection (Pr.161)
available.)
Automatic restart after instantaneous power Even when a value other than "3 or 13" is set in Pr.162, a frequency search (reduced impact restart) is
failure selection (Pr.162) performed.
Slip compensation (Pr.245 to Pr.247) To use the slip compensation function, set the motor capacity in Pr.80 (Pr.453) of the master in advance.
When "2" is set in Pr.248 of the master inverter, the MC1 signal turns OFF when the circuit failure protective
Self power management selection (Pr.248)
function or E.PA1/E.PA2 (Parallel operation slave 1 fault / Parallel operation slave 2 fault) is activated.
During operation with the X19 signal ON, when the average current of the current averaging range
becomes equal to or less than the result of the following formula 1: Inverter rated current × Number of the
inverters × 0.8 × Pr.271 setting (%), the maximum frequency is automatically defined as the setting of Pr.4
Multi-speed setting (high speed).
High-speed setting maximum current (Pr.271), During operation with the X19 signal ON, when the average current of the current averaging range
Middle-speed setting minimum current
(Pr.272) becomes equal to or more than the result of the following formula 2: Inverter rated current × Number of the
inverters × 0.8 × Pr.272 setting (%), the maximum frequency is automatically defined as the setting of Pr.5
Multi-speed setting (middle speed).
When the average current is more than the result of the formula 1 and less than the result of the formula 2,
linear compensation is performed.
15
Stop mode selection at communication error
Compatibility
(Pr.502), The settings of Pr.502 and Pr.779 does not affect communication between the inverters via the RS-485
Operation frequency during communication terminals. (The setting affects only communication via the communication option.)
error (Pr.779)
The command source is the PU connector when Pr.551 = "1" and the inverters are in the PU operation
PU mode operation command source
selection (Pr.551) mode. When a USB memory device is connected to the USB connector, the command source is the USB
connector.
Multiple rating setting (Pr.570) The SLD and HD ratings are not supported. When "0 or 3" is set in Pr.570, the ND rating is applied.
The PM sensorless vector control is not available. When Pr.800 (Pr.451) = "13, 14, 113, or 114", Real
Control method selection (Pr.800 (Pr.451))
sensorless vector control is applied.
Even if the fast-response operation is selected in Pr.800 (Pr.451), the normal-response operation is
Fast-response operation (Pr.800 (Pr.451))
applied.
229
Warranty
When using this product, make sure to understand the warranty described below.
1. Warranty period and coverage
We will repair any failure or defect (hereinafter referred to as "failure") in our FA equipment (hereinafter referred to as the "Product")
arisen during warranty period at no charge due to causes for which we are responsible through the distributor from which you
purchased the Product or our service provider. However, we will charge the actual cost of dispatching our engineer for an on-site repair
work on request by customer in Japan or overseas countries. We are not responsible for any on-site readjustment and/or trial run that
may be required after a defective unit are repaired or replaced.
[Term]
The term of warranty for Product is twelve months after your purchase or delivery of the Product to a place designated by you or
eighteen months from the date of manufacture whichever comes first ("Warranty Period"). Warranty period for repaired Product cannot
exceed beyond the original warranty period before any repair work.
[Limitations]
(1) You are requested to conduct an initial failure diagnosis by yourself, as a general rule. It can also be carried out by us or our
service company upon your request and the actual cost will be charged.
However, it will not be charged if we are responsible for the cause of the failure.
(2) This limited warranty applies only when the condition, method, environment, etc. of use are in compliance with the terms and
conditions and instructions that are set forth in the instruction manual and user manual for the Product and the caution label affixed
to the Product.
(3) Even during the term of warranty, the repair cost will be charged on you in the following cases;
1) a failure caused by your improper storing or handling, carelessness or negligence, etc., and a failure caused by your hardware
or software problem
2) a failure caused by any alteration, etc. to the Product made on your side without our approval
3) a failure which may be regarded as avoidable, if your equipment in which the Product is incorporated is equipped with a safety
device required by applicable laws and has any function or structure considered to be indispensable according to a common
sense in the industry
4) a failure which may be regarded as avoidable if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual, etc. are duly
maintained and replaced
5) any replacement of consumable parts (condenser, cooling fan, etc.)
6) a failure caused by external factors such as inevitable accidents, including without limitation fire and abnormal fluctuation of
voltage, and acts of God, including without limitation earthquake, lightning and natural disasters
7) a failure generated by an unforeseeable cause with a scientific technology that was not available at the time of the shipment of
the Product from our company
8) any other failures which we are not responsible for or which you acknowledge we are not responsible for
2. Term of warranty after the stop of production

(1) We may accept the repair at charge for another seven (7) years after the production of the product is discontinued. The
announcement of the stop of production for each model can be seen in our Sales and Service, etc.
(2) Please note that the Product (including its spare parts) cannot be ordered after its stop of production.
3. Service in overseas
Our regional FA Center in overseas countries will accept the repair work of the Product; however, the terms and conditions of the repair
work may differ depending on each FA Center. Please ask your local FA center for details.
4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability

Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to:
(1) Damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi.
(2) Loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products.
(3) Special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and compensation for
damages to products other than Mitsubishi products.
(4) Replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.
5. Change of Product specifications

Specifications listed in our catalogs, manuals or technical documents may be changed without notice.
6. Application and use of the Product

(1) For the use of our product, its applications should be those that may not result in a serious damage even if any failure or
malfunction occurs in product, and a backup or fail-safe function should operate on an external system to product when any failure
16 or malfunction occurs.
(2) Our product is designed and manufactured as a general purpose product for use at general industries.
Warranty
Therefore, applications substantially influential on the public interest for such as atomic power plants and other power plants of
electric power companies, and also which require a special quality assurance system, including applications for railway companies
and government or public offices are not recommended, and we assume no responsibility for any failure caused by these
applications when used.
In addition, applications which may be substantially influential to human lives or properties for such as airlines, medical treatments,
railway service, incineration and fuel systems, man-operated material handling equipment, entertainment machines, safety
machines, etc. are not recommended, and we assume no responsibility for any failure caused by these applications when used.
We will review the acceptability of the abovementioned applications, if you agree not to require a specific quality for a specific
application. Please contact us for consultation.
230
MEMO
231
Global network for comprehensive support of
FA Center Satellite Mechatronics Service Base
Global FA Center Mitsubishi Sales Offices Production Facility Development Center
(China) (China)
Ratingen, Germany Kraków, Poland
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V.

German Branch (Germany FA Center) Polish Branch
(Europe FA Center)
Hatfield, UK
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V.

UK Branch (UK FA Center)
Praha, Czech Republic
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V.

Czech Branch
(Czech Republic FA Center)
Nagoya, Japan
Pune, Gurgaon, Bangalore,

Chennai, Ahmedabad, India
Mitsubishi Electric India Pvt. Ltd.
Bangkok, Thailand Singapore
Mitsubishi Electric Factory Automation Mitsubishi Electric

(Thailand) Co., Ltd. (Thai FA Center) Asia Pte, Ltd. (ASEAN FA Center)
China (including Hong Kong District)

Beijing
Mitsubishi Automation (China) Ltd.
Beijing Office (Beijing FA Center)
Changchun
Shenyang
Tianjin Shanghai
Beijing Dalian
Mitsubishi Automation (China) Ltd. Tianjin Mitsubishi Automation (China) Ltd.
Tianjin Office (Tianjin FA Center) (Shanghai FA Center)
Zhengzhou Qingdao
Xiangfan
Chengdu Shanghai
Wuhang
Chongqing
Guangzhou Shanghai
Fuzhou
Mitsubishi Electric Automation Guangzhou Taipei Mitsubishi Electric Automation
(China) Ltd. Guangzhou Solution Center
Office (Guangzhou FA Center) Taichung
Shenzhen
232
customers' manufacturing.
St. Petersburg, Russia Istanbul, Turkey Seoul, Korea
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Mitsubishi Electric Turkey Mitsubishi Electric Automation
Representative Office in St. Petersburg A.Ş Ümraniye Branch (Turkey FA Center) Korea Co., Ltd. (Korea FA Center)
（Russia FA Center）
Taipei,
Taichung, Taiwan
L: Setsuyo Enterprise Co., Ltd.

R: Mitsubishi Electric Taiwan Co.,Ltd.
Chicago IL, USA
Mitsubishi Electric Automation, Inc.

(North America FA Center)
Hanoi,
Tlalnepantla De Baz, Mexico
Ho Chi Minh, Vietnam
L: Mitsubishi Electric Vietnam Co., Ltd. Mitsubishi Electric

Hanoi Branch Automation, Inc. Mexico Branch
R: Mitsubishi Electric Vietnam Co., Ltd. (Mexico FA Center)
Jakarta, Indonesia Sao Paulo SP, Brazil
L: Mitsubishi Electric do Brasil Comércio e

PT. Mitsubishi Electric Serviços Ltda.
Indonesia Cikarang Office
（Indonesia FA Center） R: MELCO CNC do Brasil Comércio e
Serviços S.A
Service bases are established around the world to globally provide the same services as in Japan.
Overseas bases are opened one after another

to support business expansion of our customers.
Overseas bases As of July 2014 * Some includes distributors
Bases providing
Area Our overseas offices Countries (Regions)
FA Center (Satellite) our products
EMEA 11 6 (2) 146 54
China 13 4 (10) 171 1
Asia 21 13 79 10
America 14 4 (0) 130 16
Others 1 0 3 2
Total 60 27 (12) 529 83
233
This solution solves customers' issues and concerns by
enabling visualization and analysis that lead to improvements
and increase availability at production sites.
Utilizing our FA and IT technologies and collaborating with e-F@ctory Alliance partners, we reduce the total cost across the entire
supply chain and engineeringchain, and support the improvement initiatives and one-step-ahead manufacturing of our customers.
Procurement Sale, logistics,

Supply chain and service
Production
and
manufacturing
FA integrated solutions Engineering
Product
design
Process
design Operation/Maintenance
reduce total cost chain

iQ-Works/EZSocket iQ Care
(prevention, predictive maintenance,
(CAD/simulation linkage) remote maintenance service)
since2003
Supply chain Sales and

Procurement
distribution
Production
Engineering
chain Product Process Operation and
design design maintenance
ERP SCM MES

IT system
CAD/CAM Simulator SCADA
FA-IT
Data primary processing / Information Data handling
analysis
Interface
Edge-computing C Controller MES interface
Programmable
Shop floor Sensor Drive Mechatronics Energy-saving
Controller
Productivity Quality Sustainability Safety Security
Overall production information is captured in addition to energy information, enabling the realization of efficient production and energy use (energy savings).
•Trademarks
DeviceNet is a trademark of the ODVA, PROFIBUS is a trademark of the PROFIBUS User Organization, and MODBUS is a registered trademark of SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC USA, INC.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Fuji Xerox Corporation in Japan.
Windows and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Other company and product names herein are the trademarks and registered trademarks of their respective owners.
234
Automation solutions
YOUR SOLUTION PARTNER
Low voltage: MCCB, MCB, ACB
Medium voltage: VCB, VCC
Power monitoring, energy management
Mitsubishi Electric offers a wide range of automation equipment from PLCs and HMIs to
CNC and EDM machines.
Compact and Modular Controllers
A NAME TO TRUST This is why you can rely on

Mitsubishi Electric automation Inverters, Servos and Motors
Since its beginnings in 1870, some
45 companies use the Mitsubishi solution - because we know first
name, covering a spectrum of hand about the need for reliable,
finance, commerce and industry. efficient, easy-to-use automation and
control in our own factories.
Visualisation: HMIs
The Mitsubishi brand name is
recognized around the world as a As one of the world’s leading
symbol of premium quality. companies with a global turnover of
over 4 trillion Yen (over $40 billion),
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation is employing over 100,000 people,
Mitsubishi Electric has the resource Numerical Control (NC)
active in space development,
transportation, semi-conductors, and the commitment to deliver the
energy systems, communications ultimate in service and support as
and information processing, audio well as the best products.
visual equipment and home
Robots: SCARA, Articulated arm
electronics, building and energy
management and automation
systems, and has 237 factories and
laboratories worldwide in over 121
countries.
Processing machines: EDM, Lasers, IDS
Transformers, Air conditioning, Photovoltaic systems
* Not all products are available in all countries.
235
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Nagoya Works is a factory certified for ISO14001 (standards for
environmental management systems)and ISO9001(standards for quality assurance management systems)
HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BLDG., 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
L(NA)06075ENG-F(1707)MEE

LNA06075ENG

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LNA06075ENG

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

LNA06075ENG

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FACTORY AUTOMATION

• Approach to the leading

Mitsubishi Electric is involved in many areas including the following

We bring together the best minds to Energy and Electric Systems

Industrial Automation Systems

1 Swift, Smooth, yet Robust

(1) For high-quality products

speed and suppress the

(2) Perform ultra-fine processing

V/F control 590 Hz*3 A700: 400 Hz

(3) Swiftly move heavy weights

system, without the need of delivers a precision workpiece,

(5) Taking motor performance to the max

Output torque (%)

spare and stocks. 70

Mitsubishi Electric Inverter Drive unit

1 For Improved Equipment Reliability

(1) Improved system safety

MELSEC iQ-R series

Hydraulic analysis and heat simulation

1 From Startup to Maintenance

Easy-to-read operation panel NEW

Easy wiring to the control circuit NEW

Wires can be protected against loosening under vibrations during RE V

transportation of the inverter. Ten additional terminals are used as STOP

compared to the FR-A700 series. Round crimping terminals can

Maintenance and control of multiple inverters (Option) NEW

The Next Step Go Green 1

and that saves the standby energy. regeneration common

(2) PM motor contributes to the energy saving in factories

• Why is a PM motor so efﬁcient?

100% Primary IPM motor

1 High Equipment Functionality

• Ethernet communication NEW

Factory Router Office outside of the factory

Office Equipment Hub

FR-A800-GF • Other network communication

(2) Reduced tact time with functionality suited to the application

Increased magnetic excitation deceleration NEW

With FR-A700 With FR-A800 SLD LD ND HD

Shield Machines, Winding and Unwinding,

(4) PLC control with an inverter

•Time-based operation is possible by using in combination with the FR Configurator2

real-time clock function (optional LCD operation panel (FR-LU08)).

Refer to page 22 for the details.

(1) Comprehensive noise countermeasures

(2) Global compatibility

(3) Protected in hazardous environment (4) Wire saving, space saving

•Inverters can be installed nearby the machine, minimizing cable

(6) Flexible configuration to meet the needs

FR-CC2 FR-A842 FR-CC2-P FR-A842-P

Inverter module Converter module Inverter module

1.5K 00105 2.2 10.5 2.2 9.6 1.5 8 0.75 5

•Overload current rating

•Separated converter type

•IP55 compatible model

BEST SUITED FOR EVERY MACHINE

Line Control (Winding and Unwinding)

Main speed (0 to 10V)

Material tension is kept constant by Dancer control NEW